PM Intercom Server Configuration en V15 0619

PRODUCT MANUAL
ENGLISH
Intercom Server
Configuration
MANUAL VERSION 1.5/0619
This product manual refers to software
version VirtuoSIS 9.0 and PRO 800 6.3.
Intercom Server Configuration
COMMEND INTERNATIONAL GMBH

Saalachstraße 51
A-5020 Salzburg – Austria
www.commend.com
Product manual Intercom Server Configuration
Edition June 2019
Version 1.5/0619
Legal Notice
The manufacturer guarantees the functionality of its products as described in the data sheets and/or tech-
nical documentation. For error-free operation of the Intercom system, faultless transmission paths are
mandatory. The functionality of transmission paths, in particular of IP networks, exclusively is the respon-
sibility of the operating company of the transmission path and therefore the manufacturer can not be re-
sponsible in any manner, for errors and problems, which result from problems or malfunctioning of the
transmission path.
It is not allowed to copy any text of this document without permission of COMMEND INTERNATIONAL
GMBH.
The technical data contained herein has been provided solely for informational purposes and is not legally
binding. Subject to change, technical or otherwise. IoIP®, OpenDuplex® and Commend® are trademarks
registered by Commend International GmbH. All other brands or product names are trademarks or regis-
tered trademarks of the respective owner and have not been specifically earmarked.
Attention
Mounting and installation of the Intercom Servers and of the equipment may be carried out by authorised
service personnel only.
Number of pages: 480
2 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration
Content
General information 4 Conference 246
Music, radio conference 254
Public address (PA) 267
Intercom Server and subscriber functions 6
Alarm function 275
Configuration software CCT 800 20
Door function 284
Configuration sequence in CCT 800 53
Control desk function 294
Establish connection to the Intercom Server 54
DSP function 327
Receiving, sending, warmstart 59
Video 342
Offline configuration 64
Speech recording 355
Software and firmware update 67
Pre-recorded audio 362
Licensing 72
Time, date 378
Network function 382
Launch VirtuoSIS 86 Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) 404
Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance 103 P2MP 407
Logic module 408
EventLOG 422
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations
105
General Intercom features 128 SIP functions 423
Privacy, busy, re-call request 169
Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy 180
IT security 446
Direct dialling button, direct dialling module 186
Input, output 198
Speech control 216 Appendix 449
Call diversion, call transfer 229
Feature with additional interface 234
Group call, All Call 236 Technical Support 480
1.5/0619 3
General information Intercom Server Configuration
General information
PDF format
Supported viewers
The PDF manual can be used with the following viewers:
 Adobe Reader from version 6.0
 Foxit Reader from version 5.0
Info boxes
ATTENTION
This information box addresses all necessary configuration options and actions which will allow an
error-free operation. Also, this box will warn you if a certain configuration, option or entered value
could lead to a malfunction of the application or a loss of data.
NOTE
This information box serves multiple purposes: from basic configuration tips to additional advices
and comments on occasional settings and events.
GOOD TO KNOW
This information box provides background knowledge which helps understand the basic principles
behind different configurations and the application itself.
New Features
The following new features are available with VirtuoSIS 9.0 and PRO 800 6.3:
 Pictogram control according to DIN EN 81-28:2018-07 – see page 164
 Individual authentication user for each SIP client – see page 441
 Activate/deactivate individual SIP subscriber ports – see page 441
 TCP and TLS binding ports configurable – see page 424
 Quick search for licenses in a license package (*.lic file) – see page 72
 New description option for LAN/WAN network connections for documentation purposes – see
page 388
 Associated device inputs and device outputs are displayed for easier/faster configuration
 Extended collision check (IP terminals) – see page 40
 Easier handling of certificate management – see page 425
4 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration General information
Legend of requirements
In the left-hand margin, requirements for the respective features are displayed as follows:
Symbol Requirement
Required firmware version for Intercom Server IS 300, GE 150, GE 300, GE 800 and VirtuoSIS (for
 VirtuoSIS up to firmware version 6.1).
 Required firmware version for Intercom Server VirtuoSIS from firmware version SIS 7.0.
 Required feature level of the subscriber card. 1)
 2-wire [2W] or 4-wire [4W] subscriber card required. 1)
 Only possible with DSP station or with certain DSP software. 1)
No restart required. 2)
1) This information is only displayed if it is required for the respective feature.
2)
This information is only displayed if the configuration of the respective feature does not require a restart of
the Intercom Server with PRO 800 5.1 or higher. An overview of all features without restart can be found on
page 461.
1.5/0619 5
Intercom Server and subscriber functions Intercom Server Configuration
Intercom Server and subscriber functions

The following overview chapters are available:
 Intercom subscriber functions – see below
 Intercom Server functions – see page 18
Intercom subscriber functions

feature level D
feature level A
feature level C
feature level B
Control desk Intercom function D C B A
Advanced Intercom function C B A
Basic function B A
Entry level Intercom function A
GOOD TO KNOW:
 The feature levels of the subscriber cards define which features are available for the individual
subscribers. If the feature is not a subscriber function (i.e. Intercom Server function), no feature level
is required for the feature.
 The feature levels can be expanded with licences (e.g. G8-IP-4D).
 Feature level an Is available with VirtuoSIS 7.0. Otherwise, feature level B is required.
In the following table, all available Intercom subscriber functions are listed with the required feature
level and Intercom Server firmware version or upgrade licence (the columns SIP-C / SIP-T refer to the
last available VirtuoSIS software):
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
General Intercom functions
Text parameter - - - B B B B B B B B B - - 130

Optional parameters - - - B B B B B B B B B B B 131
Sevenfold security against interception B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 133
Tone signals for different operation states B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 133
Minute signal configurable per subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 134
Call indication (multifunctional LED, display), calling signal B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 134
Length of ring tone B B B B B B B B B B B B A - 134
Dialling at start of the Intercom Server B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 134
Protection against feedback B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 135
Selective disabling of functions B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 135
Selective enabling of functions - - - - B B B B B B B B B B 135
De-bounce time for buttons B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 136
Handset function B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 136
6 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Intercom Server and subscriber functions
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Disable position switch and handset function B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 137

Microphone mute B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 137
Waiting information for microphone mute/further connection B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 137
Automatic disconnection of conversations after time per
B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 138
subscriber
Individual disconnection times per subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 138
Reconnection with last call B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 138
Reconnection with last call via SIP trunk - - - - - - - - B B B B B B 138
Inquiry/further connection B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 139
Further connection to fix privacy station - - - - - - - - B B B B B B 140
Lock display contrast - - B B B B B B B B B B - - 142
Subscriber list B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 143
Searching for subscribers in the menu - B B B B B B B B B B B - - 143
Indication of call number in subscriber list - - - - - - - - B B B B - - 143
Individual F2 menu C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 149
Hebrew - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 151
Favourites menu - B B B B B B B B B B B - - 153
Calling history - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 158
Indication of call number in the calling history for SIP trunk - - - - - - - - B B B B - - 158
Back-lit display B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 159
Back-lit keypad - B B B B B B B B B B B - - 160
Multifunctional LED B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 161
Increased volume (incl. voltage monitoring) B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 161
16 kHz audio bandwidth B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 162
User administration - - - C C C C C C C C C C C 166
Busy tone at line fault - - B B B B B B B B B B B - 168
Secretary transfer at line fault - - B B B B B B B B B B B - 168
Privacy, busy, re-call request
Permanent privacy function configurable B B B B B B B B B B B B A - 170
Privacy function activated at the station B B B B B B B B B B B B A - 170
Intrusion function at a private subscriber C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 171
Waiting information for private subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 172
4 kHz as privacy tone B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 172
Attendant contact for status “privacy” B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 172
Acoustic and visual busy indication B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 173
Automatic re-call in case of “busy” B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 173
Switch off busy signal while waiting for re-call B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 173
Waiting information for busy subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 174
Acoustic and visual indication of waiting subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B 1) B 1) 174
1.5/0619 7
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Double minute signal in case of waiting subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 174

Intrusion function at a busy subscriber C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 174
Priority call with disconnection of busy subscribers C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 175
Single priority call C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 175
Send re-call request B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 176
Send re-call request at privacy call - - - - - - - - B B B B B B 176
Receive re-call request B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 176
Indication of call number and name of the phone at re-recall
- - - - - - - - - - D D D D 177
request over SIP trunk
Date and time display at re-call request - - - - - - - - B B B B - - 177
Activate call back reminder B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 178
Scrolling of re-call requests/call back reminders in the display B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 178
Restoring of re-call requests/call back reminders after warmstart B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 179
Direct dialling, disabling of button, hierarchy
Direct dialling for all subscribers B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 180
Direct dialling targets up to 18-digits - - B B B B B B B B B B B B 180
Direct dialling for selective subscribers B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 181
Direct dialling configured at the station C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 181
Switch-over direct dialling/normal dialling for all subscribers B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 182
Switch-over direct/normal dialling for selective subscribers B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 182
Direct dialling with automatic disconnection B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 182
Direct dialling – Toggle between stations C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 182
Function keys with direct dialling (only EE 7000) - - - - - - - B B B B B B - 183
Send ICX messages via direct dialling - - - B B B B B B B B B B B 183
Disabling of buttons for all subscribers B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 184
Disabling of buttons for selective subscribers B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 184
Disabling the menu of WS stations - - - - - - - - B B B B - - 184
Disabling of the complete keyboard with input B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 184
Hierarchy level B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 185
Changing hierarchy level via ICX message - - - B B B B B B B B B B B 185
Direct dialling module allocation only with input level detection - - - - - - - - B B B B - - 186
Direct dialling, call/conversation indication B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 189
Single button B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 189
Control of outputs B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 190
Input simulation B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 190
Input message B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 191
Mixing radio conference - - - D D D D D D D D D - - 191
1)
Only acoustic indication available
8 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Direct dialling button, direct dialling module
Indication squelch input - - - - - - B B B B B B - - 191

PA functions - - - B B B B B B B B B - - 192
dB-range display - - - D D D D D D D D D - - 194
Send ICX messages via direct dialling button - - - B B B B B B B B B - - 196
Bonding of direct dialling modules - - - - - B B B B B B B - - 197
Input, output
Input initiates dialling at a subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 199
Input changes button of a subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 199
Activation internal inputs of stations B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 200
Using “IN2”, “IN4” at analogue WS series (WS 500, WS 800) - B B B B B B B B B B B - - 200
Using internal inputs as function keys (only EE 7000) - - - - - - - B B B B B - - 201
Position switch as input B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 201
“IN2” for external microphone B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 203
“IN2” for handset B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 204
Button triggers virtual station input B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 205
Access outputs via dialling B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 206
Output contacts for system featuresp B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 208
PA announcement - - - D D D D D D D D D D D 208
Speech control
Conversations in Duplex B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 216
Conversations in Full Duplex B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 217
Conversations in Simplex B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 218
Simplex by pressing the button “T” B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 218
Simplex with touching the button “T” B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 219
Volume adjustable separately for functions B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 219
Volume (minimum and fix) B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 219
Online volume setting B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 220
Input volume control - - - C C C C C C C C C - - 222
2-step volume switching B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 222
Intelligent Volume Control (IVC) - - - - - - B B B B B B - - 224
Improved Duplex-switching B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 226
Handset, headset and internal loudspeaker B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 227
Handset features “WSHS 50P” B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 227
Handset features “EE 380A” - - - - - B B B B B B B - - 227
Voice activity detection - - - B B B B B B B B B - - 228
Permanent executive/secretary transfer chain B B B B B B B B B B B B A - 229
Executive/secretary transfer chain C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 230
1.5/0619 9
PRO 800 1.0

PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Cell diversion, call transfer
Variable executive/secretary transfer chain B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 231

Follow Me C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 231
Call transfer (called station) C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 232
Automatic call transfer in case of busy (called station) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 232
Automatic call transfer in case of privacy (called station) C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 233
Manual call transfer activated (calling station) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 233
Manual call transfer activated (called station) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 233
Feature with additional interface
Application-specific interface - - - - - B B B B B B B - - 234
Connection of telephone dialler B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 234
Call transfer to telephone dialler B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 234
Connection of telephone sets B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 234
Parallel connection of microphones B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 234
Answer back via loudspeaker B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 235
Call indication with flashlight or horn B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 235
Group call, All call
All Call initiator configurable per subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 236
1) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 237
All Call receiver
Automatic All Call answer 3) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 237
Selective cancelling (during All Call) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 237
Group call initiator B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 238
1) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 238
Group call receiver (max. 10 groups)
Group call receiver (max. 90 groups) 1) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 238
Automatic group call answer B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 239
Selective cancelling (during group call) B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 239
Multiple group calls simultaneously B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 239
Naming of group calls B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2) 239
Individual tones for group calls B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 240
Group calls with “push to talk” (PTT) - - - - - - C C C C C C - - 240
No group calls during conversations B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 241
Feedback protection for All Call and group call B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 241
PA synchronisation - - C C C C C C C C C C - - 242
Group call with feedback protection - - C C C C C C C C C C - - 243
Recording of group calls before broadcast - - C C C C C C C C C C - - 244
Extended group call mode (6 storable group calls) - - C C C C C C C C C C - - 244
Extended group call mode (6 pre-recorded group calls) - - C C C C C C C C C C - - 244
Group call with pre-recorded audio - - C C C C C C C C C C C - 244
1) For SIP-C subscribers, the function “auto answer” must be activated
2)
Only as initiator available
3) There is no display indication for SIP-C subscribers
10 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Conference
Initiate a Simplex conference during a conversation C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 246

Initiate an OpenDuplex® conference during a conversation - - - - - - - - D D D D - - 246
Participant Simplex conference B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 247
Participant OpenDuplex® conference C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 247
Initiate conference with pre-configured participants (Sim-
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 247
plex conference)
Initiate conference with pre-configured participants (Open-
D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 247
Duplex® conference)
Party line - C C C C C C C C C C C C C 249
Attendant contact for pre-configured conferences B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 251
No busy tone at while talking into pre-configured conferences B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 252
Manual switch to active pre-configured conferences C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 252
Display text for pre-configured conferences - - C C C C C C C C C C - - 252
Pre-recorded audio for pre-configured conferences - - C C C C C C C C C C C - 252
Priority levels for pre-configured Simplex conferences C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 253
Music, radio conference
Feed-in audio signals (radio, music, waiting information,
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 254
alarm)
Feed-in via analogue subscribers D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 254
Feed-in via digital subscribers D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 254
Feed-in via “G8-AUD4” D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 255
Feed-in via “ST801” D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 255
Feed-in of music D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 256
Radio conference feed-in, “PTT” button D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 256
Reception of music B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 257
Attendant contact for reception of music B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 258
Music step function with one button B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 258
Participant radio conference (only listen) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 259
Participant radio conference (only listen, fix connection to
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 259
a channel)
Participant radio conference (listen and speak) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 260
Attendant contact for participant radio conference B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 261
Call relay for radio B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 262
Save reception status B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 262
Protection against feedback for radio conference (optional
B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 263
with reduction of the volume)
Indication of the selected radio channel in the display B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 264
Volume adjustable separately for radio conference and
conversations
Audio mixing D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 265
1.5/0619 11
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Public address (PA)
PA call - - - B B B B B B B B B - - 267
Start of PA group calls - - - C C C C C C C C C - - 268
PA announcement - - - D D D D D D D D D - - 269
Amplifiers Series AF – Operation without external power
- - - B B B B B B B B B - - 271
supply
Amplifiers Series AF – Speaker line monitoring - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 271
Amplifiers Series AF – Local announcement - - - - - - - B B B B B - - 272
Amplifiers Series AF – Offline mode - - - - - - - B B B B B - - 273
Alarm functions
Silent alarm – Initiate with a button D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 275
Silent alarm – Initiate via input (e.g. foot switch) D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 275
Silent alarm – Alarm receivers with alphanumeric display
C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 275
(max. 10 groups)
Silent alarm – Monitor the alarm at the alarm group C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 275
Silent alarm – Indication in the display of the initiator, how
D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 276
many subscribers are listening
Silent alarm – Cancel alarm with code C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 276
Silent alarm – Talk to the initiator C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 277
Silent alarm – Max. 8 alarms at the same time D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 278
Silent alarm – Automatic change of priorities and alarm
D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 279
groups if not taken over
Silent alarm – Manual change of priorities and alarm
D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 279
groups if not taken over
Silent alarm – 9 reception priorities with 3 different recep-
C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 280
tionoptions
Initiate alarms via inputs, feed-in alarm signal via subscriber D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 281
Alarm receivers with alphanumeric display (10 configur-
C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 281
able groups)
Cancel alarm with code C C C C C C C C C C C C C - 281
Max. 8 different alarms at the same time D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 282
9 reception priorities with 3 different reception options C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 282
Release keypad despite alarm B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 282
Automatic change of priorities and alarm groups after time D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 282
Audio alarm transmission with alphanumeric display (max.
B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 283
1 group)
Reception of chime signal B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 283
12 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Door functions 1)
Door station with one door opener B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 284

Door opener with buttons “0–9” B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 284
Door station with several door openers B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 285
Door opener time configurable per door station B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 285
Automatic cancelling the conversation after door opening
B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 285
after a configurable time delay
Door opener relay with Flip-Flop function C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 285
Independent operation of several door stations at the same
B B B B B B B B B B B B A - 286
time
Indication of the calling door station in the display B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 286
Automatic storage of several door calls B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 286
Ringing with chime signal via input (initiator) B B B B B B B B B B B B A - 287
Ringing with chime signal via input (receiver) B B B B B B B B B B B B A - 287
Ringing at one station (initiator) B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 287
Ringing at one station (receiver) B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 287
Ringing at group “0” (initiator) B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 287
Ringing at group “0” (receiver) B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 287
Ringing at a group of stations (initiator) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 287
Ringing at a group of stations (receiver) C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 287
Tone selection for ringing at a group - - C C C C C C C C C C - - 288
Forwarding of group ringing C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 288
A
Waiting information at the door station during ringing B B B B B B B B B B B B B 289
2)
Automatic door opening with time delay B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 289

Transfer of door calls to telephone dialler with possibility of
B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 290
opening
Allocation of door opening entitlement B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 290
Access control – 1- to 4-digit codes (can be combined) C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 291
Access control – Several codes per door station C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 291
Access control – Same code at several door stations (key
C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 291
system)
Access control – Number of reattempts C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 291
Access control – Security call to a control station in case of
C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 292
misuse
Access control – Blocking of the keyboard in case of misuse C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 292
Access control – Control of several door openers with dif-
C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 293
ferent codes at one door station
Listening to the door station while opening B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 293
Transfer of door calls via input B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 293
1)
Consider required input and output cards
2)
Feature level B required for playback of music
1.5/0619 13
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Control desk functions 1)
Parallel indication and operation of functions at several

D D D D D D D D D D D D D 2) D 2) 295
control desks
Scrolling of display information D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 296
Call request to a control desk B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 297
Trigger call requests only via ICX commands - - - - - - - - - - B B B B 297
Third button configurable for call requests - - B B B B B B B B B B B B 297
Invert button “0” and button “T” - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 297
De-bounce for releasing call - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 297
Call request with confirmation - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 297
Different display indication of call requests D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 297
Cancel emergency calls on site with mandatory acknowl-
B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 299
edgement
Cancel emergency calls on site with mandatory acknowl-
B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 299
edgement with button “2”
Disable after dialling B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 297
Disable reissuing of call requests B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 298
Output contacts for call requests B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 298
Output contacts for call requests with different switch types B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 298
Group contacts and collective contacts for call requests B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 298
Waiting information after initiating a call request B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 298
Separate waiting information for “call 1” and “call 2” B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 298
DSP tones as waiting information for DSP stations B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 298
No waiting information for “parked” calls B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 298
Call park function D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 299
Indication of input messages D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 301
Acknowledgement of input messages D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 302
Indication of different inputs D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 305
Indication of input messages via blinking conversation LED D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 306
Output contacts for input messages D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 306
Output contacts for input messages with different switch
D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 306
types
Acknowledge input messages with conversation B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 307
Line fault monitoring D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 308
Line fault monitoring for an Intercom station B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 308
Time delay of line monitoring B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 308
Automatic acknowledgement of fixed line faults - - - - - - B B B B B B B B 309
Line fault monitoring for an input D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 309
Snapshot in case of line fault B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 309
Expansion module – error for missing device - - - - - - - B B B B B - - 310
14 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Control desk functions 1)
Expansion module – prevent restart - - - - - - - B B B B B - - 311

Expansion module – EB2E2A B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 311
Reactivation of call requests/input messages B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 312
Reactivation of call requests/input messages per call type - - B B B B B B B B B B B B 312
Cancel of call requests/input messages after time B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 313
Cancel of call requests/input messages after time per call
- - B B B B B B B B B B B B 313
type
Pre-recorded audio for cancel of call request via timeout - - B B B B B B B B B B - - 313
Pre-recorded audio for call suppression of call requests - - B B B B B B B B B B - - 313
Manual call transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 314
Types of call transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 316
Call transfer after time D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 318
Output contact for call transfer after time D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 319
Day/night transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 320
Output contact for night transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D - 321
Secretary transfer at day/night transfer D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 321
Call distribution of control desks - - - D D D D D D D D D D D 322
Timeout - - - - - - - D D D D D D D 322
Storing of control desk transfers D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 323
Call transfer cancelling during active call request - - - - D D D D D D D D - - 323
Call type texts for display indication in dot-matrix displays D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 325
Change call types of call requests - - - - - B B B B B B B B B 325
Conversations as call request D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 326
Conversations as call request (configurable call type) D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 326
1)
Consider required input and output cards
2)
Only display indication available
DSP functions
Loudspeaker/microphone surveillance B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 328
Loudspeaker/microphone surveillance with white noise B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 328
Audio monitoring B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 330
Audio monitoring – Noise level and integration time B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 330
Audio monitoring – Adjusting of audio monitoring at the
D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 331
station
Audio monitoring – Audio monitoring with audio recording C C C C C C C C C C C C - - 333
Keypad tones B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 334
Lock echo canceller B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 334
OpenDuplex® B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 335
Special tones B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 336
Tone generator B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 337
1.5/0619 15
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
DSP functions
Tones for calls to control desk B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 339

Microphone frequency response B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 340
Start beep B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 340
Microphone gain B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 340
External loudspeaker gain - - - - - - - - B B B B - - 341
Sidetone for handsets/headsets - - B B B B B B B B B B - - 340
Video
Intercom station with a monitor (automatic connection dur-
B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 344
ing conversations)
Allocation of observation monitors to a station B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 344
Allocation of a camera to an Intercom station B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 345
Allocation of camera texts B B B B B B B B B B B B A B 345
Connection of cameras to certain monitors with button
code
Definition of scanning sequences on main, preview and
observation monitors
Switching off a monitor (in case of scanning all cameras
are switched off together)
Connection to observation and main monitors D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 346
Manual scanning control D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 347
Automatic priority control of camera connection (normal
call, emergency call)
Camera connection during call requests D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 347
Allocation of preview monitors to a control desk D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 347
Allocation of a main monitor to a control desk D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 347
Camera connection during input messages D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 348
Allocation of a camera to an input D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 348
Configurable scan time B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 348
Camera addressing for IP video - - - - - B B B B B B B B B 351
Configurable ports for the WS camera - - - - - B B B B B B B - - 351
External cameras with Commend audio - - - - - B B B B B B B B B 351
Video terminal with additional video interface - - - - - B B B B B B B B B 351
Live video menu for stations with configured monitor - - - - - - - D D D D D B - 352
Camera control during conversation D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 352
Allocation of monitors to stations without video switcher - - - - - B B B B B B B B B 353
16 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
SIP-C
SIP-T
Speech recording
Speech recording D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 355

Speech recording of subscribers D D D D D D B B B B B B B B 355
Channel assignment D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 356
Parallel switching of recorders D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 356
Avoid double recordings D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 357
Speech recording of OpenDuplex®conferences - - - - - - - - D D D D - - 246
RTP mode - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 359
VOX control for RTP speech recording - - - - - - - B B B B B - - 361
Pre-recorded audio
Pre-recorded audio B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 362
Recording pre-recorded audio files with Intercom station 1) - - - - - B B B B - - - - - 376
Time, date
Time zones and date formats for single subscribers - - - - - - - - B B B B - - 379
Display of time and date at stations - B B B B B B B B B B B - - 380
Display only time at station - - - - B B B B B B B B - - 380
Network functions
Network monitoring D D D D D D D D D D D D - - 390
SNMP - - - - - B B B B B B B - - 398
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P)
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) - - - B B B B B B B B B - - 404
1)
Not available for VirtuoSIS
1.5/0619 17
Intercom Server functions

In the following table, all available Intercom Server functions are listed with the required Intercom
Server firmware version or upgrade licence:
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
Calling numbers             128

Calling numbers up to 8-digits -            128
Changing the function codes             129
Indication of system faults on outputs             136
Extended subscribers - - - -         163
Extended subscribers – “Dummy Port” - - - - - -       164
Power management - - - - -        166
Input, output
Input generates ICX message             202
De-bounce time for inputs             204
Blinking output contacts             208
Parallel outputs             211
Delayed switching of outputs             212
Output generates ICX message             212
Linking inputs to outputs             213
Restore output states at warmstart             213
ICX message for output state             213
Hierarchy levels for outputs             214
Virtual input/output cards             214
Virtual slots “GE 300”             214
Extended clients -            215
Conference
Switch-off time for pre-configured conferences - -           253
Door functions
Ringing with chime signal via an input (initiator)             287
Control desk functions
Buzzer             295
Red lamp at buzzer             296
Call indication             296
Video
Decentralised video system             343
“Plug & Play” transmission of the video switcher configura-
            350
tion to EuroMax video switchers
Deleting of monitors at the start of the Intercom Server             353
18 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS 9.x
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
PRO 800 1.0
PRO 800 1.1
PRO 800 1.2
PRO 800 1.3
PRO 800 2.x
PRO 800 3.x
PRO 800 4.x
PRO 800 5.x
PRO 800 6.x
see page
Time, date
Time synchronisation -            378

ICX messages with time-controlled execution -            381
Network function
Address Conflict Detection according to RFC 5227 - - - - - - - -     397
SNMP monitoring and traps for LAN and WAN network con-
- - - - -        401
nections
P2PMP
P2MP - - - - -        407
Logic module
Logic module - - - - - -       408
EventLOG
Save ICX messages in the Intercom Server - - - - - - - -     422
IT security
Commend is focused on IT security. Not least for this reason, the Intercom Server provides functions,
which enable maximum secure communication with other devices. For further information, see “IT se-
curity” on page 446.
IT security see page
Password management 446
Ports 447
Certificates 447
1.5/0619 19
Configuration software CCT 800 Intercom Server Configuration
Configuration software CCT 800

The Central Configuration Tool (CCT 800) is a PC program, with which all features of the Intercom
Server software min. Pro 05.0 can be configured.
NOTE: Configuration sequence in CCT 800

Further information about the configuration sequence can be found on page 53.
Overview
In the following chapters, the installation, program interface and basic functions of the configuration
software CCT 800 are described:
 Installation of CCT 800 – see page 20
 Program interface – see page 22
 User account management – see page 25
 Function keys – see page 35
 Tool tips – see page 35
 Arranging windows – see page 35
 CCT 800 basic settings – see page 36
 Station test – see page 37
 Rollback – see page 37
 Copying and pasting column by column – see page 38
 Checking for collisions – see page 40
 Protect configuration with password – see page 42
 Reset individual subscribers – see page 43
 Reset of the entire configuration – see page 43
 Moving of subscribers – see page 44
 Extended copy – see page 45
 Printing the Intercom Server configuration – see page 52
Installation of CCT 800
Installation at the PC
For the installation, the software package “PRO 800 Server Software Package” is required. This pack-
age is available on www.commend.com or cLibrary.
GOOD TO KNOW: Correct display of character sets

CCT 800 displays the character sets of the respective system locale configured in Windows. If the
character sets “Cyrillic” or “Hebrew” are not indicated properly, the respective system locale must be
selected in the operating system of the computer, on which CCT 800 is executed.
Change system locale in Windows
 Open the control panel,
 click on Region 1),
 click on the tab Administrative,
 click on Change system locale and select the desired region.
 Click on OK to save the change.
 Restart your computer.
1)
Note: in order to display Region, select either the category “Large icons” or “Small icons” at
View by in the control panel.
20 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration software CCT 800
System requirements
RAM 1 GB
Processor (x86-64 comp.) min. 2 GHz
Hard disk space 100 MB
.NET Framework 4.7.1
Windows 10 (32/64 Bit), Windows 8.1 (32/64 Bit),
Operating system
Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2016
 Keyboard and mouse

 Screen with minimum resolution 1024 x 768 pixels
 Network interface serial interface
NOTE:
Use of the program libraries ”WinPcap” or ”Npcap”
CCT 800 to Version 8.1: WinPcap min. 4.x.x
CCT 800 from version 9.0: WinPcap min. 4.x.x or Npcap1) min. 0995
To ensure that CCT 800 works properly, it must be ensured that only one of the two program
libraries is installed on the computer. This can be easily checked at > Programs and features of
the operating system.
1)
When using Npcap, the option "WinPcap API-compatible Mode" must be activated.
License information
To view details about the license information of the open source components used, you can choose
from the following options:
 Click on ? in the menu bar > License information
 Click License Information in the Startup dialog.
1.5/0619 21
Program interface
 Carry out a double-click on the CCT 800 icon . The following menu bar and toolbar appears:
Menu bar
File
Menu Description
Create a new configuration. The area “Cards“ is opened after selection of the
New
Intercom Server type and the server ID.
Open Open an existing CCT 800 file. 1)
Close Close the currently opened CCT 800 file.
Save Save the current CCT 800 configuration.
Save as Save the current CCT 800 configuration with a new file name.
Import Open TE 700 files.
Print Print the configuration (see page 52).
Quit Close the program CCT 800.
1) If a file of an older CCT 800 version is opened, it will be converted into the new format! The new version
cannot be opened anymore with the older version of CCT 800.
Intercom Server
Opens the dialogue to receive the CCT 800 configuration of the connected
Receive
Intercom Server (see page 60).
Opens the dialogue to send the current CCT 800 configuration to the connected
Send
Opens the dialogue to change/set a password for configuration of the Intercom
Change Password
Server (see page 42).
Opens the dialogue to reset the configuration and optionally the Server ID of the
Initialize
Selective Restart Opens the dialogue to restart the connected Intercom Server (see page 62).
Opens the dialogue to update the software of Intercom Servers, cards and
Firmware Download
stations (see page 67).
Allocate SIS instances Opens the dialogue for the allocation of the VirtuoSIS instances (see page 103).
Determine SIS key sub- Opens the dialogue for the selection of the VirtuoSIS key subscribers (see
scriber page 97).
License administration Opens the dialogue for the licence administration (see page 72).
Connection Settings Opens the dialogue for the configuration of the connection (see page 54).
Save current connection Save the entered host IP with the appropriate port number from the drop-down
in connection list list.
22 1.5/0619
Intercom Server
Menu Description
Save current connection 1)
in current CCT 800 file Save the selected connection to the CCT 800 file
Opens the connection to the Intercom Server that is saved in the CCT 800 file
Activate connection (with CCT 800 6.1 or higher). If no connection is saved in the selected CCT 800 file,
this button is deactivated.
Close IP tunnel Closes the currently opened IP tunnel.
Connect to WAN-regions Establish a connection to a WAN region. 2)
Disconnect from WAN-
region Disconnect the connection from a WAN region. 2)
Initialize Handset Opens a dialogue for initializing a handset at selective subscribers.

Initialize control desk Opens a dialogue for initializing (deleting) the configuration of control desks.
Reset volume Reset volume of all stations to configured levels.
Lower volume Temporarily reduce volume of all stations. 3)
Pre-recorded audio Opens the dialogue for the allocation of pre-recorded audio (see page 362).
Surface Sensing Calibration of the front panels of cell terminals. 4)
Station test Checks the connection to an Intercom terminal (see page 37).
1) In order to save the connection, the CCT 800 file has also to be saved. To use the saved connection after start-
up, it has to be exist in CCT 800.
2) For further information, see the manual “L8-L3-WAN”.
3) After a warm or cold start, all stations will be reset to default volume.
4) For further information, see the manual “EB330-EF031”.
Options
Select the desired language of the user interface.
The following user languages are available:
 English
 German
Languages  French
 Italian
 Spanish
 Russian
 Chinese (simplified)
Settings Configuration of certain configurations for the program CCT 800 (see page 36).
Reset all column widths
All column widths and row heights are reset to the default values for the current
and row heights of the
dialog.
current dialog
Repair S0 blocks The functionality of all S0 connections can be checked.
User
Account management Opens the account management dialogue (see page 25).
Logon Logon to a project with a user name and a password (see page 26).
Logoff Logoff from the active project (see page 27).
View
Symbol line The symbol line can either be activated or deactivated.
Status line The status line can either be activated or deactivated.
Window
- Shows all open windows.
Help
1.5/0619 23
Help Opens the CCT 800 online help. 1)

Licence Information Shows the license information of the open source components.
Info Shows the CCT 800 program version.
1)
The online help can only be started if CHM files are activated. For further information contact your system
administrator.
Toolbar
With the toolbar in the header, it is possible to carry out all the desired settings by simply clicking a
button or directly entering an IP address of an Intercom Server to connect to:
Button Description
Creates a new CCT 800 configuration file.
Opens an existing CCT 800 configuration file.
Saves the existing CCT 800 configuration file.
Cuts the selection and save it in the clipboard.
Copies the selection and save it in the clipboard.
Inserts the saved content of the clipboard.
Prints the active Intercom Server configuration (see page 52).
Opens the information dialogue of the program CCT 800 (version, name of the user or
copyright).
Opens the help dialogue of the active dialogue. The help dialogue can also be opened
via the F1 key of the keyboard.
Opens the dialogue for checking for collisions (see page 40).
Resets all column widths and row heights of the active dialogue.
Resets the volume for all subscribers.
Reduces the volume of for subscribers. 1)
Connects to a WAN region.
Disconnects from a WAN region.
Select one of the saved server connections from the drop-down list or enter the host
IP with the appropriate port number for a quick connection (host:port). 2)
Opens the configuration dialogue (see page 54).
Saves the entered host IP with the appropriate port number from the drop-down list.
Saves the selected connection to the CCT 800 file. 3)

Opens the connection to the Intercom Server that is saved in the CCT 800 file (with
CCT 800 6.1 or higher). If no connection is saved in the selected CCT 800 file, this but-
ton is deactivated.
Indicates the currently opened IP tunnel, via which CCT 800 is connected with the
respective Intercom Server, the server ID and description of the Intercom Server (with
CCT 800 6.1 or higher). Click on this button to close the IP tunnel.
1)
After a warm or cold start, all stations will be reset to default volume.
2)
If no port is entered, the standard port “17000” is used.
3) In order to save the connection, the CCT 800 file has also to be saved. To use the saved connection after start-
up, it has to be exist in CCT 800.
24 1.5/0619
User account management
Setup guide
On the following pages, you will find a detailed step-by-step instruction to set up the user account
management via CCT800. The following illustration provides an overview of the required configuration
steps:
Execute program CCT 800
Login to a project via:
CCT 800 user account
Domain user account
Pre-configured CCT 800 user ac-
Open User account management
Create CCT 800 Import domain

user account user account
Edit user account information
Configure Section: Roles
Create a role
Allocate permissions
Configure Section: Groups Configure User Roles
Create a group Allocate a role to a user ac-

count
Allocate roles to the group
Configure User Groups

Create/Open project
Allocate a group to a user ac-
count
1.5/0619 25
Login to a project
The login to a project will be performed with an existing and enabled user account. If no user account
has been created or imported yet (domain user account), the login will be performed with a pre-
configured CCT 800 user account. The following user accounts are available for the login:
1
CCT 800 user account (see below)
2
Domain user account (see page 27)
3
Pre-configured CCT 800 user account (see page 27)
Depending on the activated permissions of the respective user account, certain functions in the menu
bar, toolbar and the project tree are enabled after a successful login. Further information about
permissions can be found on page 28.
Configuration CCT 800

 Go to: Menu User > Logon
 All active CCT 800 files will be closed at login to CCT 800.
 If there is an active CCT 800 file with unsaved changes to a project, a dialogue will be indicated with
the request to save, reject the changes of the respective CCT 800 file or cancel the process.
 If all CCT 800 files are closed, the following dialogue appears:
 Username: In this field, the user name of the respective user account can be entered (case-
sensitive).
 Password: In this field, the password of the user account can be entered (case-sensitive).
 Use single sign-on: Activate this checkbox to log in with the domain of the current logged in user
at the PC. The field Username will be completed automatically with the domain name and the field
Password will be disabled and the user will be logged in automatically with the password of the
domain user account. The respective domain user account has to be enabled in the account
management (see page 28).
 Auto logon: Activate this checkbox to log in automatically within five seconds with the current user
name and password.
 Click on the button OK to log in.
GOOD TO KNOW: Indication of the currently logged-on user

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, the currently logged-on user will be indicated at User > Logoff. See
the following screenshot:
1 CCT 800 user account

 In the field Username, enter the user name of the user account.
 In the field Password, enter the password of the respective user account.
 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user.
26 1.5/0619
2
Domain user account
In order to import a domain user account, see page 32. Carry out the following configuration to log in
with a domain user account:
 Activate the checkbox Use current domainuser to log in with the current logged in domain user
account of the PC. The field Username will be completed automatically with the domain name, the
field Password will be disabled and the user will be logged in automatically with the password of
the domain user account.
 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user.
3
Pre-configured CCT 800 user account
The pre-configured user accounts are pre-installed and enable an extended operation of the program
CCT 800 after the login. Two pre-configured user accounts with different features are available:
Master
The user account “Master” configures exclusively the user account management:
 User name: master (case-sensitive)
 Password: (non-existent)
NOTE:
 It is recommend to set a password (see page 28).
 The user account “Master” cannot be deleted.
 The name of the user account “Master” cannot be changed.
 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user account.

DefaultUser
The user account DefaultUser enables an unrestricted operation of the program CCT 800:
 User name: DefaultUser (case-sensitive)
 Password: (non-existent)
NOTE:
 It is recommend to set a password (see page 28).
 The user account “DefaultUser” cannot be deleted.
 Click on the button OK to log in with the respective user account.
Logoff from a project

 Go to: Menu User > Logoff
 All active CCT 800 files will be closed at logoff from a project.
 If there is an active CCT 800 file with unsaved changes at logoff from a project, a dialogue will be
indicated with the request to save, reject the changes of the respective CCT 800 file or cancel the
process.
 The user will be logged-off as soon as all CCT 800 files are closed.
NOTE:
In order to switch the user account the current logged in user has to be logged out first.
1.5/0619 27
Account management
With the account management, the user accounts, groups, roles and the “ActiveDirectory” service will
be configured. Roles with the respective permissions to use functions in the menu bar, toolbar and
project tree of the program CCT 800 can be allocated to the user accounts and user groups. For an
configuration example, see page 33.

 Go to: Menu User > Account Management
 All active CCT 800 files will be closed with opening the account management.
 If there is an active CCT 800 file with unsaved changes while opening the account management, a
dialogue will be indicated with the request to save, reject the changes of the respective CCT 800 file
or cancel the process.
 If all CCT 800 files are closed, the following dialogue appears:
The account management is separated into four different sections with the following functions:
User 1 : Configuration of user accounts and allocation of the configured roles and groups to user
accounts (see page 28).
Groups 2 : Configuration of the groups (see page 31).
Roles 3 : Configuration of the roles and permissions (see page 31).
ActiveDirectory 4 : Synchronization of the CCT 800 “ActiveDirectory” service and import of the
domain user accounts (see page 32).
Section: User
In the section “User”, the configured roles and groups can be allocated to the user accounts.
General
Creates, deletes and edits the settings of the user accounts.
28 1.5/0619
1
Create CCT 800 user account
 Click on the button Add to create a new CCT 800 user account.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings.
1
Delete CCT 800 user account
 Select the respective CCT 800 user account in the list.
 Click on the button Remove to delete the selected user account.
NOTE:
The pre-configured user account “Master” cannot be deleted.
2
Edit user account information
 Name: In this field, the name of the user account can be changed (case-sensitive).
NOTE:
The name of the user account “Master” cannot be changed.
 Enabled: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective user account. A login with this user
account is only possible if it is enabled.
 Password: In this field, a password for the user account can be entered for the login (case-sensitive).
NOTE:
The field Password is disabled if a domain user account is selected. Further information about
domain user accounts can be found on page 32.
 Retype password: Confirm the password that was entered in the field Password.
NOTE:
The field Retype password is disabled if a domain user account is selected. Further information
about domain user accounts can be found on page 32.
 Description: In this field, a description of the user account can be entered.

User Groups
Allocation of the configured groups to the respective user accounts. User accounts with allocated
groups (user group) have all configured permissions of the roles included in this group. It is possible
to allocate several groups to each user account. Further information about the configuration of groups
can be found on page 31.
1.5/0619 29
Allocate a group to a user account

 Activate the checkbox of the desired group to allocate it to the respective user account.
NOTE:
 The name of the group will be shown in the row and the name of the user account will be shown
in the column.
 If one or more roles will be allocated to a user account via a user group, it is not possible to change
the allocation of the respective roles for this user account via the Section: User.
User Roles
Allocation of the configured roles to the respective user accounts. User accounts with allocated roles
(user role) have all the configured permissions of this role. It is possible to allocate several roles to each
user account. Further information about the configuration of rules can be found on page 31.
Allocate a role to a user account

 Activate the checkbox of the desired role to allocate it to the respective user account.
NOTE:
 The name of the role will be shown in the row and the name of the user account will be shown in
the column.
 If one or more roles will be allocated to a user account via a user group, it is not possible to change
the allocation of the respective roles for this user account via the Section: User.
30 1.5/0619
Section: Groups
In the section “Groups”, the configured roles can be allocated to the groups. A group has all per-
missions of the gathered roles. In this way, only one group has to be allocated to a user account instead
of several roles. It is possible to allocate several roles to a group. Further information about configure
a role can be found on page 31.
 Name: In this field, the name of the group can be changed.

 Description: In this field, a description of the group can be entered.
 Role: In this field, the name of the available roles is shown.
1
Create a group
 Click on the button Add to create a new group.
1
Delete a group
 Select the respective group in the list.
 Click on the button Remove to delete the selected group.
2
Allocate roles to the group
 Select the respective group in the list.
 Activate the checkbox of the desired role to allocate it to the selected group.
Section: Roles
In the section “Roles”, permissions can be allocated to the roles. The permissions enable the use of
functions in the menu bar, toolbar and the project tree in the program CCT 800. It is possible to allocate
several permissions to a role.
1.5/0619 31
 Name: In this field, the name of the group can be changed.

 Description: In this field, a description of the group can be entered.
 Permission: In this field, the name of the permission is shown.
1
Create a role
 Click on the button Add to create a new role.
1
Delete a role
 Select the respective role in the list.
 Click on the button Remove to delete the selected role.
2
Allocate permissions
 Select the respective role in the list.
 Activate the checkbox of the desired permission to enable it for the selected role.
NOTE:
In order to enable or disable several permissions, select the desired permissions in the list 2 and
press the <space> key on your keyboard.
2
Sort permissions
 Click on the uppermost checkbox in the row A to enable the filter function B .
 B Select the desired filter mode in the drop-down list. The following filter modes are available:
 Checked: Activate this checkbox to show the selected permissions of the respective role.
 Unchecked: Activate this checkbox to show the non-selected permissions of the respective role.
 Click on the uppermost checkbox A to switch between the filter modes.
 In order to disable the filter function click on the icon or switch the mode via the uppermost check-
box A .
Section: ActiveDirectory
In the section ActiveDirectory the “ActiveDirectory” service synchronises the domain network with
the account management and imports existing domain user accounts. This domain user accounts log-
in automatically to the account management with their domain user name and password.
32 1.5/0619
 Enable ActiveDirectory: Activate this checkbox to enable the “ActiveDirectory” service. It also
displays the current used “ActiveDirectory”.
 Synchronization interval: In this drop-down list, the synchronization interval can be selected, with
which the “ActiveDirectory” service will be synchronised automatically (from 1 hour to 24 hours).
Select the entry “inactive” to disable the automatic synchronization.
 Start synchronization at: In this field, the countdown can be entered, after which the automatic
synchronization starts (hours:minutes:seconds). According to the value that was selected in the field
Synchronization interval, the automatic synchronisation will be performed.
 Last synchronization: In this field, the date of the last synchronization is shown.
 Synchronize now: Click on this button to perform the manual synchronization.
 Name: In this field, the name of the respective domain user account or group is shown.
 Import: Activate this checkbox to import the respective domain user account or group.
 Is Imported: In this field, it is shown whether the respective domain user account or group is
already imported.
Import domain user account

 Click on the button Synchronize now to perform the manual synchronization and to update the list
of the available domain user accounts and groups.
 Activate the checkbox of the respective domain user accounts or group in the list to select them for
the import into the account management.
NOTE:
If a domain group is selected, all domain user accounts that are allocated in this domain group will
be imported into the user management.
 Click on the button OK to save the settings and to import the selected domain user accounts.
 The imported domain user accounts will be displayed in the section at User > General.
Further information about the configuration of imported domain user accounts can be found on page
28.
Example: Create and configure a new CCT 800 user account.
 Open the user account management and go to User > General.
 Click on the button Add to create a new CCT 800 user account (see page 28).
 Edit the user account details (e.g. name or password).
 Go to: Roles (see page 31).
 Click on the button Add to create a new role.
 Edit the user account details (name, description).
 The following permissions will be allocated to the created role:
 Menu: File\New
 Menu: File\Open
 Menu: File\Save
1.5/0619 33
 Menu: Intercom Server\Receive

 Menu: Intercom Server\Send
 Menu: User\Account Management
 Project: Intercom Server\General Settings
 Project: Interfaces\Data Interfaces
 Project: Subscriber\General
 Project: Subscriber\Entitlements
 Go to: User > User Roles.
 Activate the checkbox of the desired role to allocate it to the respective user account (see page 28).
 Depending on the allocated permissions, the following functions will be indicated in the menu bar,
toolbar and the project tree in the program CCT 800:
34 1.5/0619
Function keys
Control in the project tree area and tabs

Down
Up
Open folder
Close folder
Jump to configuration window
Control of tabs
+ change tab
Jump to tree
Other functions
ctrl
+ S Save file Receive from Intercom Server
ctrl
+ Open file Send to Intercom Server
ctrl
+ Import Start help menu
Tool tips
Tool tips are available for new features from PRO 800 1.3. Move the mouse cursor over the new buttons
or drop-down lists to display the feature of the button.
Arranging windows
If multiple files are opened in CCT800 it is possible to arrange them horizontally and vertically.
 1 Click and hold on the desired CCT800 file tab with the left mouse button.
 2 While holding down the mouse button pull file to the desired location. A frame at the future
position of the file appears.
 3 Release mouse button. The moved CCT800 file appears at the desired location.
1.5/0619 35
CCT 800 basic settings

 Go to: Menu Options > Settings > tab General
 The following dialogue appears:
 CCT Files: In this field, a directory can be selected, where the CCT 800 files shall be saved.
 CCT Temp file: In this field, a directory can be selected, where the CCT 800 temporary files shall be
saved to.
 Auto. disconnect: Activate this checkbox to enable the automatic disconnection of the modem.
The checkbox Inquire is enabled.
 Inquire: Activate this checkbox to indicate a confirmation dialogue before auto-disconnecting.
 Timeout: In this field, the time can be changed, after which the modem shall be disconnected (by
default 600 seconds).
 Max Number (I/O-PopUp): In this field, the maximum number of entries shown in the I/O popups
can be changed (by default 40).
 Max Number (Rollback): In this field, the maximum number of saved states for rollback can be
changed (by default 10).
 Show startup dialog during application start: Activate this checkbox to display the startup
dialog.
 Split card dialog horizontally: Activate this checkbox to change the orientation of the card
dialogue between horizontal and vertical split (see page 64).
 Show hint dialog if no license is available: Activate this checkbox to show a note if a licence is
not available for the respective feature.
 Number of entries in recently opened file list: In this drop-down list, the number of recently
used CCT 800 files can be changed, which are displayed at Menu > File (by default 4).
 Menu Options > Settings > tab Communication
 Connection type: In this drop-down list, the connection type of the Intercom Server can be
changed.
 Host: In this field, an IP address can alternative be entered to the own PC (localhost), via which the
ComAdapter can be used in the network.
 Test Proxy Settings: Click on this button to test the connection to the licence server.
 Proxy server support

If a licence activation is necessary, but there is no direct internet connection to a licence server, a
proxy authentication is available. There are three authentication methods for this procedure (basic,
digest, NTLM).
36 1.5/0619

1. Go to: Menu Options > Settings > tab Communication
2. Activate the checkbox Manual proxy settings
3. Enter the following information:
 IP address: Enter the IP address of the proxy server.
 Port: Enter the port via which the proxy server is accessible.
 Username: Choose a username for the authentication.
 Password: Choose a password for the authentication.
4. Click on the button Test Proxy Settings to test the connection to the licence server.
Station test
Checks the connection to a station via establishing a conversation or playback a tone at the station to
be tested.

To check the connection, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Station test
2. The following dialogue appears:
3. In the field Calling number own station, enter the call number of the subscriber that shall
establish a conversation.
4. In the field Calling number test station, enter the call number of the station to be entered.
5. Click on the button Build up conversation to establish a call to the test station.
6. Click on the button Start test tone to playback a tone at the test station.
7. In the drop-down list Level, the volume level of the tone can be selected.
8. Click on the button Cancel test tone to cancel the playback of the tone.
9. Click on the button Cancel conversation to cancel the conversation.
1.5/0619 37
Copying and pasting column by column

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, entries can be copied and pasted column by column. With this function,
any configuration parameters (e.g. description, call number or IP address) can be copied from CCT 800
to e.g. Microsoft Excel, edited, and pasted back into CCT 800, which enables a fast and simple config-
uration of even large Intercom systems.
Copying columns
To copy columns, follow the instructions below:
 Click on the column description 1 to select the entire column, or select only the desired column area
2 . See the following illustration:
 Press the keys <Ctrl> and <C> in order to copy the selected entries into the clipboard.
ATTENTION: Values in drop-down lists are saved as decimal numbers

With fields are copied, the displayed value and text will be saved to the clipboard, whereas non-
numerical values in drop-down lists (e.g. “5k6”, “On” or “Duplex”) will be saved as decimal num-
bers (e.g. “1”, “2” or “3”)! When pasting into drop-down lists, the respective decimal numbers
must be used instead of the text that is indicated in CCT 800 (see page 39)!
Restrictions when copying

If one of the following restrictions is not fulfilled when copying an entry, the copy process will be can-
celled and a message box will be indicated:
 Rows cannot be copied.
 Only single columns can be copied.
 Only entries in fields and drop-down lists can be copied.
 Only entries of single or linked fields and drop-down lists can be copied.
38 1.5/0619
Pasting entries
To paste entries column by column, follow the instructions below:
 Select the field or drop-down list 1 , from which all entries that are saved in the clipboard shall be
inserted column by column in descending order 2 . See the following illustration:
 Press the keys <Ctrl> and <V> in order to paste the saved entries.
ATTENTION: Paste decimal numbers into drop-down lists

When pasting into drop-down lists containing non-numerical values (e.g. “5k6”, “On” or “Duplex”),
you must enter decimal numbers (e.g. “1”, “2” or “3”) instead of the text that is indicated in CCT
800! You can obtain the decimal numbers by pasting the copied values into e.g. Microsoft Excel
(see page 38)!
Restrictions when pasting

If one of the following restrictions is not fulfilled when pasting an entry, the copy process will be can-
celled and a message box will be indicated:
 Entries cannot be pasted rows by rows.
 Entries can only be pasted into single columns.
 Entries can only be pasted into fields and drop-down lists.
 Entries can only be pasted into single or linked fields and drop-down lists.
 Entries cannot be pasted into deactivated fields or drop-down lists.
 In case of pasting, the number of available rows per column, in which entries shall be inserted, must
be equal or greater than the entries that are saved in the clipboard.
 In case of pasting, only one field or drop-down list may be selected, from when all entries will be
inserted column by column in descending order.
1.5/0619 39
Checking for collisions

Detects existing collisions within a single or several Intercom Servers. To show existing conflicts,
follow the instructions below:
 Click on the button . The following dialogue appears:
Range of functions
 CCT 800 3.1 or lower: Only the check for collisions at inputs, outputs and subscribers is possible.
 CCT 800 3.2 or higher: The check of all available objects is possible (see page 41).
The call numbers of several objects will be checked for collisions (e.g. same number sequence or du-
plicate entry). The check will be carried out not only for objects of the same type (e.g. subscriber or out-
put), also the call numbers of all objects will be compared with each other. Also collisions between
each selected Intercom Server will be determined if several Intercom Servers are selected. Existing col-
lisions has to be fixed manually.
Controlling the surface

 Available Intercom Server: In this field, all available Intercom Servers are indicated. The Intercom
Servers can manually be selected, which shall be checked for collisions.
 Select all items: Click on this button to select all available Intercom Servers, which are displayed
in the dialogue “available Intercom Server”.
 Check door opener codes: Activate this checkbox to add all configured access codes of the door
for the check.
 Start check: Click on this button to start the check for collisions. Only selected Intercom Servers are
considered.
 Collisions: Displays all existing collisions of the selected Intercom Server. The following collisions
are possible:
 Duplicate entry: The call number of two objects are identical.
NOTE:
With CCT 800800 3.1 or lower, the check for duplicate entries is only possible between objects of
the same type.
 Same number sequence: The call numbers of min. two objects start with the same number
sequence (but the call numbers are not identical).
40 1.5/0619
NOTE:
With CCT 800 3.1 or lower, the check for the same number sequence is only possible between
objects of the same type and between subscribers and outputs.
 Conflict with block prefix: A part or the entire call number of an object is identical with the
block prefix of a selected Intercom Server.
The following objects will be checked for existing collisions:
Object Possible collision at Path in CCT 800
Subscriber Call number Subscriber > General
Input Call number Inputs > General setting
Output Call number Outputs > General settings
Configuration block and
 Block number
additional blocks
Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General
Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block

Block prefix Block prefix
settings
Function code Function code Intercom Server - Block XX > Function codes
Subscriber > Attendant contacts > desired subscriber
PA number PA number
> tab PA-Number
Network > IP-connection > desired slot > tab WAN-
WAN Pre-dialling code
connections
Network > IP-connection > desired slot > tab WAN-
 WAN ID number subscriber
connections
 S0 ID number subscriber Interfaces > S0 > desired slot
 Interfaces Call number Interfaces > Data interfaces
SIP-T Pre-dialling Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > sub-folder trunks > desired slot
SIP-T Code number Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > sub-folder trunks > desired slot
Door opener
Access code Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber
(optional)
Intercom Server > Cards > Serial Number
IP - Settings > Card IP address
Card IP address
Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
IP-Terminal 2) Port number,
Terminal IP Address
Terminal IP address
Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
Port number
Intercom Server > Cards > Serial Number
Card IP address IP - Settings > Card IP address
Port number, Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
IP-Terminal 2) Dynamic registration / MAC Terminal IP Address
address Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals >
MAC Adresse
1)Applies only for existing collisions within the same Intercom Server.
2)
Configuration errors resulting in the combination of card IP address + port number + terminal IP address or
MAC address on an IP card will be displayed as a collision.
ATTENTION:
 Each Intercom Server uses the same hexadecimal addresses for inputs, outputs and interfaces. 4-dig-
it addresses for local use (beginning with D0**), virtual clients for local use within an Intercom Server
(beginning with BA**) and addresses ending with “F1” to “FE” will not be considered for the check
of collisions. In order to use these inputs, outputs and interfaces across a network, an up to 8-digit
number has to be entered manually!
 Valid entries can be displayed as existing collisions if several Intercom Servers with different block
prefix are selected for the checking!
1.5/0619 41
Protect configuration with password

For Intercom Server, a password can be assigned to prevent unwanted changes to the Intercom Server
configuration. This password is requested before sending and receiving the configuration, initializing
the Intercom Server, performing a selective reboot, and updating the software.

To define a password for the Intercom Server, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Change Password
The following dialogue appears:
2. Click on the button Query network to show all Intercom Servers within the selected network.
3. Click on the button Get Data to receive the software information of all selected Intercom Servers.
4. Click on the button Set password to define a new password or to change the existing password.
5. In the field Old password, enter the existing password (no entry required if no password has been
defined).
NOTE: Delete password

In order to delete an existing password, enter the current password in the field Old Password and
click on the button OK.
6. In the fields New Password and Confirm New Password, enter the new password (4 to 8-digits).
7. Click on the button OK to save the changes.
42 1.5/0619
Reset of individual subscribers

All settings of a subscriber can be reset to default settings.

To reset the configuration of a single station, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Reset subscriber”. A dialogue appears.
3. Click on the button Yes. All previously configured definitions and functions of this subscriber will be
deleted (also all references to the call number of this subscriber, e.g. call request to this control desk,
attendant contacts, direct dialling, protection against feedback). Afterwards, a new subscriber with
default settings will be created.
NOTE: Cannot be changed back

This procedure cannot be made changed back.
Reset of the entire configuration

There are two possibilities for initialising an Intercom Server (reset to default settings):
 With the DIP switches on the motherboard “G3-GEM” (Intercom Server GE 300) or on the processor
card “G8-GEP” (Intercom Server GE 800)
 With CCT 800
Initialise with DIP switches

See the manuals “GE 800” and “GE 300”.
Initialise with CCT800

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Initialize
2. The following dialogue appears:
3. In the field Current Server-ID, the current server ID of the respective Intercom Server is indicated.
4. In the field New Server-ID, the new server ID can be entered (only for Intercom Server GE 300 and
GE 800).
NOTE: Cannot be undone

Available server IDs from “1” to “254” are possible (except “120” to “135”). The current server ID
can also be used.
5. Optionally, activate the checkbox Keep IP-Address to keep the IP address of the GEP card at the
initialization. Otherwise, the IP address will be reset to default settings.
6. Click on the button Initialize to reset the entire configuration of the Intercom Server to default
settings.
1.5/0619 43
Moving of subscribers
Previously configured subscribers can be moved to a different subscriber card (e.g. an employee
changes the office within a company. His subscriber can easily be moved to another port without losing
any entitlements or parameters).
Restrictions
 Only for station types: EE 211, EE 311A, EE 411, EE 811A
 Only for cards: Gx-GET, Gx-GED
 Control desks cannot be moved.
 Moved subscribers must have the same station type and card type and has to be located in the same
Intercom Server block.
 Station inputs and outputs are excluded.

1. Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Mark for move to select them for moving”.
3. If two or more subscribers are selected for moving, right-click on one of the selected subscriber and
click on “Move subscribers”. The following dialogue appears:
4. In the left field, select the desired a subscriber.

5. In the right field, select a free port, to which the subscriber shall be moved.
6. Click on the button Connect 1 to move the selected subscriber.
7. Click on button Disconnect 2 to undo an allocation.
ATTENTION:
Each subscriber has to be assigned to a port (can also be the original port). Otherwise, the button
OK will not be activated!
44 1.5/0619
Extended copy
Selective functions or configurations can be copied from a subscriber or client and added to other sub-
scribers. The copy/paste process will be verified to avoid configuration errors. The extended copy func-
tion can be used in the following dialogues:
 Inputs / Input messages – see page 47
 Subscriber – see page 48
 Station properties – see page 48
 Alarm triggering – see page 49
 Control desks – see page 49
 Call requests – see page 50
 Attendant contacts – see page 50
 Door opener – see page 50
NOTE: Restriction
Functions and configurations can only be copied or added between cards of the same type (e.g.
configuration copied from GED subscriber card and added to IP subscriber card).
Copy and pasting process

Copy of data
To copy functions and/or configuration from a subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “extended copy”. The following example dialogue
appears:
2. In the left hand pane, select the functions and configuration to copy. In this dialogue, only configured
functions will be shown.
3. In the right hand pane, general information about the selected client will be shown.
4. Click on the button Copy.
1.5/0619 45
Pasting of copied data

To paste the copied data to a subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Select one or multiple subscribers in the respective dialogue (multiple subscribers are selected with
the keys “shift” or “ctrl”).
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Extended Paste”. The following dialogue appears
3. In the field General source client information, the data of the copied subscriber is shown.
4. In the field Paste status, possible errors during pasting are shown.
5. To paste the copied data, the following possibilities are available:
 Click on the button Continue if OK to paste functions and configuration, at which no errors are
shown in the field Paste status.
 Click on the button Continue to paste all functions and configuration (even though errors are
shown in the field Paste status).
GOOD TO KNOW:
 Due to the various subscriber types (e.g. analogue, digital, S0 or GTEL) the pasting of functionali-
ties at these types is limited (in so far as that functions can be added to these types).
 Functions, which only work with certain card types, won‘t be copied to wrong card types (e.g. “C”
instead of “D”).
 The destination client creates those functions which have not been defined yet.
 Before Pasting, the destination client is reset to its default configuration.
 The copied data stays available until:
 A new copy action replaces the data in the cache
 The file, out of which was copied, is closed
 CCT 800 is closed
46 1.5/0619
Extended copy - dialogue

Inputs / Input messages
NOTE: Configuration required

The copied input has either to be configured as a function of an input message under Inputs > Input
message (see page 191) or as a function of an ICX message-output Inputs > ICX at input (see
page 212).
To copy the input messages, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Inputs > General Settings
2. Right-click on the desired input and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:
The following settings can be copied:

Function Functions to copy
All settings under:
 Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
General
 Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1
 Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 2
 Inputs > Input message > tab Operations Error
Control Desks 1) Selected destination control desk
All settings under Inputs > Input message > desired input > tab Attendant
Attendant contacts 1) 2) contacts
All settings under Inputs > Input message > desired input > tab Network
Network Monitoring 1) Monitoring
Data interfaces 3) All settings under Inputs > ICX at input
ICX messages 3) All settings under Inputs > ICX at input > desired input
1) This function can also be extended copied through Inputs > Input message.
2)
Only internal station outputs can be copied, if the respective output is activated at the destination station
(e.g. ET 8E8A)
3) This function can also be extended copied trough Inputs > ICX at input.
1.5/0619 47
Subscriber
Follow the instructions below to copy the subscriber settings:
1. Go to: Subscriber > General
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:
All functions defined for the selected subscriber can be copied, with the following exceptions:
 Protection against feedback and the video function cannot be copied.
 Only device internal outputs can be copied. Copying is only possible, if the respective output of the
destination client is activated Subscriber > Station properties.
Station properties
Follow the instructions below to copy the station properties:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:
 The following functions can be copied:

Function Copied function
Station type and general settings (series, audio, de-bounce time, line-monitoring
Station type1) delay).
Additional device Extension modules for subscribers (e.g. ET806, EB2E2A).
Functions and Favourites under:
Functions / Favourites Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu
Subscriber > Station properties > WS series
Parameters Depending on the station type
Station outputs. Outputs are only copied if no output has been created at this
Outputs
port at the destination station.
Station inputs (incl. input messages). Inputs are only copied if no input has been
Inputs
created at this port at the destination station.
1) If the destination subscriber is already defined (not “digital or analogue standard”), it is only possible to copy
between two identical types. Otherwise, the station type of the initiated subscriber is taken over.
48 1.5/0619
Alarm triggering

For this function, it has to be configured an alarm triggering under Subscriber > Alarm trigger-
ing for the to be copied subscriber (see page 275).
Follow the instructions below to copy the alarm settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering

Function Functions to copy
General All settings under Subscriber > Alarm triggering
Control Desks

For this function, it has to be configured a control desk under Subscriber > Control Desks for the to
be copied subscriber (see page 294).
Follow the instructions below, to copy the control desks settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks

Function Function to copy
Buzzer All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer
IP/RS232 - ICX All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab IP/RS232 - ICX
Call conversion All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Call conversions
Tone generator for All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Tone generator for
buzzer buzzers
Transfer parameters All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Transfer parameters
EE880-(functionality)1) All settings under Subscriber > Control Desks > EE 880 Subscriber
1)
This function is only available for EE880 subscribers.
1.5/0619 49
Call requests

For this function, it has to be configured a control desk under Subscriber > Call Request for the to
Follow the instructions below, to copy the call request settings:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Call Request
2. Right-click on the desired entry and select “Extended Copy“. The following dialogue appears:

All settings under:
General  Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger
 Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
Control Desks All destination control desks of the affected call request
Attendant Contacts Internal station outputs
Attendant contacts
NOTE: Restriction
Only device internal outputs can be copied. Copying is only possible, if the respective output of the
destination client is activated Subscriber > Station properties. If this output is already defined as
an attendant contact, only the configuration will be copied.

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts

All settings under
Configuration  Subscriber > Attendant contacts > tab Active at
 Subscriber > Attendant contacts > tab Call No./Function
Door opener

For this function, it has to be configured a control desk under Subscriber > Door opener for the to
50 1.5/0619
1. Go to: Subscriber > Door opener

The following door opener functions can be copied:

All settings under:
 Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open
Configuration
 Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control station
 Subscriber > Door opener > tab Waiting information
Forwarding Group-ring- All settings under Subscriber > Door opener > desired subscriber > Forward-
ing ing Group-ringing
Selected attendant contact and all settings under Subscriber > Door opener >
Access code(s)1) desired subscriber
1) Only device internal outputs can be copied. Copying is only possible, if the respective output of the destina-
tion client is activated Subscriber > Station properties. If this output is already defined as an attendant
contact, only the access codes will be copied.
1.5/0619 51
Printing Intercom Server configuration

With CCT 800 3.1 or higher, additional print options to create project or system documentation are
available.

To print the configuration of one or more Intercom Servers, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu File > Print
The following print options are available:
Option Description
An overview of all plug-in cards with the following information is printed: slot
Card Overview
number, type of card, used card licence, software version and IP address.
An overview of all Intercom Stations with the following information is printed:
Stations Overview Server ID/slot/subscriber port, call number, description, display text, station type,
firmware version and IP address with port.
An overview of all inputs with the following information is printed: address, input
call number, input description, subscriber call number, subscriber description and
Inputs Overview
the configuration of the inputs: input message (IM), ICX at input (ICX), dial via
input (D), alarm input (A), chime-signal (CH).
An overview of all outputs with the following information is printed: address, out-
Outputs Overview put call number, output description, subscriber call number, subscriber descrip-
tion, input call number and the function “ICX at output” (ICX) if used. 1)
An overview of all licences with the following information is printed: address, card
Licenses Overview
type, licence product, licence code, licence state, licence type, generation.
1) Activate the checkbox Enable full functionality to indicate the outputs of Intercom stations.
2. After selecting an option, the following dialogue appears:
3. Select the desired Intercom Servers from whose configuration should be printed. Click on the button
Select all to print the configuration of all available Intercom Servers.
4. Optional: Activate the checkbox Show printer selection dialog to open the print dialogue at the
beginning of the printing progress.
5. Click on the button Print to start the printing process.
52 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration sequence in CCT 800
Configuration sequence in CCT 800

In the following, you will find a step-by-step setup guide to configure the stations, cards and Intercom
Server in CCT 800:
1. Establishing a connection between Intercom Server and CCT 800 – see page 54
2. Receiving the configuration of Intercom Server – see page 60. All installed cards, software versions
and the CCT 800 configuration saved in the Intercom Server are displayed automatically in CCT 800.
 If no configuration is saved in the Intercom Server, an Intercom Server offline configuration can
be created. In order to create an offline configuration, no configuration to the Intercom Server is
required. This configuration can be sent to the Intercom Servers within the connected network at
a later time. Further information can be found on page 64.
3. Updating the Intercom Server, cards and station firmware – see page 67
4. Licensing of the cards and Intercom Server – see page 72
5. Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations in IPStationConfig and CCT 800 – see page 105
6. Configuration of the Intercom Server in CCT 800:
 Configuration of Intercom functions – see page 128
 Configuration of SIP functions – see page 423
7. Sending the configuration to the Intercom Server – see page 61
NOTE: Save the latest configuration file on the computer

It is recommend to save the CCT 800 file of the latest version of the configuration on the computer.
8. Warmstart of all Intercom Servers with configuration changes in order to apply the changes – see
page 62
  With PRO 800 5.1 or higher, the configuration can be changed without a restart for certain
Intercom subscriber functions (i.e. the configuration must be sent to the Intercom Server, but no
warmstart is required). An overview of all Intercom subscriber functions without restart can be
found on page 461.
1.5/0619 53
Establish connection to the Intercom Server Intercom Server Configuration
Establish connection to the Intercom Server

NOTE: Establish connection to VirtuoSIS
For further information see manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.
CCT 800 is able to establish a connection to the Intercom Servers either via a serial or IP interface. The
service “Com-Adapter” controls the communication between computer and Intercom Server. All con-
nection settings can be configured directly in the connection settings dialogue. The COM adapter man-
ages any number of connections to the Intercom system, based on IP and RS-232. The following meth-
ods for establishing a connection to the Intercom Server are available:
 IP connection to the Intercom Server – see below
 Serial connection to the Intercom Server – see page 57
Establish connection via IP interface

To establish an IP connection between an Intercom Server and computer, via which this Intercom
Server shall be configured with CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Connection settings or click on the toolbar icon
NOTE: Multiple interfaces simultaneously possible

CCT 800 can save and manage several links at the same time. Typically one link is created for each
new Intercom System or project.
2. In the drop-down list Connection or via the tab IP, select the desired IP interface, via which the
Intercom Server configuration shall be received and sent.
54 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Establish connection to the Intercom Server
3. The following optional connection settings are available:

Button Description
Click on this button to create a new setting for the selected connection type
Add
(serial/IP).
Export Click on this button to create a separate file including all connection settings.
Save changes Click on this button to saves the changes. 1)
Remove Click on this button to delete the selected interface setting.
Click on this button to import a connection settings file. The setting connections
can be extended or overwritten with the imported settings file. Settings from
Import
previously installed CCT 800 versions can be imported via the file “WCFServer-
Settings.xml”.
Discard changes Click on this button to discard the changes and reload the saved configuration.
1)
Up to 60 different connections can be saved.
4. Click on the button Search to open the network dialogue, via which all Intercom Servers within the
network can be displayed. The following dialogue appears:
NOTE: IP address of the Intercom Server must not be known

As of CCT 800 1.3 all Intercom Servers in the network can be linked without knowing their IP
addresses. CCT800 can discover all Intercom Servers connected to the same LAN broadcast domain
and setup a tunnel to the selected Intercom Server without being in the same IP range.
5. In the drop-down list Network, select the desired network interface.
GOOD TO KNOW: Recently used network interface is selected

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, the recently used network interface will automatically be selected (if
available).
6. Click on the button Query Network to show all Intercom Servers within the selected network.
GOOD TO KNOW: Colour coding of the rows

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, single rows of the Intercom Servers can be displayed in different colours
(see screenshot above):
 Blue: Selected Intercom Server.
 White: A connection to this Intercom Server can be established via an IP tunnel.
 Green: A direct connection can be established to this Intercom Server.
1.5/0619 55
7. Select the desired Intercom Server, to which a connection shall be built-up and click on the button
Open IP tunnel. A dialogue appears.
8. An available temporary IP address is automatically suggested. Optionally, an IP address can be
entered manually for the tunnel.
9. Click on the button OK. The dialogue will be closed and the view switches back to the connection
settings dialogue. The connection settings are applied automatically in the fields Host and Port.
10. The following settings of the IP connection can be configured:
Function Description
In this field, the name of the connection can be changed (prefix, followed by
Name
connection or project name).
Host In this field, the IP address of the connected Intercom Server can be changed.
In this field, the TCP port of the Intercom Server can be changed (by default:
Port
17000).
Password In this field, a password can be entered for link authentication.
Activate this checkbox to start the connection automatically (only if required by
Auto activate
CCT 800).
Disabled Activate this checkbox to disable the respective connection.
In this field, the interval can be changed, in which data is sent for prevention of
Queue interval [ms]
data overflow (recommended: 200 ms).
In this field, the time can be changed, after which an answer has to be received
Send timeout [ms]
from the Intercom Server.
Idle interval [ms] In this field, the interval between idle messages for link polling can be changed.
Idle response timeout In this field, the time can be changed, after which an answer to the idle message
[ms] has to be received.
11. Click on the button Test to test the connection settings.
NOTE: Connection test failed

If the connections test has failed, repeat the previous steps to establish an IP connection with an
Intercom Server as long as the connection test is successful.
12. Click on the button Save to save the settings.
NOTES:
 In case the PC (with CCT 800) and the Intercom Server, which should be connected, are in the same
subnet, no tunnel is established.
 In case a tunnel is established, the used host IP address in the configuration dialogue is over-
written.
 When closing CCT 800 the tunnel is not closed automatically. It has to be closed manually in the
search dialogue (see page 55).
56 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Establish connection to the Intercom Server
Establish connection via serial interface

GOOD TO KNOW: Requirements for serial interface with RS-232
The PC is connected to the configuration plug of the Intercom Server via the D-Sub cable (for Intercom
Server GE300 and GE800):
NC 1 1
TXD 2 2
RXD 3 3
NC 4 4
GND 5 5
NC 6 6
NC 7 7
NC 8 8
NC 9 9
Intercom Server (9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-submin jack) PC
This cable can be purchased at an electric outfitter or ordered under the type “X-KAB-CCT 800”.
Notes:
 RS-232/USB adapters are not recommended.
 For further information, see the manuals “GE 800” and “GE 300”.

To establish a serial connection between an Intercom Server and computer, via which this Intercom
Server shall be configured with CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Connection settings or click on the toolbar icon
NOTE: Multiple interfaces simultaneously possible

CCT 800 can save and manage several links at the same time. Typically one link is created for each
new Intercom System or project.
2. In the drop-down list Connection or via the tab Serial, select the desired serial interface, via which
the Intercom Server configuration shall be received and sent.
1.5/0619 57
3. The following optional connection settings are available:

Button Description
Click on this button to create a new setting for the selected connection type
Add
(serial/IP).
Export Click on this button to create a separate file including all connection settings.
Save changes Click on this button to saves the changes. 1)
Remove Click on this button to delete the selected interface setting.
Click on this button to import a connection settings file. The setting connections
can be extended or overwritten with the imported settings file. Settings from
Import
previously installed CCT 800 versions can be imported by the file “WCFServer-
Settings.xml”.
Discard changes Click on this button to discard the changes and reload the saved configuration.
1)
Up to 60 different connections can be saved.
4. The following settings of the serial connection can be configured:

Name In this field, the name of the connection can be changed.
In this drop-down list, the COM port can be selected, which is connected to the
COM Port
Intercom Server.
Parameters In this drop-down list, a configured parameter can be selected.
Activate this checkbox to start the connection automatically (only if required by
Auto activate
CCT 800).
Disabled Activate this checkbox to disable the respective connection.
In this field, the interval can be changed, in which data is sent for prevention of
Queue interval [ms]
data overflow (recommended: 200 ms).
Retries In this field, the number of connection retries can be changed.
In this field, the time can be changed, after which an answer has to be received
Send timeout [ms]
from the Intercom Server.
Idle interval [ms] In this field, the interval between idle messages for link polling can be changed.
Speed In this drop-down list, the speed/baud rate can be selected.
Parity In this drop-down list, the parity can be selected.
Byte size In this drop-down list, the byte size can be selected.
Stop bits In this drop-down list, the number of stop bits can be selected.
Test Click on thus button to test the connection settings.
5. Click on the button Test to test the connection settings.
NOTE: Connection test failed

If the connections test has failed, repeat the previous steps to establish a connection with an Inter-
com Server until the connection test is successful.
6. Click on the button Save to save the settings.
58 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Receiving, sending, warmstart
Receiving, sending, warmstart

The following methods for managing the Intercom Server configuration are available:
 Receiving the Intercom Server configuration – see page 60
 Sending the Intercom Server configuration – see page 61
 Warmstart of the Intercom Server – see page 62
Status messages
The following states can be shown in the send, receive or restart dialogue:
Status Description
Ok The procedure was executed successfully.
Reached The Intercom Server was found in the CCT 800 file as well as in the network.
Offline This Intercom Server exists in the CCT 800 file, however not in the network.
New The Intercom Server exists in the network, however not in the CCT 800 file.
Unforeseen events happened during sending, receiving or restart. The state row is
Warning
indicated yellow. Retires are carried out.
The sending, receiving or restart process could not be carried out. The state row is
Failure
indicated red. No retries are carried out.
Restart This Intercom Server is currently being restarted.
Receive This Intercom Server is currently being received.
Send This Intercom Server configuration is currently being sent.
 Configuration changed After a configuration change, no restart is required for this Intercom Server. An over-
without restart view of all Intercom subscriber functions without restart can be found on page 461.
No configuration No restart is required, because the CCT 800 configuration has not been changed for
change this Intercom Server.
A restart is required for this Intercom Server or the restart for this Intercom Server is
Configuration changed
delayed.
1.5/0619 59
Receiving, sending, warmstart Intercom Server Configuration
Receiving the Intercom Server configuration

By receiving the configuration from the Intercom Servers, their current configuration can be edited in
CCT 800 (used cards and connected stations are shown in the received configuration file automatically).

To receive the Intercom Server configuration, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Receive or press the button “F5” on the keyboard
2. If a CCT 800 file has been opened already or received from the Intercom Server, a dialogue appears.
3. Click on the button Yes to update the current CCT 800 file with the received Intercom Server
configuration, or click on the button No to create a new CCT 800 file. The following dialogue appears:
4. Click on the button Query network to indicate all available Intercom Servers within the network.
5. Select the desired Intercom Servers, from which the configuration shall be received.
6. Click on the button Receive to receive the configuration of all selected Intercom Servers.
GOOD TO KNOW: Safe mode

 When receiving a CCT 800 configuration that prevents an flawless operation of the Intercom Server,
the Intercom Server starts in “safe mode”. In this case, the progress bar is coloured magenta (see
page 478).
7. When the Intercom Server configuration has been received, click on the button Close to close the
dialogue. All inserted cards and connected stations will automatically be recognised in the CCT 800
file.
Additional receiving settings

Ignore different
Activate this checkbox when multiple different passwords are used in networks.
passwords
60 1.5/0619
Sending the Intercom Server configuration

In order to apply the configuration in the Intercom Servers, the configuration in CCT 800 must be sent
to these Intercom Servers.

To send the Intercom Server configuration, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Send or press the button “F4” on the keyboard
3. Select the desired Intercom Servers, to which the configuration shall be sent.
4. Click on the button Send to send the configuration to all selected Intercom Servers. Under certain
circumstances, a restart has to be performed for the selected Intercom Server to apply the
configuration changes (see page 62).
  If a configuration change can be performed without the need to restart the respective Intercom
Server, the state “No configuration change” will be indicated in the state field of the respective
Intercom Server. An overview of all Intercom subscriber functions without restart can be found on
page 461.
5. When the Intercom Server configuration has been sent, click on the button Close to close the
dialogue.
ATTENTION: Receiving the configuration after cancelling the sending process

If the sending process is cancelled, the last and not applied configuration that has been sent to the
respective Intercom Server will be displayed when subsequently receiving the configuration!
1.5/0619 61
Receiving, sending, warmstart Intercom Server Configuration
Additional sending settings

 Restart pre-selected Activate this checkbox to delay the restart of an Intercom Server at an active condi-
Intercom Server when tion (by default, this checkbox is disabled). If this checkbox is disabled, the restart will
convenient always be carried out without delay.
In this field, the delay time of the restart can be entered (max. 999 seconds; 0 = restart
will immediately be performed). If all active conditions are cancelled before the time
 Time window to is expired, the restart will immediately be carried out. After the delay time is expired,
restart [s] all active conditions will automatically be cancelled and the restart will be carried out.
Calls, call requests at a subscriber and incoming call requests with buzzer on a con-
trol desk delay a restart. 1)
Ignore different pass-
words
1)
The entered delay time is only valid for the next executed restart and will be reset to “0” afterwards. This
applies for the sending, restart and firmware dialogue.
Restart of Intercom Servers

Configuration changes will be applied in the Intercom Servers at a warmstart. Certain settings will be
reset at the subscribers.
An active password means password entry every time a warm start is performed.

To carry out a warmstart of Intercom Servers, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Selective Restart
3. Click on the button Restart to perform the restart for all selected Intercom Servers.
62 1.5/0619
GOOD TO KNOW: All settings are set to default values

After a firmware download or licensing, a restart has always to be performed for the respective
Intercom Server, whereas a restart after the sending process of the CCT 800 configuration is only
required for certain functions. The restart dialogue can only be closed after the restart process.
4. When the warmstart of the Intercom Server has been finished, click on the button Close to close the
dialogue.
Additional warmstart settings

 Restart pre-selected Activate this checkbox to delay the restart of an Intercom Server at an active condi-
Intercom Server when tion (by default, this checkbox is disabled). If this checkbox is disabled, the restart will
convenient always be carried out without delay.
In this field, the delay time of the restart can be entered (max. 999 seconds; 0 = restart
will immediately be performed). If all active conditions are cancelled before the time
 Time window to is expired, the restart will immediately be carried out. After the delay time is expired,
restart [s] all active conditions will automatically be cancelled and the restart will be carried out.
Calls, call requests at a subscriber and incoming call requests with buzzer on a con-
trol desk delay a restart. 1)
Activate this checkbox to restart each selected Intercom Server individually (instead
Individual restart
of simultaneously).
1)
The entered delay time is only valid for the next executed restart and will be reset to “0” afterwards. This
applies for the sending, restart and firmware dialogue.
1.5/0619 63
Offline configuration Intercom Server Configuration
Offline configuration
If no configuration is saved in the Intercom Server, an offline configuration can be created. At the of-
fline configuration, all settings are set to default values and must be configured manually. In order to
create an offline configuration, no configuration to the Intercom Server is required. This configuration
can be sent to the Intercom Servers within the connected network at a later time.
GOOD TO KNOW: Offline configuration for VirtuoSIS

As of VirtuoSIS 7.0, an offline configuration of VirtuoSIS is possible in CCT 800. After initialisation, per
default only the SIS-NET card is selected in slot 15 in CCT 800 at Intercom Server > Cards. All other
slots are empty. Subscriber, interface, network and SIP cards can be assigned to any slot.
Create a new offline configuration

To create a new offline configuration file, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu File > New
2. Select the desired Intercom Server type via the radio button Intercom Server-Type.
3. In the field Server Details, the Intercom Server ID can be changed.
4. Click on the button OK to confirm the entry. The following dialogue appears:
64 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Offline configuration
The following functions are available in this view at Intercom Server > Cards in CCT 800:
1 Intercom Server area
Server-ID Shows the respective Intercom Server ID.
Description In this field, the description of the Intercom Server can be entered.
Type Shows the respective Intercom Server type.
 Platform VirtuoSIS Shows the platform that is running VirtuoSIS. 1)
Generation Shows Intercom Server generation.
Software version Shows the installed Intercom Server software version.
Upgrade Chip Shows the installed upgrade package.
Autarkic For further information, see the manual “G8-IP-32”.
Licenses Click on this button to open the licence administration dialogue (see page 72).
In this field, the serial number can be entered (is automatically be indicated when
Serial number
receiving the CCT 800 configuration).
Used memory Shows the used and available memory of the respective Intercom Server
2 Card area
In this drop-down list, the card type of the used plug-in card can be selected for the
Card Type
respective slot. The available plug-in cards depend on the Intercom Server type. 1)
Generation In this drop-down list, the card revision can be selected.
Shows the default software version of the respective plug-in card. If the CCT 800 file
Softwareversion is overwritten, the versions will be updated when receiving the configuration of the
respective Intercom Server.
In this field, the first call number of the subscriber cards can be changed. At sub-
First call number. /
scriber cards, the call number of all subscribers will be changed (max. 4-digits). At
Server-ID
G8-IP-32 cards, the respective server ID is shown.
Licenses Shows all active licences for the respective plug-in card.
In this drop-down list, the feature level can be selected (only at plug-in cards with fea-
Working as
ture level “P”).
1)
For further information, see the manuals “GE 800” and “GE 300”.
1.5/0619 65
Offline configuration Intercom Server Configuration
Add Intercom Server

Multiple Intercom Servers with different types can be added to a single configuration file. Each of the
Intercom Server has its own configuration in CCT 800.

To add an Intercom Server in CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
2. Right-click within the Intercom Server area 1 and select “Add Intercom Server”.
3. Select the Intercom Server type and change the server ID of the Intercom Server (if required).
Delete Intercom Server

Existing Intercom Servers can be removed from the configuration file. In this case, the entire configu-
ration of this Intercom Server will be deleted in CCT 800.

To delete an Intercom Server in CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
2. Right-click on the desired Intercom Server and select “Delete Intercom Server”.
 Reset card to default settings

A card can be reset to its default settings with all its direct references, which is assigned to a slot.

To reset a card to default settings, follow the instructions below:
2. Right-click on the desired card and select “Reset card”.
ATTENTION: Cross-references must be removed manually

Cross-references of other cards (e.g. call transfer of a subscriber) has to be reset manually!
66 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Software and firmware update
Software and firmware update

The Intercom Server software and firmware for cards and stations can be updated with CCT 800. In ad-
dition, the firmware of the VirtuoSIS can be updated via VirtuoBRO or console.
NOTES: Further information

 The latest firmware versions are available on www.commend.com.
 For further information, see manual “VirtuoBRO”.
The following methods for updating the firmware are available:
Software update with CCT 800

The software update process in CCT 800 is the same for Intercom Server, cards and stations. During
the update procedure, the full functionality of the Intercom Server is ensured.

To carry out a software update with CCT 800, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Firmware Download
1.5/0619 67
Software and firmware update Intercom Server Configuration
2. Select the desired tab (Intercom Server, Cards, Stations),
GOOD TO KNOW: New firmware types

 The installed software version of the Intercom Server and firmware version of cards or stations are
shown in the column Software Version.
 With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, a distinction is made between the device firmware types “DSP 900A”,
“DSP 900B” for IP stations in the columns Software version and Software version - new for
IP stations.
 In the column Online, the state of the card or station is shown (“Yes”: card/station can be reached,
“No”: card/station cannot be reached at the moment, “---”: is displayed instead of “No” at Inter-
com Servers with software below Pro 05.6. An firmware update is not possible).
 The column Downloadable shows whether a firmware can be loaded for the respective card or
station. The checkbox show downloadable only must be deactivated.
4. Click on the button Get Data to receive the software information of all selected Intercom Servers.
5. Click on the button ... and select the desired software for the update. In the drop-down list on the
left, the last five selected files are saved for quick access.
ATTENTION:
 For the download of a PRO 800 software, a direct connection between the PC and the respective
Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800 is required. A download via an Intercom Server GE 200/GE 700,
which is connected to an Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800, is not possible!
 For Intercom Servers GE 200/GE 700 with software versions up to Pro 06.0, a software download
is not possible via CCT 800. It is recommended, to update the Intercom Server software with a CCT
version 06.2!
6. Select the desired Intercom Server, card, station to be updated.

7. Click on the button Apply to confirm the selected software for the selected Intercom Server, card or
station.
NOTE: Indication of new software version

The selected software version is shown in the column Software version-new as long as a restart
has not be performed.
8. (Optional) Select the entries (e.g. Intercom Server, cards or stations) in the list on the left, which shall
not be updated, and click on the button Exclude.
9. Click on the button Download to start the update process. In order to complete the update process,
a warmstart of the respective Intercom Server is required. Further information about the warmstart
can be found on page 62.
ATTENTION:
 The new software will be applied after the restart of the Intercom Server. After that, all download
relevant data will be received from the Intercom Server.
 If a manual restart is carried out, only one software update can be carried out at the same time.
 An executed software download cannot be undone.
68 1.5/0619
Additional update settings

Activate this checkbox to indicate the description of the Intercom Server, cards and
Show names
stations. The information will be indicated in the bar below of the window.
Activate this checkbox to hide all cards and stations, for which no software down-
Show downloadableonly load is possible. If this checkbox is disabled, the column downloadable is indi-
cated.
Ignore different pass-
words
A filter can be selected to avoid a download of the same or lower software version
Select
for the respective Intercom Server, card or station.
If necessary, the automatic restart of an Intercom Server can be delayed. If the
 Restart settings
checkbox Restart pre-selected Intercom Server when convenient is disabled,
the restart dialogue will be opened after the sending process and a manual restart
has to be performed. The manual restart can also be delayed.
1.5/0619 69
Software and firmware update Intercom Server Configuration
Software update with VirtuoSIS console
NOTE: Only for VirtuoSIS Master

The following chapter refers to the VirtuoSIS Master only.
Follow the steps below to carry out the VirtuoSIS update via the console:
1. Open the program WinSCP.
2. In the field Host name, enter the host IP address of VirtuoSIS (e.g. “10.10.8.100”).
3. In the field User name, enter the user name (“commend” per default).
4. In the field Password, enter the password (“commend” per default or the password configured
while setting up VirtuoSIS).
5. Click on the button Login.
Connection to VirtuoSIS via WinSCP

6. Copy the GEX file into the following VirtuoSIS directory: /tmp.
Copying the GEX file into the VirtuoSIS directory
70 1.5/0619
7. Open a SSH tool (e.g. PuTTY).

8. Activate the radio button SSH.
9. In the field Host Name, enter the host IP address of VirtuoSIS (e.g. “10.10.8.100”).
10. Click on the button Open to start the console.
Connection to VirtuoSIS via PuTTY
11. In the console window, enter the user name “commend”.

12. In the console window, enter the password “commend”.
13. In the console window, enter the following console command to upgrade VirtuoSIS:
cis-ctl update /tmp/[file name].gex.
Firmware update via PuTTY
1.5/0619 71
Licensing Intercom Server Configuration
Licensing
In the licence administration dialogue, the following actions can be carried out:
 Activation of VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences – see page 73
 Assignment of licences to an Intercom Server – see page 77
 Assignment of port-specific licences to a specific port on a card – see page 79
 Assignment of subscriber bulk-licences (L3-SUB and L8-SUB) to the subscriber slots of the
Intercom Server – see page 80
 Deactivation of PRO800 Licences (i.e. cancel assignment of an licence to an Intercom Server) – see
page 81
 Manual licence assignment for subscriber cards – see page 82
 Create temporary licences (licence can be used 30 days) – see page 84
Licence administration dialogue– Structure

The licence administration dialogue is divided into the following sections:
 Licence Pool A : In the licence pool, all free licences are shown that can be assigned to an Intercom
Server. In order to add a licence to the licence pool, this licence must be activated in the licence serv-
er dialogue or its assignment to the Intercom Server must be cancelled. With the filter function it is
possible to filter and sort licenses by criteria.
 Server Area B : In the server area, all Intercom Servers are shown that are located within the con-
nected network. In this view, an Intercom Server can be selected in order to show the licence infor-
mation in the card area C (e.g. for assigning a licence from the licence pool).
 Card Area C : In the card area, the installed cards and their assigned licences of the Intercom Server
are shown that has been selected in the server area B . In this view, licences from the licence pool
can be assigned to the Intercom Server or the assignment of used licences can be cancelled.
Licence administration dialogue– Structure
72 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Licensing
Activation of VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences

The following methods for licence activation are possible:
 Licence activation in CCT 800 – see below
 Licence activation at the station with an activation code – see page 76
Licence activation in CCT 800

VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences can be activated with the import of a single licence file in the configu-
ration software CCT 800, which can be downloaded via the Commend Licence Center with a Licence
Certificate Code. The licences will automatically be listed in the Commend Licence Portal, which has
been activated via CCT 800 at a system with active internet connection. In this portal, you will find fur-
ther information about the activated licence features.
NOTE: Information to the licensing system

Further information about the licence system of Commend (e.g. ordering process or activation via
CLLS) can be found in the manual “Licence System”.
NOTE: Activation of licences over proxy server

If no direct internet connection is available on the system, which is running CCT 800, a proxy authen-
tication (basic,digest, NTLM) can be carried out first (see page 75).
To activate a PRO800 Licence, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence administration
ATTENTION: Active connection to the Intercom Server required

An active connection between CCT 800 and the respective Intercom Server is required!
Activation of VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences
1.5/0619 73
2. Click on the button Enter License(s) to open the licence pool. The following dialogue appears:
Enter License(s)
3. Click on the button Load and select the downloaded licence file. All VirtuoSIS and PRO800 licences
will automatically be added to the licence pool. See the following illustration:
Load License(s)
4. After the licence file has been imported, these licences are added to the licence pool automatically.
These can now be allocated to cards of an Intercom Server (see page 77).
ATTENTION: Additional steps required at offline connection

If no internet connection is available on the system, which is running CCT 800, the licence has to be
activated manually on the licence server website! Further information about the offline licence acti-
vation can be found in the manual “Licence System”!
74 1.5/0619
Activation of licences over Proxy server

If a licence activation is necessary, but there is no direct internet connection to a licence server, a proxy
authentication is available. There are three authentication methods for this procedure (basic,digest,
NTLM).

To enable licence activation over a Proxy server, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Options > Settings > tab Communication
Activation of licences over Proxy server

2. Activate the field Active. The following fields will be enabled.
3. In the field IP Address, enter the IP address of the proxy server.
4. In the field Port, enter the port where the proxy server is accessible.
5. Optional: In the field Username, a user can be entered for the authentication (if required).
GOOD TO KNOW: Possible authentication methods

CCT 800 supports 3 authentication methods. Each requires different notation for the input of the
username:
 basic / digest: Username: USER
 ntlm: Username: DOMAIN\USER
6. Optional: In the field Password, a password can be entered for the authentication (if required).
7. Optional: Click on the button Test Proxy Settings to test the connection to the licence server.
1.5/0619 75
Licence activation at the Intercom station
NOTE: Only possible with paper licences

This licensing method is only valid for the previous licensing system (i.e. with paper licences). Further
information can be found in the manual “Licence System”.
If no connection between the system, which is running CCT 800, and the respective Intercom Server is
available, the activation codes can also be entered at an Intercom station with dot-matrix display.
Configuration station
To activate a licence at the station, follow the instructions below:
1. Dial the function code 9T8 at the respective station. The following display is displayed:
Licensing
Number _
Server
Slot
Scrolling
X-Cancel
Select the option “Server”
2. Press the button T. The cursor switches to the option “Server”.

3. Enter the Intercom Server ID and press the button T.
GOOD TO KNOW: Where can I find the Intercom Server ID?

The Intercom Server ID can be found in CCT 800 at Intercom Server > Cards in the column Server-
ID of the respective Intercom Server.
4. Enter the slot number of the Intercom Server and press the button T. The following display is
indicated:
Licensing
Server 1- 1
T114-3464-29
- -
Scrolling
X-Cancel
Enter the licence key at an Intercom station
5. Enter the activation code.
76 1.5/0619
Licence administration
Assignment of licences to an Intercom Server

To assign a licence to an Intercom Server, follow the instructions below:
Assignment of licences to an Intercom Server

2. Select the desired Intercom Server in the server area, to which one or several licences shall be
assigned.
3. Click on the button Get Licence Data in order to receive the licence information from the Intercom
Server. The following possibilities for licence assignment are available:
 Drag-and-Drop the desired licences from the licence pool onto the cards of the Intercom Server,
to which they shall be assigned.
 Drag-and-Drop the desired licences from a card of the Intercom Server onto an other card of the
Intercom Server.
NOTES:
 In order to assign an active licence to an other Intercom Server, this licence must be deactivated
and moved to the licence pool first (see page 81).
 Port-specific licences (e.g. L8-IP-4x or L8-ICX) might be assigned to a specific port on the card
(see page 79).
GOOD TO KNOW: Upgrade of the Gx-IP-8x licence not possible with Gx-IP-4x
An upgrade of the licence Gx-IP-8x (e.g. G8-IP-8B) is not possible with the licence Gx-IP-4x
(e.g. G8-IP-4D).
1.5/0619 77
4. The following functions are available in the card area:

In this drop-down list, the licence assignment type can be selected. Further infor-
Licence assignment
mation about the manual licence assignment can be found on page 82.
Address In this field, licences can be allocated to specific subscribers or interface ports.
Licence Product In this field, the licence name of the product is indicated.
In this field, the licence type and the remaining time of temporary licences are
Type
indicated.
Licence Code In this field, the licence code of the product is indicated.
Generation In this field, the generation number is indicated (1 to 15).
State 1) In this field, the licence status is indicated.

Activation pending: The licence is allocated to a card, but not yet activated in
the Intercom Server and at the licence server.
Activated: The licence is activated at the licence server, but not yet in the Inter-
com Server. 2)
Live: Licence is active and the features can be used.
Deactivation: The licence is prepared for deactivation, but still active in the Inter-
com Server and at the licence server.
Deactivated: The licence is disabled in the Intercom Server (not at the licence
server). 3)
Inactive: The licence is deactivated in the Intercom Server and at the licence
server and can either be moved to the licence pool or be assigned to the same or
any other Intercom Server. 4)
A successful connection test is indicated with a green tick mark and a note “con-
Test License Server nection via proxy successful”. A failed connection test is indicated with a red
Connection cross and a note “connection via proxy failed”. The red cross is also shown at
incorrect or non-existing proxy server settings.
Activate this checkbox in order to show all inactive licences that are assigned to
Show inactive the respective Intercom Server. These licences are deactivated on the Intercom
licenses Server and licence server and can either be moved to the licence pool or be
assigned to the same or any other Intercom Server. 5)
1) Click on the button Get License Data to update the state.
2)
Click on the button Synchronize to activate the inactive licences at the licence server as well.
3)
Click on the button Synchronize to deactivate the inactive licences at the licence server. When the syn-
chronization process has been finished, these licences are available in the licence pool and can be assigned
to other Intercom Servers.
4) Activate the checkbox Show inactive licenses to show inactive licences.
5) Does not apply for expired temporary licences.
5. Click on the button Synchronize to synchronise the licence information between the licence server
and Intercom Server. In order to complete the licensing process, a warmstart of the respective
Intercom Server is required. Further information about the warmstart can be found on page 62.
GOOD TO KNOW: Subscriber cards with feature level “P”

With using a subscriber card with feature level “P”, the feature levels (B, C, D) can be assigned to
the desired subscriber slots in the drop-down list Working as at Intercom Server > Cards.
NOTE: Subscriber bulk-licences must be assigned to subscriber licences

Subscriber bulk-licences (L3-SUB-x and L8-SUB-x) must be assigned to the subscriber slots of the
Intercom Server in CCT 800 at Intercom Server > Subscriber features (see page 80).
78 1.5/0619
Assignment of port-specific licences

Licences, which cannot be assigned to all subscriber slots of a subscriber card (e.g. L8-IP-4D on a sub-
scriber card G8-IP-8x), might be assigned to a specific port in order that this licence can be used for the
desired subscriber slots (e.g. the licence “L8-IP-4D” can be assigned to port “05” of the subscriber card
G8-IP-8D in order to use this licence for the ports 05 – 08.

To assign port-specific licences to a specific port, follow the instructions below:
2. Select the desired Intercom Server in the server area, to which one or several licences shall be
assigned.
Server.
4. In the field Address, enter the last two digits of the interface port or subscriber address to allocate
the licence to the desired interface port or subscriber. See the following example:
Allocate the desired licence to the interface port
GOOD TO KNOW: Licensing of the interface ports on the GEP card

To use the interface ports “8” and “11” on the GEP card, they must be licensed in CCT 800:
 Interface port “8” (e.g. “1/0-8”): Serial V24 interface. Can be configured in CCT 800 at Interfac-
es > Data interfaces > tab RS232
 Interface port “10” (e.g. “1/0-10”): Interface for ICX protocol and third-party systems (e.g. Pelco,
Milestone or video). Can be configured in CCT 800 at Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP.
For the interface ports above, the licences “Lx-ICX”, “L-COMOPC”, “Lx-IF” and “Lx-PROx” are avail-
able.
ATTENTION: Do not allocate a licence to interface port “11”

The interface port “11” of the GEP card (e.g. “1/0-11”) may not be used for licensing! This interface
can only be used for the configuration in CCT 800!
1.5/0619 79
Assignment of subscriber bulk-licences

Subscriber bulk-licences (L3-SUB-x and L8-SUB-x) will be allocated to each four subscriber slots of the In-
tercom Server slot to upgrade the feature level of the respective subscriber slots of the slot.

To assign subscriber bulk-licences to the subscriber slots, follow the instructions below:

2. Allocate the desired bulk-licences (L3-SUB/L8-SUB) to the G8-GEP card of the Intercom Server (see
page 77).
3. Receive the Intercom Server configuration (see page 60).
4. Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber features
5. Activate the checkboxes 1 – 4 and/or 5 – 8 for the Intercom Server, on which the respective
subscriber bulk-licence is allocated, in order to upgrade the feature levels of the respective
subscriber slots (1 – 4 or 5 – 8) of a slot (1 – 14). See the following illustration:
Allocate the subscriber bulk-licences to the subscriber slots
80 1.5/0619
Deactivation of PRO800 Licences

ATTENTION: VirtuoSIS licences cannot be deactivated
 Due to copy protection in virtual environments, VirtuoSIS licences cannot be deactivated. Within a
VirtuoSIS Master, it is only possible to move a licence within a VirtuoSIS Instance or from one Virtu-
oSIS Instance to another VirtuoSIS Instance.
 Deactivation and temporary licenses are not offered / supported for VirtuoSIS.
In CCT 800, active licences can be deactivated and moved to the licence pool. Licences in the licence
pool can be assigned to other Intercom Servers.

To deactivate a licence, follow the instructions below:

2. Select the desired Intercom Server in the server area, at which the assignment of one or several
licences shall be cancelled.
Server.
4. Right-click on the desired licence in the card area and select the option “Detach / Deactivate”. A
dialogue appears.
5. Click on the button Yes to confirm the selection.
7. When the warmstart process has been finished, the deactivated licences are available in the licence
pool and can now be assigned to other Intercom Servers.
ATTENTION: Additional steps required at offline connection

If no internet connection is available on the system, which is running CCT 800, the licence has to be
deactivated manually on the licence server website! Further information about the offline licence de-
activation can be found in the manual “Licence System”!
Additional licence settings

A successful connection test is indicated with a green tick mark and a hint “connec-
Test License Server tion via proxy successful”. A failed connection test is indicated with a red cross and
Connection a hint “connection via proxy failed”. The red cross is also shown at incorrect or non-
existing proxy server settings.
Activate this checkbox in order to show all inactive licences that are assigned to the
respective Intercom Server. These licences are deactivate don the Intercom Server
Show inactive licenses and licence server and can either be moved to the licence pool or be assigned to the
same or any other Intercom Server. 1)
1)
Does not apply for expired temporary licences.
1.5/0619 81
Manual licence assignment for subscriber cards

With CCT 800 5.1 or higher, licences can manually be assigned to any valid and available slot address
of a subscriber card. After the synchronisation, those licences will be assigned to the respective slot
address, which is not possible with the automatic licence assignment.
Requirements
The following Intercom Servers supports the manual licence assignment for subscriber cards:
 VirtuoSIS / IS 300 / IP-32 (generation 2)
The following configuration software is required:
 CCT 800 (min. 5.1)
A licence can be assigned to any slot address, provided that the manual licence assignment is selected
for the respected Intercom Server. Licences can only be assigned to valid card types (e.g. IP licences to
IP cards). When assigning a licence to a slot address, the subsequent slot addresses will be occupied
with the respective feature level. See the following example:
Example: The licence “L-SIS-IP-8D” is assigned to the slot address “2/01”. This licence has 8 feature
levels (“D”). All feature levels can be assigned to the subscriber card on slot “2“.
Slot Card type Licence
1 IP-8D ---- ----
2 IP-8D DDDD DDDD
3 IP-8D ---- ----
4 IP-8D ---- ----
If the last slot address of a subscriber card is reserved, the remaining feature levels (if available) will be
assigned to the slot addresses of the subscriber card in the next slot. If there is no valid card in the next
slot for this licence, the remaining feature levels will be rejected. See the following examples:
levels (“D”). Only 6 feature levels can be assigned to the subscriber card on slot “2”. It is not possible
to use this licence for the following card type on the slot “03”. The remaining 2 feature levels are
assigned to the following subscriber card on slot “3”. This is possible because there is also an IP
subscriber card configured for slot “3”.
1 IP-8D ---- ----
2 IP-8D --DD DDDD
3 IP-8D DD-- ----
4 IP-8D ---- ----
levels (“D”). Only 6 feature levels can be assigned to the subscriber card on slot “2“. It is not possible
to use this licence for the following card type on the slot “03”. The following card type on slot “3”
(“SIP-C”) is not valid for this licence. The remaining 2 feature levels will be rejected.
1 IP-8D ---- ----
2 IP-8D --DD DDDD
3 SIP-C ---- ----
4 IP-8D ---- ----
82 1.5/0619
If two or more feature levels are assigned to one slot address, the highest feature level will be used.
See the following example:
Example: The licence “IP-8D” is assigned to the slot address “2/03”. This licence has 8 feature levels
(“D”). Only 6 subscriber can be used on slot “2”. It is not possible to use this licence for the following
card type on the slot “03”. The remaining 2 feature levels are assigned to the following subscriber
card on slot “3”. Additionally, the licence “IP-8C” is assigned to the slot address “3/01”. This licence
has 8 feature levels (“C”). At the overlap on the slot addresses “3/01” and “3/02”, the highest feature
level (“D”) is used.
1 IP-8P ---- ----
2 IP-8P --DD DDDD
3 IP-8P DDCC CCCC
4 IP-8P ---- ----

To assign a licence to a lot address of a subscriber card manually, follow the instructions below:
2. In the drop-down list License assignment, Select the desired licence assignment type of the
Intercom Server. The following options are available:
 Automatic: Subscriber licences will be assigned by feature level in descending order (“D”, “C”,
“B” and “A”).
 Manual: Subscriber licences can be assigned manually.
ATTENTION: Changing the licence assignment

If the licence assignment is changed from “manual” to “automatic” or from “automatic” to “man-
ual”, a dialogue with a warning message appears! By clicking on Yes, licences will possibly be
moved to other slots when changing from “automatic” to “manual”! Therefore, it is recommended
to create a backup before changing!
NOTES: Licence assignment

 Per default, the option “manual” is selected.
 The automatic licence assignment concerns SIS-IP subscriber licences only.
 At a manual licence assignment, the upgrade licence (e.g. L-SIS-PRO7U) must be assigned to the
GEP card.
 In case of overlapping licences, the higher one is used – e.g. if the subscriber licences “C” and “D”
overlap, the licence with feature level “D” is used.
1.5/0619 83
Temporary licences
Temporary licences are free to use and have an useful life of 30 days, after the time the licence was
created (switching Intercom Servers off and on reduces this time). This licence class can be used for
testing purposes and emergency situations after hardware defects. A single temporary licence can only
be used once per type and slot.
NOTE: Temporary licences are not available for VirtuoSIS

Temporary licences are not available for VirtuoSIS.

To create a temporary licence, follow the instructions below:

Enter License(s)
84 1.5/0619
2. Click on the button Create Temporary License. The following dialogue appears:
Create Temporary License

3. In the column Count, select the desired amount of the respective licences.
4. Click on the button Create to add the selected temporary licences to the licence pool.
After the temporary licences have been created and added to the licence pool, these licences can be
allocated to the Intercom Server.
NOTE: Remaining time is displayed in the card area

The remaining time of the respective temporary licence is displayed in the card area (see page 78).
1.5/0619 85
Launch VirtuoSIS Intercom Server Configuration
Launch VirtuoSIS
In the following, you will find a step-by-step setup guide to launch VirtuoSIS:
 VirtuoSIS Installation – see below
 Connect to VirtuoSIS – see below
 Basic CCT 800 configuration – see page 87
 Licensing – see page 91
 SIS key subscribers configuration – see page 97
Further information about creating a new VirtuoSIS Instance can be found on page 103.
VirtuoSIS installation
As first installation step, an OVA template has to be deployed on a hypervisor platform such as VMware
vSphere 6.5. The installation on the hypervisor Microsoft Hyper-V requires a ZIP file, which includes a
VHD file and settings files. In this installation procedure, the following settings have to be configured:
 Host IP address, subnet mask and gateway
 Intercom Server number
 IP address SIS-GEP card, subnet mask and gateway
 SSH port

 All other IP settings have to be carried out via CCT 800 (see page 88).
 For further information, see manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.
Connect to VirtuoSIS
As soon as the virtual machine is installed and running, a connection must be established between
VirtuoSIS and the computer, via which the VirtuoSIS will be configured via CCT 800. For further infor-
mation, see manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.
86 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Launch VirtuoSIS
Basic CCT 800 configuration

The next installation step is to carry out the basic CCT 800 configuration for VirtuoSIS. For each Virtu-
oSIS Instance, the IP settings as well as the subscriber configuration have to be carried out. During the
state “Setup”, VirtuoSIS restarts every 15 minutes and the conversation time is limited to 30 seconds.
NOTE: Final activation of VirtuoSIS

To continue with the final activation of VirtuoSIS, at least three Intercom stations have to be con-
figured as key subscribers to VirtuoSIS (key subscribers act as network dongles) – Is not required
for Intercom Server S3 and S6.
GOOD TO KNOW: Offline configuration for VirtuoSIS

With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, an offline configuration is possible for VirtuoSIS (see page 64).
Card configuration
Before licensing and configuring the respective card, the desired card types have to be selected. Per
default, only the SIS-NET card is selected in slot 15. Consider the following rules:
 As of VirtuoSIS 7.0, subscriber, interface, network and SIP cards can be assigned to any slot.
NOTES: Restrictions
 With VirtuoSIS 6.1 or lower, VirtuoSIS subscriber cards have to be assigned starting at slot 1 up to
slot 14 if the automatic licence assignment is selected.
 With VirtuoSIS 6.1 or lower, interface, network and SIP cards have to be assigned starting at slot
14 down to 1 (as long as these slots are not yet used for subscriber cards).
 As of VirtuoSIS 7.0, all slots are empty after initialisation.
NOTES: Restrictions
 With VirtuoSIS 5.0 or lower, a subscriber card is preselected for all slots after initialisation. With
VirtuoSIS 5.1 or higher, a subscriber card is preselected for all slots after initialisation when assign-
ing the licences manually. For the automatic licence assignment, the slots are greyed out.
 With VirtuoSIS 5.0 or lower, unused cards are preselected as subscriber cards.
 The following cards are available for VirtuoSIS and can be assigned to the slots shown below:
max. per min. SW
GEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 NET
Instance version
SIS-GEP  1
SIS-NET  1
SIS-IP-8               14
SIS-LAN        7
SIS-IF               14
SIS-16A virtual               14
SIS-16E virtual               14
SIS-8E8A virtual               14
SIS-SIP-T               14 3.2
SIS-SIP-C               14 4.0
SIS-16Clients virtual               14 5.0
SIS-CSA               14 5.0
1.5/0619 87

To configure the appropriate cards, follow the instructions below:
2. Select the card in the drop-down list Card type for the desired VirtuoSIS Instance.
IP settings
In the next installation step, the IP settings of the assigned cards have to be carried out.
Configuration card IP
1. Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common
2. In the field Card IP Address, enter an IP address for the assigned card.
3. In the field Subnet mask, enter a subnet mask for the assigned card.
ATTENTION: Assigning IP addresses

 If NET connections should be used, an IP address and a subnet mask have to be configured for the
SIS-NET card!
 SIS-SIP cards cannot be configured in this IP settings dialogue. SIS-SIP cards automatically use the
IP address of the host (which is shown at VirtuoSIS Master > Network Settings > tab Inter-
faces)!
4. Go to: IP - Settings > tab NET - Firewall
ATTENTION: VLAN ID
For VirtuoSIS, the field Uplink VLAN ID and Downlink VLAN ID are without function!
5. Deactivate the checkbox Allow NET-ARP for uplink for uplink per instance. A deactivated instance
is no longer connected via NET networking to the remaining instances of its own master.
Configuration Network
NOTE: Configuration
The configuration of the SSH port is done via the console configuration. For further information,
see manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.
1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > Network Settings > tab Network

2. Deactivate the checkbox NET networking allowed to prevent NET networking between several
VirtuoSIS Masters (activated by default).
NOTES: NET networking allowed

 This configuration is convenient if two VirtuoSIS Masters shall autarkic be operated in parallel.
Configuration DNS settings
NOTE: Configuration
The configuration of the DNS settings is done via the VirtuoSIS console. For further information,
see manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.
88 1.5/0619
Additional network interfaces

As of VirtuoSIS 8.1 and with the licence L-SIS-PRO8x or newer, several network interfaces can be used
to realise isolated network segments. This will increase availability and security. For an Intercom Serv-
er S3 or S6, two network interfaces are available by default (“br0” and “br1”). Within a virtual environ-
ment (Microsoft Hyper-V or VMware vSphere), it depends on the hypervisor how many network inter-
faces can maximally be used. By default, up to two network interfaces can be used with a hypervisor.
If more than two network interfaces shall be used (e.g. for further isolated network segments), the
licence L-SIS-MI is required.
PRO8U PRO8U PRO8U SIS-MI
...
Intercom Server S3 Intercom Server S6 VirtuoSIS in a
virtual environment
Additional network interfaces
Thus, the transmission protocols SIP, IoIP and ICX, which are supported by VirtuoSIS, can be transmit-
ted via isolated network interfaces. Furthermore, IoIP can be split into Intercom stations and network.
For each virtual card at IP Settings, another network interface can be used.
SIP IoIP IF/ICX

(br0)
Intercom Intercom
stations network
IP Settings
ATTENTION: System accessibili98ty

 The network adapter that is equivalent to the network interface “br0” in CCT 800 must not be
removed, otherwise the functionality of VirtuoSIS cannot be ensured anymore!
 Ensure that the network interface, which is used for the communication to VirtuoSIS via a GEP or an
IF card, is available and accessible in the network in order to be able to access the system.
 A distinct assignment of the network interfaces in CCT 800 to the network adapters in the hypervisor
is only possible via the respective MAC address as the names of the network adapters, which depend
on the hypervisor, and the respective configuration for the shown names in CCT 800 may differ (see
also manual “VirtuoSIS Configuration Guide”).
NOTE: Network segmentation

The following conditions for the network segmentation have to be considered:
 Data transmission from the Linux host and SIP are always done via the network interface “br0”.
 The LAN card can only be allocated to the same network interface to which the NET card is allocated.
1.5/0619 89
Example for several network interfaces

It is not possible to access the Intercom network directly via an outer network segment as shown in the
example below.
VirtuoSIS on
Microsoft Hyper-V
br2
br1
br3 Intercom Server S6
VirtuoSIS Intercom network
br0
on VMware
vSphere
Intercom Server S3
Example for several network interfaces
Configuration network interface

1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > Network Settings > tab Interfaces
2. Enter a name for the network interface in the field Interface Description.
NOTES: Network interfaces

 After adding or removing a network interface in a hypervisor, VirtuoSIS has to be restarted.
 It is recommended to choose a name for the network interface depending on its purpose of use
(e.g. “SIP, ICX” and “IoIP, Network”).
 In the tab Interfaces, only the network interfaces are shown which are available in the system. If
e.g. a network interface is removed and the configuration is re-received from the Intercom server
or VirtuoSIS, this network interface is not shown any more.
Configuration cards
1. Go to: IP Settings > tab Common
2. Select the desired network interface in the drop-down list Interface.
NOTES: Network interfaces

 For the Intercom Server S3 or S6, only the network interfaces can be selected which are available
for the Intercom Server (“br0” and “br1”).
 If a network interface configured in CCT 800 is no longer available in a hypervisor, the fallback
interface “br0” is used. However, the configuration is kept and the respective drop-down list in
CCT 800 is highlighted red in order to indicate a missing network interface that can be re-added in
the hypervisor if required. When an network interface available in CCT 800 is selected in the drop-
down list, the network interface highlighted red can no longer be selected.
90 1.5/0619
Licensing
ATTENTION: Licence administration

 Due to copy protection in virtual environments, VirtuoSIS licences cannot be deactivated!
 Within a VirtuoSIS Master, it is only possible to move a licence within a VirtuoSIS Instance or from
one VirtuoSIS Instance to another VirtuoSIS Instance!
 IP subscriber licences have to be assigned to the corresponding IP card! These subscriber licences
can be assigned automatically (i.e. subscriber licences are assigned by feature level in descending
order (“D”, “C”, “B” and “A”) or manually. For further information see page 82!
 Before licensing the interface and network cards, it is recommended to choose the desired card type
at Intercom Server > Cards! If all 14 slots of a VirtuoSIS Instance are used, an additional VirtuoSIS
Instance (max. 10 VirtuoSIS Instances per base licence Professional/VirtuoSIS Master) has to be cre-
ated! With the base licence Starter, only one VirtuoSIS Instance can be used!
Licence assignment
Subscriber licences can be assigned either automatically (i.e. subscriber licences are assigned by
feature level in descending order (“D”, “C”, “B” and “A”) or manually. The licence assignment can be
changed separately for each VirtuoSIS Instance. With a manual licence assignment, subscriber licences
can be allocated to the desired slot individually. For further information see page 82.
Base licensing
A base licence enables the use of one VirtuoSIS Master (with up to 10 VirtuoSIS Instances with base
licence Professional or 1 VirtuoSIS Instance with base license Starter).
ATTENTION: Base licensing

First, it is necessary to allocate a base licence. A base licence creates a serial number for VirtuoSIS –
without this serial number, no further licences can be assigned!

To activate the base licence, follow the instructions below:
2. Allocate the base licence to the first VirtuoSIS Instance.
Name Description Allocation of the licence to the virtual card in VirtuoSIS
Base licence Professional for up
L-SIS-PROx GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
to 10 VirtuoSIS Instances
Base licence Starter for
L-SIS32-PROx GEP card of the available VirtuoSIS Instance
1 VirtuoSIS Instance
3. Click on the button Synchronize to assign the base licence to the VirtuoSIS Master.

 For an overview of the VirtuoSIS Masters, go to Menu Intercom Server > Allocate SIS ins-
tances.
 Further information about licensing can be found on page 72.
Upgrade licence
It is possible to upgrade a lower VirtuoSIS licence to a higher one in order to use the features of a new
VirtuoSIS version.

To activate the upgrade licence, follow the instructions below:
1.5/0619 91

2. Allocate the upgrade licence to the first VirtuoSIS Instance.
Upgrade licence from a lower
L-SIS-PROxU VirtuoSIS Professional licence GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
to a higher one
Upgrade licence for
L-SIS32PROxU GEP card of the available VirtuoSIS Instance
VirtuoSIS Starter
Upgrade licence from
L-SIS32-UPG VirtuoSIS Starter to GEP card of the available VirtuoSIS Instance
VirtuoSIS Professional
3. Click on the button Synchronize to finish the license allocation.
NOTES: Further Information

 With means of an upgrade licence, all VirtuoSIS Instances within a VirtuoSIS Master will be up-
graded.
 Further information about licensing can be found on page 72.
Slot licensing
The next step is to attach further licences. Each slot in VirtuoSIS has to be licensed separately. The
following licences can be used for VirtuoSIS:
NOTES: Card handling

 Starting with VirtuoSIS 5.1, cards can be allocated in every slot individually (slot 1 to slot 14).
 Slot 15 is designed exclusively for the SIS-NET card.
IP subscriber licences
Licence for 2 subscribers with fea-
L-SIS-IP-2B Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “B”
ture level “B”
Licence for 32 subscribers with
feature level “B”
L-SIS-IP-8C Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “C”
Licence for 32 subscribers with
L-SIS-IP-32C Any SIS-IP-8 card
feature level “C”
L-SIS-IP-2D Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “D”
L-SIS-IP-8D Any SIS-IP-8 card
ture level “D”
Upgrade licence for 1 subscriber
from feature level B or C to
L-UG-1D Any SIS-IP-8 or SIS-SIP-C card
feature level D
(with VirtuoSIS 5.0 or higher)
NOTE: Feature levels

If the automatic license assignment is activated, the licences above will be sorted from the highest fea-
ture level to the lowest by slot number automatically. This means, that the highest feature level will be
applied to the lowest card slot. Alternatively, licences can be allocated manually to the desired slots
(see page 91).
92 1.5/0619
 SIP subscriber licences
Feature PRO 800 4.0 – SIP-C

This feature allows the use of SIP-C cards.

Licence for 2 SIP-C B subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-2B SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. help points)
Licence for 2 SIP-C D subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-2D SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. master station/control desk)
L-SIS-SIP-8A Licence for 8 SIP-C A subscribers SIS-SIP-C card
Licence for 8 SIP-C B subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-8B SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. help points)
L-SIS-SIP-8C Licence for 8 SIP-C C subscribers SIS-SIP-C card
Licence for 8 SIP-C D subscribers
L-SIS-SIP-8D SIS-SIP-C card
(e.g. master station/control desk)
Upgrade licence for 8 subscribers
L-UG-8B from feature level A to feature level any SIP-C card
B (with VirtuoSIS 7.0 or higher)
Upgrade licence for 1 subscriber
from feature level B or C to feature
L-UG-1D any SIS-IP-8 or SIP-C card
level D (with VirtuoSIS 5.0 or
higher)
ATTENTION: Licence limitations

It is only possible to use the SIS-SIP-C licenses in combination with the Intercom Server Software
PRO 800 4.0 and upgrade licence “L-SIS-PRO4U” or a base licence “SIS-PRO4” or higher!
NOTE: Licensing
Before licensing, the desired SIP-C card has to be created (Intercom Server > Cards).
Interface licences
L-SIS-ICX Single licence for ICX interface GEP card or SIS-IF card
 Allocation to GEP card: With the licence L-SIS-ICX, the first ICX interface can be activated to pro-
vide full functionality. Without licence, the interfaces can only be used for CCT 800 configuration or
ComLOG.
Description 1) Type Application

Depending on the allocated licence (e.g. ICX or ComWIN). Without
n/0-10 ICX/TCP
licence: CCT 800 configuration only
n/0-11 CCT/TCP CCT 800 configuration only
1)
“n” is the server ID
1.5/0619 93
SIP trunk licences

L-SIS-SIPT1D Licence for 1 SIP-T D channel SIS-SIP-T card
L-SIS-SIPT8D Licence for 8 SIP-T D channels SIS-SIP-T card
L-SIS-SIPT1B Licence for 1 SIP-T B channel SIS-SIP-T card
L-SIS-SIPT8B Licence for 8 SIP-T B channels SIS-SIP-T card
NOTES: Licensing
If more single licences are used on one SIS card, the client numbers have to be changed manually.
Network licences
F L-SIS-LAN-4 Licence for 4 LAN connections SIS-NET or SIS-LAN card
L-SIS-LAN-8 Licence for 8 LAN connections SIS-NET or SIS-LAN card

L-SIS-WAN-8 Licence for 8 WAN connections SIS-NET or SIS-LAN card
Licence for more than 2 network
L-SIS-MI GEP card of the first VirtuoSIS Instance
interfaces
NOTES: Network licences

 The LAN and WAN licences listed in the table above can be allocated to the SIS-NET card individually
or in combination. Per SIS-NET card, up to 8 connections (LAN and/or WAN) can be configured.
 The LAN and WAN licences listed in the table above can be allocated to the SIS-LAN card individually
or in combination. Per SIS-LAN card, up to 16 connections (LAN and/or WAN) can be configured.
 Consider that a SIS-NET card provides NET connectivity without any additional licence.
Various platform independent licences

Many other products can be activated via server type independent licences (ComADAPT, ComINT,
ComOPC, ComPLC, ComREC, ComREPORT, ComSCHEDULE, ComVIDEO, ComWIN, Intercom Client,
Milestone Server Interface, Pelco Endura and TETRA). These licences typically have to be assigned to
specific card slots and client addresses.
ATTENTION: Licence limitations

It is not possible to use platform independent licences with VirtuoSIS other than the types mentioned
above!
94 1.5/0619
Licence example
This example is only valid for the automatic licence assignment. The following licences are used:
Subscriber licences
 L-SIS-IP-8B assigned to the GEP card
 L-SIS-IP-8C assigned to the GEP card
 L-SIS-IP-2D assigned to the GEP card
Interface licences
 2 x L-SIS-ICX assigned to the SIS-ICX card (client 1 and client 5 of slot 12)
Network licences
 2 x L-SIS-WAN-8 assigned to the SIS-LAN card (slot 13 and slot 14)
 L-SIS-LAN-8 assigned to the SIS-LAN card (slot 14)
Licensing example
1.5/0619 95
The VirtuoSIS cards are licensed as follows:

Card 1 Card 2 Card 3 Card 12 Card 13
Subscriber 1 D Subscriber 1 C Subscriber 1 B Interface 1 TCP/IP Connection 1 WAN
Subscriber 2 D Subscriber 2 C Subscriber 2 B Interface 2 Connection 2 WAN
Subscriber 3 C Subscriber 3 B Subscriber 3 Interface 3 Connection 3 WAN
Subscriber 5 C Subscriber 5 B Subscriber 5 Interface 5 Serial Connection 5 WAN
Subscriber 7 C Subscriber 7 B Subscriber 7 Connection 7 WAN
Subscriber 8 C Subscriber 8 B Subscriber 8 Connection 8 WAN
Card 14
Connection 1 WAN Connection 9 LAN
96 1.5/0619
Allocate SIS key subscriber

ATTENTION: No key subscribers required for S3 and S6
 It is only possible to activate VirtuoSIS key subscribers once!
 When using VirtuoSIS running on a S3 or S6, no key subscribers are required. In this case, the Inter-
com Server itself serves as a hardware dongle.
VirtuoSIS uses connected Intercom stations as dongles to prohibit using a VM image multiple times.
Per VirtuoSIS Master, a minimum of 3 subscribers have to be configured as key subscribers. It is re-
commended to use only control desks or important Intercom stations as key subscribers.
NOTES: Possible key subscribers

 EE 9xxA, ET 9xxA, WS-IP, EF 962A: min. DSP900A 5.3/min, IoIP-Device 7.1
 ET 9xxH, EF 962H, EF 962HM, AFLS xx, SIS-DONGLE: min. DSP900B (hybrid) 6.0/min, IoIP-Device 7.1
 EE 980: min. EE980 1.0
 AF xxxl: min. AF-I 5.3
 SIS-DONGLE (min. VirtuoSIS 4.x and base licence “L-SIS-PRO4” or upgrade licence “L-SIS-PRO4U”)
Furthermore, it is recommended to use as many Intercom stations as key subscribers as possible. The
high number of key subscribers is important, because 2/3 of the key subscribers must be online to use
the system without restrictions.
NOTES: Requirements to run the system

 Per VirtuoSIS Master, a minimum of 3 key subscribers must be configured – recommended are as
many as possible.
 2/3 of the key subscribers must be online.
 Further information in case of faulty key subscribers can be found in the manual “VirtuoSIS Setup
Guide”.
SIS-DONGLE
Instead of a regular Intercom station (within the Intercom system), it is possible to use a SIS-DONGLE
as key subscriber. In this case, the SIS-DONGLE has to be configured as a regular Intercom station,
however no audio functions are available.
SIS-DONGLE
1.5/0619 97
Overview of allocated key subscribers

The following table demonstrates how many key subscribers can be offline to run VirtuoSIS without
restrictions. The total number of key subscribers is shown in the table header, the min. number of
active key subscribers is shown with a green background and the max. number of offline key sub-
scribers is shown with an red background.
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28
29
30
98 1.5/0619
Configuration
NOTES: Requirements for allocating the key subscribers

 The Intercom stations to be used as key subscribers must be online and already configured.
 The configuration has to be send to and received from VirtuoSIS.
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Determine SIS key subscribers
Selecting key subscribers in CCT 800
1 SIS instances
This dialogue shows the VirtuoSIS Master and the assigned VirtuoSIS Instances. In case the VirtuoSIS
Master is selected, all subscribers of the system are indicated in the key subscriber dialogue. If a Virtu-
oSIS Instance is selected, only the subscribers within this VirtuoSIS Instance are indicated.
2 Configuration dialogue for key subscriber selection

In this configuration dialogue, all subscribers that can be used as key subscribers are displayed.
2. Activate the checkbox Key subscriber selection to select all subscribers you wish to use as key
subscribers (dongle stations).
3. Click on Licence Information to show the current licence information.
4. In the field State, the state of the subscriber is indicated.
5. Activate the checkbox Key subscriber to use the subscriber as key subscriber.
6. In the field Call number, the call number of the subscriber is displayed.
7. In the field Name, the name of the subscriber is displayed.
8. In the field Type, the type of the subscriber is displayed.
9. In the field MAC address, the MAC address of the subscriber is displayed.
NOTE: Activation
After the activation of VirtuoSIS, all subscribers are shown greyed out.
3 Information bar
The information bar indicates the current status of the key subscriber query. It can take up to several
minutes to receive key subscriber information from VirtuoSIS.
1.5/0619 99
4 Key bar
The key bar indicates the runtime key and the activation key. See the following screenshot:
Runtime key and activation key in CCT 800
1 Activation key
2 Runtime key
NOTE: Writing down the keys

It is recommended to write down the keys after activation. In case of an incomplete registration pro-
cess, it is possible to activate VirtuoSIS manually using these keys. After a successful activation, the
activation key is no longer necessary.
5 Buttons
10. Click on the button Get Data to get or update the current available subscribers.
11. Click on the button Activate to activate VirtuoSIS with the selected key subscribers.
NOTES: Activation
 This button is only available, if 3 or more subscribers are selected.
 It is only possible to activate the VirtuoSIS key subscribers within the same region. A key sub-
scriber activation over WAN is not possible.
12. Click on the button Test License Server Connection to check the connection to the licence
server. The following states are possible:
: Connection to the licence server is active.
: No connection to the licence server, check your Internet connection.
13. Click on the button Close to close the “Determine SIS key subscriber” dialogue without saving.
NOTE: Backup
For support purposes, it is recommended to carry out a backup after the activation. For further
information, see manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”.
100 1.5/0619
Offline activation
If the computer on which CCT 800 is running is not connected to the Internet, it is possible to activate
VirtuoSIS manually after the key subscriber determination. For activation, follow the steps below:
1. Carry out the key subscriber determination (see page 97). If the computer is not connected to the
Internet, no activation key will be created. For the activation, the created runtime key is necessary.
Copy the runtime key, which is indicated in the key bar (see page 100).
2. Open the following website: http://license.intercom-online.cc/Activation.aspx?language=en
3. In the field SN GEP/GEM, enter the runtime key.
NOTE: Runtime key

Be careful to enter the runtime key and not the serial number of VirtuoSIS.
4. In the field Licence key, enter the licence code of the L-SIS-PRO licence (see page 91).
5. Click on the button start activation. An activation code will be generated, which has to be entered
in CCT 800.

1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Licence Administration
2. In the card area, right click on the L-SIS-PRO licence and click on the option “Enter/Change activation
code”.
3. In the field Activation code, enter the activation code and click on the button OK.
4. Click on the button Synchronize.
Show key subscribers

Key subscribers are not only shown in CCT 800 in the window Determine SIS key subscribers but
also at Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common. In the column Mutation, every key
subscriber is marked with the key symbol .
Show key subscribers
1.5/0619 101
Troubleshooting in case of an incomplete activation

During the activation process, it is possible to reset already allocated key subscribers and allocate them
again – e.g. in case of a faulty connection to the licence server or incorrectly assigned key subscribers.
ATTENTION: Resetting key subscribers

If the activation is already completed, it is no longer possible to reset key subscribers!
 Open the VirtuoSIS console.

 Enter the following command to reset the key subscribers:
cis-ctl clear-pending-macs
 Enter the following command for restart to delete the old key subscribers in VirtuoSIS:
sudo sv restart commend-sis
 Select the desired key subscribers again (see page 97).
102 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance
Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance

With VirtuoSIS Professional, it is possible to allocate up to 10 VirtuoSIS Instances to one VirtuoSIS
Master.
NOTE: Restriction S6
Within an Intercom Server S6, max. 4 VirtuoSIS Instances can be used.

To create a new VirtuoSIS Instance and allocate it to the desired VirtuoSIS Master, follow the instruc-
tions below:
2. Right click on the upper area and select the option “Add Intercom Server”. The following dialogue
appears:
Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance

3. Activate the radio button SIS.
4. In the field Server-ID, enter the desired server ID.
5. Click on the button OK.
NOTE: Address of the new VirtuoSIS Instance

The IP address allocated via the dialogue New Intercom Server is not adopted automatically. For
the newly created VirtuoSIS Instance, the default IP address for the GEP card (“10.10.xxx.1”) and no
IP address for the NET card are allocated. Therefore, it is necessary to establish a connection to
VirtuoSIS and to send the configuration via CCT 800.
1.5/0619 103
Create a new VirtuoSIS Instance Intercom Server Configuration
 Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Allocate SIS instances
Indication of instances in CCT 800
1 In the column Not assigned SIS instances, all unassigned VirtuoSIS Instances are displayed.
2 In the column SIS masters and assigned instances, all VirtuoSIS Masters and the VirtuoSIS In-
stances that are assigned to the respective VirtuoSIS Master are displayed.
3 With the arrow button, you can switch the VirtuoSIS Instance from the column Not assigned SIS
instances to the desired VirtuoSIS Master in the column VirtuoSIS Master and assigned in-
stances.
4 This bar indicates the current status.
5 Click on Execute to start the assignment or on Cancel to close the dialogue.
How to assign a VirtuoSIS Instance to the VirtuoSIS Master

1. In the column Not assigned SIS instance, select the desired VirtuoSIS Instance.
2. In the column VirtuoSIS Master and assigned instances, select the desired VirtuoSIS Master.
3. With the arrow button , assign the VirtuoSIS Instance to the VirtuoSIS Master.
4. Click on the button Execute to carry out the assignment.
How to delete an assigned VirtuoSIS Instance

1. In the column VirtuoSIS Master and assigned instances, right click on the desired VirtuoSIS
Instance and click on the option “Delete instance”.
2. Click on the button Execute to delete the VirtuoSIS Instance.
NOTES: Deleting VirtuoSIS Instances

 It is not possible to delete VirtuoSIS Instances with allocated licences. To delete these VirtuoSIS
Instances, the licence has to be moved to another VirtuoSIS Instance within the same VirtuoSIS
Master via the licensing dialogue.
 It is not possible to delete all VirtuoSIS Instances, because the licences cannot be deactivated and
therefore one VirtuoSIS Instance has to remain active.
 After deletion of a VirtuoSIS Instance, it is recommended to receive the current VirtuoSIS configu-
ration via CCT 800 again. Otherwise, the deleted VirtuoSIS Instance is still part of the CCT 800 con-
figuration file, which was originally opened or received.
104 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations

With the program IPStationConfig, the first installation steps for IP, SIP and hybrid Intercom stations
can be carried out. Further configuration is carried out in CCT 800.
IPStationConfig is installed automatically with CCT 800 and can only be used in local networks (LAN).
This means, before the IP terminals are installed at the respective locations, all IP terminals have to be
configured in a local network previously. The PC which is used for configuration does not have to be-
long to the same subnet as the IP terminals. The following chapters are available:
 Network requirements for IP stations – see below
 Compatibility stations – IPStationConfig – see page 106
 IPStationConfig program interface – see page 108
 Configuration of IP stations – see page 116
 Configuration of SIP stations – see page 121
 Configuration of hybrid stations – see page 122
 Station redundancy – see page 123
Network requirements for IP stations

IP addresses and ports
 Each IP subscriber card must have a fix IP address.
 For an IP Intercom station, the DHCP function is available. If the DHCP function is not used, the IP
Intercom station must have a fix IP address.
 In case of a changing public IP address, a dynamic registration of an IP Intercom station is possible.
 The communication to the program IPStationConfig requires the standard TCP port 16399.
 The communication between the Intercom Server and the IP Intercom stations requires the standard
UDP port 16400 (configuration via firewall or router, only one port for audio and signalling data).
ATTENTION: Required firmware versions for communication ports

Communication via port 16400 (Single Port Protocol) is possible with the following minimum firm-
ware versions:
 ET 901: 02.4 Build 03 / 03.1 Build 03
 DSP900 (for ET 908): 03.1 Build 04
Otherwise, the communication is done via port 16400 to 16404.
QoS requirements
 One-way delay max. 100 ms
 Delay jitter max. 50 ms
 0% packet loss for perfect audio quality
Bandwidth
3.5 kHz 7 kHz 16 kHz
Bandwidth (speech and data) 1) 82 kBit/s 82 kBit/s 146 kBit/s

Speech is compressed to 1 x G.711 standard 1 x G.722 standard 2 x G.722 standard
1)
The required bandwidth depends on the desired number of speech links. Bandwidth incl. protocol overhead
per IP terminal, upload and download.
1.5/0619 105
Configuration of IP, SIP and hybrid stations Intercom Server Configuration
Compatibility stations – IPStationConfig

Configuration of the IP, SIP or hybrid stations with IPStationConfig is restricted to the respective firm-
ware version.
ET 901
2.0 build 3
The following settings can be configured:
 IP address
 Subnet mask
 IP address of the Intercom Server
 IP address of the router
 Port number
2.2
The following settings can be configured in addition:
 Additional data to be saved in the ET 901 (colour, description, call number)
 Indication of the firmware version of the ET 901 and the connection status to the Intercom Server
 Definition of passwords for all or single ET 901
 Firmware download in ET 901 (without the need to use CCT 800)
 Use of expansion and option boards (e.g. EB2E2A)
02.4 build 01 / 03.1 build 01

 Ethernet parameters
02.5 build 01 / 03.2 build 01

 VLAN parameters
 Dynamic registration on the Intercom Server
 DHCP functionality
DSP900 (for ET 908)

03.1 build 01
 Ethernet parameters
03.2 build 01
 VLAN parameters
 Dynamic registration on the Intercom Server
106 1.5/0619
SIP stations
SIP 3.6 (build 105)
 IP address
 Subnet mask
NOTE: Settings can also be configured in the web interface

All settings as listed above can also be carried out via the web interface of the SIP station.
Hybrid stations
SIP 3.6 (build 105)
 Boot mode (run as SIP or hybrid station)
 IP address
 Subnet mask
NOTE: Settings can also be configured in the web interface

All settings as listed above can also be carried out via the web interface of the hybrid station.
1.5/0619 107
Program interface – IPStationConfig
Menu bar
Menu Description
File
The configuration of IPStationConfig can be loaded from an XML file. When an
Load XML-Settings XML file is opened while an IPStationConfig configuration is already open, it is
possible to merge the two configurations.
Save XML-Settings Saves the IPStationConfig configuration as XML file.
Print Prints the IP configuration of the IP stations that are listed in the table .
Group by subscriber Groups subscribers by the MAC address
Reset Table-Layout Reset the layout of the table (i.e. placement and width of columns).
Exit Close the program IPStationConfig
1) If merging is selected, the fields, which are overwritten, are highlighted red.
Station
Query Stations Shows all available IP subscribers within the connected network in the table .
In this drop-down list, the mode for sending the configuration can be selected.
With clicking on the button Write settings, the configuration will be sent to the
respective IP stations. The following modes are available:
Write settings
 all: The entire configuration is sent.
 modified: The configuration is sent only to modified stations.
 selected: The configuration is sent only to selected stations.
Clear Settings Removes all IP stations from the table and deletes the loaded configuration.
Firmware Download Carries out a firmware update of the selected IP station (see page 115).
108 1.5/0619
Menu Description
Station
Protects a single subscriber or a group of IP subscribers with a password to pre-
Set Password
vent unwanted changes to the IPStationConfig configuration
Set Factory Default
All settings of the selected IP stations are reset to default settings.
(Reset)
Export Settings Exports the IPStationConfig configuration as Excel, text or HTML file.
Searches for the IP stations with the given IP addresses within the connected
Query remote station
network and shows them in the table (see page 112).
1)
Changed settings will applied only after the configuration has been sent to the IP subscriber.
Help
About The IPStationConfig program version is indicated.
Toolbar
With the toolbar in the header, it is possible to carry out all the desired settings by simply clicking a
button or directly entering an IP address of an Intercom Server to connect to.
Button Description
Loads the configuration of IPStationConfig from an XML file. When an XML file is
opened while an IPStationConfig configuration is already open, it is possible to
merge the two configurations.
Saves the IPStationConfig configuration as XML file.
Shows all available IP subscribers within the connected network in the table .
Searches for the IP stations with the given IP addresses within the connected network
and shows them in the table (see page 112).
In this drop-down list, the mode for sending the configuration can be selected. With
clicking on the button Write settings, the configuration will be sent to the respective
IP stations. The following modes are available:
 all: The entire configuration is sent.
 modified: The configuration is sent only to modified stations.
 selected: The configuration is sent only to selected stations.
Cancels the sending process of the IPStationConfig configuration.
Enables the section “Link Config / VLAN” in the table .

Enables the section “Fallback” in the table (see page 111).
Enables the section “SNMP” in the table (see page 112).
1)
If merging is selected, the fields, which are overwritten, are highlighted red.
Network connection
In the drop-down list in the status bar , the desired network card can be selected. A failure in the net-
work connection is indicated with a blinking blue box in the status bar.
1.5/0619 109
Table
In the table , the following configuration of the queried IP subscribers is shown:
General
In this field, the current boot mode is indicated. The boot mode can be changed at hybrid sta-
BootMode
tions (SIP or Intercom).
Activate this checkbox so that the IP station requests IP address of the IP station, subnet mask
DHCP
and IP address of the router from a DHCP server.
In this field, the IP address of the IP station can be entered. The checkbox DHCP must be
IP-Address
deactivated.
In this field, the subnet mask of the IP station can be entered. The checkbox DHCP must be
Subnet Mask
deactivated.
In this field, the IP address of the router or gateway can be entered via which the Intercom
Router-IP
Servers shall communicate. The checkbox DHCP must be deactivated.
Mac In this field, the MAC address of the IP subscriber is indicated (cannot be configured).
Address
Shows the current state of the main connection. 1) 2) The following states are available:
Station is registered via this connection.
Connection is available but station is not registered via this connection.
Connection is not configured (i.e. this connection has the IP address “0.0.0.0”).
Connection is not available.
In this field, the IP address of the IP subscriber card can be entered that shall be allocated to
Card-IP
this IP subscriber.
In this field, the standard destination port number can be entered (by default, “16400”). The
Port
port numbers must only be changed for special configurations with NAT.
DYN Activate this checkbox in order to activate the dynamic registration via the MAC address.
In this field, a name for the IP station can be entered, which identifies the IP station for the
Host name
DHCP server. If no name is entered, a standard name will be used when using DHCP.
1) Required station firmware: AF-I 6.3, ET901 4.6, IoIP-Device 7.2, WS-TM 2.0 or higher.
2) IPStationConfig version 6.3.5 or higher required.
Basic
Color In this field, color coding can be advised to subscribers. 1)
In this field, the current status of the device in dependency to the program IPStationConfig is
Status
indicated (“Ready”, “Success”, “Timeout” or “Firmware Download”). 1)
In this field, the status of the connection between the IP Intercom station and the Intercom
Online
Server is indicated (online: green icon, offline: red icon).
CallNo In this field, the call number of the IP Intercom station can be entered. 1)
Description In this field, a text for identification of the IP Intercom station can be entered. 1)
Station In this field, the station type (connected to the ET 901) is indicated.
Converter In this field, the used converter is indicated (e.g. ET 901D)
EB-Interface In this field, connected expansion and option boards are indicated.
Version In this field, the firmware version of the IP Intercom station is indicated.
In this field, a password can be set for the respective station in order to restrict the con-
Password
figuration of the station (see page 115).
1) The settings in the columns Color, Status, CallNo and Description are saved in the IP Intercom station
(ET 901 min. firmware version 2.2), but not in the Intercom Server configuration.
110 1.5/0619
Link Config / VLAN 1)

Disable
Activate this checkbox in order to deactivate the offline LED of the IP station.
Offline LED
Uplink and In these drop-down lists, the Ethernet operation mode of the network connections (RJ45) can
Downlink be selected.
Activate this checkbox in order to deactivate the downlink port of the Intercom station or con-
DDP
verter. 2)
Activate this checkbox so that the IP station will stop the communication in case of an IP
ACD
address conflict according to RFC 5227. 3)
In this field, the priority level for transmission of data according to IEEE 802.1P can be entered
Pri
(0 – 7). The priority for the transmission of voice/speech shall be set to level “6”. 4)
In this field, the bit for the “Canonical Format Indicator” can be entered (0 or 1). In standard,
CFI
the CFI bit shall always be set to “0”. 4)
VID In this field, the VLAN ID acc. to EEE 802.1Q can be entered (1 – 4094). 4)
1)
Click on the button Link in the toolbar in order to enable the section “Link Config / VLAN”.
2) This function is available for the following Intercom stations and converters (required minimum firmware ver-
sion in brackets):
 ET 901 (ET 901 3.3)
 EE 900A (DSP900A min. 6.4 or IoIP-Device min. 7.1)
 ET 908A (DSP900A min. 6.4 or IoIP-Device min. 7.1)
 ET 908H (IoIP-Device min. 7.1)
 AF 20I, AF 50I and AF 250I (AF-I min. 6.2)
3) In case of an address conflict:
 the static, manually entered IP address of the respective station remains unchanged. The affected station is
not shown in IPStationConfig anymore. To fix the conflict, the IP address of the station has to be changed
manually in another network with no IP address conflict.
 the IP address assigned from the DHCP server is changed. The DHCP server assigns the station automatically
a new unique IP address.
4) In this field, the so-called “frame tagging” (IEEE 802.1Q) can be configured. This also means that the Ethernet
header is extended by 4 bytes.

Fallback 1)
Shows the current state of the first/second fallback connection. 2) 3) The following states are
available:
Station is registered via this connection.
Connection is available but station is not registered via this connection.
Connection is not configured (i.e. this connection has the IP address “0.0.0.0”).
Connection is not available.
In this field, enter the IP address of the allocated IP subscriber card. This IP subscriber card
Card-IP establishes the fallback connection. For each connection (standard and fallback), a different IP
subscriber card has to be used.
In this field, the port number of the fallback connection can be changed (by default 16400).
Port For each connection of an IP subscriber (standard and fallback), the same port number can be
used.
1) Click on the button Fallback in the toolbar in order to enable the section “Fallback”.
2)
Required station firmware: AF-I 6.3, ET901 4.6, IoIP-Device 7.2, WS-TM 2.0 or higher.
3) IPStationConfig version 6.3.5 or higher required.
4) The second fallback connection is not available for the station type “ET 901”.
1.5/0619 111
SNMP 1)
ON Activate this checkbox to enable SNMP.
Trusted Host In this field, the IP address of the central management station can be entered.
Subnet Mask In this field, the subnet mask of the central management station can be entered.
In this field, the IP address of the management station can be entered, which should receive
Trap IP Nr.
the “traps” from the IP station.
In this field, the port number of the respective trap can be entered (standard port UDP 162 – it
Port Nr.
is recommended to not change the standard port number)
1) Click on the button SNMP in the toolbar in order to enable the section “SNMP”. Further information can be
found in the manual “SNMP”.
Query remote stations

Up to CCT 800 6.1, it is only possible to search for one IP station with the given IP address within the
connected network.
With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, it is possible to search for multiple IP stations with the given IP addresses
within the connected network. The requested IP stations are shown in the table . To search for
specific IP stations in the network, follow the instructions below:
3. Go to: Menu Station > Query Remote Stations or click on the toolbar icon
4. In the field Default config port, the default port for reaching the IP stations can be changed (by
default: 16399).
5. In the field Station IP Addresses, enter the IP Addresses that shall be reached (see screenshot
above). Optionally, a port can be defined for a single stations that will be used instead of the default
port in the field Default config port (<IP address>:<port>).
6. Click on the button Query. The requested IP stations are shown in the table (if available).
112 1.5/0619
Presets
In the section Presets , it is possible to configure settings and texts for multiple IP subscribers auto-
matically. Thereby, it is also possible to advise e.g. consecutive IP addresses automatically.
1. Change the setting or text in the desired field in the section Presets.
2. Optional, activate the checkbox inc next to the field IP-Addr in order to increase the IP address per
subscriber by one (at multiple selections).
3. Click on the green arrow next to the modified field in order to change the respective settings of the
selected subscribers in the table.
CallNo (call number) / Desc. (description)

For a automatic allocation of the call number and the description, use one of the following variables:
 {ip1} to {ip4} .............................. 1st to 4th byte of the IP address
 {sn1} to {sn4}............................. 1st to 4th byte of the subnet mask
 {ce1} to {ce4} ............................. 1st to 4th byte of the central IP address
 {rt1} to {rt4}................................ 1st to 4th byte of the router IP address
 {mac1} to {mac6} ...................... 1st to 6th byte of the MAC address
 {port}.......................................... port number
 {n} .............................................. automatic increase
....................................................... (Initial value = start value, Increment = value increase)
NOTE: Maximum amount of storable digits for call number and description
 “CallNo”: max. 126 digits
 “Desc.”: max. 126 digits
Ping Target
In the section Ping Target , a ping request can be sent to a network device. Therefore, the IP address
of the used computer must be located in the same subnet as the IP address that shall be reached. Three
ping measurements are executed. The result and the time of the last measurement is indicated.
1.5/0619 113
Basic functions – IPStationConfig
Send configuration to the IP station

Follow the instructions below to send the IPStationConfig configuration manually to the IP stations.
1. In the drop-down-list next to Write Settings, select one of the following modes:
 all: The entire configuration is sent.
 modified: The configuration is sent only to modified stations.
 selected: The configuration is sent only to selected stations.
2. Click on the button Write settings to send the configuration to the respective IP stations.
ATTENTION: Unique IP address required

If an IP address, which already exists in the network, is advised to a subscriber, heavy malfunctioning
of the network may occur! Therefore, it is recommended to always receive the current configuration
of the system in order to avoid IP address collisions in the network!
Save the configuration

Follow the instructions below to save the IPStationConfig configuration as XML file on the connected
computer.
1. Go to: Menu File > Save XML-Settings or click on the button Save in the toolbar
Export the configuration

Follow the instructions below to export the IPStationConfig configuration as Excel, text or HTML file:
1. Go to: Menu Station > Export Settings > desired file format
Load the configuration

Follow the instructions below to load the configuration of IPStationConfig from an XML file:
1. Go to: Menu File > Load XML-Settings or click on the button Load in the toolbar
2. When an XML file is opened while an IPStationConfig configuration is already open, it is possible to
merge these two configurations.
NOTE: Merged fields

If merging is selected, the fields, which are overwritten, are highlighted red.
Reset configuration of IP station to factory default

Follow the instructions below to reset the configuration of an IP station to the factory default.
1. Go to: Menu Station > Set Factory Default (Reset)
ATTENTION: Reset to factory default

To be able to reset the configuration of the IP subscriber, the following has to be ensured:
 The connection to the Intercom Server may not be upright (“offline” – a red cross is indicated in the
column “Online”).
 The IP subscriber at the Intercom Server may not use dynamic registration or DHCP.
114 1.5/0619
Firmware update
Alternatively to the download via CCT 800, the firmware of the IP Intercom station can be downloaded
to the IP Intercom station via the program IPStationConfig. Follow the instruction below:
1. Select the IP stations to be updated in the table.
2. Go to: Menu Station > Firmware Download
3. Select the desired GEH file and click on the button Open.
ATTENTION: Requirements ET 901

 For an ET 901, this feature is available with firmware version 2.2 or higher!
 Download of the firmware of an ET 901 is only possible, if an Intercom station (i.e. a subscriber) is
connected to the ET 901!
Protect configuration with password

A password can be defined for a single or group of IP stations to prevent unwanted changes to the IP-
StationConfig configuration. This password mus be entered before sending or changing the configu-
ration. Follow the instructions below:
1. Select the desired subscribers in the table (multiple selection with the key combination <CTRL> and
<SHIFT>).
2. Go to: Menu Station > Set password
3. In the fields New Password and Confirm Password, enter the new password (max. 126
characters).
Unlock configuration of an IP station

When receiving the configuration of subscribers with configured passwords, red dots are indicated in
the column Password. For these IP Intercom stations, only the MAC address is indicated. See the fol-
lowing screenshot:
1. Enter the required password in the field Password. If the correct password is entered, the
configuration of the respective IP station is enabled.
1.5/0619 115
Configuration of IP stations
The configuration of an IP station is divided into 3 sections:
 Configuration of the IP stations in IPStationConfig – see below
 Configuration of the IP subscriber cards in CCT 800 – see page 118
 Configuration of the IP subscribers in CCT 800 – see page 119
Configuration of the IP stations in IPStationConfig
ATTENTION:
 In order to put an IP station into operation, valid values must be entered in the fields IP-Address,
Subnet mask and Card-IP! Make sure that the settings must comply with the configuration in
CCT 800 at IP-Settings > tab Common (see page 118) and at Subscribers > IP-Terminals > tab
Common (see page 119)!
 Changed settings will applied only after the configuration has been sent to the IP subscriber (see
page 114)!
Configuration IPStationConfig
1. Click on Query stations to list the IP subscribers in the connected network or click on the button
Query remote station and enter the IP address of a specific IP station that shall be displayed. See
the following screenshot:
2. In the field IP-Address, enter the IP address of the IP station. The checkbox DHCP must be
deactivated.
3. In the field Subnet mask, enter the subnet mask of the IP station. The checkbox DHCP must be
deactivated.
4. In the field Router-IP, the IP address of the router or standard gateway can be entered via which the
Intercom Servers shall communicate. The checkbox DHCP must be deactivated.
5. In the field Mac, the MAC address of the IP subscriber is indicated (cannot be configured).
6. In the field Card-IP, enter the IP address of the IP subscriber card that shall be allocated to this IP
subscriber.
116 1.5/0619
7. In the field Port, the standard destination port number can be entered (by default, “16400”). The port
numbers must only be changed for special configurations with NAT.
ATTENTION: Required firmware versions for communication ports

Communication via port 16400 (Single Port Protocol) is possible with the following minimum firm-
ware versions:
 ET 901: 02.4 Build 03 / 03.1 Build 03
 DSP900 (for ET 908): 03.1 Build 04
Otherwise, the communication is done via port “16400” to “16404”.
NOTE: Port 16399

The port 16399 is used by the program IPStationConfig for configuration of the devices.
8. Optionally, activate the checkbox DYN in order to activate the dynamic registration via the MAC
address.
ATTENTION: Function must also be activated in CCT 800

This feature has also to be activated in CCT 800 (see page 118).
NOTES:
 The dynamic registration of an IP Intercom station described above is enabled by transferring the
MAC address of the device in the data payload of the IP packet. If the MAC address can be set man-
ually (e.g. for the Intercom Client), these IP Intercom stations may have different MAC addresses.
 When using redundant network connections, the activation of the dynamic registration is valid for
both, the primary and the secondary link.
GOOD TO KNOW: Short description – Dynamic registration?

By means of this feature, the registration of an IP Intercom station on an Intercom Server even via a
non-static Internet access (e.g. ADSL) is possible (for the Intercom Server, always a static public IP
address is required).
The registration of the IP Intercom station on the Intercom Server is done with the current IP address
and port number. The allocation subscriber and device will no longer be done via the IP address and
port number, but exclusively via the MAC address of the IP device. Thus, several IP Intercom stations
configured for dynamic registration can be registered on the Intercom Server with the same port
number and the same IP address. Consider that static and dynamic devices may never have the same
port number and IP address.
9. Optionally, activate the checkbox DHCP so that the IP station requests the IP address of the station,
subnet mask and IP address of the router from a DHCP server.
10.In the field Host Name, a name for the IP station can be entered, which identifies the IP station for
the DHCP server. If no name is entered, a standard name will be used when using DHCP.
Additional settings
Further information about configuration of additional settings (e.g. description, VLAN or SNMP) can be
found on page 110.
1.5/0619 117
Configuration of the IP subscriber cards in CCT 800
ATTENTION: Valid values in CCT 800 and IPStationConfig required

In order to put an IP station into operation, valid values must be entered in the fields Card IP Address
and Subnet mask! Make sure that the settings must comply with the configuration in IPStationConfig
(see page 116)!

1. Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common
2. In the field Card IP Address, enter the IP address of the respective IP subscriber card. For all
subscribers that shall be assigned to this IP subscriber card, the same IP address must be entered in
IPStationConfig Card-IP (see page 116).
3. In the field Subnet mask, enter the subnet mask of the respective IP subscriber card. For all
subscribers that shall be assigned to this IP subscriber card, the same subnet mask must be entered
in IPStationConfig Subnet mask (see page 116).
4. In the field MAC address, the MAC address of the IP subscriber card is indicated (cannot be
configured).
Additional settings
The following settings can be configured in CCT 800 optional:
 Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common
In this field, the IP address of the router or gateway can be entered, via which the
Intercom Servers shall communicate. For all subscribers that shall be assigned to
Router IP Address this IP subscriber card, the same router IP address must be entered in IPStation-
Config Router-IP (see page 116) 1)
In these drop-down lists, the Ethernet operation mode of the network connec-
Uplink and Downlink
tions (RJ45) can be selected.
Address Conflict Activate this checkbox so that the IP card will stop the communication in case of
Detection an IP address conflict according to RFC 5227.
1) A router IP address is only required when the IP components are located in different subnets. The router IP
address and the Card IP address must be in the same subnet.
GOOD TO KNOW: Address Conflict Detection (ACD) according to RFC 5227

In case of an address conflict, the static, manually entered IP address of the respective IP card remains
unchanged. To fix the conflict, the IP address of the card has to be changed manually.
 Go to: IP - Settings > tab Extended Settings

In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used in the net-
work by the IP subscriber card for data and speech. The total bandwidth must
Bandwidth in kBit
always be set higher than the value in the drop-down list Databandwidth
kBit. It is recommended to select the entry “unlimited”.
In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used for data
packets that leave the IP subscriber card. When the bandwidth is reduced, the
Databandwidth
packets leave the cards with a larger time period between them (Traffic Shap-
kBit
ing Algorithm according to Leaky Bucket Principle). This prevents a “Packet
burst” which can lead to a queue overflow at the router.
118 1.5/0619
Configuration of the IP subscribers in CCT 800
ATTENTION: Valid values in CCT 800 and IPStationConfig required

In order to put an IP station into operation, valid values must be entered in the fields Card IP Address,
Terminal IP Address and Port No.! Make sure that the settings must comply with the configuration
at IP-Settings > tab Common (see page 118) and in IPStationConfig (see page 116)!
In the following, the connection from the IP subscriber card to the IP subscribers is configured.

1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Common
2. In the field Card IP Address, the configured IP address of the respective IP card is indicated (see
page 118).
3. In the field Station type, the type of connected IP station is indicated that is selected at Subscriber
> Station properties > tab Common.
4. In the field Terminal IP Address, enter the IP address that is entered in IPStationConfig in the field
IP-Address for the respective subscriber (see page 116).
NOTE: Subscriber must be assigned to specific subscriber card

The IP subscriber is assigned to the IP subscriber card that is indicated in the field I/S - T.
5. In the field Port No., enter the IP address that is entered in IPStationConfig in the field Port for the
respective subscriber (see page 117).
6. In the field Subnet mask, the configured subnet mask of the respective IP card is indicated (see
page 118).
Additional settings
The following settings can be configured optionally in CCT 800:
 Go to: IP - Settings > tab Common
In these drop-down lists, the Ethernet operation mode of the network
Uplink and Downlink
connections (RJ45) can be selected.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Common
In this field, the configured router IP address of the respective IP card is indi-
Router IP Address
cated (see page 118).
Activate this checkbox in order to enable the dynamic registration via MAC
Dynamic registration
address. The field MAC address is enabled
In this field, the MAC address of the IP subscriber card can be entered. If the
MAC address checkbox Dynamic registration is activated, the MAC address is configured
automatically.
1)
This feature has also to be activated in IPStationConfig (see page 117).
1.5/0619 119
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Settings
In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used in the net-
work by the IP subscriber card for data and speech. The total andwidth must
Bandwidth in kBit
always be set higher than the value in the drop-down list Databandwidth kBit.
It is recommended to select the entry “unlimited”.
In this drop-down list, the bandwidth can be selected, which is used for data
packets that leave the IP subscriber card. When the bandwidth is reduced, the
Databandwidth
packets leave the cards with a larger time period between them (Traffic Shap-
kBit
ing Algorithm according to Leaky Bucket Principle). This prevents a “Packet
burst” which can lead to a queue overflow at the router.
In this drop-down list, the time can be defined, how often the card checks if the
Card poll time
IP subscriber can be reached.
In this drop-down list, the time can be defined, how often the IP subscriber
Station poll time checks if the card can be reached. It is recommended to activate this feature
when operating an IP subscriber over WAN (dynamic firewall, dynamic NAT).
Activate this checkbox in order to transmit speech packets only when a signal is
VOX-Control active at the microphone. This function shall only be used if the bandwidth in
the network is limited. 1
In this drop-down list, the time can be selected (in seconds), after which speech
VOX-Follow up
packets shall be transmitted when a signal is no longer detected at the micro-
time
phone.
In this field, the bits for DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) Packet Mark-
DSCP
ing can be entered (0 – 63, e.g.: 46 for “Expedited Forwarding”).
Jitter Buffer Start In this drop-down list, the jitter buffer delay time can be selected (in millisec-
Delay onds) in order to prevent packet lost (e.g. caused by an overloaded network).
Activate this checkbox in order to prevent the automatic decrement of the jitter
No decrement of
buffer below the selected value in the drop-down list Jitter Buffer Start
Jitter Buffer
Delay.
Deactivate switch Activate this checkbox in order to deactivate the LEDs of the subscriber with a
LEDs built-in switch (e.g. ET 901).
1)
For an ET 901, this feature is available with firmware version 2.2 or higher.
 Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Subscribers
In this drop-down list, the station type of the extend subscriber can be selected.
The options “Non Audio” (any non-audio subscriber, e.g. Intercom Client),
Station type
“WSCM 50”, “WSTM 50” and “dummy port” (e.g. for configuration of a virtual
control desk to transfer calls) are available.
Assignment to In this drop-down list, the Intercom station can be selected, which shall be linked
host-client with the extended subscriber.
120 1.5/0619
Configuration of SIP stations

Requirements
 SIP firmware 3.6 or higher
 CCT 800 5.0 (build 1016) or higher (contains the required version of IPStationConfig)
NOTE: Requirements
If at least one requirement is not fulfilled, the SIP subscriber will be indicated as an IP subscriber in
IPStationConfig. Thus, a configuration as SIP subscriber is not possible.
1. Click on the button Query stations to indicate all subscribers in the network.
NOTE: Configurable settings in IPStationConfig

Only the settings as described below are available for SIP subscribers in IPStationConfig. The con-
figuration of the settings can also be carried out via the web interface.
2. In the field BootMode, the operation mode “Boot as SIP” for the SIP station is indicated.
3. In the field IP-Address, enter the IP address of the SIP station. The checkbox DHCP must be
deactivated.
4. In the field Subnet Mask, enter the subnet mask of the SIP station. The checkbox DHCP must be
deactivated.
5. In the field Router-IP, optionally enter the IP address of the router or standard gateway, via which
the SIP station shall communicate. The checkbox DHCP must be deactivated.
6. (Optional) Activate the checkbox DHCP so that the IP station requests IP address of the IP station,
subnet mask and IP address of the router from a DHCP server.
NOTE: Accept settings

To accept the settings, the configuration has to be sent to the SIP subscriber first (see page 114).
1.5/0619 121
Configuration of hybrid stations

A hybrid subscriber can be operated either as an IP or SIP station.
Requirements (operated as SIP subscriber)

 SIP firmware 3.6 or higher
 CCT 800 5.0 (Build 1016) or higher (contains the required version of IPStationConfig)
NOTE: Requirements
If at least one requirement is not fulfilled, the SIP subscriber will be indicated as an IP subscriber in
IPStationConfig. Thus, a configuration as SIP subscriber is not possible.
Configuration via IPStationConfig

1. Click on the button Query stations to indicate all subscribers in the network.
2. In the drop-down list BootMode, select the desired operation mode of the hybrid subscriber. The
following operation modes are available:
 Boot as IoIP: Operate as IP subscriber (see page 121)
 Boot as SIP: Operate as SIP subscriber (see page 116).
NOTE: Accept settings

To accept the settings, the configuration has to be sent to the SIP subscriber first (see page 114).
122 1.5/0619
Station redundancy
In normal operation, the entire communication runs exclusively via the standard connection between
the Intercom Server and a station. Only in case of disconnection (e.g. failure of IP subscriber card, line
fault, power supply of the Intercom Server interrupted etc.), the communication between the Intercom
Server and station is automatically routed via the first fallback connection, which still offers unrestric-
ted operation. Therefore, it is possible to carry out redundant IP subscriber cards or Intercom Servers,
via which a fallback connection is routed. Even if the first fallback connection shows an error, the
connection is automatically routed via the second fallback connection.
GOOD TO KNOW: Classification of activated connections

When the IP subscriber or Windows Intercom Client starts initialising, the standard and fallback
connections will automatically be tested within 20 seconds to define the “active” connection. If at least
two connections are reachable, the “active” connections are classified in the following order:
1. Standard connection
2. First fallback connection
3. Second fallback connection
Requirements
Intercom Server
 Software Intercom Server VirtuoSIS
 Intercom Server GE 800/GE 300/IP-32/IS 300
Station software
 AF-I: min. 5.4
 DSP 900: min. 3.3
 DSP 900A: min. 5.6 (build 1)
 DSP 900B: min. 5.6C
 DUETTO/EE 980: min 1.2
 ET 901: min. 3.7 (build 1)
Intercom Client software

 IC200: min. 3.4.4540.0
Restrictions
 The station type ET 901 only has one fallback connection.
 The fallback function is not supported for the Android and iOS Intercom Client.
 If the standard connection and at least one fallback connection are available, the firmware download
has to be carried out via the standard connection of the respective Intercom Server (see page 70).
1.5/0619 123
Examples for station redundancy

Redundant connection of IP subscribers
The master Intercom Server (server ID “01”) and the secondary Intercom Server (server ID “02”) are
connected separately via an IP connection with the IP subscribers. In case of a line fault, a correspond-
ing message is indicated at both control desk (“line monitoring”).
If the standard connection or an IP subscriber card fails, the connection is routed via the fallback
connection to the secondary Intercom Server. As the Intercom Servers are not networked, the call num-
bers of the affected IP subscribers can be kept with the activated fallback connection. When the master
Intercom Server fails, all incoming calls are displayed at the control desk of the secondary Intercom
Server.
GE 800 GE 800
server ID “01” server ID “02”
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
standard connection fallback connection
contr
control desk contr desk
control
Ethernet Ethernet
Ethernet
Example: redundant connection of IP subscribers
Redundant connection via networked Intercom Servers

In this example, the master Intercom Server and secondary Intercom Server are networked via a
synchronous link (HDSL or E1). For the standard and fallback connection, different call numbers have
to be configured for the affected IP subscribers.
synchronous link (HDSL, E1)
CNET-E1/
CNET-E1/
CNET-W
CNET-W
GE 800 GE 800
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
standard connection fallback connection
control
c desk
control desk
contr
Ethernet Ethernet
Ethernet
call number with standard connection 128 129 135

call number with fallback connection 215 225 227
Example: redundant connection via networked Intercom Servers
124 1.5/0619
Configuration: IPStationConfig
Follow the instructions below, to configure the fallback connections for an IP station in IPStationConfig:
1. Click on the button Fallback in the upper menu bar to indicate the fallback settings. See the
following illustration:
Configuration of the fallback connections in IPStationConfig
First fallback connection

2. Card-IP2: In this field, enter the IP address of the allocated IP subscriber card. This IP subscriber card
establishes the first fallback connection. For each connection (standard and fallback), a different IP
subscriber card has to be used.
3. Port2: In this field, the port number of the first fallback connection can be changed (by default
16400). For each connection of an IP subscriber (standard and fallback), the same port number can
be used.
Second fallback connection

2. Card-IP3: In this field, enter the IP address of the allocated IP subscriber card. This IP subscriber card
establishes the second fallback connection. For each connection (standard and fallback), a different
IP subscriber card has to be used.
3. Port3: In this field, the port number of the second fallback connection can be changed (by default
16400). For each connection of an IP subscriber (standard and fallback), the same port number can
be used.
1.5/0619 125
Configuration: CCT 800

The following configuration has to be carried out separately for each connection (standard and
fallback) of an IP subscriber and Intercom Client (up to three times). Depending on the configuration
and the currently activated connection, the respective IP subscriber or Intercom Client may change its
call number.
Enter the same IP configuration as in IPStationConfig for each connection

Follow the instructions below to configure the fallback connections for an IP station in CCT 800:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Common
2. Terminal IP address: In this field, enter the same IP address, which has been entered in
IPStationConfig for the respective connection (see page 116).
3. Port No.: In this field, enter the same port number, which has been entered in IPStationConfig (see
page 117) for the respective connection.
4. Dynamic registration: Activate this checkbox if the dynamic registration is enabled for the
respective IP subscriber in IPStationConfig. The field “MAC address” is enabled.
5. MAC address: In this field, the MAC address for the connection to the Intercom Server can be
changed (if the checkbox “Dynamic registration” is activated).
 Line monitoring of the fallback connections

Line faults can be indicated at the control desk by a delayed registration of the IP subscriber (e.g. due
to a longer initialisation time of the ports by using certain switches). Within this time range, line faults
can already be indicated at the control desk. If the standard or one of the fallback connections of an IP
subscriber fails, a line fault can be indicated via line monitoring at a control desk. The following con-
figuration has to be carried out separately for each connection of an IP subscriber (up to three times).
The same subscriber ports has to be used as for the configuration of the standard and fallback connec-
tions. Follow the instructions below to configure line monitoring for the fallback connections:
1. Configure a line monitoring for the desired fallback connection of the IP station (see page 302).
2. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Settings
3. Card poll time: In this drop-down list, the card poll time of the standard and fallback connection
can be selected. The Intercom Server polls the respective IP subscriber card constantly after the
selected time to recognize a line fault, to which the IP subscriber belongs to.
 Recommended value: 8 [s]
Adjust the polling times to indicate line faults faster
126 1.5/0619
4. Station poll time: In this drop-down list, the station poll time of the standard and fallback
connection ca be selected. The station polls its allocated IP subscriber card constantly after the
selected time to recognize a line fault. If at least one fallback connection is enabled for the respective
IP subscriber, the value “8 seconds” is automatically used for the entry “Off”.
 Recommended value: Off
5. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
6. Line monitoring delay time [s]: In this drop-down list, the line monitoring delay can be selected
for the standard and fallback connection. The recognition of a line fault at this subscriber port is
delayed for the selected time.
 Recommended value: 8 [s]
Adjust the line monitoring delay to avoid the indication of unintentional line faults
1.5/0619 127
General Intercom features Intercom Server Configuration
General Intercom features
Calling numbers
Rules for call number allocation

One to eight digits from 1 to 99999999, with the following exceptions:
 Same beginning digits with different length may not be used (e.g. 1234 and 123456).
 Function codes (00, 010, 4T, 6T, …) are reserved for internal functions, but can be changed (see
page 129).
 Block numbers may not be used.

 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Naming
 Call number: In this field, the calling number of the selected subscriber can be entered.
 Description: In this field, an optional text can be entered for the selected subscriber. This text is
used only in CCT 800 for easy identification of the Intercom stations.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Inputs
 Call number IN: In this field, the calling number of the station inputs can be entered.
 Go to: Inputs > General Settings
 Call number: In this field, the calling number of the inputs can be entered.
 Go to: Outputs > General Settings
 Call number: In this field, the calling number of the outputs can be entered.
ATTENTION: For Inputs and Outputs

Dialable call numbers (e.g. 101) should be used instead of hexadecimal call numbers (e.g. D101)!
 Call numbers up to 8-digits

As of PRO800 1.1 call numbers with up to 8 digits can be assigned to subscribers, inputs and outputs
(up to PRO800 1.1 only 4-digits).
Restrictions
 Call numbers that begin with the same digit sequence, may not be used (e.g. 22 and 220 cannot be
used together in one Intercom Server).
 The checkbox Enable full functionality has to be activated for a station output with a 8-digit call
number (see page 211).
 Firmware upgrade of all network cards required:
 G8-NET, G8-LAN, G8-CNET-W, G8-CNET-E1: Minimum 5.3.
 G7-GEV, G7-CNET-LAN, G7-WAN, G7-CNET-E1: Minimum 5.3 (only in combination with G7-
UPG).
NOTE:
Even “stand-alone” Intercom Servers must use the above mentioned software versions in order
to support 8-digit call numbers.
 EE880/EE380
  EE880: Can only have a 4-digit number and direct dialling buttons with 4-digits.
 EE380: Can have 8-digit number.
 EE380: Direct dialling buttons only support 6-digits.
128 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration General Intercom features
 WAN networking
 8-digit numbers cannot be combined with WAN pre-dialling codes.
 Stations with dot-matrix display (e.g. EE811A, EE880) can only display 8 digits (restrictions with 8-
digit call numbers with additional WAN-prefix).
 Stations with small display (e.g. EE311, EE411) can only display 6 digits.
Server-IDs
 No collisions of phone numbers and addresses for server IDs below 100
 Recommendation:
 Select Server-IDs if possible < 100
 With more than 60 networked intercom servers -> WAN networking
 Server-IDs from #100 to #119 and from #136 to #254:
 Each Intercom Server uses the same hexadecimal addresse after initialization for inputs / outputs
and interfaces -> locally usable addresses (starting with D0 **); In addition, there are still virtual
clients that can only be used locally within an Intercom Server (starting with BA **)
 They can be used via networked systems only by manually assigning up to 8-digit telephone num-
bers for inputs / outputs and interfaces.
 Numbers of participants must also be changed: uniqueness in networked systems must be given
Changing the function codes

It is possible to change the codes for system functions, e.g. for music or privacy function.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block No. > Function Codes
 Function Codes: In this field, the code of the respective function can be changed (maximum 4-
digits; e.g. “881” instead of “4T” for music. In this case, music is switched on with “881” and
switched-off with “880”).
NOTE:
In case the function code is displayed in the display menu (TT to answer an All Call), only the last
two digits are displayed (e.g. “1933” instead of TT. In this case, only “33” is indicated in the
display menu)e.g.
1.5/0619 129
 Text parameter
The text parameter is a user-defined parameter that briefly describes any object with a specific value.
This parameter is allocated to a single e.g. subscriber, input or output and can be requested by a
Commend system or third-party system (e.g. TETRA) via an ICX message in order to e.g. execute an
action.
NOTE: Further information

For further information about the required ICX message, see “Text parameters” in the manual “ICX
Protocol”.
GOOD TO KNOW: Text parameters can be added automatically

In CCT 800 it is possible that text parameters can be created by different functions (e.g. with addressing
the camera of an Intercom station at Subscriber > Station properties > Cameras > tab Address-
ing, a text parameter will automatically be added for displaying the video stream.

 Go to: Parameter > Textparameter
 Right-click on the desired e.g. subscriber, input or output and select “Add parameter”.
GOOD TO KNOW: Export/import of text parameters

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, text parameters of single subscribers can be exported and saved as GEC
file on the computer or imported into CCT 800. It is not possible to export or import text parameters
of several subscribers in a single file.
Export of a text parameter
 Right-click on a configured text parameter and select “Export parameter”.
 Save the GEC file on the computer.
Import of a text parameter
 Right-click on a configured text parameter and select “Import parameter”.
 Select the desired GEC file on the computer for import.
 Click on the button Configure to open the configuration dialogue.

 Right-click and select “add entry”. The following settings can be configured:
 Name: In this field, the object name can be entered in ASCII coding.
 Value: In this field, the object value can be entered in ASCII coding. All characters of the ASCII
table are valid for the object value (max. 14 characters).
NOTE: Several text parameters possible

It is possible to add several text parameters per e.g. subscriber, input or output.
130 1.5/0619
 Optional parameters

In order to use special functions, for Intercom subscribers optional parameters can be configured. For
the optional parameters the parameter numbers 900 to 999 are reserved.

 Go to: Parameter > Optional Parameters
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add parameter”.
 Parameter: In this field, the desired parameters can be entered (several definitions are separated
via commas).
Register of the optional parameters

Optional
Requirements Description
parameter
No control desk list during conversation at the display. During a conversation
900 PRO 800 1.2 at a control desk, incoming call requests are shown in the display. With this
optional parameters the function is turned off.
901 PRO 800 1.2 Red flashing LED at calling station when the called station is in privacy mode.
902 PRO 800 1.3 6T conference (only one channel displayed in mixing mode).
Simultaneous speaking in a 6T radio channel and listening to the other 6T radio
903 PRO 800 1.3
channels of the conference.
For the configured Intercom subscriber, during a conversation the incoming
904 PRO 800 1.3
call tone is not audible.
Reinitialize call request (only in combination with function “automatic end of
905 PRO 800 1.3
call”).
In case direct dialling is configured for the subscriber, this direct dialling is also
906 PRO 800 2.1
carried out via F1 menu.
The monochrome LCD display is switched to an EE 811 compatibility mode.
This mean that the WS station or Conductor is always working as EE 811 (max-
907 PRO 800 4.1
imum of 14 digit display text). The only difference between that instead of the
button F1, F2 and F3 the Commend help button is shown.
This parameter has to be used in order to make a 7T conversation without a
connected telephone cable on the G3/8-TEL card (e.g. using a dummy sub-
912 PRO 800 3.0
scriber). If the parameter is not used, the 7T conversation is automatically can-
celled).
Indication of active control desk calls with display and buzzer also during night
916 PRO 800 5.1
transfer.
If a call request can not be confirmed, the call request is immediately deleted
918 PRO 800 6.1
from the queue by pressing the Enter key.
919 PRO 800 7.1 Suppression of the acknowledge tone at intrusion for all 6T receivers.
1.5/0619 131
Optional parameters with upgrade licence
NOTE: upgrade licences required

A PRO 800 upgrade licence is required for the following optional parameters.
Optional Required firmware Required

Description
parameter version upgrade licence
If an Intercom subscriber has a conversation over IAX to
a phone and a second Intercom subscriber want to
establish a conversation to the same phone, subscriber
2 has to wait until subscriber 1 has finished the conver-
sation. By default, after cancelling the conversation from
908 PRO 800 6.0 PRO2U
subscriber 1, the conversation switch automatically to
subscriber 2 and the display which is indicated on the
phone will not be updated. With this optional parameter,
after cancelling the conversation a new conversation
will be established and the display text will be updated.
909 PRO 800 2.1 PRO2U It is possible to dial during a permanent function menu.
If an IAX subscriber starts dialling, the dial tone ends
910 PRO 800 2.1 PRO2U
after the first button press (the tones work as usual).
Deactivation of the automatically sorting of 6T channels
911 PRO 800 2.1 PRO2U
for mixing radio if someone speaks into a channel.
After the configured menu display time, the time in the
drop-down list Permanent menu display will be
913 PRO 800 3.1 PRO3U recessed. Typically used for EE811A/EE900A and WS800
display stations when permanent F2 menu is config-
ured.
If a subscriber in privacy mode has accepted an incom-
ing call from a control desk, the call can be parked with
the button 2 or 3 from the control desk. At a re-call by
914 PRO 800 3.1 PRO3U
the control desk, the call will be activated immediately
and the subscriber in privacy mode does not have to
confirm the call.
Deactivation of the automatic call number indication in
917 PRO 800 6.1 PRO6U menus. By default, the call number of the selected entry
will be indicated after two seconds in the menu.
Use the keys 4 and 5 to accept privacy calls. After
J accepting the privacy call, the keys 4 and 5 can still be
PRO 800 920 VirtuoSIS 9.0 PRO9U used for sending callback requests and activating the
LICENCE
PRO9U callback reminder. The optional parameter must be set
for each station for which this function is needed.
132 1.5/0619
 Sevenfold security against interception

In order to entirely prevent any unwanted listening at the own station, seven different possibilities and
security provisions are available. According to the situation these various security functions can be
activated by the subscriber:
 Calling signal.
 Minute signal.
 Multifunctional LED as a visual indication for activated microphone.
 Turning the station (activating secretary transfer, privacy).
 Activating privacy function by dialling 031.
 Secretary transfer by dialling 02T and the secretary's number.
 Disconnection of microphone by dialling 7 during a running call.
No configuration via CCT 800 required.
 Tone signals for different operation states

In order to inform the user most accurately about the state of his station, different signals indicate the
condition of the station.
Calling Signal
Minute Signal 1 Minute
Double Gong
Busy Signal
Privacy Signal
Error Signal
Acknowledgement Signal
Normal Call
Emergency Call
Waiting Information
 Calling Signal: Sounds at every new setup of a call on both the caller's and the receiver's station.
 Minute Signal: Sounds one time every minute as a reminder that a conversation is running, two
times if a subscriber is waiting and three times before the conversation time exceeds.
 Double Gong: Signal announcing an All Call or a group call.
 Busy Signal: Is given when the called subscriber is busy.
 Privacy Signal: Shows that the called subscriber has activated the privacy function.
 Error Signal: Is given when the station is operated in an incorrect way.
 Acknowledgement Signal: Is given when a function is activated (e.g. privacy).
 Normal Call: Indication of a normal call (Call 1) at a control desk.
 Emergency Call: Indication of an emergency call (Call 2) at a control desk.
 Waiting information: At the calling station during a normal call or emergency call during a call to
a control desk.
GOOD TO KNOW:
Tone signals can be changed for DSP stations (see page 337).
1.5/0619 133
 Minute signal configurable per subscriber

To have an acoustic indication of a running call, every minute a short signal sounds to indicate the state
of the station (interception protection). The minute signal sounds two times if another station is waiting
for the talking subscriber, and three times before automatic cut off of the conversation. The minute sig-
nal can be eliminated by configuration, but the double and the triple minute signal are sent in any case.

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 Minute Tone: Activate this checkbox to enable the minute signal for the respective subscriber.
 Call indication (multifunctional LED, display), calling signal

A conversation between two Intercom stations is announced by a calling signal. Additionally the red
lamp lights at both stations during the conversation. With display stations the name (display text) of
the conversation partner is indicated in the display.
 Length of ring tone

The length of the tone to indicate a call can be configured as desired. The time can be defined for the
entire Intercom Server or for each subscriber individually.

 Go to: Intercom Server > Switch off times
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “add switch off times”.
 Ringtone before red lamp [s]: In this field, the length of the ring tone to indicate a call can be
changed (by default 0.5 seconds).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be changed for the entire Intercom Server
block.
 Dialling at start of the Intercom Server

A button sequence can be configured for single subscribers, which is dialled automatically when the
Intercom Server is switched on (e.g. build up a conversation).

 Go to: Subscriber > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “0000=<ButtonSequence>” for the respec-
tive subscriber (e.g. “0000=312” to built up a call to the subscriber with the call number 312; see
page 180).
ATTENTION:
 Works only with features within an Intercom Server housing!
134 1.5/0619
 Protection against feedback

Intercom stations, which are positioned close next to each other, can be barred against each other to
avoid feedback. If e.g. subscriber 11 is barred against subscriber 10, dialling 11 at station 10 switches
on the error tone. If station 10 initiates an All Call, subscriber 11 does not receive it (All Calls from other
stations can be heard). An Intercom station can also be barred against several other Intercom stations.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Disabling
 Protection against feedback: In this field, call numbers can be entered, which shall be disabled
for this subscriber in order to avoid feedback (several definitions are separated via commas). At the
disabled subscriber, automatically the call number of the initial subscriber is entered.
 Selective disabling of functions

Dialling of certain call numbers or functions can be enabled or disabled for single Intercom stations
(e.g. group call).

 Disabling of functions and dialling: In this field, blocked call numbers or functions can be
entered for the respective subscriber (e.g. group call “010,011”; several definitions are separated via
commas).
 At more than 10 group calls, a whole decade can be disabled (e.g. “0120” to “0129” can be
disabled by entering “012”).
  Invert call barring: Activate this checkbox to enable all subscriber for calling, which are entered in
 the field Disabling of functions and dialling. Thus, it is possible to initiate calls to subscribers
with higher hierarchy level.
It is possible to enter a call number range of a 4-digit part-call number. All 5-8 digit call numbers will
be enabled, which starts with the 4-digit part-call number.
NOTE:
Still only subscribers are displayed in the F1 menu, which are callable with the common hierarchy
settings.
1.5/0619 135
Indication of system faults on outputs

The relay S1 on the G8-GEN (installation board GEAN 700R) or G3-GEM can be used for status
indication of the Intercom Server (e.g. indication via signal lamp):
 Relay closed: Intercom Server in normal operation.
 Relay open: Intercom Server switched off, during restart or Fault.
The relay S2 on the G8-GEN (installation board GEAN 700R) or G3-GEM can be used for status indi-
cation of the cards:
 Relay open: All cards in normal operation.
 Relay closed: At least one card with faults.

 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General
 Relay S1: Intercom Server error and Relay S2: Slot error: Activate these checkboxes to indicate
system faults for the respective outputs.
NOTE:
When the relays are used for this function they may not be configured for other functions.
 De-bounce time for buttons

The de-bounce time for buttons can be configured selectively per subscriber.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Key de-bounce time [s]: In this drop-down list, the de-bounce time can be selected per subscriber.
 Internal handset function

Intercom stations with handset function (see datasheet) can be used as handset after lifting the station.
NOTE:
Turn the intercom station 90° to activate the privacy mode (see page 137).
136 1.5/0619
 Disable position switch and handset function

If e.g. an Intercom station with position switch shall be used as wallmount station, it can be defined
that turning the station (hanging on the wall):
 Does not activate privacy function (or secretary transfer).
 Does not switch to handset volume.
For the wallmount station EE 320, these functions must not be disabled, because a magnet disables the
position switch as soon as the station is in the wallmount bracket.
ATTENTION:
Disabling the handset function does not work for 4-wire stations!

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Permission Privacy: Activate this checkbox to enable the privacy mode and secretary transfer for
the respective subscriber.
  Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Handset
 Disable internal handset function: Activate this checkbox to do not switch to handset volume
when the respective subscriber is lifted.
 Microphone mute
If during a running call the subscriber wants to prevent the called person from listening to a
conversation going on in his room, it is possible to switch off his microphone by pressing button 7.
By pressing the same button again he is re-connected with the other subscriber. During the time the
microphone is switched off, the conversation partner receives an acoustic and visual signal.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common > Waiting signals
 Microphone mute: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected.
 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the music program for the
respective subscriber, which is selected in the drop-down list microphone mute.
NOTE:
The after dialling for subscribers has to be disabled (see page 297).
1.5/0619 137
 Automatic disconnection of conversations after time per

subscriber
After a configurable disconnection time a running call is interrupted (by default, 6 minutes). The cancel
of the conversation time is indicated by a three time minute signal before the call is cancelled. The
conversation time can then be extended (started once again) by pressing 77. This disconnection can
be deactivated by configuration, so that each call has to be cancelled with button X.

 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Switch off times”.
 Switch-off time duplex [s]: In this field, the switch-off times can be changed for Duplex (max. 900
seconds, by default 360 seconds).
 Switch-off time simplex [s]: In this field, the switch-off times can be changed for Simplex (max.
900 seconds, by default 180 seconds).
 Switch-off time full duplex [s]: In this field, the switch-off times can be changed for Full Duplex
(max. 900 seconds, by default 360 seconds).
block.
 Auto. disconnection: Activate this checkbox to enable the automatic disconnection (at a
configuration without restart, the configuration is applied at the next call).
NOTE:
If a selective switch-off time is configured for a subscriber at Intercom Server > Switch off times (see
above), a call will also be deactivated if the checkbox Auto. disconnection is deactivated.
In case of a conversation between a subscriber with and a subscriber without automatic disconnection,
the conversation is not switched off automatically (depending on calling/called station).
 Reconnection with last call

The last call is set up again by dialling the sequence 0T (also for answer to All Call).
 Reconnect with last call via SIP trunk


NOTE: Only available with configured SIP trunk
The following function is only available with at least one configured SIP trunk. Further information
about the configuration of SIP trunks can be found in the manual “VirtuoSIS-CCT 800 Config”.
Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Reconnect with last conversation partner via SIP trunk
VirtuoSIS If the last call has been set up to a SIP station through a SIP trunk, it can be set up again by
LICENCE PRO6U
dialling the sequence 0T.
138 1.5/0619
 Inquiry/further connection
If an inquiry with another subscriber is required during a conversation, the active conversation can be
put on hold by pressing the button 0.
 The dial tone is audible at the station and a second subscriber can be called.
 At stations with dot-matrix display the button A can be pressed, in order to select a subscriber from
the subscriber list.
 It is also possible to initiate e.g. an All Call with answer back.
The waiting subscriber receives the privacy tone and the conversation lamp blinks. Instead of the
privacy tone a music channel for feed-in of waiting information or music can be switched on. All
previously defined music channels can be used as waiting signal. At dot-matrix display stations
“Please wait” is displayed.
monochrome LCD display dot-matrix display colour TFT display
Conversation
20
Anne Long
Please wait
X-Cancel
Then there is a choice of the following two possibilities:
 The second conversation is cancelled with X, the dial tone is switched on again. If desired, further
inquiries can be started. If X is pressed another time, the call to the “parked” subscriber is
established again.
 The new conversation partner can be connected to the “parked” subscriber with button 0.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common / Waiting signals
 Microphone mute: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected (default:
privacy tone)
 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the music program for the
respective subscriber, which is selected in the drop-down list microphone mute.
NOTE:
The after dialling for subscribers has to be disabled (see page 297).
1.5/0619 139
 Further connection to fix privacy station


 During a conversation, a subscriber can connect its conversation partner to a subscriber with privacy
transfer, whereby this call cannot be accepted first at the privacy station. E.g. if the call is transferred
to the privacy subscriber, the call between both subscribers is cancelled automatically and the privacy
tone is audible at the transferred subscriber until the call is accepted by the privacy station.
Requirements
The following cards are supported:
Gx-IP Gx-GED Gx-GET
Gx-TEL 1) Gx-TEL4 Gx-IAX 1)

Gx-S0 1) SIS-IP-8 SIS-SIP-T 1)
SIS-SIP-C 1)
1) Transfer to a privacy station on this card is only possible after the call has been accepted.
NOTE: Different cards can be used

The stations can be registered at different cards.
Transfer process
 During a conversation between the subscriber A and B, press the button 0 on the station A. The con-
versation between subscribers A and B is paused.
 The dial tone is audible at the station A and the call number of the privacy station C can be entered.
If an error occurs during dialling or the dial process is cancelled prematurely, the previous conver-
sation will be continued.
 The incoming privacy call is indicated at the station C and the privacy tone is audible at the station A.
NOTE: Call must be ended first when subscriber is busy

If the privacy subscriber is busy, the busy tone is audible at the station B and the subscriber C must
cancel the active conversation first in order to accept the incoming privacy call.
 Press the button 0 at the station an In order to acknowledge the call initiation between the subscrib-
ers B and C. The conversation between the subscribers B and C is ended. Privacy tone is audible at
station B.
 Press the button 0 at the station C in order to accept the incoming privacy call.

1. Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
2. Activate the checkbox Fix as called for the subscriber, to which the privacy call shall be transferred.
140 1.5/0619
Display Indication with stations series EE311A/EE411

In addition to the display functions described here, there are certain indications with special functions
(e.g. privacy, control desk functions), which are shown at the description of the corresponding feature.
Idle state
In idle state (if no conversation is built up and if no special mode like privacy or secretary transfer is
activated) the own calling number is indicated, e.g.:
Conversation
During a conversation the calling number of the conversation partner is indicated in the display, e.g.:
It is also possible to configure an up to 6 character long text, which is indicated in the display of the
conversation partner, e.g.:

 Display Text EE311A/411: In this field, a text with up to 6 digits can be entered (for a list of possi-
ble characters see below). If stations without display or with dot-matrix display are used, a text shall
be entered for these stations. In this case, the text is displayed in case of a conversation with a dis-
play station EE311/EE411.
Character font EE311A/EE411

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - > < blank
_ A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z *
+ = / ] a b c d h i k m n o
r t u v w z . :
1.5/0619 141
Display functions dot-matrix display

 Device version
The device version can be queried at any time by selecting the option “Device Version” in the main
menu. (calling number, name, versions of Intercom Server, subscriber card and station). After 10
seconds or when button X is pressed, the display switches to idle state.
GerÄteversion
22
Doc. Snyder
22
Doc. Snyder
GE 800 Pro01.1 GE 700 Pro05.6
GED-4D V03.1 GED-4D V02.3
WS-D V01.0 EE 811 V02.6
X-Beenden
X-Abbrechen
At EE880 control desk additionally the ARM-software version is indicated.
 Idle state
This display is shown if no conversation is built up and if no special mode (like e.g. privacy) is activated.
It indicates the calling number and the “Display text EE811A & camera” of the own station. Additionally
the function keys are explained (can be deactivated).
22
22 Doc. Snyder
Doc. Snyder
F1-Teilnehmer
F2-Funktionen
F3-Hauptmenü
d-MenÜ

 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, a text with up to 14 digits can be entered for the
respective subscriber.
 Contrast adjustment with arrow buttons

  Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm, Common
 No contrast adjustment: Activate this checkbox for subscribers, which shall not be able to change
the contrast of the display in idle state.
Hide function menu in idle display

 For EE811A: Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE811 family > tab Inputs, Outputs,
Display
 For WS series: Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Display
 Don‘t show function menu: Activate this checkbox to hide the function menu in idle display of the
142 1.5/0619
 Menus
 Subscriber list
In the subscriber list, all subscribers of the Intercom system will be displayed in alphabetical order that
are defined at Subscriber > General > tab Naming in the field Display texts EE811A & camera.
Colour TFT display/monochrome LCD display

 In order to open the subscriber list in idle state, press the button , select the option “Subscribers”
via the arrow buttons and press the button .
monochrome LCD display colour TFT display
Subscribers
Santana C.
Scott B.
Sixx N.
Staley L.
Stills S.
Stradlin I.
Search:.......
NOTE:
Full text search will not be supported.
 With the arrow buttons, the desired subscriber can be selected in the subscriber list.
  With PRO 800 1.1 or higher, the subscriber list can be searched with the alphanumeric buttons (see
page 144).
 Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Indication of call number in subscriber list
 VirtuoSIS The call number of the selected subscriber will be indicated if no button is pressed for ap-
LICENCE PRO6U
proximately three seconds.
 Press the button F to establish a call to the selected subscriber.

 Press the button X to close the subscriber list without establishing conversation.
Dot-matrix display
 The subscriber list can be called up by pressing button an In idle state.
 First an alphabetical overview is displayed (if activated). With the arrow buttons, the initial letter of
the searched subscriber can be selected, and by pressing the button F, the first subscriber with the
selected initial letter will be displayed in the subscriber list.
1.5/0619 143
 With the arrow buttons, the desired subscriber can be selected in the subscriber list. The button A
can be used for page down, B for page up.
 The subscriber list can be searched with the alphanumeric buttons (see page 144).
 The call number of the selected subscriber will be indicated if no button is pressed for approxi-
mately three seconds.
 By pressing the button F, a call will be established to the selected subscriber.
 By pressing the button X, the subscriber list can be left without building up a conversation.

 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, the name of the station with up to 14 digits can be
entered for the respective subscriber. If the series “811” or “311/411” is used, this text shall also be
entered in the field Display Text EE311A/411. In this case, the text is indicated on the display of
the control desk EE 311/EE 411 during a conversation.
Deactivation of the alphabet overview of the subscriber list

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters”.
 Show A-Z menu: Activate this checkbox to indicate the alphabet overview for the respective
subscriber.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the connected Intercom Servers or blocks can be
selected, which shall be included in the subscriber list.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.
NOTE:
The A-Z menu is not available for IP terminals (EE900A, WS-IP).
Search function in the subscriber list

The subscriber list can be searched for letters, characters and numbers by means of the alphanumeric
buttons (1 to 9) of the Intercom station (case-insensitive and full-text search). Press the button X to
delete the last input. The latest input after pressing an alphanumeric button will be confirmed for the
search if the same button is not pressed again within one second. The displayed subscribers can be
selected using the arrow buttons (E and D). By pressing the button F, a call can be established to
the desired subscriber.
GOOD TO KNOW:
With PRO 800 6.0 or higher, the subscriber list can be searched for Cyrillic characters.
With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the subscriber list can be searched for Hebrew characters.
144 1.5/0619
 Permanent subscriber list

It is possible to permanently activate the F1 menu for stations with dot-matrix display. This can be
useful for e.g. door and gate stations, where the subscriber index shall be displayed permanently. The
operation and the indication at the display is changed, since the handling is not via the main menu.
Scroll with the arrow keys and select with the number keys.

 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Subscriber list” to display this
subscriber list permanently in idle state for the Intercom Server block or per subscriber.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.
Hide subscribers from subscriber list

It is possible to hide subscribers from the subscribers list (e.g. for dummy subscribers).

 Hide subscribers from F1-menu: Activate this checkbox to hide the respective subscriber in the
subscriber list.
External subscriber list

In case an external System (e.g. Studio) shall manage a subscriber list (telephone book), this subscriber
list can be displayed at the Intercom subscribers of the Intercom System. It is possible to receive the
external subscriber list in two different ways:
 Press a button: Via ICX message or F2 menu.
NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of ICX messages, see the manual “ICX Protocol”.
 Permanent indication: Via F1 menu. The default F1 menu is replaced with the external subscriber
list.

 External subscriber list: In this drop-down list, the subscriber can be selected, which permanently
display the external subscriber menu.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block”, this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.
1.5/0619 145
 Phonebook view
Feature PRO 800 6.0 – phonebook view for the permanent subscriber list
VirtuoSIS
The indication of the permanent subscriber list (see page 145) in the phonebook view enables
LICENCE PRO6U the representation of up to 4 subscribers. In the phonebook view, subscribers can only be
selected via the arrow buttons, a search with the alphanumeric keypad is not possible.
Requirements
The following station types are supported:
 WS 800 (all versions)
The following firmware versions are supported:
 DSP 800B min. 2.3
 DSP 900A min. 6.2
 DSP 900B min. 6.2
 IoIP-Device min. 7.0
monochrome LCD display
Subscribers
Santana C. ›
Scott B.
Sixx N.
Staley L.
Down/UP ›Call
 Select the desired subscriber with the arrow buttons.
 Press the button  to establish a call to the respective subscriber.

 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Subscriber list” for the
respective subscriber to display the subscriber list permanently in idle state. The checkbox
phonebook view will be enabled.
 Activate the checkbox phonebook view for the respective subscriber.
 Function list
The functions indicated in this list can be defined by configuration.
Functions
1 Last Call
2 All Call
3 Group Call
4 Privacy ON
5 Privacy OFF
6 Music ON
›Execute X-Cancel
Monochrome LCD display and colour TFT display

 Open the main menu with menu button . Select Functions via arrow buttons and accept with F
or initiate directly with button .
 With the arrow buttons a function is selected and initiated with button F or directly initiated via
146 1.5/0619
buttons  to .
 With  the function list can be left without activating a function.
Dot-matrix display
 The Function List is called up by pressing button B in idle state.
 With the arrow buttons a function can be selected and carried out with button F.
 With button X the Function List can be left without carrying out a function.
The function list can be configured individually for each system and for each subscriber. The function
list can contain any button sequences or calling numbers, so it can be used e.g. as individual subscriber
index.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Functions F2-menu
 Number / Code: In this field, the direct dialling code of the respective function can be changed.
 Deutsch, English, Francais and Nederlands: In these fields, the name of the respective function
can be entered in the according language.
NOTE:
Further information about enabling a language can be found on page 151.
Selective functions (only for dot-matrix, monochrome LCD and colour TFT dis-
plays)
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > sub-folder subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add function” (with PRO 800 1.1, max. 252 entries are available per
subscriber; see page 476).
 The selective functions are listed above the general functions in the function list (see page 147).
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Extended Settings
 Functions general: Activate this checkbox to enable the function list for the respective subscriber.
The display only shows the selective functions if it is configured for the respective subscriber.
NOTE:
 For stations with a dot-matrix display, the checkbox Function general is only available if a
function has already been added for the respective subscriber in the menu “individual F2-menu”
(Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > sub-folder subscriber).
 For stations with a monochrome LCD and colour TFT display, a separate list of favourites will be
additionally applied to the “selective functions” in the function list (see page 159).
 Moving and sorting F2 menu entries in CCT 800

Via the toolbox, entries in the F2 menu can be moved and alphabetically sorted for either single sub-
scribers or the Intercom Server block. See the following illustration:
1.5/0619 147
This toolbox will be indicated in CCT 800 at Intercom Server - Block XX > Functions F2-menu and
Subscribers > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > desired subscriber. The column Index
shows the current position of the respective entry in the F2 menu.
NOTE:
If this toolbox is not displayed, carry out a right-click on the list and select “Show toolbox”.
 Search function in the function list

The function list can be searched for letters, characters and numbers by means of the alphanumeric
buttons (1 to 9) of the Intercom station (case-insensitive and full-text search). Press the button X to
delete the last input. The latest input after pressing an alphanumeric button will be confirmed for the
search if the same button is not pressed again within one second. The displayed subscribers can be
selected using the arrow buttons (E and D). By pressing the button F, a call can be established to
the desired subscriber.
GOOD TO KNOW:
 With PRO 800 6.0 or higher, the function list can be searched for Cyrillic characters.
 With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the function list can be searched for Hebrew characters.

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menu
 Search in Functions / Favorites menu: Activate this checkbox to enable the search function for
the function list and favourites menu.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX” this setting can be activated for the entire Intercom Server
block
 Permanent function list

It is possible to permanently indicate the function list for all subscribers with dot-matrix, monochrome
LCD and colour TFT displays.

 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, the permanent displayed function list in idle state
can be selected for the respective subscriber. The following functions are available with up to CCT
800 5.0:
 Functions / Favourites
  The following functions are available as of CCT 800 5.1:
 Functions
 Favourites + Functions
block.
148 1.5/0619
 Individual F2 menu

NOTE:
This function is only available for subscribers with dot-matrix display.
Subscribers of the F1 subscriber menu can be selected and added to the personal F2 menu. If desired
a direct dialling code can also be assigned. These entries are added to the existing F2 menu. If desired
it is possible to add standard and additional entries in CCT 800. Per subscriber a maximum of 252
entries in the selective F2 menu are possible (as of PRO800 1.1 see page 476).
Adding an entry from the F1 menu

The subscriber is selected in the usual manner via scrolling with D and E and
Masters John browsing with A and B. This row is displayed inverted to show that it is
McRyan Andy selected. After not scrolling for 2 seconds additionally the call number of the
Mellin Julia subscriber is displayed. With F a call could be initiated to this call number.
Michael Roger
---- 1234 ----
Monday George
Musil Sarah
Muther Sam
If C is pressed a new menu is displayed, in which a new entry for this subscriber
can be created in the F2 menu. Additionally a direct dialling code can be advised.
F2-Menu
1234
Michael Roger
› Save
F1-Delete
X-Cancel
In the first row the direct dialling code is displayed or an empty space if none
has been advised. The code can be added/changed simply by entering an up to
T1_ 4 digit code with the keypad.
F2-Menu
1234
Michael Roger
› Save
F1-Delete
X-Cancel
When the F button is pressed, the entry for the F2 menu is saved with this call number (e.g. “1234”).
The text for the subscriber (“Michael Roger”) is queried from the Intercom Server for this subscriber.
If a direct dialling code has been entered (e.g. “T1”) it is saved as T1 = 1234 enabling conversations to
the subscriber to be built-up with T1. The code may consist of 1 to 4 digits. This direct dialling code
is also displayed when the CCT 800 file is received and at the normal direct dialling configuration of the
station with 9T1 (direct dialling see page 180).
Adding an entry during a conversation

The menu described above can also be displayed during a conversation by pressing C. Therefore
pressing C and F adds an F2 entry for the current conversation partner. The audio transmission of
the conversation is even active when editing in the menu, however the acknowledgment tone is not
put out when F is pressed.
Changing of the entries of the F2 menu

If C is pressed in the F2 menu while a subscriber is selected, the menu for configuration of this entry
is displayed again.
1.5/0619 149
Deleting an entry of the F2 menu

During editing of an F2 entry (see above), the complete entry including direct di-
alling code can be deleted by pressing the button A.
F2-Menu
X-Cancel
NOTES:
 A maximum of 252 entries per subscriber are possible (as of PRO 800 1.1; see page 476).
 For the WS series a favourites menu can be configured instead of the individual F2 menu (see
page 159).
 Main menu
The main menu is called up by pressing button C in idle state:
 WS800 With button 
 EE811A: With button C
Main Menu
1 Subscribers
2 Functions
3 Favourites
4 Settings
X-Cancel ›OK

 Switch-off time for menus
The automatic switch-off time of the menus can be configured.

 Menu display time [s]: In this field, the switch-off time of the menus can be selected (2 to 1049
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX” this setting can be selected for the entire Intercom Server
block.
Requirements Cyrillic and Hebrew

 Cyrillic:
 EE811A: DSP 800A min. 1.1
 WS800D: DSP 800B min. 1.0
 WS800I: DSP 900A min. 1.0 or IoIP-Device 7.0
150 1.5/0619
  Hebrew:

Feature PRO 800 2.0 – Hebrew
PRO 800 EE811A: DSP 800A min. 2.1
LICENCE PRO2U EE900A / WS800I: DSP 900A min. 5.1 or IoIP-Device 7.0

 Help functions
For most of the possible functions (no matter if they are entered directly or called up in the function
list) the possible inputs are indicated at the bottom of the display as help for the user.
 Volume adjustment
The volume for the different tone signals and conversation modes can be adjusted individually. If the
option “Set Volume” is selected in the main menu, a list for selection of the tone signals and con-
versation mode appears. Select the volume you want to adjust with up and down keys (accept the
selection with button F) or by entering the corresponding number. The Display for adjustment of the
volume appears:
dot-matrix display
monochrome
LautstÄrke LautstÄrke LCD display
1 Tone Töne
2 Gong
3 Musik
4 Sammelruf 5
5 Duplex
6 Simplex œÄndern -/+
X-Abbrechen ›OK X-Beenden ›Speichern
colour TFT
display
The volume can be changed in steps from 0 to 12 with the arrow buttons or with the buttons 0 to 9
The maximum volume depends on the device and if the maximum volume has been limited by con-
figuration (see page 219). With button F the new volume is saved, with X the mode can be left without
saving any changes.
 Language
Several languages can be loaded for the display of the dot matrix display units. The desired language
can then be selected at each station. By default, the languages English and German are already loaded.
The language which is set as standard for the stations can be configured.
1.5/0619 151
Selecting the option “Language” in the main menu opens a list of all loaded languages. Select the
desired language with the arrow buttons (accept the selection with button F) or by entering the
corresponding number. With button X the list can be left without changing the language.
Language
1 Deutsch
2 English
X-Cancel ›OK

 Go to: Intercom Server- Block XX > Languages Subscriber Display
 Current display languages: In this field, the currently loaded display languages are displayed.
 The buttons Reset and Delete are used to restore the default language settings.
 Language of the file > Languages: The following display languages are available:
 Dutch
 English
 French
 German
 Hebrew
 Italian
 Polish
 Russian
 Spanish
 Select an available display language and assign it to one of the buttons Set to language by clicking
on it.
 Language of the file > Path of language file: In this field, the directory of the selected database
is displayed. Click on the button ... to select a different database. A window appears and a GET file
can be selected. Click on the button Load File to load the selected language in CCT 800.
ATTENTION:
If texts are changed in an existing GET file (e.g. at English), they are only taken over by the Intercom
Server when at the position “Sprache im Klartext” in the GET file a different name is entered (e.g.
“English_new”)!
Set default station language

 Default languages: The following standard languages are available:
 German
 English
NOTE:
If additional languages are required, the languages must first be added to the display languages.
ATTENTION:
After initializing an Intercom Server, only English is activated in the Intercom Server! After sending
the first CCT 800 file, the secondary language (in standard “German”) can be enabled!
152 1.5/0619
 Favourites menu

 It is possible to configure an individual list of frequently required functions and subscribers. This list is
indicated separated from the “Function list” in the menu “Favourites”.
NOTE:
The entitlement for the favourites menu can be deactivated (see page 157).
 Open the main menu with menu button .

 Select “Favourites” via the arrow buttons and accept with F or directly select with button . The
configured list of favourites is indicated:
Favourites
1 Kilmister L.
2 Vedder E.
3 Music on
4 Music off
5 McKagan D.
6 Call Transfer
›Execute d-Edit
 With the arrow buttons a function or subscriber is selected and initiated / accepted with button F or
directly initiated via buttons  to . With  the list can be left without selecting an entry.
 Via the menu button  the menu “Fav. edit” for editing the list of favourites can be opened.
 Edit Favourites
 The list of favourites can be created and edited via the display menu of the station.
 Open the list of favourites:
 From menu “Favourites”, or
 from menu “Settings”
Add Favourites
 Various functions and subscribers can be added to the favourites menu:
 If the list has been opened via the menu “Favourites”, press menu button .
 If the list has been opened via the menu “Settings”, press return button F.
Edit Favourites
1 Add
2 Delete
3 Save
X-Cancel ›OK
 In the appearing menu, select the entry “Add” via F.
1.5/0619 153
Add subscriber
 Select the entry “Subscriber” with the button F to open the subscriber list:
Add Favourites
1 Subscribers
2 Functions
X-Cancel ›OK
 Selecting and searching for a subscriber is carried out as described in section “Menus”.
 Pressing F will not initiate a call to the respective subscriber, but the subscriber will be added to the
list of favourites (leaving without making a selection it is possible by pressing the button ).
Add function
 Select “Functions” via F to open the function list.
 In order to add a function to the list of favourites, select the function with the arrow buttons and ac-
cept with F or add the function directly to the list via buttons  to  (leaving without making a
selection: ).
Further information about saving the added subscribers or functions can be found on page 155.
 Delete favourites
 Subscribers and functions can be deleted from the list of favourites:
Edit Favourites
1 Add
2 Delete
3 Save
X-Cancel ›OK
 The subscriber or function to be deleted is selected with the arrow buttons and the menu pictured to
the right is opened via:
 The menu button  (if list of favourites has been opened from menu “Favourites”) or
 the return button F (if list of favourites has been opened from menu “Settings”).
 In the appearing menu, select the entry “Delete” via the arrow buttons and accept with the button
F or .
Further information about saving changes in the favourites menu can be found on page 155.
154 1.5/0619
Save and reject changes

If subscriber and/or functions have been added or deleted, then these changes have to be saved in or-
der that the list of favourites can be updated. After making changes (i.e. adding or deleting favourites),
open the menu pictured to the right via .
Edit Favourites
1 Add
2 Delete
3 Save
X-Cancel ›OK
 From the appearing menu select the entry “Save” with the arrow buttons and accept with F or
accept the entry directly via pressing button .
 When trying to leave the list of favourites with , without saving previously, the menu pictured
below will be opened.
Save
1 Save
2 Drop
3 Continue
X-Cancel ›OK
With the arrow buttons and acknowledgement with F or direct selection via buttons  to , one of
the following 3 possibilities are selected:
 Save: Saving/taking over changes made in the list (the list of favourites can then be left with ).
 Reject: Rejecting changes, i.e. changes will not be saved (the list of favourites can then be left with
).
 Continue: Continue editing the list of favourites.
NOTE:
A maximum of 255 entries are possible per subscriber (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 476).
1.5/0619 155
 Editing favourites via CCT 800

 Additionally to editing the favourites menu via the station the favourites menu can also be defined in
CCT800.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Series > Favourites > sub-folder
subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add entry”.
 Number / Code: In this field, the call number of the subscriber or the function code can be entered.
If a function code is entered, which is not available in the field Functions F2-menu, it is possible to
enter a text in the fields English and German (consider restrictions on page 476).
 English and Deutsch: In these fields (and all further defined languages), the corresponding text of
the field Displaytext EE811A & camera (for a subscriber) or “Functions F2-menu” (for function
codes) can be entered. These texts are displayed in the display of the WS series.
 Right-click and select “Add entries” to add multiple call numbers and function codes at once (several
entries are separated via commas).
 Right-click and select “Add empty entry” to create an empty separator entry for the permanent
favorite list (see page 157).
 Delete favorites: Right-click on the desired entry and select “Remove entry”.
Moving and sorting F2 menu entries in CCT 800

Via the toolbox, entries in the F2 menu can be moved and alphabetically sorted for either single sub-
scribers or the Intercom Server block. See the following illustration:
This toolbox will be indicated in CCT 800 at Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Se-
ries > Favourites > sub-folder subscriber. The column Page/Index indicates the page number of the
entry in the favourites menu and the button, which is allocated to the respective function.
NOTE:
If this toolbox is not displayed, carry out a right-click on the favourites menu and select “Show tool-
box”.
156 1.5/0619
 Search function in the favourites menu

The favourites menu can be searched for letters, characters and numbers by means of the
alphanumeric buttons (1 to 9) of the Intercom station (case-insensitive and full-text search). Press
the button X to delete the last input. The latest input after pressing an alphanumeric button will be
confirmed for the search if the same button is not pressed again within one second. The displayed
subscribers can be selected using the arrow buttons (E and D). By pressing the button F, a call can
be established to the desired subscriber.
GOOD TO KNOW:
 With PRO 800 6.0 or higher, the favourites menu can be searched for Cyrillic characters.
 With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the favourites menu can be searched for Hebrew characters.

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menu
 Search in Functions / Favorites menu: Activate this checkbox to enable the search function for
the function list and favourites menu.
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX“ this setting can be activated for the entire Intercom Server
block.
 Permanent favourites menu

 The favourites menu can be permanently displayed in idle state (e.g. for stations at doors or lobbies).
Handling with permanent favourites fist:
 Change to idle display:  button.
 Change back to permanent favourites menu:  button.

 Go to: Intercom Server > Subscriber menus or
Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Series > Direct dialling settings/Favour-
ites
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add subscriber menu parameters” (only at
Intercom Server > Subscriber menus).
 Permanent menu display: In this drop-down list, the permanent displayed favourites menu in idle
state can be selected for the respective subscriber.
 The following functions are available with up to CCT 800 5.0:
 Functions / Favourites
  The following functions are available with CCT 800 5.1:
 Favourites
 Favourites + Functions
block.
 Entitlements favourites menu

 For each WS station it is possible to control the entitlements of the favourites menu:
 Full access: Display and modification of the favourites menu is allowed.
 Indication only: The favourites menu can be displayed and used for dialling but modification is not
possible.
 No access: The favourites menu cannot be displayed nor modified (the menu entry “Favourites” is
hidden in the display).

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series/CD Series > Favourites
 Entitlements Favourites: In this drop-down list, the entitlement of the favourites menu can be se-
lected for the respective subscriber.
1.5/0619 157
 Calling history

Feature PRO 800 2.1 – calling history
PRO 800
With the calling history, the last 20 incoming and outgoing calls will be indicated in the func-
LICENCE PRO2U tion menu of the Intercom subscribers. With the arrow buttons E and D, the desired call entry
can be selected and by pressing the Enter button, a call will be established to the selected des-
tination (only for Intercom calls). “9T6” is the default function code to open the calling history.
The function code can be changed at Intercom Server - Block XX > Function Codes (see
page 129).

 Go to: Subscriber > Calling history
 Group multiple calls: In this drop-down list, the groupings of calls in the calling history can be
selected. The following settings are available:
 Off: Calls from the calling history are not grouped.
 By subscriber: Calls are grouped by subscriber.
 By subscriber and direction: Calls are grouped by subscriber and directions.
NOTE: Calls via SIP trunk will not be grouped

Incoming and outgoing calls via a SIP trunk will never be grouped.
 Show in function menu: Activate this checkbox to show the calling history in the function menu.
 Indication of call number in the calling history for SIP trunk


NOTE: Only available with configured SIP trunk
The following function is only available with at least one configured SIP trunk. Further information
about the configuration of SIP trunks can be found in the manual “VirtuoSIS-CCT 800 Config”.
Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Indication of call number in the calling history for SIP trunk
VirtuoSIS
In the calling history, the call number of SIP stations connected through a SIP trunk to this
LICENCE PRO6U subscriber are now indicated. By pressing the Enter button, a call will be established to the se-
lected destination.
158 1.5/0619
Special features A Series / WS series

 Back-lit display

For the white display backlight, configurations for the following display features can be set via the
menu of the station or the configuration software CCT.
Display
7
Intensity
œChange -/+
X-Cancel ›Save
Display
29
Timeout
X-Cancel ›Save
NOTE:
 The display backlight is deactivated automatically after 4 seconds if the button X is pressed in idle
mode of the station (no matter which timeout for the backlight is configured).
 Via configuration, the display backlight switch-off can be deactivated.
 In idle mode the contrast of the display can be set with the arrow buttons.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE811 family or
Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Display
 Display timeout [s]: In this field, the time of inactivity can be changed, after which the backlight
illumination is switched to idle mode (max. 999 seconds; 0 = illumination is permanently activated,
(by default 30 seconds).
 Display idle intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in idle mode can be
selected.
ATTENTION:
 It is not recommended to change the pre-configuration (preconfigured display idle intensity:
“OFF”)! With display idle intensity “OFF” electricity can be saved and the life time of the colour
TFT display can be increased! In case a high idle intensity is configured and the Intercom station
is less used, a screen burn of the idle screen is possible!
 After initializing an Intercom Server only the English language file is active in the Intercom Server!
After sending the first CCT 800 file the second language (in standard “German”) becomes active!
 Display active intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in active mode can
be selected.
 Contrast: In this drop-down list, the display contrast of WS810 stations and analogue WS800
stations (WS800A) can be selected.
1.5/0619 159
 Back-lit keypad


ATTENTION:
 The keypad backlight can only be used and configured with external power supply of the WS station!
 This means the checkbox External power supply has to be activated for the WS station see
page 161!
For the white keypad/button backlight the following features can be set via the menu of the station
(WS800/WS810 only) or the configuration software CCT800:
 Intensity of the backlight in 10 steps from 0 to 9.
 Timeout, after which the backlight shall be deactivated at inactivity (1 to 999 seconds).
 If the timeout is set to “0”, the keypad illumination is permanently active.
Keypad
7
Intensity
œChange -/+
X-Cancel ›Save
Keypad
30
Timeout
X-Cancel ›Save
NOTE:
The keypad backlight is deactivated automatically after 4 seconds if the button X is pressed in idle
mode of the station (no matter which timeout for the backlight is configured). Via configuration, the
keypad backlight switch-off can be deactivated.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Keyboard
 Keypad timeout [s]: In this field, the time of inactivity can be changed, after which the backlight
illumination is switched to idle mode (max. 999 seconds; 0 = illumination is permanently activated,
by default 30 seconds).
 Keypad idle intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in idle mode can be
selected.
 Keypad active intensity: In this drop-down list, the intensity of the backlight in active mode can
be selected.
160 1.5/0619
 Multifunctional LED

Instead of the default red conversation lamp of Intercom terminals, the A series terminals are fitted with
a multifunctional LED, with which the colours red, green and blue will be indicated. The multifunctional
LED can be configured individually in CCT 800 for the following modes:
 Tone signals: E.g error tone, privacy tone or waiting signal for busy.
 Operating states: E.g emergency call, state group call or state conference listen.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Templates (LED+TFT) > tab Template Name
 Template Name: In this field, the name of the respective template can be entered. In the following
tabs, the options for this template will be enabled.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Templates (LED+TFT) > tab Colour assignment-tones
 In the following drop-down lists, the tones can be allocated to a colour (or 2 colours for linking):
 Colour off: In this drop-down list, the colour of the permanent LED can be selected for the
respective DSP signal.
 Colour on: In this drop-down list, the colour of the permanent LED can be selected for the
respective DSP signal.
 Blink mode on / off (ms): In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED can be selected for
the respective DSP signal.
 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General
 Template (LED+TFT): In this drop-down list, a template can individually be assigned to
subscribers.
 Increased volume (incl. voltage monitoring)


Instead of the volume levels 0 to 9 available with previous stations, the following stations offer
increased volume levels:
 A series station: Volume levels from 0–11.
 WS series stations: Volume levels from 0–12.
Voltage monitoring:
 The station automatically monitors if the current supply is sufficient for the operation of the station
with the respective volume level. If at higher line lengths the current supply is too low, the volume
level is reduced automatically (in no case lower than volume level 8).
 Therefore the full features of the WS series with increased volume, maximum display and keypad
back-light is only possible with external power supply of the station.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab General
 External power supply: Activate this checkbox to enable volume level 12 if the respective sub-
scriber is powered by a external power supply.
1.5/0619 161
 16 kHz audio bandwidth

With the Intercom Server generation GE 800 and GE 300 conversations, All Calls, radio conferences and
music are possible with 16 kHz audio bandwidth.
NOTE:
 16 kHz is only possible when the station of both conversation partners support the 16 kHz bandwidth.
 All Calls and group calls in 16 kHz are only possible in systems, in which all receivers support 16 kHz
audio bandwidth.
Supported station types

EE 811A, EE 900A WS Series
EE3 11A Intercom Client (depending on sound card used)
EE 380A ET901D with A Series stations
EE 342A All analogue stations
ET 312A, ET 311A EX 200

 Audio: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Digital 16 kHz” for the respective subscribers.
All Calls, group calls with 16 kHz

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common / Audio
 Activate the checkbox All Calls / Group Calls  16 kHz.
Speech recording with 16 kHz

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox Audio recording  16 kHz.
ATTENTION:
Voice recording in 16 kHz is not possible with the G8-AUD card!
 Invert button “0” and button “T”


Feature PRO 800 2.1 – invert button “0” and button “T”
PRO 800 For Intercom modules it is possible to invert the screw terminal connection of the button “0”
LICENCE PRO2U and button “T”.

 Invert key 0: Activate this checkbox to invert the screw terminal connection of the button “0”.
 Invert key T: Activate this checkbox to invert the screw terminal connection of the button “T”.
162 1.5/0619
 Extended subscribers

Feature PRO 800 2.1 – extended subscribers
PRO 800 With the extended subscribers feature it is possible to use Stand-Alone modules without using
LICENCE PRO2U a fully-fledged IP subscriber.
Number of extended subscribers per IP card

 G8-IP-8: 2 extended subscribers per card.
 G8-IP-32: 8 extended subscribers (2 per virtual G8-IP-8).
 G8-IP-32 + L8_IP-32-32B: 16 extended subscribers.
Restrictions and function range

 Bidirectional video.
 Direct dialling functions.
 Adding a new extended subscriber is only possible if the IP card addresses “9” and/or “10” are avail-
able. This IP card addresses can also be used by station inputs, station outputs and V24 clients.
NOTE:
By default, extended subscribers are created at the address “9” and “10” of the respective IP card.
 Allocation to client only possible if this client has no direct dialling function (allocation not possible
to e.g. EE380A, Intercom Client, WS with direct dialling via input).
 Allocation to client is only possible if this client has no video function.
 Allocation to host client is only possible within the same Intercom Server.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended subscribers
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add extended subscriber function”.
 Client Type: In this field, the client type of the extended subscriber is indicated.
 Station Type: In this drop-down list, the station type of the extended subscriber can be selected.
The following station types are available:
  Non Audio ICCNA
  Non Audio IC200I
 WSCM 50
 WSTM 50
 SIS Dongle
 Dummy port (see page 164)
NOTE:
If an extended subscriber is selected, this device type cannot be changed at Station properties >
tab Common.
 Assignment to host-client: In this drop-down list, a host client can be selected, to which the
respective extended subscriber will be allocated.
NOTE:
For further information about the configuration of the camera and monitor, see the manual “Video-
WS”.
1.5/0619 163
 Extended subscribers – “dummy port”

Feature PRO 800 4.0 – dummy port (non-audio port)
An extended subscriber can be configured as a dummy port with feature level “D” for control
desk functions (non-audio port).
NOTE:
When using an IS 300 or VirtuoSIS Intercom Server, it is mandatory to activate all required licences
before it is possible to configure the extended subscribers.
Dummy ports are displayed in the following directories in CCT 800:

 Intercom Server > Subscriber licenses
 Subscriber > General
 Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Terminals
 Subscriber > Control Desks

 Go to: Subscribers > Station properties > IP-Terminals > tab Extended Subscribers
 Station Type: In this drop-down list, select the entry “Dummy Port” for the respective subscriber.
J
EN 81-28 Emergency Call System
Standards and guidelines

The functionality of an emergency call system is implemented by the requirements of DIN EN 81-28.
The following devices support the standard DIN EN 81-28:
ET 908H ET 962H
ET 970H EF 962H
ES 962H WS 211V I DA
ET 808A Y-LIFT-S
Requirement
 min. DSP800A 3.4 Build 1
 min. IoIP-Device 7.3 Build 6
 min. PRO 800 6.3 Build 16
 min. VirtuoSIS 9.0
Description
The emergency call system is intended to enable a permanent connection between trapped users and
a liberating organization via a 2-way voice connection. The liberation organization should be able to
provide this service at all times. The liberation organization should be able to respond promptly to all
emergency calls.
In order to ensure the proper functioning of the emergency call release device, the system constantly
checks itself.
The emergency call system must have the following visible signals:
164 1.5/0619
Call lamp
Indicates whether a user has triggered an emergency call.
According to standard EN 81-28: Yellow signal with picto-
gram in accordance with ISO 4190-5: 2006, Table C.1, no. 1,
which is lit when a real emergency call is detected.
Conversation lamp
Signals whether the speech connection is established.
According to standard EN 81-328: Green signal with picto-
gram in accordance with ISO 4190-5: 2006, Table C.1, no. 8,
which is lit during voice communication.
Out of service indication

If a microphone unit is not equipped with a call lamp and a conversation lamp is not connected, the
function can be deactivated. Alternating flashing of the call lamp and the conversation lamp in 1-se-
cond intervals indicates that no service is possible.

 Go to: Subscribers > Station properties > tab Extended settings > EN81:28 Out of service
indication
 The following states can be selected in the drop-down list:
 Auto: The state "EN 81:28 No service indication" is automatically selected by the device itself. The
current state is displayed in the bracket.
 Off: There is no explicit signal at the intercom station that "no service" is currently possible.
 On: If "No service" is available, the call lamp and the conversation lamp flash alternately.
Add Call lamp at conversation

This option can be used to set whether the call lamp lights up in addition to the conversation lamp du-
ring a call / speech connection.

 Go to: Subscribers > Station properties > tab Extended settings > EN81:28 Add Call lamp
at conversation:
 The following states can be selected in the drop-down list:
 Auto: The state "EN 81:28 Call lamp on call" is automatically selected by the amplifier itself. The
current state is displayed in the bracket.
 Off: The status "EN 81:28 Add Call lamp at conversation" is deactivated.
 On: The status "EN 81:28 Add Call lamp at conversation" is activated.
1.5/0619 165
 Power management
By default, the Intercom Server GE 300 is powered with a 30 W power supply unit, whereby the number
of usable digital subscribers is limited. With using a 60 W (with PRO 800 6.0 or higher) or 70 W power
supply unit, the number of usable digital subscribers can be increased.
NOTE:
For further information about the power management, see the manual “GE 300”.
ATTENTION:
The following configuration may only be required for the Intercom Server GE300 (generation 2)!
 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General

 Generation: In this drop-down list, select the entry “2” (2nd generation of the GE 300).
 Power Supply [W]: In this drop-down list, select either the entry “60” or “70” (according to the used
power supply unit) to use the full capacity of the power supply unit, by default 30 seconds).
 Deactivate power management: Activate this checkbox to optimize the power distribution over
all digital subscriber cards if the respective subscriber has an external power supply.
 User administration

When no user is logged into the Intercom station, it is locked, i.e., the subscriber functions are not
accessible. Incoming calls can always be received, whether a user is logged in or not. Users may log
in manually or automatically at the Intercom station to use its functions.
In order to log in with your user credentials, enter the button T followed by your PIN. At that point you
will be logged in either automatically after the pre-set timeout, or you can log in manually by keeping
the X button pressed for approximately one second.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > User administration > tab User groups
 Name: In this field, the group name can be entered. The following functions are enabled.
 Hierarchy level (local): In this drop-down list, the hierarchy level can be selected per user group
(see page 185).
 Hierarchy level (WAN): In this drop-down list, the level for outgoing conversations can be selected
per user group. If prohibited is selected the subscriber cannot call via WAN connections.
 RGB-LED color off: In this drop-down list, the colour of the RGB LED can be selected for the state
of the user login (see page 167).
 RGB-LED color on: In this drop-down list, the colour of the RGB LED can be selected for the state
of the user login (see page 167).
 Blink mode on/off (ms): In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the RGB LED can be selected for
the respective user group.
NOTE:
Up to 8 different user groups can be configured.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > User Administration > tab Users
 Username: In this field, the name of a user can be entered.
 Access code: In this field, a door opener code can be entered (see page 284).
166 1.5/0619
 User pin: In this field, the pin of a user can be entered (4 to 8 digits).
 User group: In this drop-down list, the user group has to be selected for each user name.
 RFID: Activate this checkbox to use RFID keys (radio-frequency identification) for the log-in.
User login
 Go to: Subscriber > User Login > tab General
 Right-click on a user and select “Add User Login”.
 Logout time-total: In this drop-down list, the total time from login to automatic logout can be
selected.
 Logout time-idle: In this drop-down list, the time from the last activity at the station (push of a
button or incoming call) to the automatic logout can be selected.
 Interface external control: In this drop-down list, an interface (ICX) to control the login/logout of
a user with ICX messages can be selected.
 Default user group: In this drop-down list, a group can be selected, which will be logged in all the
time. If no default user group is selected, a manual login is necessary.
 Display username on called station: Activate this checkbox to display the username of the
logged in user of the called station.
 Login via pin code: Activate this checkbox to enable a login with PIN code entry.
 Login via ICX message: Activate this checkbox to enable the login via ICX messages.
NOTE:
States of the user login

 Go to: Subscriber > User Login > tab Pre-recorded Audio
 Login: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “succeed Login”.
 Logout: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “Logout”.
 Tag fail: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “login via tag
failed”.
 Pin fail: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered for the state “login via PIN code
failed”.
NOTE:
Up to four different pre-recorded audio IDs can be entered for each station with a configured user
login (see page 362).
1.5/0619 167
Offline indication
 Busy tone at line fault

It is possible to configure a busy tone / offline display for subscribers which cannot be reached.

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Line monitoring
 Activate the checkbox Line monitoring for the respective subscriber.
 Activate the checkbox Offline at line fault for the respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations > tab Signals, Tones 1
 Busy tieline: In this drop-down list, a busy tone can be selected if the respective subscriber is
offline.
 Secretary transfer at line fault


It is possible to configure a transfer to a secretary number when calling a subscriber with a line fault.
Configuration CCT 800 (subscriber with line fault)

 Activate the checkboxes Line monitoring and Offline at line fault for the respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
 Activate the checkbox Call transfer as calling station for the calling subscriber and the checkbox
Call transfer as called station for the called subscriber (see page 232).
 Secretary Number: In this field, the call number of the secretary station can be entered.
 Secretary Description: In this field, the description of the secretary station will be displayed, which
is entered in the field Secretary Number. The description can be changed at Subscriber >
General > tab Naming in the field Description.
168 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Privacy, busy, re-call request
Privacy function
If a subscriber does not wish to be called aloud, he has the possibility to protect his station against calls.
If a subscriber protected by privacy is called, both the caller and the receiver are given an acoustic
signal (privacy signal). At the called station the red lamp blinks, with display stations the display text
of the caller is indicated in the display.
The call is taken over by dialling any button or by lifting up the station (with EE311, EF311, EE320,
EE411, EE420 or EE811). Both stations disconnect automatically if the call is not answered within a
configurable time (by default, 30 seconds).
Calling station (“Michael White”)
Conversation
35
Sam Brown
Privacy Call
Please wait
T-Intrude
X-Cancel
Called station (“Sam Brown”)
Conversation
20
Michael White
Privacy Call
0-Take Call
X-Cancel
There are different possibilities of activating privacy function, either at the station or by configuration,
which are described below.
NOTE:
As of PRO800 1.1 privacy state remains active after a restart of the Intercom Server.

 LED when private: Activate this checkbox to enable the blinking LED, while it is turned to the side
(only for analogue stations).
1.5/0619 169
Privacy, busy, re-call request Intercom Server Configuration
 Permanent privacy function configurable

There are two different types of permanent privacy functions:
 Permanent privacy depending on the called station
Each station can be configured for permanent privacy. In this case, all incoming conversations at this
station have to be taken over with any button or by lifting the station (with EE 411, EE 420, EE 311,
EE 320 or EE 811).
 Permanent Privacy Depending on the calling station
Each station can be configured to permanent privacy when calling another station. These stations
can call to other stations only in privacy. Calls to these stations however are received loudspeaking.

 Activate the checkboxes Fix as calling and/or Fix as called for the respective subscriber.
 Privacy function activated at the station

Activate privacy function at the station with 031
Each station entitled for privacy function can activate privacy function with 031. The privacy function
can be deactivated with 030. At a stations with dot-matrix display the following help is displayed af-
ter dialling of 03:
Dial
03
Privacy
Status: OFF
0-Switch ON
X-Cancel
Privacy function by turning the station

With stations EE 411, EE 311 or EE 811 privacy can be activated by turning the station to the side (no
secretary transfer may be configured). In order to take over a call the station is turned back. Privacy
function by turning the station can be disabled (see page 137).

 Permission Privacy: Activate this checkbox to enable the privacy mode at the respective sub-
scriber with “031”.
 Permission privacy via tilting: Activate this checkbox to enable the privacy mode by turning the
170 1.5/0619
Indication of the station's status

After dialling 03 the status of the station is indicated with a permanent signal for “loudspeaking” or
an interrupted signal (acknowledgment signal) for “privacy”. At display stations, active privacy func-
tions are additionally indicated:
20
Klaus Kurz
Privacy
d-Menu
311A/EE 411
Switch-off time
If a privacy call is not taken over within a configurable time, both stations switch off automatically.

 Switch off time privacy calls [s]: In this field, the switch-off time of privacy calls can be changed
(0 = function disabled, by default 30 seconds).
block.
 Intrusion function at a private subscriber

When in need of an urgent connection with a private subscriber, the caller has the possibility to pass
on an information by pressing button T. After releasing of button T “Knocking” is ended, both
stations receive again the privacy signal.

 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, call transfer, Re-Call Request
 Activate the checkbox Intrusion when private for the respective subscriber.
 Allow intrusion: Activate this checkbox to “knock” at the respective called subscriber.
1.5/0619 171
 Waiting information for private subscriber

If a private subscriber is called, in standard the calling station receives the privacy tone. Instead of this
a music channel for feed in of waiting information or music can be defined. All (already configured)
music channels are available. It can be defined separately for each subscriber if he receives the defined
music channel or the standard tone.

 Privacy: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected as waiting signal for
private subscribers (e.g. 4T1).
 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the defined music program at
the respective subscriber. If this checkbox is deactivated, the selected subscriber receives the
standard privacy tone.
 4 kHz as privacy tone

It is possible to define a 4 kHz Tone as call indication for stations switched to privacy mode.

 4 kHz as privacy tone: Activate this checkbox to indicate privacy calls with a 4kHz tone at the
 Attendant contact for status “privacy”

An attendant contact (see page 208) can be configured for stations switched to privacy mode. The relay
is closed as long as the station is switched to privacy mode.

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call No./Function
  Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
 With “by card”, all available outputs, sorted by cards, can be selected.
 With “by subscriber”, all available station outputs, sorted by subscribers, can be selected. Further
information to activate station outputs can be found on page 200.
ATTENTION:
Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacities can be found on page 477!
 Click on the button Configure Functions.

 Right-click and select “Add call no. / function”.
 In the field Call No./Function, enter the code “031”.
 Click on the button Accept to save the changes.
NOTE:
Several outputs can be configured for the same subscriber with either the same or different codes.
172 1.5/0619
Busy functions
 Acoustic and visual busy indication
When calling a subscriber who is already talking, the caller hears an acoustic signal (busy signal)
indicating that the station is busy. With display stations EE 311/EE 411 the display text of the called sta-
tion is additionally indicated in the display. At stations with dot-matrix display the caller gets the fol-
lowing display:
Conversation
20 Dave Grohl
Dave Grohl
Busy
0-Wait
T-Intrude
X-Cancel
All incoming calls are stored, also if the subscriber is called from several stations at the same time.
 Automatic re-call in case of “Busy”

As soon as the called subscriber finishes his conversation, the new call to the waiting subscriber is
connected automatically. The caller can end the waiting position on his station at any time with X.
 Switch-off busy signal while waiting for re-call

If no acoustic signal is desired while waiting for a number to become free, it can be switched off by
dialling 0 (if “Music on waiting” is configured the waiting signal is not switched off!). As indication of
the “waiting position” the red lamp blinks, at stations with dot-matrix display “Please wait” appears in
the display.
Conversation
20
James Bond
Busy
Please wait
T-Intrude
X-Cancel
Waiting occupies no speech link. The call is set up automatically as soon as the called station is free.
1.5/0619 173
 Waiting information for busy subscriber

If a busy subscriber is called, in standard the calling station receives the busy tone. Instead of this a
music channel for feed in of waiting information or music can be defined. All (already configured)
music channels are available. It can be defined separately for each subscriber if he receives the defined
music channel or the standard tone.

 Busy: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected as waiting signal for busy
subscribers.
 Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy
 Music on Waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the defined music program at
the respective subscriber. If this checkbox is deactivated, the selected subscriber receives the stand-
ard busy tone.
 Acoustic and visual indication waiting subscriber

 Double minute signal in case of waiting subscriber
In order to show a talking subscriber that during his conversation he is called by another subscriber,
two successive minute signals sound on his station. With display stations the display text of the waiting
subscriber blinks in the display after the double minute signal (immediately after the call of the waiting
subscriber, then once per minute).
 Intrusion function at a busy subscriber

When in need of an urgent connection with a busy subscriber, the caller has the possibility to pass on
an information by pressing button T. During this period the conversation partner of the busy sub-
scriber is given an acoustic information signal (privacy signal) and the blinking red lamp. Instead of the
privacy signal a music channel for feed-in of waiting information or music can be switched on. All
previously defined music channels can be used as waiting signal. It is possible to selectively define
which subscribers shall receive this waiting information.

 Activate the checkbox Intrusion when busy for the calling subscriber.
 Allow intrusion: Activate this checkbox to “knock” at the respective called subscriber.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common / Waiting signals
 Microphone mute: In this drop-down list, a configured music program can be selected as waiting
signal at intrusion.
 Music on waiting (Busy/Privacy): Activate this checkbox to receive the defined music program at
the respective subscriber. If this checkbox is deactivated, the selected subscriber receives the
standard busy tone.
174 1.5/0619
 Priority call with disconnection of busy subscribers

 Manual Priority Call: If a subscriber with entitlement for priority calls a subscriber that is busy, he
can activate priority function with button T. The existing conversation is interrupted and the desired
connection is immediately established. A priority call also interrupts functions that the called
subscriber has activated (e.g. conference, call request to a control desk; but no All Calls/group calls).
If all speech links in the Intercom Server are busy and a subscriber with entitlement for priority calls
wants to build up a conversation, another conversation is interrupted, so that a speech link becomes
free.
 Automatic Priority Call: It is also possible to configure that calls from certain subscribers interrupt
existing conversations automatically, without having to press a button.

 Priority call: In this drop-down list, the priority call mode can be selected. the following modes are
available:
 None: This subscriber has no entitlement for priority calls. In this case, the button T is used for
knocking” (see page 174).
 Manual: This subscriber can interrupt conversations between other subscribers with button T.
 Automatic: A call from this subscriber interrupts other conversations automatically.
 Single priority call

Via direct dialling, an entry in the F2 menu or initiation of an input it is possible to allow a single priority
call per subscriber.
 If the code “9T971” is dialled (direct dialling, an entry in the F2 menu or initiation of an input) the
next conversation built-up is a priority call.
 i.e. the call, initiated after dialling the code, is built-up as priority call and interrupts other
conversations, see above.s
ATTENTION:
The configured hierarchies remain active (see above)!

 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “9T971” for the respective subscriber (see
page 180).
1.5/0619 175
Re-call request
 Send re-call requests
If a called subscriber does not answer, the station is busy or in privacy mode, a re-call request can be
left at the called station with after-dialling the button 5. The conversation is automatically ended. A
re-call request can be deleted again by calling the station once again and pressing button 6. At each
subscriber any number of re-call requests can be stored. The re-call requests are indicated and an-
swered in order of time.
Configuration via CCT 800 only for receiver required (see below)
 Send re-call requests in case of privacy call


Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Send re-call requests in case of privacy call
VirtuoSIS
In case of an incoming call, the called subscriber can press the 5 button to end the call without
LICENCE PRO6U accepting it and to leave a re-call request at the calling station. With PRO 800 6.0 or lower, an
incoming privacy call has to be accepted first in order to leave a re-call request at the calling
station.
Configuration via CCT 800 only for receiver required (see below)
 Receive re-call requests

A re-call request is indicated at the called station in the following way:
dot-matrix display: EE311A/EE411: Call number of the

Calling number and name of the caller are indicated in caller is indicated blinking in the display;
the display, the conversation lamp blinks. the conversation lamp blinks.
22
Joe Cocker
Please call me
›Re-call
176 1.5/0619
EE 311A/EE 411
The re-call request is answered with button F or by dialling the calling number of the subscriber who
has left the re-call request (stations without function keys can answer re-call requests with 5T). The
conversation is built up automatically and the re-call request is deleted. A re-call request can also be
deleted without building up a conversation by pressing button X for at least one second.
 Feature PRO 800 6.3 and VirtuoSIS 7.1 – Indication of call number and name of the
 VirtuoSIS phone at re-recall request over SIP trunk
 LICENCE SIS7U With sending a re-call request over a SIP trunk, the name and phone number will be displayed
at the receiver station. All re-call requests are saved in the call history (entries won‘t be deleted
VirtuoSIS at a restart).
LICENCE PRO6U
 Receiver must have feature level “D”.
 Per SIP trunk, only the latest re-call request will be shown at the called subscriber.
 At outgoing calls, the phone number of the station and the name of the SIP call will be dis-
played.
 A re-call is not possible if one of the following functions has been configured for the respec-
tive SIP trunk:
 Auto dialler mode (see page 434)
 SIP trunk channels (see page 432)

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter185
 Make sure that the checkbox Disable after-dialling is disabled for the respective subscriber.
 Activate the checkbox Receive Recall Request for the respective subscriber.
 Date and time display at re-call requests


Feature PRO 800 6.0 – date and time display at re-call requests
VirtuoSIS If a re-call request is left at a subscriber, date and time of the incoming call is automatically
LICENCE PRO6U
indicated.
Date and time is indicated at the called station in the following way:
22 22 22
Joe Cocker
Joe Cocker Please call me Joe Cocker
Please call me 01.03.16 11:04 Please call me
01.03.16 10:48 01.03.16 11:47
› Re-call
›Re-call Re-call
NOTE:
This function is not available for seven-segment displays (EE 311A/EE 411).
Date and time will only be indicated if the respective Intercom Server has been time synchronised via
an SNTP server.
Configuration via CCT 800 only for receiver required (see page 176)
1.5/0619 177
 Activate call back reminder

It is possible to activate a reminder for oneself to call another subscriber. it can be activated by pressing
button 4 during a conversation with a subscriber. The conversation is automatically quit and in the
display the call number / display text of the subscriber to be called is indicated.
dot-matrix display: EE311A/EE411: Call number of the

Call number and display text of the subscriber to be called subscriber to be called is displayed
is displayed, the conversation lamp blinks. linking, the conversation lamp blinks.
22
Joe Cocker
Please call me
›Re-call
EE 311A/EE 411
The call back reminder can be carried out with button F or dialling of the call number (stations without
function keys can answer re-call requests with 5T). The conversation is built-up automatically and the
call back reminder is deleted. A call back reminder can also be ended without building up a conversa-
tion by pressing button X for at least one second.

 Activate the checkbox Receive Recall Request for the respective subscriber.
 Scrolling of re-call requests/call back reminders in the display

If several re-call requests / call back reminders have been left at a station, this is indicated in the follow-
ing way:
dot-matrix display: EE311A/EE411: The first re-call

“Scrolling” is displayed in addition. request is indicated blinking in the
display with points.
22
Joe Cocker
Please call me
›Re-call
178 1.5/0619
EE 311A/EE 411
The different re-call requests / call back reminders can be scrolled with buttons D and E and answered
(or deleted) in any order.
 Restoring of re-call requests/call back reminders after warmstart

Re-call requests and call back reminders can automatically be restored after a warmstart of the Inter-
com Server.
ATTENTION:
The configured hierarchies remain active (see page 175)!
1.5/0619 179
Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy Intercom Server Configuration
Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy
Direct dialling
PRO 800 1.1 or lower PRO 800 1.2 or higher
Maximum number of digits for
direct dialling targets 8 1) 18 2) 3)
1)
Only up to 4-digit direct dialling codes can be used for 8-digit call numbers.
2)
Required when using 8-digit call numbers (e.g. for control desk call transfers).
3)
Cannot be used directly for direct dialling buttons (e.g. EE 380 and EE 880). An up to 4-digit direct dialling
code has to be configured for the subscriber with an up to 18-digit direct dialling target.
NOTES: Restrictions
 Direct dialling codes cannot be used as direct dialling targets.
 A maximum of 339 direct dialling targets can be configured per station (min. CCT 800 1.1 see
page 476).
ATTENTION:
Configured direct dialling targets require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server. A list of
ATTENTION:
A speed dialling destination can not contain spaces.
 Direct dialling for all subscribers

An up to 18-digit direct dialling target can be configured for each button or button sequence (max. 4-
digits). This direct dialling target is valid for the entire Intercom Server block, but can be replaced by
direct diallings of a single subscriber (see page 181). Button sequences, which require a pause during
dialling cannot be configured (e.g. call a door station and open the door with after dialling). Follow the
instructions below:

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the desired direct dialling can be entered as follows for the respective
Intercom Server block:
Type of direct dialling Description
1-digit direct dialling code and up to 4-digit direct dialling target (e.g. “1=010” or
Button
“2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via commas.
Max. 4-digit direct dialling code and up to 18-digit direct dialling target (e.g.
Button sequence “T1=010” or “T2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via com-
mas.
180 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling, button disabling, hierarchy
 Direct dialling for selective subscribers

An up to 18-digit direct dialling target can be configured for each button or button sequence (max. 4-
digits). This direct dialling target is valid for the selected subscriber (also for „Direct dialling for all sub-
scribers”). Button sequences, which require a pause during dialling cannot be configured (e.g. call a
door station and open the door with after dialling). Follow the instructions below:

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the desired direct dialling can be entered as follows for the respective
subscriber:
Type of direct dialling Description
1-digit direct dialling code and up to 4-digit direct dialling target (e.g. “1=010” or
Button
“2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via commas.
Max. 4-digit direct dialling code and up to 18-digit direct dialling target (e.g.
Button sequence “T1=010” or “T2=011” for group calls). Several definitions are separated via com-
mas.
 PRO 800
Feature PRO 800 5.0 – function keys with direct dialling
LICENCE PRO5U The function keys F1 to F7 can be configured with direct dialling.
Max. 8-digit direct dialling target (e.g. “T1=010” or “T2=011” for group calls).
Function key (F1 to F7)
Several definitions are separated via commas. 1)
1) If a direct dialling target is configured for a function key, the respective function menu cannot longer be
used!
NOTE: 1-digit direct dialling with feature level A

With feature level A, a 1-digit direct dialling is only possible for ringing at group 0 (e.g. 0=980), see
page 287.
 Direct dialling configured at the station

Add direct dialling
Follow the instructions below to configure direct dialling directly at the station:
1. Enter the code 9T1.
2. Enter the desired direct dialling code (max. 4-digit).
3. Acknowledge with F.
4. Enter the desired direct dialling target (max. 8-digit).
ATTENTION:
If direct dialling is configured for button 9, the code 9T1 can only be dialled if the direct dialling “T=-
” is configured for the respective subscriber!
GOOD TO KNOW: Indication of long direct dialling targets

With more than 6-digit direct dialling targets, the display switches in a rhythm of one second between
the first 5 digits (with an arrow at the right) and the last digits (arrow at the left). The configuration of
direct dialling at the station can be disabled with the direct dialling “9T1=X” in the field Direct
Dialling.
1.5/0619 181
Remove direct dialling

Follow the instructions below to remove a configured direct dialling from the station:
1. Enter the code 9T1.
2. Enter the button which you want to delete.
3. Acknowledge with F (the selected direct dialling is shown).
4. Press X.
ATTENTION:
If direct dialling is configured for button 9, the code 9T1 can only be dialled if the direct dialling “T=-
” is configured for the respective subscriber!
 Switch-over direct dialling/normal dialling

A button configured with direct dialling can be dialled anyway by pre-dialling the button T (e.g. if direct
dialling is configured for button 1, the call number 12 can be called with dialling the button sequence
T12). Follow the instructions below:

 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling “T=-”.
 Direct dialling with automatic disconnection

Calls can be established and switched on active at Intercom station via direct dialling buttons (i.e. with
1-digit direct dialling code) as long as the respective direct dialling button is pressed. The call is termi-
nated automatically when the direct dialling button has been released. Follow the instructions below:

 Activate the checkbox Disconnect on release.
 Toggle between stations

Calls can be established one after the other at Intercom stations via direct dialling buttons (i.e. with 1-
digit direct dialling code), without the need to end the active conversation by pressing X. In this case,
after dialling is not available (e.g. for door opening). Follow the instructions below:

 Activate the checkbox Toggle Mode.
182 1.5/0619
 Function keys with direct dialling (only EE 7000)


PRO 800
Feature PRO 800 5.0 – Function keys with direct dialling
LICENCE PRO5U Direct dialling targets can be configured for the function keys F1 – F6 of the station EE 7000.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE 7000 > tab Function Keys
 Short dial selective F1 to Short dial selective F6: In these fields, the desired direct dialling tar-
get can be entered for the respective function keys. At Subscriber > Direct Dialling, an entry will
be created automatically with the configured direct dialling for the respective subscriber.
ATTENTION:
In PRO 800 5.0, the function keys have to be configured in reversed order (F1=F6, F2=F5, F3=F4)!
 Send ICX messages via direct dialling


Pre-configured ICX messages can be sent with dialling a direct dialling code via function code “9T5”.
Follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Parameter > ICX parameter
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add parameter”.
3. Click on the button Configure to open the configuration dialogue.
4. Right-click and select “add entry”. The field ID is enabled.
5. In the field ID, enter any ID for the ICX message (01 – 99). The fields task, type and data are enabled.
NOTE: Unique ID per subscriber

The ID of the ICX message is always 2 digits long and must be unique per subscriber.
6. In the field Task, enter the task number of the ICX message (e.g. “40”). In order to send an ICX
message to an other ICX interface, an ICX tunnel message has to be sent with task “6A”.
7. In the field Type, enter the type for the ICX message (e.g. “80”).
8. Optional: In the field Data, enter the data of the ICX message.

9. Go to: Subscriber > Direct dialling

10. In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “9T5” followed by the ID of the ICX
message to be sent (e.g. “0=9T501” to send the ICX message with ID “01”).
1.5/0619 183
 Disabling of buttons
For each station single buttons can be disabled with the direct dialling function.

 Go to: Subscribers > Direct Dialling
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “X” for the button that shall disabled in an
Intercom Server block or per subscriber (e.g. “4=X”, for disabling of button 4).
NOTE:
If a number is locked at the Intercom Server and however, direct dialling is configured, the direct
dialling has a higher priority and is carried out.
 Disabling the menu of WS stations

 For WS stations, the menu button can be disabled with the direct dialling function.
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “F7=-” to disable the menu button in an
Intercom Server block or per subscriber.
 Disabling of the complete keypad via input

Over an input the complete keyboard of an Intercom station can be disabled.

 Configure the function “Input changes button of a subscriber” for the respective input (see
page 199).
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the input of the respective subscriber can be entered that shall disable
the keyboard (e.g. “T=X”, e.g. for short circuit and “T=T” for the inactive state).
 The following direct dialling is configured for the respective subscriber:
“T=-, 0=X, 1=X, 2=X, 3=X, 4=X, 5=X, 6=X, 7=X, 8=X, 9=X”.
NOTE:
As long the input is closed, the whole keyboard is disabled. When the input is open, dialling can
be carried out with pre-dialling of T.
184 1.5/0619
 Hierarchy level

In order to block calls from certain subscribers to certain stations it is possible to arrange the subscriber
numbers into hierarchy levels. The call relations between the levels can be configured as desired that
means for each of the 15 levels you may define to which level a call may be carried out or not.
General concept
 By default, the 15 hierarchy levels are divided into 8 main hierarchy levels (level 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13
and 15) and 7 interim hierarchy levels (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14) of hierarchy.
 The priority of the levels starts with 1 (lowest priority).
 Each main level is able to call into the next higher level and into all lower levels.
 Each interim level is able to call into the next higher main and interim hierarchy level and into all
lower levels (e.g. level 2 can call levels 3 and 4).
Hierarchy level Can built-up a call too these hierarchy levels
00 (standard) 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
01 00, 01, 02
02 00, 01, 02, 03, 04
03 00, 01, 02, 03, 04
04 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06
05 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06
06 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08
07 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08
08 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10
09 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10
10 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12
11 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12
12 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
13 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
14 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
15 00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

 Hierarchy: In this drop-down list, the number of the hierarchy level can be selected for the
respective subscriber (if a user is logged in at the respective subscriber at a configuration without
restart, the configuration is applied at the user logout). Further information about user login can be
found on page 167.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Hierarchy levels
 Activate the desired checkboxes of the respective hierarchy level in the corresponding row of a level
(“Level 1” to “Level 15”) to define, to which levels can be called (an activated checkbox means this
level can be called).
 Changing hierarchy levels via ICX messages


The hierarchy levels of stations can be changed in the entire Intercom Server network (also WAN re-
gions) with ICX commands.
NOTE:
1.5/0619 185
Direct dialling button, direct dialling module Intercom Server Configuration
Direct dialling button, direct dialling module

With CCT 800 1.3 or higher, the configuration dialogues for direct dialling modules and devices with
direct dialling buttons have been unified.
Functions of the direct dialling module

Not every function can be carried out with each direct dialling modules. The following table shows
which function the respective direct dialling module can perform:
“Templates” (LED templates)
Call,
“Mixing radio conferen-
“Send ICX messages via

direct dialling button”
“Control of outputs”
“dB range display”

“Input simulation”
“Remote control”
“Direct dialling,
“Input message”
“Single button”
“PA functions”
Conversation”
ces”
EE 380           
Intercom Client           
WSDD (53V/59V)           
EE 8000           
Conductor           
NOTE:
The Intercom stations EE 880 and EE 6000 have to be configured in a different way.
For further information about the configuration of direct dialling modules, see the manuals “EE 880”
and “EE 6000”.
Allocation of direct dialling modules (WSDD)

For the direct dialling modules WSDD 53V and WSDD 59V an allocation to the desired device is
necessary because the modules are not recognized when reading out the Intercom Server. The direct
dialling modules can be used with all digital and IP WS stations and all devices with input level
detection (e.g. Intercom modules ET808A or ET908A). The modules can be allocated manually to the
inputs (IN1, IN2 or IN3).
 Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Direct dialling module allocation only with input level detection
 VirtuoSIS
In the configuration software CCT 800, the drop-down lists Function: IN1 to Function: IN3
LICENCE PRO6U (see below) will only be enabled for stations with input level detection. Stations without input
level detection are not compatible with the direct dialling modules “WSDD 53V” and
“WSDD 59V”. A list of all station types with input level detection can be found on page 478.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Direct dialling buttons
 Function: IN1 to Function: IN3: In these drop-down lists, the desired direct dialling module can
186 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Direct dialling button, direct dialling module
be selected for the respective subscriber.
ATTENTION:
The intensity of the background lighting can only be changed via potentiometer on the backside of
the module. For further information about the connection of the power supply and the con-
figuration of the background lighting, see the data sheet “WSDD”!
Templates
There are templates available to indicate the different button/indication functions. With these tem-
plates, it is possible to configure the colour and blink mode of the control desk LED buttons individual-
ly. Different templates can be used for the different button/indication functions.
Templates
Output /
Conversation Call request /
special Line fault
indication input message
functions
Direct dialling, Call, Conversa-
  - 
tion
Single button - - - -
Control of outputs - -  -
Button-/indication functions
Input simulation - - - -
Input message -  - 
Mixing radio conferences - -  -
PA functions - -  -
dB range display - -  -
Remote control - - - -
Switching privacy - -  -
Switching headset - -  -
Switch loudspeaker on - -  -
Lock microphone - -  -
Unlock key - -  -
Level switching - -  -
If an indication type should apply for one or more Intercom Server blocks, a configuration in CCT 800
must be made.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings > drop-down list Direct
dialling buttons - block
Line fault
Line faults are displayed automatically in “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation” and “Input message”.
The line fault indication can be configured separately for stations and inputs.
To show line faults on the control desk display, this must be configured in CCT 800.
 Stations: Line fault monitoring must be activated for the respective station, see “Line fault monito-
ring for an Intercom station” on page 308.
 Inputs: A line fault call type must be configured for the respective input, see “Call types” on
page 324.
To show line faults on the LED buttons of the control desk, this must be configured in CCT 800.
 Stations: An LED button must be configured as “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation” for the respec-
tive station.
 Inputs: An LED button must be configured as “Input message” for the respective input.
1.5/0619 187

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Tem-
plates > tab Line fault
 Stations colour: In this drop-down list, the colour of the LED button can be selected to indicate sta-
tion line faults.
 Stations blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button can be selected to
indicate station line faults.
 Inputs colour: In this drop-down list, the colour of the LED button can be selected to indicate input
line faults.
 Inputs blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button can be selected to
indicate input line faults.
Predefined functions
LED buttons can be referred with predefined functions under “Predefined functions”. These preconfig-
ured functions can be configured individually and detailed under “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation”,
see below.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Prede-
fined functions > desired module
 Button no.: In this field, the module and button number is shown.
 Function: In this drop-down list, the pre-configured function can be selected.
 Call number / Button: In this field, the parameter of the respective function can be entered (e.g.
button (0 - 9, T), functions codes, call number of a subscriber, input or output). If this field is empty,
no function is carried out.
NOTE: Restriction of the parameter to 8 digits

The parameters are restricted to 8 digits (e.g. short numbers).
  Description - Call number / Button: In this field, the description of the direct dialling button, sub-
scriber, input or output entered in the field Call number / Button is displayed (only valid if one of
the functions “Direct dialling, Call, Conversation”, “Control of outputs”, “Input simulation” or “Input
message” is selected in the drop-down list Function). The description can be changed under Sub-
scriber > General > tab Naming in the field Description.
NOTE: Parameter not available

If the entered parameter is not available (e.g. the subscriber with this call number does not exist),
“???” will be displayed instead.
Button/indication functions
For LED buttons, functions can be configured. Functions created under “Predefined functions” can be
configured in in the “Button/indication functions” dialogue.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > sub-folder subscriber > Button-
/ Indication function > desired function
 Right-click and select the desired keypad under “add button” and then select the desired button.
188 1.5/0619
NOTE: Activate LED buttons for Conductor

To indicate functions on the LED buttons of a CD series, activate the checkbox LED-Indication CD se-
ries under Outputs > General Settings.
 Direct dialling, Call, Conversation

Using an LED button, a call can be established and ended, an active call request can be displayed and
acknowledged or a number sequence dialable function can be executed.

 Call number: In this field, the desired call number can be entered.
 Delete before press Activate this checkbox to dial the sequence “XX” before dialling the call
number.
 Delete after release Activate this checkbox to dial the sequence “XX” after releasing.
 Conversation indication: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be select-
ed. The template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the following statuses:
 During a call between the control desk and the call number, which is defined for an LED button of
the control desk.
 If busy – when the call number defined for an LED button of the control desk has a call with another
subscriber.
 Indication call requests: In this drop-down list, one out of seven available templates can be se-
lected. The template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for a call request (nor-
mal and emergency call).
Configure the template for the conversation indication:

plates > tab Conversation indication
 Conversation colour: In this drop-down list, the colour of the LED button can be selected to display
a conversation.
 Conversation blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button during a con-
versation can be selected.
 Busy colour: In this drop-down list, the LED button colour can be selected to indicate the respective
subscriber is busy.
 Busy blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the LED button can be selected to
indicate the respective subscriber is busy.
Configure the template for call request indication:

plates > tab Call request / Input message
 Normal call / Active 1 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate a nor-
mal call.
 Normal call / Active 1 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to in-
dicate a normal call.
 Emergency call / Active 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate an
emergency call.
 Emergency call / Active 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to
indicate an emergency call.
 Single button
Using an LED button, an action can be carried out. An LED button can be configured to function as the
respective button.
1.5/0619 189

 Button: In this field, the desired button can be entered (1–9, 0, X, T, F4 = D, F5 = E, F6 = F).
 Function: In this drop-down list, the action to be performed when the defined direct dialling button
is pressed can be selected.
 Control of outputs
Using an LED button, an output can be switched. The LED button indicates the state of the output.

 Call number: In this field, the call number of the output to be controlled can be entered.
NOTE: Controlling a non-dialable output with an ICX message

If the output should be selected via an ICX message (because e.g. in the field call number is entered
a non-dialable call number), select under Outputs > General Settings in the drop-down list ICX -
Message the entry “on change” for the respective output.
 Function: In this drop-down list, the action of the output can be selected.
 Indication output: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be selected. The
template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the different output states:
open, closed and blinking.
Configure the template of output indication:

plates > tab Output- / Special-functions
 OFF / Condition 1 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the state
“output open”.
 OFF / Condition 1 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate
the state “output open”.
 ON / Condition 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the state
“output closed”.
 ON / Condition 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate
the state “output closed”.
 Blinking / Condition 3 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the
state “output toggle”.
 Blinking / Condition 3 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indi-
cate the state “output toggle”.
 Input simulation
Using an LED button, the input level can be simulated.

 Call number: In this field, the call number of the input to be controlled can be entered.
 Level when pressed: In this drop-down list, the level simulated when the button is pressed can be
selected.
 Level when released: In this drop-down list, the level simulated when the button is pressed can be
released.
190 1.5/0619
 Input message
Using an LED button, an active input message can be displayed and acknowledged.

 Call number: In this field, the call number of the input which should be controlled can be entered.
Indication input message: In this drop-down list, one out of seven available templates can be select-
ed. The template defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for “active 1” and “active 2”.
Configure the template for output indication:

plates > tab Call request / Input message
 Normal call / Active 1 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate “active
1”.
 Normal call / Active 1 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the buttons can be
selected to indicate “active 1”.
 Emergency call / Active 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate
“active 2”.
 Emergency call / Active 2 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode of the buttons can
be selected to indicate “active 2”.
 Mixing radio conferences


Additional configurations have to be made for the indication of radio conference states on LED buttons,
see “Participant radio conference (listen and speak)” on page 260 and see “Audio mixing” on page 265.

 Mode: In this drop-down list, the following functions can be selected:
 “Disconnect all”: All connected channels will be disconnected.
 “Switch on”: The radio channel defined for the button will be connected if the button is pressed.
 “Selective Disconnect”: If the buttons for Selective Disconnect and Switch on are pressed at
the same time, an individual channel will be disconnected.
 Channel: In this drop-down list, the channel of the desired feed-in can be selected.
 Indication: In this drop-down list, one out of three available templates can be selected. The tem-
plate defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the activated channel and for talk-
ing.
Configure the template for radio conference state indication:

 ON / Condition 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the connect-
ed channel.
the connected channel.
 Blinking / Condition 3 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate that
the control desk or a squelch input has activated.
cate that the state control desk or a squelch input has activated.
 Indication squelch input


Feature PRO 800 3.x – indication squelch Input
PRO 800
If the squelch input for the radio subscriber is set, it will be indicated on the direct dialling
LICENCE PRO3U buttons of a EE380A or Conductor.
1.5/0619 191
 PA functions

Using an LED button, PA announcements can be started and stopped.
NOTE: LED buttons indicate the state of PA announcements

The state of the PA announcement is shown on the configured LED button. For further information,
see ”PA announcement” on page 267.

/Indication function > tab PA functions
 Mode: In this drop-down list, the mode for selecting and triggering PA announcements can be se-
lected. The following modes are available:
 “Entire selection”: Select all PA zones.
 “Single selection”: Select a PA zone that is selected in the field Zone Nr.
 “Selective start: Trigger a PA announcement in all PA zones that have been selected via the op-
tions “Entire selection” and “Single selection”.
 “Single start”: Trigger a PA announcement in the PA zone that is selected in the drop-down list
Zone Nr.
See the following overview of the function range of the modes:
Pre-recorded audio Pre-recorded audio
Button no. Mode Zone no. Priority Indication
ID “gong” ID “announcement”
01 – 12 Entire selection     
01 – 12 Single selection     
01 – 12 Selective start     
01 – 12 Single start     
 VirtuoSIS
Feature PRO 800 6.0 – manual control of PA announcements
LICENCE PRO6U Manual control to trigger and cancel PA announcements with the drop-down list Function.
ATTENTION: unlock drop-down list Function

In the drop-down list Mode, select either the entry “Selective start” or “Single start” to enable the
drop-down list Function!
 Function: In this drop-down list, an action can be selected for the manual control of a PA
announcement. The following functions are available:
 “Trigger announcement”: Press the selected direct dialling button to trigger a PA announcement
in the selected PA zones. A PA announcement can either be cancelled via an ICX message or by
pressing the button X.
NOTE: Further information on ICX messages

 “Toggle announcement”: Press the selected direct dialling button to switch between triggering
and terminating a PA announcement in the selected PA zones.
 “Announcement as long as button pressed”: Press and hold the selected direct dialling button to
trigger a PA announcement in the selected PA zones. Release this direct dialling button to cancel
the PA announcement.
 Zone Nr.: In this drop-down list, the PA zone can be selected for which a PA announcement is trig-
gered via a direct dialling button.
 Priority: In this field, the priority of the triggered PA announcement can be entered (01 to 99; see
page 267).
192 1.5/0619
 Pre-recorded audio ID Gong: In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio file can be entered for a
gong.
 Pre-recorded audio ID Announcement: In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio file to be
played back as a PA announcement can be entered (0 = manual PA announcement).
plate defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the different modes.
Configure the template of radio conferences state indication:

 The following states are indicated on the LED buttons it the respective mode is active.
Colour and blink mode Mode
Idle state entire selection
OFF / Condition 1 Idle state single selection
Idle state selective start
Idle state single start
ON / Condition 2
Active single selection or entire selection (if all zones are selected)
Single selection and active announcement, zone not busy (a zone with a
Blinking / Condition 3
higher priority can superimpose)
Active single start
Condition 4 Active single selection and announcement, zone is busy
Selective start, if zone is busy
GOOD TO KNOW: Mode “active”, mode “idle state”

 If the direct dialling button is pressed, the mode is “active”.
 If the direct dialling button is not pressed, the mode is “idle state”.
NOTE: Further information on PA announcement receiver

Further information about the configuration of PA announcement receiver can be found on page 268.
1.5/0619 193
 dB range display

Changes of the sound pressure level of a feed-in audio signal can send with an ICX message to the In-
tercom Server. The changes can be used for visualization with a direct dialling module or Studio.
Requirements for the dB range display:
 The audio signal must be configured and connected as a radio feed-in, see “Configuration of feed-
in (music and radio)” on page 256
 The control desk must be in mixing mode, see “Mixing radio conferences” on page 191
 The sound pressure levels must be defined, see “ICX message with sound pressure level change”
on page 334.
Requirements
 DSP 800A min. 2.0
 DSP 800A min. 2.0
 DSP 800B min. 1.2
 DSP 900A min. 5.0
 AF-I min. 5.5
 DSP 900B
 AF-D min. 1.0
 IoIP-Device 7.0

 Channel: In this drop-down list, the channel of the desired radio feed-in can be selected.
plate defines the colour and the blink mode of the LED button for the three level ranges
Configure the template for the sound pressure level indication:

 ON / Condition 2 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the dB range
1.
the dB range 1.
 Blinking / Condition 3 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the dB
range 2.
cate the dB range 2.
 Condition 4 colour: In this drop-down list, the colour can be selected to indicate the dB range 3.
 Condition 4 blink mode: In this drop-down list, the blink mode can be selected to indicate the dB
range 3.
194 1.5/0619
Configuration CCT 800 (if more than one radio feed-in)

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > Conference
 Immediate mix function: Activate this checkbox to use additional feed-in radio conferences.
ATTENTION: Immediate mix function

Individual channels cannot be selected as long as the checkbox immediate mix function is
activated. Thus, the volume control is only possible for the mix function!
It is possible just to display the sound pressure level visually on the direct dialling buttons, so that the
radio channels do not need to be heard:
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab conference
 dB Indication without active connection to 6T-channel: Activate this checkbox to indicate the
sound pressure level on the direct dialling buttons.
 Define the level ranges and ICX messages, see “ICX message with sound pressure level change” on
page 334.
 Remote control

Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Remote control of direct dialling buttons
VirtuoSIS
By pressing or releasing a direct dialling button, a pre-configured ICX command can be sent.
LICENCE PRO6U For further information about sending ICX commands, see “Direct dialling button control” in
the manual “ICX Protocol”.
NOTE:
 For Conductor no upgrade licence “Lx-PRO6U” is required.
 Up to PRO 800 6.0, this function is only supported by Conductor.

 Go to: Interfaces > Application-specific interfaces
 In the drop-down list Interface, select the desired ICX interface to output ICX commands.
NOTE: ICX licence required

The licence “L-ICX” is required to output ICX commands.
/Indication function > tab Remote control
 Call number: In this field, the desired call number of the subscriber can be entered.
 Function: In this drop-down list, the action for sending an preconfigured CX command can be se-
lected.
1.5/0619 195
 Send ICX messages via direct dialling button


Pre-configured ICX messaged can be sent by pressing a direct dialling button.

To enable sending of ICX messages, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Parameter > ICX parameter
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add parameter”.
3. Click on the button Configure to open the configuration dialogue.
4. Right-click and select “add entry”. The field ID is enabled.
5. In the field ID, enter an ID for the ICX message. The ID is equal to the numbering of the direct dialling
buttons of the connected direct dialling modules (1 – 12 for direct dialling module 1, 13 – 24 for direct
dialling module 2. E.g. the ICX message with ID “03” is sent by pressing the third direct dialling
button of the first direct dialling module, whereas the ICX message with ID “24” is sent by pressing
the last button of the second direct dialling module. The fields task, type and data are enabled.
NOTE: Unique ID per subscriber

The ID of the ICX message must be unique per subscriber.
6. In the field Task, enter the task number of the ICX message (e.g. “40”). In order to send an ICX
message to an other ICX interface, an ICX tunnel message has to be sent (task “6A”).
7. In the field Type, enter the type for the ICX message (e.g. “80”).
8. Optional: In the field Data, enter the data of the ICX message.

ATTENTION: Button and indication functions will be deactivated

If an ICX message is configured for a direct dialling button, configured button and indication func-
tions will be deactivated for this direct dialling button!
196 1.5/0619
 Bonding of direct dialling modules


Feature PRO 800 3.x – bonding of direct dialling modules
PRO 800
With this feature it is possible to create a bonding of non-audio clients or a Conductor to audio
LICENCE PRO3U subscribers. This allows you to create or increase the number of direct dialling buttons for an
audio subscriber.
Example
In this example, the host client uses the direct dialling buttons
of an Intercom Client direct dialling module. This makes it
possible to dial via the buttons on your PC and speak with clear
16 kHz Commend audio quality.

 Go to: Subscriber > Bonding
 Slave 1 to Slave 4: In these drop-down lists, a slave module can be selected to allocate them to the
respective Conductor or non-audio client.
NOTE:
 All audio clients can be used, as host client.
 The following subscribers can be used as slaves:
 All non-audio clients (WS TM, NAC Intercom Client, NAC Android Intercom Client).
 Conductor.
 In case a subscriber is disabled, the subscriber is already used as slave or cannot be used for the
bonding feature.
ATTENTION:
If an ICX message for the button is configured, pre-configured functions for these buttons are not
carried out!
1.5/0619 197
Input, output Intercom Server Configuration
Input, output
Dialling functions for inputs

An activated input can initiate different functions in the Intercom Server:
 Simulation of dialling at a certain subscriber, as soon as the input is activated, or
 Change the function of a subscriber's buttons while the input is active.
One input can initiate either dialling or changing the buttons, the functions cannot be combined. The
following inputs can be used:
 An input on a plug-in card Gx-8E8A or Gx-16E.
 An input on the motherboard G3-GEM (GE300) or on the power supply card G8-GEN (GE800).
 An internal input of a station (activation of these inputs see page 200).
 A virtual input (see page 214). These can be activated e.g. with the function “linking inputs to out-
puts” (see page 213).
Depending on the cabling of the inputs, five different switch steps can be indicated (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5
and short circuit). Applies only for inputs on the plug-in cards Gx-8E8A, Gx-16E, ET8E8A and the
following station types:
CD 800 EE 7000 EE 900A EF 962A
EF 962H EF 963A ES 962H ECCT 80008A
ET 962A ET 962H ET 970A ET 908A
EX 200 EX 7000 WS Serie ET 970H
The inputs can be wired according to one of the following methods:

IN
2k2 10k
Method 1: 15k
short 1k5 5k6
IN
2k2 6k8
Method 2: 15k short 1k5 5k6
ATTENTION:
With an input on the power supply card G8-GEN (GE800), on the motherboard G3-GEM (GE300) or
with a station internal input only two switch steps can be indicated (break and short). Virtual inputs
can indicate all five switch steps!
198 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Input, output
 Input initiates dialling at a subscriber

As soon as an input receives a certain level, a configured button or button sequence (max. 8 digits) is
dialled at a subscriber.

 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input initiates dialling”.
 Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling > sub-folder input
 Subscriber 1 to Subscriber 5: In these drop-down lists, the desired subscribers can be selected,
at which the dialling shall be initiated.
 Dial/Key: In this drop-down list, a separate dial (“Down” (for D), “Up” (for E), “Return” (for F))
can be selected for the respective input level of an input (Break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and Short). Alternative-
ly, a 1- to 8-digit button sequence can be entered (0 to 9, T, X).
ATTENTION:
In case the privacy mode is selected, two Levels for the Input has to be configured. Level 1 with
state “Press only” to activate privacy mode and Level 2 with state “Release only” to inactivate pri-
vacy mode!
 Press + Release, Press only and Release only: Select the desired radio button of the respective
input level to define for a single-digit dial if pressing and releasing of the button, only pressing of the
button or only releasing of the button shall be simulated (does not work for “Disconnect on
release”). For a button sequence only the radio button Press + Release is available.
Example
A foot switch shall work as press-to-talk button (T) for a certain Intercom station. For the input of the
foot switch, the dialling simulation Press only is configured at “Short” for the desired subscriber
Release only at “Break”.
ATTENTION:
When dialling, “XX” should be configured before the button sequence in order to make sure that the
station is in idle mode before dialling (e.g. “XX21” for calling station “21”)!
 Input changes button of a subscriber

An input can change the function of a subscriber's buttons as long as it is active.

 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input changes button
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input changes button”.
 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input changes button > sub-folder input
 Subscriber 1 to Subscriber 5: In these drop-down lists, up to 5 subscribers can be selected, whose
buttons shall be changed.
 Level for Input: In this drop-down list, up to four buttons can be selected at the respective input
level of an input (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and short).
 In the first drop-down list of an entry, select the button, which shall be changed at the respective
input level.
 In the second drop-down list of the same entry, select the desired button, to which the button shall
be changed at the respective input level.
Example: “Short: 0 = 1”, the button 0 works as 1, as long as the input is short-circuited (also valid
for configured direct dialling of these buttons). As soon as the input is open again, the button
behaves as configured at “Break” (e.g. 0 = 0).
1.5/0619 199
 Activation of internal inputs and outputs of stations

Some station types (e.g. EE 311A, EE 811A, ET 800A or ET 908H) have internal inputs and outputs that
can be used for functions like e.g. dialling simulation or attendant outputs. The internal inputs and
outputs of stations has to be activated in the program CCT 800 before they can be used.
NOTE:
Only activated internal inputs of a station are indicated at the tab “Inputs”. Up to 16 internal inputs can
be used per subscriber card (minus the number of subscribers). Outputs are not indicated in the tab
Outputs, but in the pop-up windows for selection of outputs for certain functions (e.g. attendant
contacts or door opener outputs). If inputs and outputs are activated for a station, and then a different
station type is connected, the definitions of the inputs and outputs are not changed!
ATTENTION:
 Station inputs can only handle “open” and “short” state! WS series stations can handle all five input
states!
 As of Server-ID “17” collisions may occur with the automatic assignment of station outputs when
multiple Intercom Servers are separately configured (offline) and then networked afterwards!
GOOD TO KNOW:
At Subscriber > Station properties, all available subscribers are indicated with the connected
station type.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Outputs
 OUT: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective output.
 Call number OUT: In this field, the calling number of the according input can be changed.
 IN: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective input.
 Call number IN: In this field, the calling number of the respective output can be changed.
 Using “IN 2” and “IN 4” at analogue WS series (WS 500/WS 800)


 Deactivation of privacy switching of “IN2”
The input “IN 2 (PTT)” is pre-configured for connection of a privacy switch. However, this standard
privacy switch of the input “IN 2 (PTT)” can be deactivated.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > WS Series > tab Inputs
 IN 2 (PTT): Activate this checkbox to enable the input 2 (PTT) for the respective analogue WS
station.
 Call number IN 2 (PTT): In this field, the call number of the input 2 (PTT) can be changed.
GOOD TO KNOW:
An additional internal input “IN 4” is available for the analogue WS series WS800A/WS500A. This
input can be activated/triggered via the “menu button (e.g. to trigger an ICX message). A separate
ICX messages can be configured for the two input levels (open and short; see page 202).
 IN 4: Activate this checkbox to enable the input 4 for the respective subscriber.
 Call number IN 4: In this field, the call number of the input 4 can be changed.
200 1.5/0619
 Using internal inputs as function keys (only EE 7000)


PRO 800
Feature PRO 800 5.0 – function keys simulated by internal inputs
LICENCE PRO5U The function keys (“F1” to “F6”) can be simulated by internal inputs.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > EE 7000 > tab Function Keys
 Input F1 to Input F6: Activate these checkboxes to simulate the respective function key via an
internal input. The field Short dial selective is disabled.
 Call Number Input: In this field, the call number of the input can be entered, which simulates the
respective function key.
ATTENTION:
In CCT 800 5.0, the function keys have to be configured in reversed order (F1 = F6, F2 = F5, F3 = F4)!
An entry is automatically be created at Subscriber > Inputs > General Settings with the config-
ured input for the respective subscriber.
NOTE:
Further information about the configuration of function keys with direct dialling can be found on
page 183.
 Position switch as input

At stations with position switch the position switch can be used as normal input, so that turning of the
station (e.g. initiates an input message or dialling simulation).

 Activate the checkbox IN 3 to enable the input 3 for the respective subscriber. The following
dialogue appears:
 Call number IN 3: In this field, the call number of the input 3 can be changed.
ATTENTION:
In case ICX messages (or EE380 LED button functions) are executed as an input, the make/break
status messages has to be sent in reverse!
1.5/0619 201
Input generates ICX message

It is possible to define an ICX message per input state that is sent to the selected interface when the
level is reached.

 Go to: Inputs > ICX at input
 Right-click on the desired input and select “add ICX at input”.
 1. ICX-Interface to 3. ICX-Interface: In these drop-down lists, up to three interfaces can be select-
ed, at which the ICX messages are put out.
GOOD TO KNOW:
If in the drop-down list 1. ICX - Interface the value “----” is selected, only internal ICX messages
will be received. If in the drop-down list 2. ICX - Interface or 3. ICX - Interface the value “----” is
selected, ICX messages will not be received over these ICX interfaces. Here are some examples for
receiving ICX messages:
 Only internal ICX messages will be received:
1. ICX - Interface: ----
 Only external ICX messages will be received:
1. ICX - Interface: z.B. ICX 1-0/10
 Internal as well as external messages will be received:
 Inputs > ICX at input > sub-folder input

 In this folder, an ICX message can be configured for the input states (open, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and short),
which is sent to the selected interface(s) when the respective input state becomes active.
 Condition: In this drop-down list, the condition of an input level can be selected, at which an ICX
message is sent.
 With this conditions (“break”: Error, “15k”: Idle, “5k6”: Active 1:, “1k5”: Active 2, “short”: Error),
one of the following wiring methods can be used:
IN
2k2 10k
Method 1: 15k
short 1k5 5k6
IN
2k2 6k8
Method 2: 15k short 1k5 5k6
 Task: In this field, the task number of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 Type: In this field, the type number of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 Data: In this field, the parameter of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 System no. receiver/ sender: In this field, the receiver/sender block number can be entered.
NOTE:
202 1.5/0619
NOTE:
For ICX at input a maximum of 150 digit long ICX messages are allowed. In case the data from an
ICX messages is longer than 22 digits, a not used ICX message is deactivated.
 “IN2” for external microphone


It is possible to use an external microphone with talk button in series that simulates e.g. button T at
the station when the PTT button is pressed (e.g. for radio applications).
Circuit for microphone with PTT button

EP+
EP–
Mic+
Mic–

 Activate the checkbox IN2 (PTT) to enable the input 2 (PTT) for the respective subscriber
(i.e. ET 311).
 Call number IN2 (PTT): In this field, the call number of the input can be changed
 Activate the checkbox IN2 at ext. mic. for the respective subscriber.
 For the respective input, either the function “input initiates dialling” (see page 199, e.g. for PTT
button: short = press only; break = release only for button T) or “ICX at input” can be configured
(see page 202).
1.5/0619 203
 “IN2” for handset


It is possible to use an external handset with a PTT button that simulates e.g. button T at the station
when the PTT button is pressed (e.g. for radio applications)
Circuit for handset with PTT button
EP+
10µF
EP–
Mic+
Mic–

 Activate the checkbox IN2 (PTT) to enable the input 2 (PTT) for the respective subscriber (i.e.
ET 311).
 Call number IN2 (PTT): In this field, the call number of the input can be changed
 Activate the checkbox IN2 at PTT button of handset for the respective subscriber.
 For the respective input, either the function “input initiates dialling” (see page 199, e.g. for PTT
button: short = press only; break = release only for button T) or “ICX at input” can be configured
(see page 202).
 De-bounce time for inputs

Per input a configurable time can be set: An input has to be active at least as long as the configured de-
bounce time, before it gets activated. If the input is switched off, it remains active as long as the
configured timer value.
Application
 Adjust de-bounce time for piezo-electric buttons.
NOTE:
The de-bounce time can only be used for inputs of interface cards and digital stations without DSP.

 Go to: Inputs > Common
 Input de-bounce time [ms]: In this drop-down list, the de-bounce time can be selected for the
respective input.
204 1.5/0619
 Button triggers virtual station input

It is possible to trigger 4 virtual station inputs via a button of the station (allocation via row / column
matrix).
Application
 Additional direct dialling buttons.
 F1, F2, F3 as direct dialling buttons.
 Deactivation of individual buttons (also functions buttons) via simulation of X.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Virtual Inputs
 Virtual IN: Activate this checkbox to enable the respective virtual input.
 Virtual call number: In thus field, the call number of the respective virtual input can be changed.
 Inputs > Key switches input
 Key: In this drop-down list, the button to simulate the input can be selected.
1.5/0619 205
 Access outputs via dialling


By dialling the call number of an output at a station the current status is indicated in the display. It now
is possible to activate, deactivate or toggle the output with various code numbers. Several outputs can
be controlled in parallel or one output is controlled by multiple stations.
Output inactive Output active

EE 311A / EE 411
dot-matrix display
9951 9951
Barrier SW Barrier SW
OFF ON
1-Switch ON 0-Switch OFF
X-Cancel X-Cancel
Dial Dial monochrome
9951 9951 LCD display
Barrier SW Barrier SW
Status: OFF Status: ON
1-Switch ON 1-Switch OFF

X-Cancel X-Cancel
colour TFT display
The following codes are possible:

 0: turn off (e.g. 9950 0: deactivate output)
 1: turn on (e.g. 9951 1: activate output)
 T: toggle (off  on/on  off)
 2: output activated as long as button is pressed (direct dialling not possible).
NOTE:
Output does not switch off if display indication has switched off before releasing button.
 3: Activate output until automatic quitting of display indication

The call number of the output and after dialling code can be dialled as follows
 Manually via keyboard.
 Output call number via direct dialling, manual entry of code.
 Via direct dialling at the station.
 Via function list B at a station EE 811 (with a 14-digit text).
206 1.5/0619
Automatic quitting of display indication

After a button is pressed at the station, the display is updated and a timer is activated (max. 17 min.)
for automatic quitting. If the output has been activated with button 3, it stays active until the display
indication is switched off automatically (by default 30 seconds).

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 When activated with button 3: In this field, the time can be changed, after which the display shall
be switched off automatically (by default 30 seconds).
Switch outputs via direct dialling

It is also possible to activate, deactivate or toggle outputs via direct dialling. The following direct
dialling definitions can be configured-example with output no. 1933:
 2 = 19330XX (to switch off the output “1933”)
 2 = 19331XX (to switch on the output “1933”)
 2 = 1933TXX (to toggle the output “1933” (switch on/off))
ATTENTION:
With after dialling of the button 3 the output is deactivated after 30 seconds (the time configured at
“Dial to output”, see above)!
Parallel outputs
It is possible to configure the same call number for multiple outputs in parallel. The entire group of
outputs is controlled simultaneously. The status of the “master output” is indicated in the display.
Simultaneous control by multiple stations

The same output can be controlled simultaneously by several stations. If the status is changed by a
station (e.g. activation), the modified status is indicated correctly at all other stations.
NOTE:
Via LAN and S0 connections, outputs must be located in the same Intercom Server configuration
block in order to synchronise the display indication at all stations. This Intercom Server configura-
tion block has also to be configured for the respective connections (e.g. IAX, TEL or SIS-SIP-T).

 Call number: In this field, the call numbers of the respective outputs can be changed (enter a
dialable call number).
ATTENTION:
The default call numbers will not work!
1.5/0619 207
 Output contacts for system features

For each station one or several output contacts can be configured for different situations (e.g. conver-
sation, All Call or ringing). The following possibilities can be combined:
 Call indication privacy call: The relay is closed during a privacy call until the call is taken over.
 Subscriber with conversation: The relay is closed during an active conversation.
GOOD TO KNOW: Relay will be closed independent of conversation status

The relay will be closed independent of the conversation status (i.e. also for privacy call or busy
subscriber).
 Red lamp active: The relay is closed as long as the red lamp / multifunctional LED at the station is
on (e.g. during conversations, no indication of All Calls and audio monitoring).
 Loudspeaker active: The relay is closed as long as a signal is on the loudspeaker (also during All
Calls).
 Conversation with subscriber: The relay is closed as long as the subscriber has a conversation
with a pre-configured station.
 Initiate ringing at a group: The relay is closed when the subscriber initiates ringing to a defined
group, until the call is taken over.
 Receive 4T, 6T, 7T (Radio conference, predefined conference, music): The relay is closed,
as long as the subscriber receives a defined music program, radio conference or pre-configured
conference.
 Initiate All Call/Group Call: The relay is closed when the subscriber initiates an All Call or a
defined group call, until the call is cancelled.
 Receive All Call/group call: The relay is closed when the subscriber receives an All Call or a
defined group call, until the call is cancelled.
 Subscriber with Simplex reception (PTT-contact for simplex): The relay is closed as long as
simplex reception is active (during dial tone, during listening of simplex conversation, at reception
radio conference/All Call/group call).
  PA announcement: The relay is closed when the subscriber is called with the defined PA-code.
ATTENTION: Memory required for output contacts

Attendant contacts
Outputs can be assigned as attendant contacts to one or multiple subscribers, which will be closed
when a certain event occurs (e.g. during active conversation or conversation lamp is active). In addi-
tion, PA announcements or user-specific functions (e.g. establish a call, start an All Call or ring at a
group) can be executed automatically as long as the attendant contact is closed.
GOOD TO KNOW: Restrictions

Per subscriber, 339 definitions for attendant contacts are possible (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 476). One
definition is:
 One or more activated checkboxes at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab active at.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./ Function.
208 1.5/0619
Configure output as attendant contact

To assign any output as attendant contact to a subscriber, follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add attendant contact”.
3. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber
 4. Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
ATTENTION: Memory required for output contacts

Controlling of attendant contacts

An attendant contact can be closed when certain events occur that has been triggered by the assigned
subscriber. Follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab active at
2. Select the desired event, at which the attendant contact shall be closed:
Call indication
Activate this checkbox to close the output until a privacy call is answered.
privacy call
Subscriber with Activate this checkbox to close the attendant contact during an active conver-
conversation sation. 1)
Red lamp active Activate this checkbox to close the output if the red lamp is activated.
Loudspeaker active Activate this checkbox to close the output if the loudspeaker is activated.
1) The attendant contact will be closed independent of the conversation status (i.e. also for privacy call or
busy subscriber).
3. (Optional) Blinking output: Activate this checkbox to automatically switch the activated output on
and off.
ATTENTION: Requirement for station outputs

By default, station outputs do not blinking during conversations, because this leads to noise in the
loudspeaker. Activate the checkbox Blinking output during a call for the respective output at
Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Outputs to enable the respective
station outputs.
 PA announcement with closed attendant contact

If the attendant contact is closed, pre-configured PA announcements can be executed. Follow the in-
structions below:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers
2. Click on Configure PA.
3. Enter an up to 4-digit code, which shall control the PA system.
4. Click on the button Add (several codes can be entered).
5. Click on the button Accept to save the changes.
6. In the field PA-Numbers, the configured codes are shown.
1.5/0619 209
Functions with closed attendant contact

If the attendant contact is closed, pre-configured functions can be executed (e.g. establish a call, start
an All Call or ring at a group). Follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no. / Function
2. Click on Configure Functions.
3. Right-click and select “Add call no. / function” (several functions can be added).
4. n the field Call no./Function, the following functions can be entered:
Enter a call number. The attendant contact is activated during an active conver-
Calling number
sation between the subscriber and the given call number.
Enter the code for ringing at a group (e.g. “980” or “9825”). The attendant con-
Ringing at a group
tact is activated when the subscriber rings at this group.
Enter the code for an All Call or group call (e.g. “00” or “010”). The checkboxes
All Call/Group Call
Initiate All Call/group call and Receive All Call/group call will be enabled.
Enter the function code and the radio channel (e.g. “6T1”, “7T3” or “4T2”). The
Reception Music/radio
attendant contact is activated when this radio channel is received. In case only
conference/predefined
the function code is entered (e.g. “6T”, “7T” or “4T”), the attendant contact is
conference
enabled by receiving any radio channel.
Subscriber with Enter the button “T”. The attendant contact is activated when the speech direc-
Simplex reception tion of the subscriber is switched to simplex.
5. Receive All Call/group call: Activate this checkbox to receive an All Call or group call with the code
that is entered in the field Call no./Function. To enable this checkbox see above.
6. Initiate All Call/group call: Activate this checkbox to initiate an All Call or group call with the code
that is entered in the field Call no./Function. To enable this checkbox see above.
7. Click on Accept to save the changes.
8. In the field Call no./Function, the configured functions are shown.
210 1.5/0619
 Station output
The station / module outputs can be activated as real outputs. In case the station output is activated as
real output, the output is indicated in the output dialogue (Outputs > General Settings). With
indication in the output dialogue, the station output restrictions are no longer valid for these outputs.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab Outputs
 Enable full functionality: Activate this checkbox to upgrade the respective station output to a real
output.
NOTE:
 In case the station output is enabled as real output, the further configuration is the same as for
normal outputs.
 The checkbox Enable full functionality cannot be used in combination with the checkbox Blink-
ing output during a call (at Subscriber > Station properties > desired device type > tab
Outputs).
ATTENTION:
In case no hierarchy level for the station output is configured the hierarchy level “00” is used!
 Feature PRO 800 2.0

PRO 800
If for the station output no hierarchy level is configured, the hierarchy level from the station
LICENCE PRO2U is automatically used for the station output. If a different hierarchy level is required/
configured for the station output, it has to be configured manually via CCT 800 at Outputs
> General Settings.
Parallel outputs
It is possible to configure the same call number for multiple outputs in parallel. The entire group of
outputs is controlled simultaneously. The status of the “master output” is indicated in the display.
NOTE:
Only outputs of I/O cards can be switched in parallel (no station outputs). However it is possible to use
a station outputs as “master output”.

 Parallel Call Number: In this field, the call number of the “master output” can be entered for the
outputs, which shall be controlled in parallel to the master output (e.g. in the row of the output
“9952”, “9951” is entered as parallel. The outputs “9951” and “9952” are switched with “9951”.
 For the “master output” that switches the parallel outputs, the own call umber has to be entered
in the field Parallel Call Number.
ATTENTION:
In LAN and S0 networks, the outputs has to be in the same Intercom Server block. This Intercom
Server block has also to be configured at the S0 connections!
1.5/0619 211
Delayed switching of outputs

It is possible for outputs (no station outputs) to configure a close and an open delay time.

 Output ON delay: In this field, the output close time delay can be entered for the respective output
(in seconds).
 Output OFF delay: In this field, the output open time delay can be entered for the respective output
(in seconds).
 If a value is entered in both fields, the output is switched as a pulse. In this case, the value in the
field output ON delay is the close time and the value in the field output OFF delay is the
duration of the pulse.
ATTENTION:
If certain values are entered in the field output ON delay, it is possible that these values will
be skipped and other values are given out!
Output generates ICX message

It is possible to define ICX messages for the input states (active, inactive) that is put out at up to three
interfaces when the output state is reached.
ATTENTION:
Only possible with input/output cards, not for station outputs!

 Go to: Outputs > ICX at output
 Right-click on the desired output and select “Add ICX at output”.
 1. ICX-Interface to 3. ICX-Interface: In these drop-down lists, up to three interfaces can be
selected, at which the ICX messages are put out.
GOOD TO KNOW:
will be sent. If in the drop-down list 2. ICX - Interface or 3. ICX - Interface the value “----” is
selected, ICX messages will not be sent over these ICX interfaces. Here are some examples for
sending ICX messages:
 Only internal ICX messages will be sent:
 Only external ICX messages will be sent:
 Internal as well as external messages will be sent:
 Go to: Outputs > ICX at output > sub-folder output

 Conditional: In this drop-down list, the condition of an input level can be selected, at which an ICX
message is sent.
 Task: In this field, the task number of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 Type: In this field, the type number of the desired ICX message can be entered.
212 1.5/0619
 Data: In this field, the parameter of the desired ICX message can be entered.
 System no. receiver/sender: In this field, the receiver/sender block number can be entered.
NOTE:
NOTE:
A maximum of 150 digit can be used for an ICX message. In case the data from an ICX messages is
longer than 22 digits, a not used ICX messages is disabled.
Linking inputs to outputs

It is possible to virtually link inputs to outputs.
ATTENTION:
Only possible with input/output cards (not with station outputs)!

 Input: In this drop-down list, an input can be selected, which shall be connected to the output.
 Level ON: In this drop-down list, a level can be selected, which shall be simulated at the input when
the output is activated.
 Level OFF: In this drop-down list, a level can be selected, which shall be simulated at the input when
the output is deactivated.
Restore output states after a warmstart

The output states can be restored after a warmstart of the Intercom Server. Even when the Intercom
Server is reconfigured, it is possible to restore the states of outputs.
ATTENTION:
 The output states are not saved at a power failure or turning the power off and back on!
 Only possible for outputs of I/O cards (not for station outputs)!

 Activate the checkbox Restore state after restart for the respective output.
ICX message for output states

ICX messages can be given out for the output of the own Intercom Server.
ATTENTION:
At outputs with a dialable or local call number (FExx) ICX messages are always put out!
1.5/0619 213
Configuration CCT 800 (only for station outputs)

 Activate the station output as real output (see page 211).

 ICX-Message: In this drop-down list, the option can be selected when an ICX message is put out for
the individual outputs. The following options are available:
 Never: ICX messages will not be put out.
 On change: At each change of state an ICX message will be put out.
 On restart and on change: An ICX message well be put out at start/restart of the Intercom
Server and at each change of state.
NOTE:
At the start of an Intercom Server, ICX messages will only be put out in the own Intercom Server
via a serial interface!
Hierarchy levels for outputs

In order to allow selective access to outputs it is possible to advise hierarchy levels to the outputs.
Hierarchy relations are handled the same as with conversations (see page 185).
ATTENTION:
No hierarchy for station outputs!

 Hierarchy: In this drop-down list, the hierarchy level can be selected for the respective output.
Virtual inputs/outputs
Virtual input/output cards

Virtual input and output cards are available. Operation is the same as with normal input/output cards,
however they are not physically present.

 Go to: Intercom Server > Cards
 Select the desired cards in the respective slot.
Virtual slots “GE 300”

Virtual slots are available for the GE300 Intercom Server. In these slots only virtual input / output cards
can be selected (G3-16E virtual, G3-16A virtual and G3-8E8A virtual).

 Card type: In these drop-down list, up to three virtual input/output cards can be selected for slots
“(13)” to “(15)”.
214 1.5/0619
Extended clients
 Up to PRO800 1.1 a maximum of 224 inputs/outputs can be addressed.
 As of PRO800 1.1 a maximum of 478 inputs/outputs can be addressed (224 “regular” addresses +
254 extended addresses).
Restrictions for networked systems

 In total an Intercom System can address 2040 “remote”, extended clients.
 This limit only becomes active when extended clients are used across networked systems.
 The allocation of the address pool is carried out dynamically.
 Required firmware versions
 PRO800 1.1 in all GE300 / GE800
 G7-UPG (network cards has to be updated to version 5.3
G8-NET, G8-LAN, G3-LAN, E1, W, G7 network cards)
 Compatibility to GE200 / GE700
 Extended client addresses from a GE300 / GE800 cannot be used from the Intercom Server GE200/
GE700.
1.5/0619 215
Speech control Intercom Server Configuration
Speech control
Duplex
ATTENTION:
When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 450)!
 Conversations in Duplex
The speech direction is controlled by a so called “speech balance”. Depending on
the background noise, hands free communication is possible from up to seven me-
tres (22 ft.).

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab General
 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select the entry “Duplex” for the respective subscriber.
216 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Speech control
 Conversations in Full Duplex
ATTENTION:
Do not confuse Full Duplex with “OpenDuplex®” at DSP stations (see page 335)!
 The conversation is permanently switched in both directions that means both conversation partners
can talk at the same time.
 There are two possibilities of configuration:
 Full duplex (only one of the conversation partners has to be in mode “Full duplex” to build up
the conversation in full duplex)
 Full duplex both (both conversation partners have to be in mode “Full duplex”).
ATTENTION:
 If “Full duplex” is configured for a station, the station has to be equipped with a suitable
earphone!
 If “Full duplex both” is configured, the station has to be equipped with a gooseneck microphone
or similar (e.g. EE 472), because otherwise feedback would occur!
The following table shows, how conversations are built up between differently configured Intercom
stations:
Called station
Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex both
Duplex Duplex Full Duplex Duplex
Calling
station
Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex

Full Duplex both Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex
NOTES:
 If one of the stations is in mode Simplex, the conversation is always built up in Simplex.
 When in use of DSP stations, this table is also valid for OpenDuplex (see page 335; i.e. “OpenDuplex®”
instead of “Full Duplex”).

 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “Full Duplex” or “Full Duplex both” for
1.5/0619 217
Simplex
ATTENTION:
With simplex the direction of speech is controlled manually, e.g. in case of high background noise
(speak: press T, listen: release T).
 Conversations in Simplex
A conversation with a subscriber configured as simplex is always built up in simplex. The speech di-
rection is determined by configuration:
 Simplex - Listen: The speech direction is switched to the selected station, the conversation partner
can answer without pressing any button. This is the most common simplex mode.
 Simplex - Talk: The speech direction is switched from the selected station to the conversation
partner, the conversation partner has to press T for talking.
If both stations are configured to “Simplex Listen” or “Simplex Talk”, the mode is determined by the
calling station.

 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “Simplex-Listen” or “Simplex-Talk” for
 Simplex by pressing the button T

If during a duplex conversation one of the subscribers presses the T button, the speech direction is
switched to his conversation partner. The following two simplex modes are available:
 Duplex again: After releasing of the T button the conversation is in duplex again, so that the
conversation can be continued in duplex e.g. after a noisy machine has been switched off.
 Simplex remains: After releasing the T-button the whole conversation stays in simplex. The
speech direction is switched to the subscriber, who has last pressed the T button, his conversation
partner can answer without pressing a button.

 In this drop-down list Release T-Key, select either the entry “Back to Duplex” or “Simplex remains”
for the respective subscriber.
block.
218 1.5/0619
 Simplex with touching the button T

If during a duplex conversation one of the subscribers shortly presses the T button, the speech direc-
tion is switched to his conversation partner, until the conversation partner shortly presses the T button
and so turns round the speech direction.

 In the drop-down list Release T-Key, select the entry “Conference mode (tap)”.
block.
 Volume adjustable separately for functions

For each subscriber a volume level can be configured for the different conversation modes and tones.
During a conversation the volume can be changed at the Intercom station; the maximum and minimum
volumes can be configured. It is also possible to configure a fixed volume level.
2-wire Intercom stations with dot-matrix display/WS series

The volume can be adjusted with the option “Volume” in the main menu of the station (see page 151).
4-wire stations series EE 411, 2-wire stations series EE 311A

The volume can be changed during a conversation with the buttons D and E, with display stations
the volume level is indicated in the display while the volume is changed:
If the volume level is acknowledged with button F, the new volume is stored permanently. If the
volume level is not acknowledged with F, the volume is reset to the configured volume level after
disconnection of the conversation (except the adjustment for music: this volume is stored in any case).
ATTENTION:
If the volume is adjusted at the Intercom station, the configuration “Volume act.” of the Intercom
Server might be different to the configuration stored with CCT 800!

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab Duplex, Simplex, Full duplex
 Duplex active / Simplex active / Full Duplex active: In these drop-down lists, the default volume
can be selected for the respective conversation type and subscriber.
 Duplex mode / Simplex mode / Full Duplex mode: In these drop-down lists, the mode of the
volume limit can be selected for the respective conversation type and subscriber. The following
modes are available:
 Max: At the respective subscriber, the volume of this call type can be increased to a maximum,
which is defined in the drop-down list limit.
 Min: At the respective subscriber, the volume of this call type can be reduced to a minimum,
which is defined in the drop-down list limit.
 Fix: At the respective subscriber, the volume of this call type cannot be changed. The volume in
the drop-down list limit is permanently activated.
1.5/0619 219
 Online volume setting


It is possible to change the volume settings of stations online in CCT 800without sending the CCT 800
file to the Intercom Server. The changes can subsequently be taken over in the CCT 800 file if desired.

 In the column Online volume control of the respective subscriber, click on the button .... The
following dialogue appears:
 Click on the button Receive to receive the current settings of the subscriber.
Subscriber
 Call number
 Description (e.g. “Station 104“)
 Address ([Intercom Server]/[slot]-[subscriber], e.g. “1/1-4“)
 Station type (e.g. “EE311“)
 Card type: Subscriber card, to which the subscriber is connected (e.g. Gx-GED-4D).
220 1.5/0619
Thresholds
 High: In this drop-down list, the threshold level can be selected in dB, at which a switch to the max-
imum volume level is automatically carried out.
 Low: In this drop-down list, the threshold level can be selected in dB, at which a switch to lowest
volume level is automatically carried out.
NOTE:
The volume settings in the drop-down lists High and Low are automatically adjusted when an offset
is defined in the drop-down list Internal (e.g. “High” is set to 75 dB, in the drop-down list Internal -
9 dB is selected  High is automatically set to 84 dB).
 Reduction: In this drop-down list, the volume reduction value can be selected. This setting defines
how much the volume is reduced at level “low” contrary to level “high”.
Microphone gain
 Internal: In this drop-down list, the microphone sensitivity can be selected for the internal
microphone module.
NOTE:
With using the industrial station series EE8000 and the built-in microphone (EM 860, EM 660) as a
noise-cancelling microphone (at very high ambient noises), the microphone gain is set to -15 dB.
 External: In this drop-down list, the sensitivity of the external microphone can be selected (e.g.
handset).
 Gooseneck: In this drop-down list, sensitivity of the gooseneck microphone can be selected (if
connected).
 Headset: In this drop-down list, the sensitivity of the headset microphone can be selected (if
connected).
Levels
 Level “Low” at start of Intercom Server: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume auto-
matically to level “low” at start the of the Intercom Server.
 Level “Low” when button is pressed: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume automatically
to level “low” if a button is pressed.
Volumes
 With the slider “Master”, all volume types can be adjusted. With the different sliders, the volumes
can individually be adjusted for the following features:
Duplex Simplex Full Duplex Handset
Music All Call Gong Tones
Buzzer 6T Feedback Radio
 Click on the button Save to save the volume settings in a desired directory (*ACS, Microsoft Agent
Character File).
 Click on the button Load to load a saved volume setting (*ACS, Microsoft Agent Character File).
 Click on the button Reset to reset a defined volume settings.
 Click on the button Send to send the defined volume settings to the Intercom Server.
 Online: Activate this checkbox to enable an online communication between PC and Intercom Server.
All defined settings are sent in real-time (in this case, no need for button Send). Additionally, the
following current data is indicated in real-time:
 Active level (volume high/low).
 Noise level (current ambient noise in dB).
 Click on the button Accept to take over the settings in the CCT 800 configuration, which have been
sent to the respective subscriber (via the dialogue “Volume settings”). The configuration dialogue is
closed.
1.5/0619 221
NOTE:
The volume of the Intercom subscribers can be changed via ICX messages. For a list of all ICX
messages, see the manual “ICX Protocol”.
 Input volume control


A fed-in audio signal on the line-in or microphone input can be put out at the own loudspeaker of the
Intercom modules ET 908A and ET 808A.

 Line-In Volume Control: Activate this checkbox to enable the drop-down lists Line-In Volume
and Line-In Audio Source for the respective subscriber.
 Line-In Volume: In this drop-down list, the desired volume can be selected for line-in.
 Line-In Audio Source: In this drop-down list, the input source can be selected. The following
sources are available are available:
 Dynamic: The audio signal with the higher volume is used (line-in or mic).
 Microphone: The input of the “mic” subscriber is used.
 Line-In: The input of the “line-in” subscriber is used.
 2-step volume switching


For DSP stations two different volume modes can be configured (“High”, “Low”) for varying ambient
noise levels (see page 220).
Automatic volume control

The microphone of the station monitors the current noise level and automatically activates the
adequate volume mode. Additionally it is possible to automatically switch to volume mode “Low”
when a button is pressed at the station to protect the person in front of the station against the high
volume.
[dB]
ambient noise level
high threshold
low threshold
Level: low high low high t
NOTE:
During a conversation or a call request, the automatic volume control is deactivated. This means the
microphone does not monitor the ambient noise level during that period of time (because of different
noise level conditions during the conversation / the call request). But during the conversation / the call
request there is a possibility to toggle manually between the volume modes “High” and “Low” (see
page 223).
222 1.5/0619

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Voice control
 Threshold-loud: In this drop-down list, the level can be selected, at which the automatic switching
to volume mode “High” is carried out.
 Threshold-silent: In this drop-down list, the level can be selected, at which the automatic switching
to volume mode “Low” is carried out.
 Reduction: In this drop-down list, the volume reduction value can be selected. This setting defines
how much the volume is reduced at level “low” contrary to level “high” (0 to -9 dB).
 Level “Low” at start of Intercom Server: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume auto-
matically to level “low” at start of the Intercom Server.
 Level “Low” when button is pressed: Activate this checkbox to switch the volume automatically
to level “low” if a button is pressed.
Attendant contact for Level “High”

 Configure an attendant contact for the desired subscriber for the code “9T92”. The contact is active
when the station is in volume mode “high” (see page 208).
Manual volume control

Manual switching by dialling of a code (the code has to be defined as Direct Dialling, which makes it
possible to entitle single stations):
 9T920: Low
 9T921: High
 9T92T: Toggle (does not work with “Level Low when button is pressed”)
Further information about the configuration of direct dialling can be found on page 180.
1.5/0619 223
 Intelligent Volume Control (IVC)


Feature PRO 800 4.1 – Intelligent Volume Control (IVC)
Automatic volume control of the loudspeaker and microphone gain due to the ambient noises.
The “Intelligent Volume Control” (IVC) differs between the ambient noises and the voices of the
speaker. The IVC exclusively monitors the ambient noises and controls the gain of the loudspeaker and
microphone of the station depending on the changing noise level. This allows to automatically adapt
the condition of the conversation at the station according to the ambient noise level for applications
with a higher difference in volume of the ambient noises (e.g. train station, highway).
Requirements
 DSP800A min. 2.6
 DSP800B min. 2.0
 DSP900A min. 5.6
 AF-I min. 5.5
 AF-D min. 1.5
 IoIP-Device 7.0
With a rising ambient noise level the loudspeaker gain will be increased and the microphone gain
decreased automatically within a firmly defined volume range. The ambient noise level can be a static
noise (e.g. incoming train at a train station) or a pulsating noise (e.g. pneumatic hammer).
NOTE:
The IVC does not control the volume at the playback of DSP tones.
At a station with display the station test for the “ambient noise level” will be opened by holding and
, followed by releasing :
The following information will be shown on the display:

 1: Current ambient noise level.
 2: Minimum volume level.
 3: Current loudspeaker gain.
 4: Maximum noise level.
In order to cancel the station test press  (see page 449).
224 1.5/0619
Loudspeaker gain
At a changing ambient noise the volume of the loudspeaker will be adjusted continuously to the noise
level. The minimum volume is defined by the configured volume level of the station. With a rising
ambient noise level the loudspeaker gain will be increased up to 4 volume levels (+12 dB), in which the,
configured maximum volume level (e.g. max. 12 at WS station) cannot be exceeded. The maximum
loudspeaker gain will be achieved at an ambient noise level of 85 dB (see illustration below).
volume level example: WS station
12 maximum volume level
11
10
0
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 80 90 95 100 ambient noise level
60 85 (dB)
Example
A station next to a train station has the configured volume level 7. When a train enters the train station
the ambient noise level rises over 85 dB and the loudspeaker gain will be increased about 4 volume
levels (+12 dB) to level 11. When the train has left the station, the ambient noise level is below 60 dB
and the loudspeaker gain will be decreased to the configured noise level 7.
1.5/0619 225
Microphone gain
At a changing ambient noise the microphone gain will be adjusted continuously to the noise level. The
minimum volume is defined by the configured volume level of the station. With a rising ambient noise
level the microphone gain will be decreased up to 12 dB. The minimum microphone gain will be
achieved at an ambient noise level of 85 dB (see illustration below). With the rising noise level the
speaker at the station speaks automatically louder (Lombard effect), whereby the useful signal remains
approximately the same for the listener and the ambient noise level will be decreased by the reduced
microphone gain.
microphone gain
(dB)
–1
–2
–3
–4
–5
–6
–7
–8
–9
–10
– 11
– 12
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 80 90 95 100 ambient noise level
60 85 (dB)
Example
A station next to a highway. When a car passes the station the ambient noise level rises over 85 dB and
the microphone gain will be decreased about 12 dB. When the car is gone, the ambient noise level is
below 60 dB and the microphone gain will be increased about 12 dB.

 IVC: Activate this checkbox to enable the “Intelligent Voice Control” (IVC) for the respective
subscriber (by default, activated).
 Improved Duplex-switching

In rooms with lots of reverberations and at high volume with a small distance between loudspeaker
and microphone problems with switched Duplex may appear (clipping of speech). This behaviour can
be improved via special configuration.

 High volume duplex mode: Activate this checkbox to improve switched duplex for the respective
subscriber in certain situations.
226 1.5/0619
 Handset, headset and internal loudspeaker


In standard, connecting a handset or headphones at a station is automatically recognized and the
internal loudspeaker of the station is muted. It is also possible to define that when a handset/head-
phones are connected that via dialling of a code via direct dialling, F2 menu, EE880 button or ICX
message the internal loudspeaker is reactivated (9T911), switched off (9T910) or the status is
toggled (9T91T). This can be useful when the handset is set aside and All Calls and regular calls
shall still be audible.

The codes will be configured either as direct dialling, entry in the F2 menu or for an EE880 button:
 9T911: Activate internal loudspeaker
 9T910: Deactivate internal loudspeaker
 9T91T: Toggle internal loudspeaker status
 Handset features
When using a handset, by default the following features exist:
Hook on handset
At conversations  quit conversation
Hook off handset

At privacy calls, door calls, All Calls, group calls  accept call or answer All Call / group call
 Feature PRO 800 3.x – automatic detection of an EE 380 and EE 380A with handset
PRO 800 With this feature, the checkbox Extended handset function will be automatically
LICENCE PRO3U activated. This allows you to use external handsets without additional configuration.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Handset
 Disable internal handset function: Activate this checkbox to do not switch to handset volume
when the respective subscriber is lifted.
 External handset installed: Activate this checkbox If an external handset is used. The checkbox
Extended handset function is enabled.
 Extended handset function: Activate this checkbox to enable the drop-down list Dialling of
button on hook-off (automatic configuration is cancelled).
 Dialling of button on hook-off: In this drop-down list, a button can be selected, which is dialled
automatically when the handset is hooked off. The following buttons are available:
 0: To start an automatic call request (via direct dialling).
 Enter: To start a conversation automatically in privacy mode.
1.5/0619 227
 Voice activity detection


With the function Voice activity detection it is possible to detect the cancel of a conversation (no signal
at the microphone) and cancel the conversation automatically.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Voice activity detection
 Switch off time: In this drop-down list, the time can be selected, which is between the cancel of
the conversation and automatic cancelling of the conversation (0 = no voice activity detection). The
fields Sensibility and Input Call-Nr are enabled.
 Sensibility: In this drop-down list, the audio level can be selected for the microphone.
 Input Call-Nr: In this field, the call number of the respective input can be entered, which is used to
cancel the conversation (only required if an input is configured).
NOTE:
In case the voice activity detection is activated after the defined Switch off time the conversation is
always cancelled automatically.

 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input initiates dialling”.
 Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling > sub-folder input
 In the drop-down list Dial/Key, enter the entry “X” for the input level “Short”.
Further information about the configuration of inputs can be found on page 199.
228 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Call diversion, call transfer
Call diversion, call transfer

 Call diversion: All incoming calls are transferred to another station.
 Call transfer: In certain situations incoming calls are transferred over a configured call transfer
chain of stations.
Type of call diversion Call diversion destination Trigger
Executive/secretary To a fix configured Own station: 02 and calling number
transfer chain “Secretary station” of secretary station.
Own station: 02T and calling num-
Variable secretary transfer To any desired station
ber of target station.
Own station: Turn, target station: 02
Follow Me To any desired station
and calling number of own station.
Type of call transfer Transfer destination
Automatic in case of busy If the called station is busy, the call is immediately transferred.
If the called station is in privacy mode, the call is transferred after a configur-
Automatic in case of privacy
able time when the call is not taken over.
If nobody answers at the called station if the station is busy or in privacy
Manual call transfer
mode, the caller can switch to the next station with 9.
 Permanent executive/secretary transfer chain

By turning the station to the side (only EE411, EE311 or EE811A) or by dialling 02 and the number of
the station configured as secretary, incoming calls for the executive are automatically transferred to
the secretary. At a stations with dot-matrix display the following help is displayed after dialling of 02:
Dial
02_
Call transfer
X-Cancel
An activated secretary transfer is deactivated again by dialling 030 or by turning back the station.
1.5/0619 229
Call diversion, call transfer Intercom Server Configuration
With display stations the target of an activated secretary transfer is indicated in the display, e.g.:
->22
Joe Cocker
Call Transfer
d-MenÜ
EE411

 Secretary Waiting time when busy [s]: In this field, the delay time can be entered, after which a
conversation is forwarded to the secretary station when the called station is busy.
NOTE:
 As of PRO800 1.1 Secretary transfers remain active after a warmstart of the Intercom Server.
 Executive/secretary transfer chain

A subscriber who is configured as secretary can again have an aligned secretary. If this subscriber
wants to work undisturbed or leaves the office, he turns his station (or activates secretary transfer with
02 and the secretary's number) and all incoming calls are transferred. So a caller will always reach
somebody who can pass on information.
ATTENTION:
The call transfer chain may be as long as desired, but it may not close in a loop!

230 1.5/0619
 Variable executive/secretary transfer chain

By dialling 02T and the number of any desired station, incoming calls are automatically transferred
to this station (in case of secretary transfer over tieline, T has to be after-dialled, e.g. 02T 123 T).
The displays of the stations are like “Fix secretary transfer”. Feature level “C” is required for the
subscriber that is transferred.
NOTE:
 As of PRO800 5.0, the variable secretary transfer remains active after a restart of the Intercom Server.
ATTENTION:
By turning the station (i.e. by the position switch), this feature will be deactivated!
No configuration via CCT 800 required.1
 Follow Me
If a subscriber leaves his office and turns his station to the side (only EE411, EE311 or EE811), he can
enter 02 and his own calling number at any station. The calls arriving at his station are then
transferred to this station. During the acknowledgement tone the display shows the number of the
transferred station. See the following illustrations:
Dial
42
Call transfer
X-Cancel
EE411
This transfer can also be carried out to several stations, one after the other. This prevents unnecessary
This transfer can also be carried out to several stations, one after the other. This prevents unnecessary
All Calls and ensures direct access to the subscriber wherever he is. When the subscriber returns to his
office, all he has to do is to turn his station back to its normal position and Follow Me is cancelled.
Feature level “C” is required for the subscriber that is transferred.
NOTE:
As of PRO 800 1.1 Follow Me transfers remain active after a warmstart of the Intercom Server.
1.5/0619 231
Call diversion, call transfer Intercom Server Configuration
Call transfer
A chain of stations is configured for the call transfer chain. All along this chain the calls can be manually
(with button 9) or automatically transferred if unanswered. The different types of transfer can be
combined.
Called station: 
The call transfer chain is configured like an “executive-secretary transfer chain” (see page 230).
 Secretary Number: In this field, the call number of the secretary station can be entered for each
subscriber in the call transfer chain, to which a call shall be transferred.
Automatic call transfer in case of busy

If a busy station of the call transfer chain is called, the call will be automatically transferred to the next
idle station of the chain. In case the last station of the chain is also busy, a busy tone will be switched
on. The standard features for “busy” can now be operated.
Called station: 
 Go to: Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into, Priority call, Call transfer, Recall request
 Call transfer as calling station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which calls
into the call transfer chain.
 Call transfer as called station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber to which the
call shall be transferred.
232 1.5/0619
Automatic call transfer in case of privacy

If a call comes to a station of the call transfer chain which has activated “privacy function” with 031
or which is configured as “Fix privacy” and the call is not answered within a configurable time, it will
be automatically transferred to the next station of the chain. Should this station also be in “privacy
mode”, the call will be further transferred until the cancel of the chain. If all stations in the chain are in
“privacy mode” and nobody answers, the call will be cancelled after the configured switch-off time.
Called station: 
 Call transfer as calling station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which calls
into the call transfer chain.
 Call transfer as called station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, to which the
 Switch off time forwarding [s]: In this field, the switch-off time of forwarding can be entered,
after which the call is transferred (max. 15 minutes; 0 = No transfer in privacy mode).
block.
ATTENTION:
If the “switch off time forwarding” is higher than the “switch off time privacy call”, then no call
transfer in case of privacy will be carried out!
 Manual call transfer

If any station in the transfer chain is called and if the station is busy or if nobody answers, the call can
be manually transferred to the next station in the chain by pressing button 9 at the calling station. The
call can be transferred until the cancel of the chain.
If a station is called (loudspeaking or privacy call), the called station can transfer the calling station to
a configured secretary station by pressing button 9. If the station does not have the entitlement “Call
transfer as called station”, the conversation is built-up (only during privacy).

 Call transfer as called station: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, to which the
1.5/0619 233
Feature with additional interface Intercom Server Configuration
Feature with additional interface
 Application-specific interface

For the control desk terminal CD810, it is possible to send direct dialling button events to a third-party
interface. With this function, the information of the direct dialling button will be automatically sent to
the third-party interface and not into the Intercom Server system. This feature is typically used for
project specific applications.

 Go to: Interfaces > Application-specific Interface > tab Remote Control Direct Dial
 Interface: In this drop-down list, the third-party interface can be selected, which should receive the
information of the direct dialling button.
NOTE:
This function is only available for the terminal “CD810”.
 Connection of telephone dialler, call transfer to telephone

dialler
With a telephone interface G3-TEL or G8-TEL Intercom calls can be transferred into the public
telephone net.
NOTE:
For further information about the features and configuration of the telephone interface, see the
manuals “G3-TEL” and “G8-TEL”.
234 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Feature with additional interface
 Answer back via loudspeaker


The answer back over loudspeaker only works in simplex. The direction of speech is controlled
manually by pressing the talk button T (see page 218). For these subscribers an interface HE505 is
needed.

 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select the entry “Simplex - Talk” for the respective subscriber.
 Activate the checkbox Mode HE505 for the respective subscriber.
 Call indication with flashlight or horn


Subscribers who shall have their calls announced e.g. by means of a flashlamp are configured to fix
privacy. The light keeps on flashing until the call has been accepted. For this subscriber either an
interface HE501 is required, or an output contact “Call indication privacy call” (see page 208).

 Activate the checkbox Fix as called station for the respective subscriber.
1.5/0619 235
Group call, All Call Intercom Server Configuration
Group call, All Call
All Call
ATTENTION:
 All Call initiator configurable per subscriber

If a person is not at his desk he can be paged over all stations that are configured for receiving All Calls
by the sequence 00. A double gong sounds, the announcement can be started as soon as the red
lamp lights. The All Call announcement is cancelled by pressing button T. With display stations “00”
is indicated in the display during the All Call:
Announcement
00
All Call
X-Cancel
EE311A/EE411
After termination of the announcement with T:

Announcement
00
All Call
Answer Back
X-Cancel
EE311A/EE411 blinking
If only an announcement is to be made the All Call is cancelled by pressing X. If an All Call announce-
ment started with 00 is not cancelled with T or X, it is automatically switched off after a configurable
time (by default 1 minute).
236 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Group call, All Call

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls
 All Call initiator: Activate this checkbox to initiate All Calls with the respective subscriber.
 Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Switch off times
 All Call: In this field, the announcement time of All Calls can be changed (max. 1049 seconds or 17.4
minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).
 All Call receiver

At the All Call receivers a double gong sounds. With display stations the display text of the caller is
indicated in the display during the announcement. After the initiator has cancelled the announcement
and waits for an answer the receivers get the following display:
Announcement
54
Lucky Luke
Answer Back
TT-Answer Back
X-Cancel
EE311A/EE411 blinking

 All Call receiver: Activate this checkbox to receive All Calls with the respective subscriber.
NOTE: No display for SIP-C subscribers

No display is possible for SIP-C subscribers.
 Automatic All Call answer

The person being looked for can answer from any station (need not be an All Call receiver) with TT
and is connected to the caller without delay. After start of waiting for the answer back with T the
searching subscriber is busy for all conversations except the answer with TT for a configurable time
(by default 30 seconds). The All Call can also be answered after this time has elapsed, as long as no
new All Call or group call is initiated in the system.beim Deaktiviwerung der Funktion wird eine beste-
hende NET-Vernetzung nicht unterbrochen. Erst nach Neustart der beteiligten VirtuoSIS-Master wird
keine NET-Vernetzung mehr aufgebaut.

 Answer back All Call: In this field, the time for an answer back of an All Call can be changed (max.
1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).
 Selective cancelling (during All Call)

Each All Call receiver can switch off reception during the All Call with button X.
1.5/0619 237
Group call (max. 90 groups)

ATTENTION:
 Group call initiator

The search process within a group resembles that of the All Call. It is started with 01 and the group
number: 010– 019 (single digit group numbers for max. 10 groups) or 0100 – 0189 (2-digit
group numbers for max. 90 groups). Only one group call can be initiated, not more at the same time.
Instead of pre-dialling “01” a 1-digit code can be configured (see page 129), e.g. “7”: dialling 70 to
79 (single digit group numbers) or 700 to 789 (2-digit group numbers).
With display stations the group call number is indicated in the display during the announcement, after
termination of the announcement with T the display blinks. If a group call announcement is not can-
celled with T or X, it is automatically switched off after a configurable time (by default 1 minute).

 Group Call: In this field, the announcement time of group calls can be changed (max. 1049 seconds
or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).
NOTE:
The gong of a group call takes 500 ms; thus longer pre-recorded audio files will be isolated.
 Group call receiver (max. 90 groups)

Each subscriber can be configured to be receiver of one or several group calls. The groups are defined
by configuration the receivers. The receivers of the group calls can be configured as desired (groups
of receivers can also overlap). When using display stations the display text of the caller is indicated in
the display during the announcement, after the initiator has cancelled the announcement and is waiting
for an answer the display blinks. If more than 10 different group calls are required, 2-digit group num-
bers have to be dialled (0100 to 0189).

 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones
 Gr. no: Activate the desired checkbox to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
group.
 Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox 2-digit (00-89) if more than 10 groups are required.
238 1.5/0619
 Automatic group call answer

The group call is answered like an All Call with TT. After start of waiting for the answer back with T
the searching subscriber is busy for all conversations except the answer with TT for a configurable
time (by default 30 seconds). The call can also be answered after this time has elapsed, as long as no
new group call or All Call has been initiated in the system.

 Answer back Group Call: In this field, the time for an answer back of a group call can be changed
(max. 1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).
 Selective cancelling (during group call)

Each group call receiver can switch off reception during the group call with button X.
 Multiple group calls simultaneously

It is possible to initiate a group call, while a previously initiated group call is waiting for an answer. For
this button “T” has to be dialled before the group number (e.g. “01T0” for group 0).
NOTE:
A normal group call (without pre-dialling T) can be answered with “TT” also by a subscriber which
is not configured as group call receiver.
ATTENTION:
 Only if the first group call was initiated with pre-dialling of T it is possible to initiate a second group
call.
 If the group call subscribers overlap, the group call initiated last is switched through.
 For group calls, which have been initiated in this manner, answer back with “TT” is possible only
from the respective receiver group.
 Naming of group calls

For easy identification names can be advised to a group calls. When a group call is dialled the name of
the called group is displayed in dot-matrix display stations.
Announcement
010 010
South Gates
South Gates
T-Answer Back
T-Answer Back X-Cancel
X-Cancel

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Group options
 Text: In this field, an up to 14-digit text can be entered for the respective group.
1.5/0619 239
 Individual tones for group calls


A DSP tone can be selected for identification of group calls. For playback of the tones DSP stations are
required (see page 327).

 Tone: In this drop-down list, a DSP tone can be selected for the respective group call.
 In the drop-down list Tone for, select either the entry “Group Call and Ringing” or “group Call” for
the respective group.
 Group calls with “push to talk” (PTT)
Feature PRO 800 4.0 – push to talk (PTT)

The speech channel of a group call will not be switched on before pushing T.
The group call starts with 01 and the group number: 010–019 (single digit group numbers for
max. 10 groups) or 0100–0189 (2-digit group numbers for max. 90 groups). Only one group
call can be initialized at the same time.
group calls with ‚push to talk‘
broadcast of group call

with answer back
TT
(hold) (release)
01 group call
number
gong T speak T broadcast of group call
without answer back
broadcast of group call

without answer back;
re-group call possible
X
cancel

group.
 Activate the checkbox 2-digit (00-89) if more than 10 groups are required.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > Group options
 PTT mode: In this drop-down list, the following settings can be selected:
 Without Answer TT: The initiator of an All Call or group call is able to cancel the broadcast by
releasing button T; an answer isn‘t possible.
 With Answer TT: The initiator of an All Call or group call is able to cancel the broadcast by
releasing button T; an answer is possible by pressing TT.
 Cancel With X: The speech channel is active as long as the button T is pressed; an answer is not
possible. If T is released, the speech channel will be interrupted, not cancelled. By pressing X the
group call is cancelled.
 Answer back Group Call: In this field, the time for an answer back of a group call can be changed
(max. 1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes; 0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).
240 1.5/0619
 No group calls during conversations

It there are multiple stations in one room it can make sense to continue a conversation because the
announcement can also be heard via the other stations:
 Per subscriber, it is possible to define that conversations shall not be interrupted.
 Per group, it is possible to define that conversations will be interrupted despite configured entitle-
ment.
 All Calls (with 00) always have top priority and interrupt running conversations.

 Activate the checkbox No group call during call for the respective subscriber (at a configuration
without restart, the configuration will be applied at the next group call).
 Activate the checkbox Group Call overlays conversation for the respective group.
NOTE:
The checkbox Group Call overlays conversation works only in combination with the checkbox No
group call during call.
 Feedback protection for All Call and group call

It is possible to reduce the volume of All Call/group call receivers in the same room to the feedback
protection volume. Therefore the announcement is still audible, but feedback is suppressed.

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab 6T Feedback, Radio, Headset
 6T Feedback active: In this drop-down list, the default volume of the respective conversation type
can be selected for the desired subscriber (see page 263).
 6T Feedback mode: In this drop-down list, the volume limit of the respective conversation type can
be selected for the desired subscriber. The following limits are available:
 max: At the respective subscriber, the volume can be increased to a maximum, which is defined
in the drop-down list limit.
 min: At the respective subscriber, the volume can be reduced to a minimum, which is defined in
the drop-down list limit.
 fix: At the respective subscriber, the volume cannot be changed. The volume in the drop-down
list limit is permanently activated.
 6T Feedback limit: In this drop-down list, the maximum volume of the respective conversation
type can be selected for the desired subscriber.
1.5/0619 241
 PA synchronisation

If the Intercom Server is connected to a third-party PA system, it may be required to delay the playback
of a group call to ensure a free channel in the PA system. Therefore, the Intercom Server must receive
a “ready” ICX message to carry out the group call.
The required incoming ICX message is triggered in the same way as the dialling simulation of the T
button at the initiating subscriber.
Example: “00 40 00 NNNN 000A 82” (NNNN = call number of the initiating subscriber)

 PA synchronisation: Activate this checkbox for the desired group to delay group calls until a
“ready” ICX message is received by the respective Intercom Server.
242 1.5/0619
 Group call with feedback protection


In order to prevent feedback at group calls it is possible to record group calls before broadcast to the
subscribers of a group. Three types of operation are possible for this function:
 Recording of group calls before broadcast (see page 244)
 Extended group call mode with 6 storable group calls (see page 244)
 Extended group call mode with 6 pre-recorded group calls (see page 244)
Requirements
The following subscriber cards are supported:
 G3-GET/G8-GET (for all analogue stations).
 G3-GED/G8-GED (for all A stations, e.g. EE 811A).
 G3-IP/G8-IP (only with DSP 900A stations, DSP 900B).
Operation
Recording of Group Calls before broadcast
Group Call initiator: C
T Broadcast of Group Call

with answer back
TT
Recording of
04 Group Call
number
Gong the Group Call
before broadcast
7 Broadcast of Group Call
without answer back
X
quit
Extended Group Call mode (6 storable Group Calls)

Group Call initiator: C
0 Playback of recorded
Group Call
T Re-record Group Call
T
Recording of
04 Group Call
number
Save position
(1-6)
the Group Call (hold)
7
(hold) before broadcast
Broadcast of Group Call
Automatic broadcast
X
*
of Group Call after
EQPƂIWTCDNGVKOG
quit
(recording is saved) #PUYGTDCEMYKVJ66EQPƂIWTCDNGRGTUWDUETKDGT
Extended Group Call mode (6 pre-recorded Group Calls)
0 Playback of recorded
Group Call
Playback of the
04 Group Call
number
Save position
(1-6)
pre-recorded
Group Call before
7 Broadcast of Group Call
broadcast
Automatic broadcast *
of Group Call after
X
EQPƂIWTCDNGVKOG
#PUYGTDCEMYKVJ66EQPƂIWTCDNGRGTUWDUETKDGT
quit
1.5/0619 243
NOTE:
 Recordings are deleted at a restart of the Intercom Server.
 Maximum recording time: 120 seconds per subscriber card.
 Recording of group calls before broadcast


 Extended group call mode (6 storable group calls)


Up to 6 group calls can be recorded and played back as often as desired.Required firmware for sub-
scriber cards: min. 3.3.

 Go to: Subscriber > Group Calls with feedback protection
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add group call with feedback protection”.
 Activate the checkbox Extended mode to enable all following fields.
 Callback after Announcement: Activate this checkbox to enable the callback feature with TT
after a group call for the respective subscriber.
 Playback of recording before broadcast: Activate this checkbox to playback the recorded audio
before broadcast for the respective subscriber. The recording can be repeated if required.
 Extended group call mode (6 pre-recorded group calls)


 Go to: Subscriber > Group Calls with feedback protection
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add group call with feedback protection”.
 Activate the checkbox Extended mode to enable all following fields.
 Playback message ID 1 to 6: In these fields. the ID of a pre-recorded audio can be entered, which
is used as group calls.
 Callback after Announcement: Activate this checkbox to enable the callback feature with TT
after a group call for the respective subscriber.
 Automatic broadcast after [s]: In this field, the time until automatic broadcast of the group call
after playback can be changed for the respective subscriber (by default 4 seconds).
 Overwrite pre-recorded audio: Activate this checkbox to allow overwriting of pre-recorded group
calls for the respective subscriber.
 Group calls with pre-recorded audio


A pre-recorded audio (see page 362) can be played back instead of the gong, before a group call is
initiated.
Advantages
 Compared with the pre-recorded audio with the ID “185” (see page 366; duration max. 2 seconds),
this pre-recorded audio does not have a maximum playback time. This pre-recorded audio is played
back to the cancel and afterwards, the announcement can be carried out.
 The pre-recorded audio has only to be loaded at the subscriber, which is initiating the group call (see
page 367). Whereas the pre-recorded audio with ID “185” has to be loaded at each subscriber
(client), which shall receive the group call. Otherwise, only the gong is put out at these subscribers.

 Pre-recorded audio ID: In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio can be entered, which is played
244 1.5/0619
back of the group call gong.
NOTE:
For group calls, pre-configured audio files with the ID “1” to “239” can be used.
1.5/0619 245
Conference Intercom Server Configuration
Conference
 Initiate a conference during a conversation

ATTENTION:
 Feature PRO 800 6.2 and VirtuoSIS 7.0

 VirtuoSIS Start OpenDuplex®conference during a conversation
LICENCE SIS7U A conversation partner of any conversation can change the active conversation to an Open-
Duplex®conference in a pre-configured block with dialling the button 8 (i.e. this conversation
VirtuoSIS partner is initiator of the OpenDuplex®conference). Up to eight subscriber can be invited per
LICENCE PRO6U
OpenDuplex®conference. If no configuration block is configured, a Simplex conference is
started.
During a conversation between two subscribers, it is possible to invite any number of subscribers into
a Simplex conference or up to eight subscribers into an OpenDuplex®conference. Follow the instruc-
tions below to initiate a conference during a conversation:
1. During a conversation, press the button 8 if OpenDuplex®and 8T if Simplex at the station that is
entitled to start a conference.
2. The dial tone is audible at the initiator and the conversation is paused until the conference is initiated
by the initiator.
3. Enter the call number of the subscriber that shall participate the conference. If the dial process is
cancelled prematurely, the conversation is switched into a conference with 2 participants.
4. Press the button 8 if OpenDuplex®and 8T if Simplex to initiate the conference.
5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4 until all subscribers are invited to the conference.
6. By pressing the button X, the conference can be left prematurely by any conference participants (if
configured) or can be terminated by the initiator.
Requirements
The following feature levels are required:
 Initiator Simplex conference:   Initiator OpenDuplex®conference: 
 Receiver Simplex conference:   Receiver OpenDuplex®conference: 
The following networks are supported for OpenDuplex®conferences:
 LAN networks (NET and LAN card)
 G8-CNET-W and G8-CNET-E1
Restrictions for OpenDuplex®conferences

 Max. one initiator and up to eight receivers are possible.
 A subscriber can only participate in one OpenDuplex®conference at the same time.
 All subscribers, which are located in the configured Intercom Server block, can be invited.
 When using an Intercom Server IS 300 and a server card G8-IP-32, only the first four subscribers can
be used.
 OpenDuplex®conferences are not available when networking with Intercom Servers GE 700, GE 200
or GE 700-UPG or for the subscriber card G8-TEL-4.
246 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Conference
 The following subscribers can be used as initiator and receiver:

 Subscribers of IP, GED, GET and AUD cards
 SIP-C
 SIP-T
 Each subscriber must support the OpenDuplex®function as initiator or receiver. Analogue subscrib-
ers must use switched Duplex.

1. Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab General
2. In the drop-down list Initiate Conference during conversation, select the Simplex conference
that shall be initiated by the respective subscriber.
3. Configure the conference participants (see page 251).
Configuration CCT 800 (OpenDuplex®conference)

1. Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab General
2. In the fields Configuration block or Additional Blocks, enter the Intercom Server blocks in which
the OpenDuplex®conference shall be started.
 Initiate a conference with pre-configured participants

ATTENTION:
Up to 40 Simplex or OpenDuplex®conferences can be pre-configured with conference participants

(Simplex conference with any number of subscribers and OpenDuplex®conferences with up to eight
subscribers). Optional, additional subscribers can be invited to an active conference by the initiator.
The following steps are required to start a conference:
Initiate a Simplex conference

Follow the instructions below to initiate a Simplex conference:
1. Enter the code 7T, followed by the conference channel (e.g. 7T10 to initiate a Simplex
conference on conference channel 10). This station must be entitled to start a Simplex conference
on the dialled conference number.
2. The Simplex conference is initiated automatically on the respective conference channel with the
initiator and all configured participants.
3. A conference participant can press the button T to talk into the channel. The permission to talk into
depends on the configuration of the conference participants.
Initiate an OpenDuplex®conference
 Follow the instructions below to initiate an OpenDuplex conference:
1. Enter the code 7TT, followed by the conference channel (e.g. 7TT09 to initiate an OpenDuplex
conference on conference channel 9). This station must be entitled to start an OpenDuplex
conference on the dialled conference number.
2. The OpenDuplex conference is initiated automatically on the respective conference channel with the
initiator and all configured participants.
NOTE:
If a conference participant is busy at the time the conference is initiated, this participants joins the
conference automatically when the conversation is cancelled.
1.5/0619 247
 Extension of an existing conference
NOTE:
An upgrade license Lx-PRO6U and PRO 800 6.1 is required for the extension of an existing
OpenDuplex conference.
 At the station of the initiator press the button 8 if OpenDuplex® or Simplex.

 The dial tone is audible at the station and the initiator leaves the conference during the call number
entry (the remaining participants continue the conference).
 Enter the call number of the subscriber that shall participate at the conference. If an error occurs dur-
ing dialling or the dial process is cancelled prematurely, the initiator rejoins the conference.
 To add the subscriber to the conference press the button 8 if OpenDuplex® or Simplex. Press the
button X to cancel the process. The initiator rejoins the conference.
Requirements
 Initiator Simplex conference:   Initiator OpenDuplex®conference: 
 Receiver Simplex conference:   Receiver OpenDuplex®conference: 
The following networks are supported for OpenDuplex®conferences:
 LAN networks (NET and LAN card)
 G8-CNET-W and G8-CNET-E1
Restrictions for OpenDuplex®conferences

be used.
 The following subscribers can be used as initiator and receiver of OpenDuplex®conferences:
 SIP-C
 SIP-T
 Each subscriber must support the OpenDuplex®function as initiator or receiver of Open-
Duplex®conferences. Analogue subscribers must use switched Duplex.

 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab 7T1 – 7T8 or Subscriber > Predefined
conferences > tab 7T9 – 7T40
 7Tx Permission to initiate: Activate this checkbox for the desired subscribers, which shall be au-
thorized to initiate the respective conference.
NOTE:
 The channels configured for a conference cannot be used for radio conferences (e.g. conferences
7T1, 7T2 and 7T3 configured  the channels 6T1 to 6T3 cannot be used).
 7Tx Participants: Activate this checkbox for each subscriber that shall attend the respective con-
ference automatically when it is started by the initiator.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference
 Optional: Activate the checkbox 2-digit dialling (6T01-6T64, 7T01-7T40) to dial 2-digit confer-
ence numbers at Intercom stations.
 Optional: Activate the checkbox Digital receivers only (7T conference) to allow exclusively dig-
ital receivers without a G2/G7-GEK card. If analogue subscribers are in the system, which do not re-
ceive the conference, the conference is not switched through without a G2/G7-GEK card.
248 1.5/0619
 Party line

With the party line, an OpenDuplex®conference can be started, on which entitled subscribers are able
to switch on without the invitation of the initiator for a configurable time. This allows e.g. on-the-fly
channel switching. The party line is started without any pre-configured participants (except for initia-
tor) and the initiator cannot invite any other subscribers. The following steps are required to start a
party line:
 At the station, press the block number, followed by the button sequence 7TT and the conference
channel (e.g. 7TT1 (1-digit) or 7TT01 (2-digits) for party line 1), which is entitled to initiate the
party line on the respective conference channel (initiator).
NOTE:
Only a limited number of party lines are available per Intercom Server block (number of party lines
configurable). Conferences with the lowest conference channel numbers are changed automatically
into party lines in ascending order (e.g. with pre-configured conference channels 7T1 to 7T9 and
four possible party lines, the conference channels 7T1 to 7T4 are changed automatically to party
lines.
 The party line is started automatically on the respective conference channel with the initiator.
 Further subscribers can join this party line by dialling the button sequence 7TT, followed by the
same conference channel (e.g. 7TT1 (1-digit) or 7TT01 (2-digits) for party line 1).
 By pressing the button X, the party line can be left prematurely by party line participants. The party
line cannot be cancelled by the initiator, its is cancelled when all participants have left the party line.
Restrictions for party lines

be used.
 The following subscribers can be used as initiator and receiver of OpenDuplex®conferences:
 SIP-C
 SIP-T
 Each subscriber must support the OpenDuplex®function as initiator or receiver of Open-
Duplex®conferences. Analogue subscribers must use switched Duplex.
1.5/0619 249

 In the field Number of channels, enter the maximum number of party line conferences that can be
executed simultaneously in the respective Intercom Server block.
 Switch off time: In this field, the switch off time can be changed, after which each party line par-
ticipant is removed from the respective party line (applies also for the initiator; max. 17 minutes, by
 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab 7T1 – 7T8 or Subscriber > Predefined
conferences > tab 7T9 – 7T40
 Activate the checkboxes 7Tx Permission to initiate and 7Tx Participants for the respective
subscriber in order to switch to a party line conference on the respective conference channel.
NOTES:
 All subscribers can initiate a party line if they are entitled to switch on this party line.
 In order to use 2-digit conference numbers, the checkbox 2-digit dialling (6T01-6T64, 7T01-
7T40) must be activated at Intercom Server - Block XX> General > tab Conference.
 The channels configured for party line cannot be used for radio conferences (e.g. 3 party line chan-
nels configured for conferences 7T1, 7T2 and 7T3  the channels 6T1 to 6T3 cannot be used)!

 In the drop-down list Duplex mode, select either the entry “OpenDuplex®” or “OpenDuplex®both”
for all party line participants. Further information can be found on page 335.
ATTENTION:
If one or more party line participants are located on an IP32 card, consider the supplementary
configuration on page 387!
250 1.5/0619
Conference functions
Conference participants
 Disconnection with [X]: Activate this checkbox so that any subscriber can leave the conference by
pressing the button X. If this checkbox is deactivated, the conference cannot be left by single
subscribers until the initiator cancel the conference.
 Reception display: Activate this checkbox to indicate the description of the talking subscriber in
the display of the conference participants.
Configuration CCT 800 (only for OpenDuplex conferences)

for all conference participants (see page 335).
Configuration CCT 800 (only for Simplex conferences)

 In the section Voice control (PTT), select the desired radio button for the function of the button T.
The following functions are available:
 Hold T-key: Press and hold the button T to talk into and release to listen.
 Tab T-key: Press the button T to talk into until another conference participant presses the button
T.
 Optional: In the field Max. speaking time, the maximum speech time can be changed (max. 15
minutes, 0 = no time limit). When this time has been exceeded, the conference initiator is switched
through automatically.
 Attendant contact for pre-configured conferences

For each receiver of a pre-configured conference, an attendant contact can be configured that is closed
as long as the subscriber attends the conference (see page 208).

 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./Function
ATTENTION:

 Call no./Function: In this field, the code of the pre-configured conference can be entered (e.g.
“7T1”). With the code “7T” it is possible activate the respective attendant contact for all participants
of conferences.
1.5/0619 251
 No busy tone while talking into pre-configured conferences

The busy tone can be deactivated, which is switched on at the subscriber when trying to talk into a
channel while an other subscriber is already talking into by pressing the button T.

 Activate the checkbox No busy tone at talk in (conference) for the respective subscriber.
NOTE:
This function is only valid if the radio button Hold T-key is selected at Intercom Server - Block
XX > General > tab Conference (see page 251).
 Manual switch to active pre-configured conferences

A subscriber can switch to an active conference with a direct dialling code.
Configuration CCT 800 (switch to any active conference)

 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “6TTT” for the respective subscriber.
ATTENTION:
 Does not work while multiple conferences are active!
 In networked systems, the block number for conferences has to be configured properly to reach
the feeding!
Configuration CCT 800 (switch to certain conference)

 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “6T” and the channel number of the 7T
conference for the respective subscriber (e.g. “6T03” for switching to 7T conference “03”).
ATTENTION:
 Initiator and participants has to be located within the same Intercom Server!
 Display text for pre-configured conferences


A display text can be configured for each pre-configured conference, which is shown in the display of
all conference participants with dot-matrix display.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Predefined conference options
 Text: In this field, an up to 14-digit text can be entered for the respective pre-configured conference.
 Pre-recorded audio for pre-configured Simplex conferences


Before initiation of a pre-configured Simplex conference, a pre-recorded audio file can be played back
at the conference participants as identification.
NOTE: Pre-recorded audio must be loaded

The pre-recorded audio file must only be downloaded at the initiator of the pre-configured Simplex
conference.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Predefined conference options
 Pre-recorded audio ID: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered, which is
played back before the initiation of a pre-configured Simplex conference. Further information about
uploading a pre-recorded audio can be found on page 362.
252 1.5/0619
 Priority levels for pre-configured Simplex conferences

Priority levels can be configured for pre-configured Simplex conferences that allow to override various
receiver states in order to put the conference call through. In case one of the conference participants
performs one of the reception functions listed below, the overriding capacity of an incoming confer-
ence depends on its priority level. If the conference call has a higher priority level than the reception
function of the other conference participants, the conference call will be put through automatically.
However, the original speech channel to the overwritten reception functions will be enabled automat-
ically once the subscriber leaves the conference. The speech channel of the conference participant will
be closed from a priority level 8 or 9. The conference is faded as described in the table below:
Priority levels
Reception option Fading: no Fading: yes
Conversation 1–2 3–9
All call initiator 1–6 7–9
All call receiver 1–4 5–9
Waiting for TT 1 2–9
Ringing 1 2–9
Dial tone 1–2 3–9
Keyboard is blocked 1–2 3–9
Busy 1–2 3–9

 Activate the checkbox Configurable priority for 7T conferences.
 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences > tab General
 Optional: In the drop-down list Priority for intrusion, a permanent priority level can be selected
for the intrusion subscriber (“Participants” is equal to priority level 0).
Initiate Simplex conference with any priority level

Follow the instructions below to initiate a pre-configured Simplex conference with any priority level:
1. Enter the code 7T, followed by the priority level and the conference channel (e.g. 7T810 to
initiate a Simplex conference with priority level 8 on conference channel 10).
NOTE: Input of priority level will not be shown

The input of the priority level will not be shown on the display of the Intercom station.
2. The Simplex conference will be initiated automatically.
 Switch-off time for pre-configured conferences

A switch-off time can be configured for pre-configured conferences, after which active conferences are
cancelled automatically.

 Switch off time 7T conference: In this field, the switch off time for pre-configured conferences
can be entered.
 Switch off time 7TT conference: In this field, the switch off time for OpenDuplex®conferences
can be entered.
1.5/0619 253
Music, radio conference Intercom Server Configuration
Music, radio conference
 Feed-in of audio signals

The following types of feeding-in audio are possible:
 Feed in via music input (see page 254)
 Feed in via analogue subscriber (see page 254)
 Feed in via digital subscriber (see page 254)
 Feed in via G8-AUD4 (see page 255)
 Feed in via ST801 (see page 255)
Feed in via music input (music only)

Via the music input (GE300: terminals “MUSIC” on G3-GEM, GE800 terminals “MU1” and “MU2” on
G8A-GEN of the 1st housing) it is possible to feed-in an audio signal (e.g. background music) into the
Intercom system.
 Feed in via analogue subscribers


Up to 8 audio signals can be fed in each over the terminals A and B of the first subscriber of a G3/G8-
GET-4D with 0 dB at 600 Ohm (turn the switch on the subscriber card). For the remaining analogue
subscribers the signal has to be adjusted with an external pre-amplifier (e.g. ST801; see page 255).
 Feed in via digital subscribers


GE 300/GE 800 with G3-GED-4/G8-GED-4D and Intercom station
Up to 40 additional music programs can be fed in over digital (2-wire) Intercom PCB‘s, either with 7 kHz
or with 3.5 kHz (feed in with 3.5 kHz requires only half of the audio channels). For each music program
an ECCT 80008 is connected to any subscriber of a G3-GED-4D/G8-GED-4D, the music is fed in over the
terminals “MIC+” and “MIC-” of the ET808.
If both Music and Radio Conference are used, it is not possible to use all 40 music channels and all 40
radio channels. The following combinations are possible:
Radio channels Music channels
1 – 40 1–8
1 – 32 1 – 32
1 – 24 1 – 40
ATTENTION:
The numbers of the channels are the deciding factor, not the amount!
254 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Music, radio conference
 Feed in via “G8-AUD4”

With the digital connection- and recording card it is possible to optimally feed-in audio signals into the
Intercom system. All audio inputs and outputs have a galvanic separation, electronic level adaptation
as well as a graphic equalizer for correction of the sound quality.
NOTE:
 For further information about the features and configuration of the G8-AUD4 card, see the manual
“G8-AUD4”.
 Audio feed-in is also possible with a Gx-DSP IAX. For further information, see the manual “Gx-
IAX”.
 Feed in via “ST801”

With the ST801 audio interface it is possible to feed-in frequency optimized audio signals into the
Intercom system. Connection of one channel (IN and OUT) to an Intercom subscriber (by default, AB-
CD) in analogue 4-wire technology.
NOTE:
For further information about the features and configuration of the ST801, see the manual
“Audiocom”.
Precautions
 The subscribers used for feed in cannot be used for Intercom functions any more.
ATTENTION:
Configured music programs require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
the memory capacity can be found on page 477!
 If a pre-configured conference (e.g. “7T1”; see page 247) is already configured, the corresponding
radio conference (“6T1”) cannot be configured any more.
NOTE:
For the required audio channels, see the manuals “GE800” and “GE300”.
1.5/0619 255
Configuration of feed-in (music and radio)

ATTENTION:
If radio conferences 6T41 to 6T48 are used, restrictions apply (see page 476)!
 Feed-in of music
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of music”.
 Channel (8 channels): In this drop-down list, the program number can be selected. Channel 1 is fed
in at the input “MUSIC” of the 1st housing in standard.
 Channel (40 channels): In this drop-down list, the desired channel can be selected. Activate the
checkbox Music 2-digit dialling (4T01-4T40) at Intercom Server - Block XX> General > tab
Common to enable 2-digit dialling.
 Receiver: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected for reception.
 ICX-message: Activate this checkbox to send ICX messages for this channel.
 Digital receivers only (only for Intercom Server GE200/GE700): Activate this checkbox to allow
digital receivers without the need for a G2/G7-GEK card. If analogue subscribers are in the system,
which do not receive the conference, the conference is not switched through without a G2/G7-GEK
card.
 Audio: In this drop-down list, the audio quality can be selected for the respected feed-in.
 Radio conference feed-in, “PTT” button

For control of the PTT button, per channel a relay (on G1-GEM/G3-GEM/G8-GEN, Gx-16A or Gx-8E8A)
can be configured, which is activated while talking into the radio channel.

 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of radio conference”.
 Channel (9 channels): In this drop-down list, the program number can be selected. Channel 1 is fed
in at the input “MUSIC” of the 1st housing in standard.
 Channel (64 channels): In this drop-down list, the desired channel can be selected. Activate the
checkbox 2-digit dialling (6T01-6T64, 7T01-7T40) at Intercom Server - Block XX >
General > tab Conference to enable 2-digit dialling.
 Authorization channel: In this drop-down list, the authorization channel can be selected. By
default, the authorization channel of channel 1 to 48 is the selected radio channel and of channel 49
to 64 the channel 1.
 Relay PTT-button: In this drop-down list, an output can be selected for PTT control.
 Receiver: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected for reception.
 ICX-message: Activate this checkbox to send ICX messages for this channel.
 Digital receivers only (only for Intercom Server GE200/GE700): Activate this checkbox to allow
digital receivers without the need for a G2/G7-GEK card. If analogue subscribers are in the system,
which do not receive the conference, the conference is not switched through without a G2/G7-GEK
card.
 Audio: In this drop-down list, the audio quality can be selected for the respected feed-in.
256 1.5/0619
Reception of music programs (max. 40 channels)

 Reception of music
There are multiple ways to feed-in background music into the Intercom system (see page 254). The
music is muted during e.g. conversations or All Calls.
Operation at the station

 9 music channels: Music is switched on with button sequence 4T1 to 4T9 and off with button
sequence 4T0 (or pressing button X for one second).
 40 music channels: Music is switched on with button sequence 4T01 to 4T40 and off with
button sequence 4TX (or pressing button X for one second).
 While the music is switched on, the volume can be changed with the buttons D and E (this volume
is stored also after the Intercom Server is switched off).
At stations with dot-matrix display reception of music is indicated in the display (see screenshot be-
low). Display indication can be configured separately for subscribers with a dot-matrix display.
It can also be configured for certain subscribers that the music is switched on automatically after start
of the system.

 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music
 Display indication: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE311A/
EE411 and Display text EE811 & camera at the respective feed-in while listening to the music
channel.
 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference
 Switch Music on at startup: In this drop-down list, the channel can be selected for the respective
subscriber, to which a music program shall be switched after the start of the Intercom Server.
1.5/0619 257
 Attendant contact for reception of music

For each receiver of a certain music program (audio signal) an attendant contact can be configured. The
relay is closed as long as the subscriber receives this music program.

ATTENTION:

 Call no./Function: In this field, the code of the pre-configured conference can be entered (e.g.
“4T2”).
NOTE:
 Music step function with one button

With a direct dialling code it is possible to step through a definable range of music channels with one
button. It is also possible to define if music shall be switched off between the cycles.

 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling code “XX4TTABC” for the respective subscribers.
 A: Lowest channel number
 B: Highest channel number
 C: 0 / 1: (0 = Including 4T0, 1 = Without 4T0)
NOTE:
Does not function with 2-digit music channels.
Example: 4 = XX4TT240
1. Press button 4: music channel 2 is switched on (begin of cycle).
2. Press button 4 again: music channel 3 is switched on.
3. Press button 4 again: music channel 4 is switched on.
4. Press button 4 again: music is switched off.
5. Press button 4 again: music channel 2 is switched on (begin of cycle).
258 1.5/0619
Reception radio conference

 An Intercom station can operate up to 64 different radio channels. Depending on the entitlements, the
station can select each of these channels, listen to the channel and talk into the channel. The
entitlements for listening and for talking can be configured selectively for each station and for each radio
channel. There are multiple ways to feed-in radio channels into the Intercom system (see page 254).
ATTENTION:
 Participant radio conference (only listen)

While listening to a radio channel a subscriber can make calls or receive calls as usual. After the
conversation is finished, the radio channel is switched on again. It is also possible to configure that a
subscriber is busy for incoming conversations while listening to a radio channel, except for All Calls
and group calls which are received in any way.
The different radio channels can be switched on with buttons 6T and the number of the radio channel,
e.g. 6T4 for the 4th radio channel or 4T23 for the 23th radio channel. The entitlement for listening
to a radio channel has to be configured selectively for each channel and for each Intercom station.
Listening to a radio channel can be switched off with button sequence 6T0 or, with special con-
figuration, by pressing button X for at least one second.

 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Switch on with 6TX
 Activate the desired checkboxes to assign the respective subscriber to the corresponding
conferences.
 Busy during reception: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in
the radio conference. Subscribers, which listen to this channel are occupied for calls during
reception (applies for all subscribers, which are listening to this channel).
 Disconnection with [X]: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in
the radio conference. The reception can be cancelled by pressing button X (applies for all sub-
scribers, which are listening to this channel).
 Participant radio conference (only listen; fixed connection to a

channel)
Certain Intercom stations can be configured to switch to a certain radio channel automatically when
the Intercom Server is switched on.

 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Switch radio conference on
at startup
 Activate the desired checkboxes to connect the corresponding radio channels to the respective
subscriber at start-up.
 Busy during reception: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in
the radio conference. Subscribers, which listen to this channel are occupied for calls during
reception.
 Disconnection with [X]: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in
the radio conference. The reception can be cancelled by pressing button X (applies for all sub-
scribers, which are listening to this channel).
1.5/0619 259
 Participant radio conference (listen and speak)

The entitlement for talking into a radio channel can be configured selectively for each subscriber and
radio channel. For talking, first the subscriber has to be switched to the mode “Listening” (6T and the
channel number). Then it is possible to talk into the channel with button T. The red lamp of the station
is switched on while talking into the channel. There are two (configurable) possibilities for talking:
 The subscriber talks into the radio channel as long as he presses button T, or until the configured
time for talking exceeds. Then the station is switched back to mode “Listening” again.
 The subscriber shortly presses button T and then can talk until another subscriber shortly presses
button T, or until the configured maximum time for talking exceeds.
All other stations connected to this radio channel receive the subscriber, who is talking into the
channel. After talking, the subscriber stays busy for incoming conversations. This time can be con-
figured (max. 255 seconds). If the station shall be free immediately after talking, this time delay can be
cancelled with button X.

 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Entitlement to talk into 6TX
 Activate the desired checkboxes to allow the respective subscriber to talk into the corresponding
conference.
 Busy time [s]: In this field, the time of busy subscriber after talking into this radio channel can be
changed (max. 255 seconds). This time is valid for all subscribers talking into this radio channel (by
 Maximum talk time: In this field, the maximum time for talking into this radio channel can be
changed (max. 15 minutes; 0 = no time restriction). This time is valid for all subscribers talking into
this radio channel (by default 60 seconds).
 Mode T-key: In this drop-down list, the function of the T button can be selected (valid for all
subscribers talking into this radio channel). The following functions are available:
 Hold: The T button works as “press to talk, release to listen” button.
 Tab: The subscriber shortly presses button T and then can talk until another subscriber shortly
presses button T, or until the configured time for talking exceeds.
 Go to: Subscriber > Predefined conferences
 Priority for intrusion: In this drop-down list, a priority can be selected for the respective subscriber
for talking into the radio channel. The subscriber with the highest priority is switched through.
NOTE:
This function is only available for the mode “hold T-key” in the drop-down list Voice control
(PTT) at Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Conference (see page 251).
260 1.5/0619
 Attendant contact for participant radio conference

For each participant and for each radio channel an attendant contact can be configured. The relay is
closed, as long as the subscriber receives this radio channel.

ATTENTION:

 Call no./Function: In this field, the code of the radio channel can be entered(e.g. “6T1” or “6T2”).
NOTE:
1.5/0619 261
 Call relay for radio

While listening to a radio conference it is possible to activate a relay by pressing T and after that
pressing button 1to 8. This can be used to control a pilot tone. The configuration of the relay is done at
the subscriber feeding-in with an attendant contact for the fictional call number T1 to T8. If the station
fails during key-press or if the button is pressed permanently, the relay automatically switches off after
15 seconds.

 An attendant contact has to be configured for the call number “T1” to “T8”of the respective sub-
scriber, which feeds-in the radio channel is configured (see page 208).
 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Entitlement to talk into 6TX
 Activate the desired checkboxes to allow the respective subscriber to talk into the corresponding
conference.
 After pressing the T button the pilot tone can be activated with the buttons “1” to “8” for a con-
figurable time. This time can be set in the field Busy time [s] on page 260 (by default 10 seconds).
 Save reception status

With software from Pro 4.6 on it can be defined that the reception status of the subscribers is stored
when the Intercom Server is switched off. If e.g. a subscriber listens to the 6T2 channel before the
Intercom Server is switched off, he will be automatically switched to this channel again as soon as the
Intercom Server is switched on.
NOTE:
This feature does not apply to sending a configuration, i.e. after sending the configuration the
definitions at “Subscriber”-“Receiver Music / Radio conference” becomes active.

 Save Reception State: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber, which is feeding in the
radio conference (applies for all subscribers, which receives this channel).
ATTENTION:
The reception status of channels 6T41to 6T48 cannot be restored after a restart of the Intercom
Server!
262 1.5/0619
 Protection against feedback for radio conference (optional with

reduction of the volume)
The protection against feedback can be configured for radio conference. Optional, the loudspeaker at
the “barred” subscriber can be switched on with reduced volume (e.g. if one of the two “barred” sub-
scribers speaks into the radio conference, the other subscriber receives the radio with this volume lev-
el). This volume can be configured selectively for each subscriber.

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab 6T Feedback, Radio, Headset
 6T Feedback active: In this drop-down list, the default volume of the 6T mode can be selected for
 6T Feedback mode: In this drop-down list, the volume limit type of the 6T mode can be selected
for the respective subscriber:
 Max: The volume can be increased to a maximum, which is selected in the drop-down list limit.
 Min: The volume can be reduced to a minimum, which is selected in the drop-down list limit.
 Fix: The volume cannot be changed. The volume in the drop-down list limit is permanently
applied.
 6T Feedback limit: In this drop-down list, the maximum volume of the 6T mode can be selected
Restricted features while listening

While a station is listening to a radio channel, button T is reserved for talking, so all features activated
with T are not available during this time (e.g. answering an All Call). In order to perform such features,
first the radio channel has to be left with 6T0 and afterwards switched on again. These restrictions
are not valid for stations that are entitled only for listening to a radio channel.
1.5/0619 263
 Indication of the selected radio channel in the display

The display text of the subscriber that feeds in the AF, is indicated in the display of the participant while
listening.
Radio
6T1
Channel 1
Channel 1
Listen
T-Talk d-Menu
EE311A/EE411

 Display indication: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE311A/
EE411 and Display text EE811 & camera at the respective subscriber. If this checkbox is
deactivated, the reception of the radio channel is displayed for 10 seconds and switches back to the
idle display (audio remains switched through).
 Volume adjustable separately for radio conference and

conversations
For each subscriber a separate volume level can be configured for normal conversations and for radio
conference (see page 219). The volumes can be changed at the Intercom station with the buttons D
and E during a conversation or during reception of radio conference.
264 1.5/0619
 Audio mixing
Intercom stations can listen to up to 8 radio channels simultaneously. The radio channels are switched
on as usual, with 6T and the number of the channel.
ATTENTION:
Audio Mixing is NOT possible with 16 kHz feed-in! If a 16 kHz feed-in subscriber is dialled the error
tone is audible!
It is possible to switch on more than 8 channels, but only the last 8 channels can be heard (or the 8
channels with highest priority or channels with active Squelch input).
The display jumps to mix mode. The 8 channels can now be heard simultaneously.
 At WS stations the 3 channels that were selected last are shown in the display (or the 4 channels with
highest priority, or channels with active Squelch input).
 At a station EE 811 the 4 channels that were selected last are shown in the display (or the 4 channels
with highest priority, or channels with active Squelch input).
 At a station EE 311 the channel that was selected last (or the channel with highest priority, or a
channel with active Squelch input) is shown with points at the bottom.
monochrome LCD display dot-matrix display EE 311A/EE 411
Radio confer. Radio confer.

6T1 Listen
6T1 Listen Funkconfer.
Radio 6T1
Radio confer. 6T2 Listen
6T2 Listen Radio confer.
6T3 Listen
Radio confer. Radio confer.
6T3 Listen 6T4 Listen
With the arrow buttons E and D, the desired channel can be selected. With T it is possible to talk
directly into the selected channel.
With F the selected channel can be listened to separately (display indication of “single mode” like
when switching on a single channel, see page 264). The reception of this single channel stays active for
a configurable time, then “mix mode” is activated again.
A single channel can be switched off by selecting it in mix mode and pressing button X for one second.
With 6T0 all channels are switched off.
Volume
The volume for the radio channels is set with the arrow buttons E and D and saved with F. The set-
tings stay active until reception is cancelled with “6T0”. By default, the configured volume in the field
Radio active at Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab 6T Feedback, Radio, Headset is used.
 Volume for Single Mode: Select a channel with F; the display has to be in single mode.
 Volume for Mix Mode: The display has to be in mix mode and no channel may be selected
(selection can be deactivated with X and activated with F).
NOTE:
Settings of the mix mode volume influence the single mode volumes.
1.5/0619 265
Priority
Each radio channel can be given a priority, channels with high priority are sent to the front of the list in
Mix-Mode.
Squelch input
Among channels with equal priority a radio channel with active squelch input (contact from the radio
system when the channel is active) is sent to the front of the list in mix mode.

The radio conferences are defined as described at radio conferences (see page 256), with all necessary
definitions (cancel with X or talking into a channel).
 Go to: Subscriber > Receiver Music / Radio conference > tab Common
 Reception of multiple radio conferences: Activate this checkbox for the respective subscriber
to listen to several channels simultaneously.
 Mixing Priority: In this drop-down list, a priority can be selected for the respective radio channel of
a subscriber.
 Squelch-time [s]: In this field, a time can be entered, for which the radio channel stays active after
the squelch input turns inactive (max. 255 seconds).
 Squelch-Input: In this drop-down list, the input can be selected, to which the squelch output of the
radio system is connected.
 Selective reception [s]: In this field, the time for listening to a single channel can be changed (max.
255 seconds; 0 = selective reception is switched off by pressing the button X (the station is busy
during this time), by default 4 seconds).
 Deselection channel after: In this field, the time of an automatic channel de-selection can be
changed (max. 255 seconds, by default 125 seconds).
 Immediate mix function: Activate this checkbox to switch immediately to the mix function.
266 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Public address (PA)
Public address (PA)
 PA announcement

What is a PA announcement
PA announcements are group calls with special PA functions for public address systems (PA system).
These PA announcements can be triggered either via an ICX message or direct dialling module. The
standard group calls “60” to “89” correspond to the PA zones “1” to “30”.
Priority of PA announcements
Each PA announcement has a configurable priority (“01” to “99”). This priority determines for re-
ceivers and triggers in the same PA zone, whether the PA announcement will be cross-faded at two or
more simultaneously triggered PA announcements. A cross-faded PA announcement will not be heard
by a receiver.
Trigger of a PA announcement
 Two or more PA announcements can simultaneously be triggered without cross-fades, independent
of the priority for different PA zones.
 If a PA announcement is being performed and a second PA announcement is triggered with a lower
priority in the same or in an overlapping PA zone, the trigger of the second one hears the busy tone
and has to wait for the termination of the first PA announcement. The first PA announcement cross-
fades the second one.
 If a PA announcement is being performed and a second PA announcement is triggered with a higher
priority in the same or in an overlapping PA zone, the first PA announcement will be cross-faded.
The first PA announcement will not be cancelled and can be heard again, after the second PA an-
nouncement is finished. The trigger of the cross-faded PA announcement does not receive any
acoustical or optical note during the active cross-fade.
Receiver of a PA announcement
 If the tens digit of the priority of the first PA announcement is greater or equal than the tens digit of
the priority of the second PA announcement, the second PA announcement will be cross-faded at
the receiver. As soon as the first PA announcement is cancelled, the second PA announcement will
be heard by a receiver.
Example: A PA announcement with the priority “21” cross-fades PA announcements with the
priority from “01” to “29”.
 If the first digit of the priority of the first PA announcement is less than the first digit of the priority
of the second PA announcement, the first PA announcement will be cross-faded at the receiver. As
soon as the second PA announcement is cancelled, the first PA announcement is audible at the
receiver.
Example: A PA announcement with the priority “21” does not cross-fade PA announcements with
the priority from “30” to “99”.
1.5/0619 267
Public address (PA) Intercom Server Configuration
Receiving of PA announcements
Configuration CCT 800 (for PA announcement receiver)
 Go to: Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones > tab Gr. 60-69 / Zones,
Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones > tab Gr. 70-79 / Zones,
or Subscriber > All Calls / Group Calls / Zones > tab Gr. 80-89 / Zones
All Call / group call
Group number 0–9 10 – 19 20 – 29 30 – 39 40 – 49 50 – 59 60 – 69 70 – 79 80 – 89
PA zone
Zone number 01 – 10 11 – 20 21 – 30
 Gr. 60 Zn. 1 to Gr. 89 Zn. 30: Activate the desired checkboxes to assign the respective subscriber
as a PA announcement receiver to the corresponding PA zones.
 Activate the checkbox 2 digit (00-89).
 Triggering of PA announcements

PA announcements can be triggered and cancelled either via ICX messages or a direct dialling module
(see page 192):
Studio EE 380A Intercom station
Device
Variable PA announcement Fix defined PA announcements

Functions Trigger PA announcements via direct
Deselection/Selection of PA zones
dialling or F2 menu
Areas with many PA zones Few PA announcements
Area of
operations PA announcement always to the
Many PA announcements to different PA zones
same PA zones
NOTE:
 Triggering a PA announcements is the same as triggering a group call. It is possible to execute single
PA announcements or combinations of PA announcements.
 For further information about the configuration of ICX messages to trigger or cancel a PA announce-
ment, see the manual “ICX Protocol”.
268 1.5/0619
 PA announcement

Announcements to different loudspeaker circuits can be carried out via a PA-system connected to the
Intercom Server. The AF-coupling of the PA-system is done over the loudspeaker output of a 4-wire
subscriber card (terminals C, D) or via the G8-DSP AUD4 card. The loudspeaker circuits are selected
with inputs of the PA-system that are switched by floating contacts of the Intercom Server.
The subscriber that is connected to the PA-system is called with an up to 4-digit code (freely con-
figurable), the loudspeaker circuit (or more circuits) is activated by means of one (or more) attendant
contacts. The announcement is cancelled with X, like a normal conversation. The length of the call tone
until the conversation lamp lights can be configured (see page 134).

 An attendant contact has to be configured for the relay, which activates the loudspeaker circuit (see
page 208).
 Go to: Subscriber > Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers
ATTENTION:
 Click on the button Configure PA.

 Enter an 1- to 4-digit code for activating the loudspeaker circuit and click on the button Add to save
the code.
 PA-Numbers: In this field, the configured codes for controlling a PA system are indicated.
NOTE:
Per subscriber, 339 definitions for attendant contacts are possible (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 476). One
definition is:
 One or more activations at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab active at.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab PA-Numbers.
 One entry at Attendant contacts > sub-folder subscriber > tab Call no./Function.
1.5/0619 269
Extended PA codes
It is possible to enter wildcards at PA codes to increase the available number range.
Example: 2***, 33***, 567*
Application
For telephone interfaces G-TEL / S0 / IAX for direct dialling of extensions in PABXs.
NOTE:
PA contacts are only switched when a full PA number is dialled (not when a number within a range is
dialled).

ATTENTION:

 Enter an 1- to 4-digit code for activating the loudspeaker circuit and click on the button Add to save
the code.
NOTE:
NOTE:
270 1.5/0619
Amplifier AF Series
 Operation without external power supply

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF Series > AF 20 > tab Common
 Operation without external power supply: Activate this checkbox to supply digital amplifiers over
the Intercom Server in case of a power supply failure. In case of a power failure, the IP amplifier is
automatically supplied over PoE.
ATTENTION:
If power supply over Intercom Server is used, an attenuation of up to 18 dB is possible, this is equal
to an output power of 0.5 watt! It is only possible to configure the “emergency operation” via
CCT 800 for a number of 20 amplifiers AF20D per Intercom Server!
 Speaker line monitoring


 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF Series > tab Linemonitoring
Feature licence “L-AF-LM” – speaker line monitoring
The speaker line at the audio output of an amplifier (70V or 100V) can be monitored for the
PRO 800
following errors:
LICENCE AF-LM
 Short-circuit
 Short-circuit to ground
 Disconnection
 Impedance changing
Feature PRO 800 6.0 – measuring the ground fault resistance
VirtuoSIS
Measuring the ground fault resistance and impedance at the audio output of an amplifier can
LICENCE PRO6U be carried out without the licence “L-AF-LM” and with deactivated speaker line monitoring.
Requirements
 AF-D min 2.0
 AF-I min 6.0
ATTENTION:
 An active connection between CCT 800 and the respective amplifier is required for speaker line
monitoring!
 Speaker line monitoring will not be supported for the amplifier AF20!
1.5/0619 271

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF Series > desired amplifier series > tab Line Mon-
itoring
 Line Monitoring: In this drop-down list, the speaker line monitoring mode can be selected. The
following modes are available:
 Off: Speaker line monitoring is disabled. Following functions are disabled in CCT 800.
 60 [s]: Speaker line monitoring is automatically performed in a time interval of 60 seconds.
 60 min: Speaker line monitoring is automatically performed in a time interval of 60 minutes.
NOTE:
With selecting the option “60 [s]” or “60 min”, an error (short-circuit or disconnection) can be
indicated as line fault at a control desk. Further information about line faults can be found on
page 308.
 ICX: Speaker line monitoring can manually be triggered once via an ICX command.
NOTE:
For further information about line monitoring via ICX commands, see the manual “ICX Protocol”.
 Line: In this drop-down list, the used loudspeaker line can be selected.
 Tolerance: In this drop-down list, the tolerance for “error at the loudspeaker line” can be selected
(the tolerance value “30%” is recommended).
 Click on the button Measure to measure the current ground fault resistance and impedance of the
audio output of the respective amplifier. The measurements are displayed in the following fields:
  Ground fault resistance [kΩ]: Current ground fault resistance (0,01kΩ to 1,2kΩ).
 Impedance [Ω]: Current impedance value.
 Impedance nominal value [Ω]: Configured nominal impedance value.
 Click on the button Accept to set the current measured value (displayed in the filed Impedance) as
nominal value. The current nominal value is displayed in the filed Impedance nominal value.
 Local announcement

The local announcement enables the play back of audio messages regardless of whether the amplifier
is connected to an Intercom Server or not. The incoming speech signal is received through a
microphone connected to the amplifier and played back through a loudspeaker, which is also
connected to the amplifier. This means, the amplifier can be operated as a stand-alone unit (with
limited functionality) without being connected to an Intercom Server.
ATTENTION:
The function “offline mode” has to be enabled to operate as a stand-alone unit (see page 273)!
Requirements
 AF-I min. 5.6
 AF-D min. 1.6

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Microphone, Loudspeaker, Tones
 Sidetone: In this drop-down list, the volume of the sidetone can be selected.
 no sidetone: The function “local announcement” is disabled.
272 1.5/0619
 Offline mode

If the connection between the amplifier and the Intercom Server will be interrupted (e.g. line fault,
power failure), the offline mode prevents a restart of the amplifier. This ensures that the existing con-
figuration of the amplifier will not be deleted by a restart. This means, the amplifier can be operated as
a stand-alone unit (with limited functionality) without being connected to an Intercom Server (e.g. “lo-
cal announcement”, see page 272).
ATTENTION:
An active external power supply is required for the amplifier!
Requirements
 AF-I min. 5.6
 AF-D min. 1.6

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Extended settings
 Offline mode: In this drop-down list, the state of the offline mode can be selected for the respective
amplifier. The following states are available:
 Auto: The state of the offline mode will be select by the amplifier (On, Off). The current state of
the offline mode will be indicated in the brackets.
NOTE:
Receive the CCT 800configuration to indicate the current state of the offline mode.
 Off: The offline mode is disabled.

 On: The offline mode is enabled.
Amplifier general
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > desired amplifier series > tab Inputs or
Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > desired amplifier series > tab Outputs
 The input/output configuration is the same as for all other Intercom subscribers (see page 198).
 Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > Equalizer
 In the drop-down list Equalizer (LS), select an equalizer preset for the loudspeaker. Optionally, the
equalizer settings can be configured manually (see below).
 Subscriber > Station properties > AF series > Volume control via Input
 Right-click on the desired amplifier and select “Add Function”.
 Activate the checkbox of a tone group to enable the volume control.
 Priority: In this field, the priority of the volume control can be changed for the respective subscriber
(by default: 49).
 Volume min: In this drop-down list, the minimum volume for operation range can be selected.
 Volume max: In this drop-down list, the minimum volume for operation range can be selected.
Configure equalizer settings

To configure the equalizer settings, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > AUD > tab Parameter
1.5/0619 273
2. Click on the button Configure. The following dialogue appears:
3. In the drop-down list Settings for, select the entry “Loudspeaker” (by default, selected).
4. Activate the checkbox next to the drop-down list Settings for to activate the equalizer. The state of
the amplifier is changed in real-time.
5. Put the slider on the desired position for the respective frequency to adjust the attenuation or
amplification. The current value is shown in the field Value [db].
NOTE: 16 kHz only for AUD2 cards

The frequency 16 kHz is only available with AUD2 cards.
6. In the drop-down list Presets, a pre-configured setting can be loaded by pressing the button Load,
or the current equalizer settings can be saved in the selected preset by pressing the button Save. It
is the same setting as in the drop-down list Equalizer (LS) in the main dialogue.
7. Click on the button Send to send the defined equalizer settings to the Intercom Server. Optionally,
activate the checkbox Online to send the equalizer settings to the Intercom Server in real-time.
8. Click on button Apply to save the equalizer settings and to close the dialogue.
274 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Alarm function
Alarm function
The alarm functions can be used for different applications, the two main applications are:
 Silent Alarm: Initiation of an alarm at a preconfigured group by e.g. a threatened officer by pressing
a button or a foot switch. The receivers of this group can listen to the happening at the initiator after
taking over the alarm. The number of listener is shown in the display of the initiator.
 Alarm: Playback of a pre-recorded audio file or an announcement to a pre-configured group (e.g. for
evacuation alarm).
The receivers can be arranged in 10 groups (same groups as on page 238). If a group is used as alarm
receiver, group calls can still be initiated in this group.
ATTENTION:
Silent alarm
The alarm process

 Initiate with a button
The alarm is initiated with dialling the direct dialling code “9T2” and the receiver group (e.g. “9T201”
to trigger the alarm in receiver group 01). A single subscriber can initiate multiple alarms with different
direct dialling codes. The initiator does not receive any tone signal, but the conversation lamp is acti-
vated by default (see page 276). With dialling the direct dialling code “9T2T” at the initiator, the idle
display state is activated at all receiver stations.
NOTE: Alarm must be trigger via direct dialling

Dialling the code “9T2” and the receiver group directly does not trigger the alarm.
 Initiate via input (e.g. foot switch)

The alarm can also be initiated by activation of an input, which simulates the dialling of the initiating
subscriber (see page 199).
 Alarm receivers with alphanumeric display (max. 10 groups)

The alarm is indicated at the receivers with buzzer (interval depends on priority), blinking conversation
lamp and blinking display (shows identification of initiator). With dialling the direct dialling code
“9T2T” at the initiator, the idle display state is activated at all receiver stations.
 Monitor the alarm at the alarm group

The alarm is taken over by the receivers with any button, now the receiver can listen to the initiator's
station.
1.5/0619 275
Alarm function Intercom Server Configuration
 Indication in the display of the initiator, how many subscribers are listening
The number of listening subscribers is indicated in the display of the initiator, e.g.:
Alarm
0002
Alarm
 Cancel alarm with code

The alarm is cancelled by entering a configurable code (the code may not start with T), which can also
be activated by dialling simulation of an input. This code has to be defined by Direct Dialling, which
makes it possible to entitle single stations for ending the alarm. Depending on the configuration of the
alarm, single subscribers can switch off reception of the alarm by pressing button X for at least one
second. If during an alarm all receivers (that have already taken over the alarm) switch off reception or
build up another conversation, so that nobody is listening, the alarm is automatically initiated again
after 4 seconds.

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add alarm trigger”.
 Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add new entry”.
 Group: In this drop-down list, the receiver group can be selected (see page 238). If several alarms
are configured with different buttons, a separate entry has to be added for each alarm.
 The following methods for triggering an alarm are possible:
 If a button is used for triggering, a direct dialling has to be configured for the respective subscriber
(e.g. “9 = 9T20” for group 0 or “9 = 9T200” for group 0 with 2-digit dialling: see page 181).
 If an input is used for triggering, a dialling simulation has to be configured for the respective input
(e.g. “9T20” for initiating an alarm in “Group 0”; see page 199).
 Priority: In this drop-down list, the reception priority can be selected for this alarm (see page 280).
 Disconnect: Activate this checkbox to switch-off reception with this receiver group via the button
X.
 Attendant contact: in this drop-down list, an output contact can be selected, which is closed until
the alarm (or the corresponding transfer level) is cancelled.
 Indication of alarm: Select the desired radio button to define alarm type (see page 278).
 Last subscriber switches off: restart alarm: Activate this checkbox to automatically initiate the
alarm once again as soon as the last receiver has switched off reception.
 no red lamp during alarm: Activate this checkbox to disable the red lam at the initiator of the
alarm.
group.
276 1.5/0619

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling target of the code “9T30” to cancel the alarm can be
entered for the respective subscriber. Any direct dialling code can be entered, but it may not start
with “T” (e.g. “4711=9T30”).
 In the row “Intercom Server configuration block”, this setting can be entered for the entire
NOTE:
 At alarms with high or medium priority the keyboard is locked (see page 280). It is not possible to
quit the alarm via direct dialling (keypad at the receivers is locked).
 If the alarm shall be switched off via input, the code defined at direct dialling has to be simulated
(not “9T30”).
 If the selected subscriber shall initiate several alarms with different buttons, these definitions have
to be configured separately for each receiver group and button.
 Talk to the initiator

If this option is configured, the receivers of an alarm can talk by pressing button T after the alarm is
taken over. A talking receiver is heard by the initiator and by all other receivers that have taken over
the alarm.

 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber
 Activate the checkbox Receiving stations entitled to talk for the initiating subscriber.
1.5/0619 277
 Max. 8 silent alarms at the same time

If several alarms arrive at a station at the same time, this is indicated in the following way:
dot-matrix display: EE 311A/EE 411:

The first alarm that reaches the station is displayed. The first alarm that reaches the
station is indicated blinking in the
display with points at the bottom.
Alarm
22 22
Joe Cocker
Joe Cocker Alarm
Alarm
T-Intrude
X-Cancel
X-Accept
After the first alarm has been accepted it is possible to scroll through the alarms with D and E (as
long as no buzzer is active, otherwise volume control of buzzer). With F the selected alarm can be
taken over. Indication of an alarm with buzzer has the highest priority, so a new alarm (also with low
priority) fades an already taken over alarm with high priority until the new alarm is taken over. In order
to avoid this, it is possible to configure that an alarm with low priority is indicated with buzzer only for
a short time if the receiver already listens to another alarm. If this alarm is cancelled, the new alarm is
again indicated with buzzer.

 Select the radio button “Silent Alarm: Buzzer only once” in the column Indication of alarm for the
respective subscriber with an low priority alarm.
278 1.5/0619
 Automatic change of priorities and alarm groups if not taken

over
Each alarm can be transferred to further groups (or to the same group, with different priority) or deleted
after a configurable time.
Application for “Silent Alarm”

If an alarm is not taken over within a configurable time, it can be transferred to different groups or
deleted. This function can be used e.g. to transfer an alarm to a larger receiver group with higher pri-
ority if it is not taken over.

 In the drop-down list Group, select the desired receiver group. The groups are the same as for group
calls.
 Go to: Subscriber > Alarm triggering > sub-folder subscriber > Group
 Time [s]: In this field, the time can be changed, after which the alarm is transferred (by default 1 sec-
ond).
 Group: In this drop-down list, the receiver group can be selected (End = the alarm shall be can-
celled).
 Priority: In this drop-down list, the reception priority can be selected for this alarm (priority levels
see page 280).
X.
 Attendant contact: In this drop-down list, an output contact can be selected, which will be closed
until the alarm is cancelled or transferred.
NOTE:
If in the previous alarm procedure stations have received the alarm that are not configured as
receiver of the selected level, they still receive the alarm.
 Manual change of priorities and alarm groups if not taken over

The transfer can also be controlled manually by dialling a direct dialling code. Via a direct dialling code,
it possible to entitle single stations for ending the alarm (the initiator as well as the receivers):

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling target of the code “9T3” to control the transfer can
be entered. Any direct dialling code can be entered, but it may not start with “T”. e.g:
 With “9T3” and “T” (e.g. “555=9T3T”), the transfer can be disabled. The alarm stays in the current
transfer level.
 With “9T32” and the number of the desired transfer level (e.g. “444=9T32”), one of the transfer
levels can be enabled.
1.5/0619 279
 9 reception priorities with 3 different reception options

9 different reception priority numbers, which define 3 reception options (“Low”, “Medium” and
“High”), are available for each alarm. These reception options define the following (after the alarm has
been taken over):
 If the alarm fades conversations.
 If the alarm fades All Calls and group calls.
 If the receiver is busy for other conversations.
 If the keyboard of the receiver is blocked, so that he can call no other subscribers or functions.
The alarm fades above the functions as described in the table below:
Priority levels
Reception option Fading: no Fading: yes
Conversation 1–2 3–9
All Call initiator 1–6 7–9
All Call receiver 1–4 5–9
Waiting for TTT 1 2–9
Ringing 1 2–9
Dial tone 1–2 3–9
Keyboard is blocked 1–2 3–9
Busy 1–2 3–9
280 1.5/0619
Alarm
The alarm Process

 Initiate alarms via inputs, feed-in alarm signal via subscriber
The AF signal for the alarm announcement is fed in over the terminals A and B of the first subscriber
of a G3-GET-4D / G8-GET-4D with 0 dB on 600 Ohm (DIP switch on the subscriber card has to be turned).
NOTE:
For further information, see the manuals “GE300” and “GE800”
The alarm is initiated by activation of an input, which simulates dialling of the code (“9T2” and the
number of the receiver group) for the subscriber that feeds in the AF.
 Alarm receivers with alphanumeric display (10 configurable groups)

The alarm announcement is switched automatically to all stations within the receiver group, the
number of the initiator blinks in the display.
 Cancel alarm with code

The alarm is cancelled either by dialling simulation of an input (code 9T30) or by entering a configur-
able code at an entitled station (the code may not start with T). Depending on the configuration of the
alarm, single subscribers can switch off reception of the alarm by pressing button X for at least one
second. If during an alarm all receivers switch off reception or build up another conversation, so that
nobody is listening, it can be configured that the alarm is automatically initiated again after 4 seconds.

 Right-click and select “Add new entry”.
 Group: In this drop-down list, the receiver group can be selected (see page 238). If several alarms
are configured with different buttons, a separate entry has to be added for each alarm.
 The alarm can be triggered either by pressing a button (0 to 9) or via an input:
 If a button is used for triggering, a direct dialling has to be configured for the respective subscriber
(e.g. “9 = 9T20” for group 0 or “9 = 9T200” for group 0 with 2-digit dialling: see page 181).
 If an input is used for triggering, a dialling simulation has to be configured for the respective input
(e.g. “9T20” for initiating an alarm in “Group 0”; see page 199).
 Priority: In this drop-down list, the reception priority can be selected for this alarm (priority levels
see page 280).
X.
 Attendant contact: in this drop-down list, an output contact can be selected, which is closed until
the alarm (or the corresponding transfer level) is cancelled.
 Select the radio button “Evacuation Alarm (Connect to Audio)” in the column Indication of alarm
 Last subscriber switches off: restart alarm: Activate this checkbox to automatically initiate the
alarm once again as soon as the last receiver has switched off reception.
group.
1.5/0619 281

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling target of the code “9T30” to cancel the alarm can be
entered for the respective subscriber. Any code can be entered, but it may not start with “T”
(e.g. “4711=9T30”).
 Max. 8 different alarms at the same time

If several alarms arrive at a station at the same time, this is indicated in the following way:

The last alarm that has been initiated is indicated. The last alarm that has been
initiated is indicated blinking in the
display with points at the bottom.
Alarm
22 22
Joe Cocker
Joe Cocker Alarm
Alarm
T-Intrude
T-Intrude X-Cancel
X-Cancel
After the first alarm has been accepted, it is possible to scroll through the alarms with D and E, with
F the selected alarm can be taken over.
 9 reception priorities with 3 different reception options

Described at “Silent Alarm” on page 275.
 Release keypad despite alarm

During a reception as of priority 3 the keypad is blocked. It is possible to selectively enable subscribers
to release the keypad, so that they e.g. can switch off the alarm by dialling to an output. In order to
unlock the keypad at the subscriber any key has to be pressed during reception of the alarm.

 Activate the field Release keypad despite alarm for the desired subscribers.
 Automatic change of priorities and alarm groups after time

Described at “Silent Alarm” on page 275. Each alarm can be transferred to four different groups (or to
the same group, with different priority levels) or deleted after a configurable time.
This function can be used e.g. to define an alarm with high priority, with no possibility for switching
off, to ensure that all receivers hear the announcement. After a configurable time the priority is
decreased, so that the receivers can build up conversations or initiate All Calls, the alarm has only
background status.
282 1.5/0619
 Audio alarm transmission with alphanumeric display

(max. 1 Group)
By means of a floating contact (terminals “IN1” and “-”, GE 300: on G3-GEM, GE 800 on G8A-GEN of
the 1st housing) a notice of alarm can be transferred to pre-configured stations (feed-in of the alarm
notice at the music input - GE300: terminals “MUSIC” on G3-GEM, GE 800 terminals “MU1” and
“MU2” on G8A-GEN of the 1st housing). This alarm has the highest priority. It fades running con-
versations and All Calls. With display stations the display “ALARM” is blinking during the alarm. Feed-
in of music over the music input is not possible in this case.
ATTENTION:
The transmission of the NF-signal in the entire configured Intercom Server block is only possible if the
alarm input is in the same Intercom Server as the AF-feed-in! Otherwise the alarm is only shown in the
display, without audio transmission!

 Go to: Inputs > Alarm input
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add alarm input”.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server or block can be selected, which
shall receive the alarm message (see page 382).
 Alarm 1 receiver: Activate this checkbox for the selected subscriber to receive the alarm 1 signal.
 Subscriber > Call Disabling
 In the field Disabling of functions and dialling, the button sequence “4T” shall be disabled.
Otherwise, the alarm message can be switched on by entering “4T1” (see page 135).
 Reception of chime signal

By activation of the chime signal input (floating contact, terminals “IN2” and “-”, GE300 on G3-GEM
and GE800 on G8A-GEN), the chime signal is switched to the pre-configured receivers.

 Receive Chime-signal: Activate this checkbox for the selected subscriber to receive the chime
signal.
 Inputs > Chime-signal
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add chime signal”.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server or block can be selected, which
shall receive the chime signal (see page 382).
 Chime signal: In this drop-down list, the amount of rings can be selected.
 Select the desired radio buttons in the section Chime Signal to define, whether the chime signal
shall sound as double gong or as single gong.
1.5/0619 283
Door function Intercom Server Configuration
Door function
Door opening
ATTENTION:
Configured door stations require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the
memory capacity can be found on page 477!
 Door station with one door opener

For each door station some general definitions have to be configured. In addition the desired way of
ringing has to be configured (“Ringing at one station” or “Ringing at a group of stations”).

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add door opener function”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > tab General
ATTENTION:
 Door opening with buttons “0–9”

ATTENTION:
 Button: In this drop-down list, the button to open the door can be selected.
284 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Door function
 Door station with several door openers

Multiple door opener contacts can be allocated to one door station (max. 339 contacts per subscriber
min PRO 800 1.1 see page 476). These contacts can be opened at a control station with a button of
choice.

ATTENTION:
 Door opener time configurable per door station

The time, the door opener output remains closed after the door opener button has been released, can
be configured.

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open
 Time for door opener [s]: In this field, the time to open the door can be changed (max. 255
 Automatic cancelling the conversation after door opening after

a configurable time delay
It is possible to configure that the conversation with the door station is automatically cancelled after
the door is opened, immediately or after a time delay.

 Cancel Call: Activate this checkbox to automatically cancel the conversation with the door station
after the door is opened.
 after [s]: In this field to the right side, the time delay can be changed, after which the conversation
is cancelled (by default 0 seconds).
 Door opener relay with Flip-Flop function

A Flip-Flop mode can be configured selectively for each door opener relay and for each door opener
button or access code. This function can be used for:
 Switching on a relay (or several relays) with a code (e.g. T1234) and switching it off by entering the
same code once again.
 With after dialling: switching on the relay by pressing the button the first time, switching off the relay
by pressing the button a second time.
 A permanently switched on relay can be switched off with after dialling.

  Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > tab General
 Right-click and select the desired output via “Add Output”.
1.5/0619 285
ATTENTION:
 Relay toggle: Activate this checkbox to enable the Flip-Flop function for the respective relay.
 Independent operation of several door stations at the same time

If several door stations ring at the same time, the receiver is always connected to the right door station.
 Indication of the calling door station in the display

With display stations the display text of the calling station is indicated.
 Automatic storage of several door calls

If several door stations ring at the same time, all waiting calls are stored automatically and connected
one after the other.
286 1.5/0619
Ringing
 Ringing with chime signal via an input
By activating the chime signal input e.g. by means of a call button, ringing at a group of Intercom
stations can be initiated. A subscriber of this group can now dial to the door station and open the door.

The receivers have to be configured as chime signal receivers (see page 283).
 Ringing at one station

A station, which is configured as door station, is able to carry out a privacy call to a pre-configured control
station. The call is taken over at the control station with any button. During the conversation, the door can
be opened with after dialling a pre-configured button. A music channel can be defined for feed-in of
waiting information or music at the door station. All defined music programs are available (see
page 172).

 Activate the checkbox Fix as calling station for the respective door station.
 Activate the checkbox Disable after-dialling for the respective door station.
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the call number of the control station can be entered as direct dialling
target for the respective call button (e.g. “0=45”).
 Ringing at a group of stations

A door station can also call to a group of stations. The groups are the same as the max. 90 groups of
group call. The call is taken over with 8T + group no., with F or with T. During the conversation the
door can be opened by after dialling a configurable button:
 Ringing at group 0: 
 Ringing at group 1–89: 
 Answer a group call with T: 
 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the code “98” and the group call number as direct dialling target
for the corresponding button (e.g. “0=981” for ringing at group “1” with button 0, or “4=9823” for
ringing at group “23” with button 4; see page 238).
 If “T” is included in the direct dialling code (e.g. ringing at a group of stations = 098T0), a snapshot
is activated when the door station is ringing at a group of stations.
ATTENTION:
A speed dialling destination can not contain spaces.
 Activate the checkbox Disable after-dialling for the respective door station.
group.
 Duration: In this field, the announcement time can be changed (max. 1049 seconds or 17.4 minutes;
0 = switch-off time disabled, by default 60 seconds).
1.5/0619 287
 Tone selection for ringing at a group


A DSP tone can be selected for ringing at a group of stations.

 Text: In this field, a max. 14-digit description can be entered for the respective group call.
 Tone: In this drop-down list, an announcement tone can be selected for the respective group call.
NOTE:
 For playback of the tones DSP stations are required.
 The length of the DSP tone is always 500 ms. If the selected DSP tone has more than 500ms the
tone will be automatically cut after the max time.
 Group Call overlays call: Activate this checkbox to overlay conversations of receiving subscribers
with a group call.
 PA Synchronisation: Activate this checkbox for the desired group to delay group calls until a
“ready” message is received by the respective Intercom Server.
 Pre-recorded audio ID: In this field, the ID of a pre-recorded audio can be entered, which is played
back instead the gong at group calls.
NOTE:
 The message only has to be downloaded at the initiating subscriber (client).
  For ringing at a group, pre-configured audio files with ID “100” to “131” can be used.
 Tone for: In this drop-down list, the intended use of the DSP tone can be selected, which is selected
in the drop-down list Tone.
 Forwarding of group ringing

If the group call is not answered, it is cancelled after a configurable time. But the door call can also be
forwarded to a different group of stations or to a pre-configured station after a configurable time.

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber > Forwarding Group-ringing
 Right-click and select “add new group”.
 Transfer- Group: In this drop-down list, the group can be selected, from which the door call shall
be forwarded.
 Target No.: In this field, the configured direct dialling target of the group (e.g “981”; see page 287)
or the call number of the respective subscriber can be entered, to which the door call is forwarded
(target call number max. 6-digits, e.g. at 2-digit groups via LAN a 3-digit function code cannot be
used).
 Time [s]: In this field, the time can be changed, after which the group call is forwarded (by default 4
seconds).
288 1.5/0619
 Waiting information at the door station during ringing
ATTENTION:
Only for ringing at a group of stations!
In standard the conversation lamp of the door station blinks during ringing. If the door station is
configured as receiver of the called group, also the tone signal is switched on. It is also possible to
configure an audio channel with music or waiting information, which will be switched to the door
station during ringing. All already defined music channels are available (see page 257). For DSP
stations different tone signals can be selected as waiting information.

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Waiting information
 Waiting information: In this drop-down list, a music channel can be selected (only configured
music channels).
 In the drop-down list Waiting information, select the entry “always” to receive the waiting
information with the door station, even if it is not within the group call receiver group. If more than
one door station is ringing at the same group, the door station does not receive ringing from the
other door stations.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations
 Initiate ringing: In this drop-down list, a tone signal can be selected (only for DSP stations).
 Automatic door opening with time delay

This function can be used e.g. for a door station with day/night transfer: During daytime operation the
door opens automatically when the call button at the door station is pressed. Activating privacy
function for a defined station (turning or 031) changes to night-time operation: pressing the call
button now initiates a normal call. The Intercom station used for changing between daytime and
night-time operation can be the control station or any other station. The station for changing between
daytime and night-time operation can also be switched to privacy mode via an input (e.g. time switch,
see page 199). For automatic door opening a time can be configured, which passes before the door
opener relay closes after the call button has been pressed. During this time normal ringing is carried
out (the call could also be taken over). This informs the inside stations that the door has been opened
and also prevents that everybody recognises that the door is opened automatically.

 Configure either of the functions “Ringing at one station” or “Ringing at a group of stations”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control Station
 Control Station: In this field, the calling number of the station used for switching over day-time
and night-time operation can be entered.
 Only control station can open: Activate this checkbox to open the door only by the control station
(switching over).
ATTENTION:
If the door station does not ring to the control station, this checkbox may not be activated!

 Activate the checkbox Automatic open for the respective door station.
 after [s]: In this field to the right side, the time delay can be entered, after which the door opener
relay closes after the call button has been pressed. During this time, normal ringing is carried out
(max. 255 seconds; 0 = door is opened immediately, by default 4 seconds).
 Activate the checkboxes Automatic open and Automatic open when private for the res-
pective subscriber to invert this function (control station loudspeaking = manual opening; control
station in privacy mode = automatic opening active).
 Time for door opener [s]: In this field, the time to open the door can be change (max. 255 seconds).
It is recommend to do not enter “0”. Otherwise, the door opener relay would not stay closed when
1.5/0619 289
door opening is initiated (by default 3 seconds).
ATTENTION:
 Pending door calls are not affected by the transfer of the control station. Therefore destination is
affected by the state of the control station at the time of initiation!
 Only works with door opener button 1!
 The keypad of the door station (if existent) cannot be used for other functions when this feature is
active!
 Transfer of door calls to telephone dialler with possibility of

opening
With a telephone interface G3-TEL or G8-TEL Intercom calls can be transferred into the public
telephone net. During a conversation with the door station the door can be opened at the telephone
with after dialling.
NOTE:
For further information about the features and configuration of the telephone interface, see the
manuals “G3-TEL” and “G8-TEL”.
 Allocation of door opening entitlement

It is possible to allow only certain groups of stations to open doors by after dialling. The entitlements
can selectively be defined per door station.
NOTE:
All groups except group “0”.

group.
 Authorisation group: In this drop-down list, a group to open doors can be selected. The following
options are available:
 No restriction: All subscribers can open this door.
 Group: Only stations of the selected group may open this door (e.g. “Group 2”).
290 1.5/0619
Access control (door opening with code input)

 1- to 4-digit codes (can be combined)
Doors can be opened by entering a 1- to 4-digit code at the door station. It is possible to configure
several codes per door station or the same code at several door stations (key system), so that
general codes, group codes and single codes can be configured. Per door station a maximum of 123
codes can be configured (minus 2 codes for each allocated output, see page 476). 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-digit
codes can be mixed.
NOTE:
If a door opener controls several relays with various codes, a relay with the code TTTT would be
triggered by any other relay whenever it is switched.
ATTENTION:
Configured codes require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the memory
capacity can be found on page 477!
Example: with ten door stations, each with one door opener output, up to thousand codes can be con-
figured all together, but in this case the memory is nearly full!

 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add door opener function”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Door opener > sub-folder subscriber
ATTENTION:
 Access code(s): In this field, the access codes to open the door can be entered (e.g. “T0815”;
multiple entries are separated with a comma “,”).
 Time for door opener [s]: In this field, the time to open the door can be changed (max. 255
seconds). It is recommend to do not enter “0”. Otherwise, the door opener relay would not stay
closed when door opening is initiated (by default 3 seconds).
 Number of attempts
After input of an invalid code the calling signal changes into an error signal. If reattempts of code input
are allowed, the error signal changes again into the calling signal and another code can be entered.

 Number of attempts: In this drop-down list, the number of allowed code inputs can be selected,
before a call to the control station is established.
1.5/0619 291
 Security call to a control station, blocking of the keyboard in

case of misuse
After the configured number of reattempts overflows (if no reattempts are configured after the first
invalid input), a call to a configured control station is established. The call to this station will be
announced by a special tone. At the control station the call can be taken over with any button. The door
can be opened during the conversation with button 1. The call to the control station lasts until it is
answered by the control station, but the option to switch it off automatically after a configurable time
exists as well. If the call to the control station is transferred via secretary transfer or Follow Me, the door
opener function is also transferred.

 Control Station: In this field, the call number of the control station is entered.
 Duration of control station call [s]: In this field, the time can be changed, after which a control
call is switched off (max. 15 minutes; 0 = call lasts until it is taken over, by default 0 seconds).
 Only control station can open: Activate this checkbox to open the door only by the control station
(switching over).
ATTENTION:
If the door station does not ring to the control station, this checkbox may not be activated!

ATTENTION:
ATTENTION:
If an emergency call “call 2” is configured from the door station to the control desk, an emergency
call is automatically issued upon misuse and not the control station call! Therefore the settings for
emergency call are active and not the ones for control station call!
292 1.5/0619
 Control of several door openers with different codes at one door

station
Several door opener contacts can be allocated to one door station. These contacts can be opened by
entering of different codes at the door station.

ATTENTION:
 Access code(s): In this field, the access code to open the door can be entered (e.g. “T0815”;
multiple entries are separated with a comma “,”).
 Listening to the door station while opening

It can be configured that the speech direction is switched permanently from the door station to the
control station from pressing of the door opener button on until the conversation cancel. In this case
the control station can e.g. hear if the door is closed again.

 Activate the checkbox Simplex during opening for the respective door station.
 Transfer of door calls via input

A door call can be transferred by an activated input, which changes the dialling of the call button (e.g.
by a time switch). So it is possible to define different targets for one door station.

See “Input changes button” on page 199.
1.5/0619 293
Control desk function Intercom Server Configuration
Control desk function
General
Stations, which are configured as control desk, can carry out the following control desk functions in
addition to the standard Intercom functions:
 Call requests: By pressing a call button on a station, a call can be requested from the control desk.
Active call requests are stored at the control desk and have to be acknowledged manually in order
to establish a call to the respective station. It is not possible to cancel active call requests and there-
fore to decline a not accepted call. Not acknowledged call requests are indicated on the display of
the control desk and an acoustic signal (“buzzer”) sounds. Further information about the configura-
tion of call requests can be found on page 297.
 Call park: During an active call between a control desk and the calling station, this call can be parked
by pressing either the button 2 or 3. This call is displayed at the respective control desk as call
request and can be continued at a later point in time. The call type of the parked call changes to “call
type 3” (on page 324). Further information about the configuration of the call park function can be
found on page 299.
 Input messages: Activated inputs (e.g. Gx-8E8A, Gx-16E, station inputs) are stored at the control
desk and have to be acknowledged manually. Not acknowledged call requests are indicated on the
display of the control desk and an acoustic signal (“buzzer”) sounds. Depending on the configuration
and cabling of the inputs, the following switch steps can be indicated:
 Idle mode
 Active 1 (normal call)
 Active 2 (emergency call)
 Short circuit
 Line fault
By default, the switch step “Active 1” is indicated at the control desk with standing display and
buzzer with long interval; the switch step “Active 2” is indicated with flashing display and buzzer with
short interval. Further information about the indication of input messages can be found on page 301.
294 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Control desk function
Definition of a control desk

As difference to a normal Intercom station, a control desk EE 311/EE 411 shows the following display
in idle position:
If a conversation is built up or if a call request or input message comes in, the display text of the calling
Intercom station or input is displayed.
ATTENTION:
Configured control desks require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add control desk function”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Extended Settings
  Idle display at control desk function: Activate this checkbox to display the call number of the
control desk in the idle display.
GOOD TO KNOW: Recommendation

It is recommend to configure max. 8 control desks per Intercom Server housing.
 Parallel indication and operation of functions at several control desks

For the call requests or input messages of single or of all Intercom stations or inputs several control
desks can be configured for indication.
ATTENTION:
When configuring Intercom Servers with server IDs higher than 100, the control desk call numbers
may not have more than four digits!
 Buzzer
For each control desk the buzzer for indication of call requests and input messages can be configured
separately. For DSP stations different tone signals can be defined instead of the buzzer (see page 339).

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer
 Buzzer-mode: Select the desired radio button to define the indication of call requests and input
messages. The following options are available:
 Normal: The buzzer sounds until an incoming call request or input message is taken over.
 Single with repetition: The buzzer sounds once with call 1/active 1 or four times with call 2/
active 2, but is repeated every 16 seconds.
 Single without repetition: The buzzer sounds once with call 1/active 1 or four times with call 2/
active 2.
 Buzzer during conversation Normal call/Emergency call: Activate this checkbox to indicate the
buzzer of the control desk immediately during a conversation. If this checkbox is deactivated, a call
of this call type is not indicated before the conversation is cancelled.
 Buzzer via output: In this field, the call number of an output can be entered, that is closed either in
parallel to the buzzer or instead of the buzzer.
 Buzzer via output Normal call/Emergency call: Activate this checkbox to announce a call of the
respective call type via an output, which is selected in the field Buzzer via output.
 Buzzer at station Normal call/Emergency call: Activate this checkbox to announce a call of the
respective call type with the buzzer of the control station.
1.5/0619 295
 Red lamp at buzzer

Additionally to the buzzer the red lamp of the station can be switched to indicate incoming calls.

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer
 Activate the checkbox Red lamp at buzzer for the respective control desk.
 Call indication
For each control desk, the call indication of call requests and input messages can be configured sepa-
rately.

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Extended Settings
 Call indication during conversation normal call: Activate this checkbox to indicate incoming
normal calls immediately at the display during a conversation. If this checkbox is deactivated, a nor-
mal call will not be indicated before the conversation is cancelled.
 Call indication during conversation emergency call: Activate this checkbox to indicate incom-
ing emergency calls immediately at the display during a conversation. If this checkbox is deactivat-
ed, an emergency call will not be indicated before the conversation is cancelled.
 Line faults with video: Activate this checkbox in order to display video during a line fault (if avail-
able) at the respective control desk.
 Scrolling of display information

If several call requests or input messages come in at the same time, up to 60 calls can be stored per
control station. If more than this number of calls come in, the remaining calls are not stored. If several
call requests are waiting, this is indicated in the following way:
F2 menu / WS 800 / WS 810: EE 311A/EE 411:

The first three call requests (the call requests The first call request or the call request with the
with the highest priority) are indicated. The highest priority is indicated blinking in the display
number of waiting call requests is also indi- with points at the bottom.
cated.
Call Request
Parkdeck 1
======== 20 ========
Elevator
******** 57 ********
Machine Room
-------- 35 --------
œLine 1/3 ›Take Call
EE 311A/EE 411
One call after the other can be taken over with button F at the control station without having to cancel
between the conversations. The calls are sorted in order of priority, calls with equal priority are sorted
in order of time. It is also possible to select any call with the buttons D and E and then take it over
with F without keeping to the order.
296 1.5/0619
 Call request to a control desk station

Any button of an Intercom station, except button X and the function keys, can be configured as call
button for a call request to a control station. Two different types of call requests can be configured: Call
1 (normal call) and Call 2 (emergency call). Both call types can be initiated from one Intercom station
with different buttons.
ATTENTION:
 Configured call requests require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server. A list of the
 A maximum of 509 call requests can be configured for each subscriber card (as of PRO 800 1.1 see
page 476)!
 Each Intercom Server can store a maximum of 1300 call requests (for all control desks together)!
 Call requests from one control desk to another control desk are not possible!

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Call Request”.
NOTE: Function extension with PRO 800 1.2

The functions Trigger key 3, Call type for trigger key 3 and Snapshot at key 3 are available
with PRO 800 1.2 or higher.
 Trigger key no.: In this drop-down lists, the call button to initiate a call request can be selected (but-
ton 0 to 9, T).
 Call type for trigger key no.: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected for the call re-
quest, which is triggered by the selected button in the drop-down list Trigger key.
NOTE: Call requests have higher priority

Call request has higher priority as dialling. The button used for triggering the call request is no
longer available for dialling.
 Snapshot at key no.: Activate this checkbox to save a snapshot at a video station whenever the
respective button is triggered, which is selected in the drop-down list Trigger key.
NOTE: Further information about snapshots

For further information about snapshots, see the manual “Video WS”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Call Requests > sub-folder subscriber > tab Control Desks
 Right-click and select the desired control desk via “Add Control Desk”.
 Different display indication of call requests


 Call 1 (normal call) is indicated with standing display (EE 311/EE 411) or framed with “=====” (EE
811), buzzer with long interval and blinking conversation lamp.
 Call 2 (emergency call) is indicated with flashing display (EE 311/EE 411) or framed with “*****”
(EE 811), buzzer with short interval and blinking conversation lamp.
 Disable after dialling

“Disable after dialling” should be configured for stations, where unskilled personnel shall initiate calls,
to avoid wrong dialling. After a call request is issued, all dialling except X is ignored.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Activate the checkbox Disable after-dialling for the respective subscriber.
1.5/0619 297
 Disable reissuing of call requests

It is possible to disable the possibility of reissuing call requests. This can make sense if the control desk
is dialled via a G-TEL or S0 connection causing call charges.
NOTE:
Configuration is only possible per configuration block.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Control desk system
 Activate the checkbox No new call on new trigger.
 Waiting information after initiating a call requests

An already configured radio channel (see page 254) can be used for feed-in of waiting information dur-
ing a call request. The calling station receives the waiting information until the call is taken over.

 Calm down signal normal call and Calm down signal emergency call: In these drop-down
lists, a radio channel or DSP tone can be selected for the calling subscriber (only configured radio
channels available).
 Standard (red lamp): No waiting information, only the red lamp blinks.
 Call-park without calm down signal: Activate this checkbox to do not put out a calm down signal
at subscribers, which are “parked” at the control desk
 Output contacts for call requests

One or several outputs can be configured as output contact for the calling station (e.g. for light call
signalling in old people's homes and hospitals).
 Group contacts and collective contacts for call requests

The same output can also be configured for several Intercom stations. This contact is closed as soon
as a station of this group initiates a call.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > sub-folder subscriber > tab Attendant Contacts
ATTENTION:
 Normal Call: Activate this checkbox to close the selected contact during a “Call 1”.
 Emergency Call: Activate this checkbox to close the selected contact during a “Call 2”.
 Line-fault: Activate this checkbox to close the selected contact during a line fault.
 Parking: Activate this checkbox to activate the selected contact as long as a call request is parked
at the control desk (see page 299). The switch type of the respective contact can be selected in the
drop-down list switch type.
NOTE:
The respective attendant contact remains active at a parked emergency call.
298 1.5/0619
 Switch type: In this drop-down list, the switch type can be selected for the respective attendant
contact (standard, constant, blinking (1 Hz; 500 ms on/500 ms off) and fast blinking (2 Hz, 250 ms on/
250 ms off)). If the option “standard” is selected, the following switch types apply:
 Normal Call (Call 1): The contact stays closed until the call is deleted.
 Emergency Call (Call 2): The contact opens and closes until the call is deleted.
 Line-fault: The contact opens and closes until the line-fault has been fixed and acknowledged.
 Call park function

If a call request is taken over at the control desk a conversation is built up. If this call is parked with the
button 2 or 3, the call remains in the display as a reminder that there is still something to do. With F
the call can be built up once again. If this call is cancelled with X, the call park function is cancelled.
The call park function can be initiated after taking over:
 a normal call (Call 1),
 an emergency call (Call 2) without Cancel on Site (see page 299) or
 a previously “parked” call.
 Cancel emergency calls on site

With this function, call 2 (emergency call) cannot be cancelled at the control desk, only acknowledged.
The buzzer is switched off, the display indication remains, the red lamp lights at the calling station as
acknowledgement for the caller. The call has to be cancelled with X at the calling station. It is also
possible to define that the call has to be acknowledged at the control desk before it can be cancelled
on site with X. Call 1 (normal call) can be cancelled with button X at the calling station as well as at
the control desk by building up a conversation. Via special configuration it is possible to define that
emergency calls has to be parked with button 2 or 3 in order for them to be cancelled on site with X.

 Activate the checkbox Cancel on site with [X] for the calling subscriber.
 NOTE:
At a call request for telephone interfaces (S0, TEL, IAX, SIP-T or SIP-C) the checkbox Cancel on
site with [X] is automatically activated.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX> General > tab Control desk system
 Clear emergency call only after acknowledgement. Activate this checkbox to cancel emergen-
cy calls on site with button X only after these calls have been acknowledged at the control desk.
 Delete on site: Activate this checkbox to cancel call requests on site with button X only after these
have been accepted and parked with button 2 at the control desk.
 Delete “Call 2” on control desk at “Delete on site”: Activate this checkbox to delete emergen-
cy calls at control desks in the respective Intercom Server block without pressing the button X at the
initiator.
Trigger call requests only via ICX commands

As of CCT 800 7.1 it is possible to trigger call requests only via ICX commands. Further information
about ICX commands to trigger call requests can be found in the manual “ICX Protocol”. Follow the
instructions below.

1. Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger
2. In the drop-down list Trigger key no. of the desired call type, select the entry “----”.
In the drop-down list Call type for trigger key no. to the right, select the desired call type, which
1.5/0619 299
must be simulated by the incoming ICX command to trigger this call request.
De-bounce for releasing call

Feature PRO 800 2.1 – de-bounce for releasing call
PRO 800 By using the function call requests will only be set up after a certain amount of receptions of
LICENCE PRO2U key presses or after a definable time of stable press of the release button.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Delayed triggering
 Number keystrokes: In this drop-down list, the number of keystrokes to trigger the call request can
be selected. The drop-down lists Duration keypress [s] and Time for resetting delayed mode
[s] are enabled.
 Duration keypress [s]: In this drop-down list, the time of the permanently keystroke to trigger the
call request can be selected.
 Time for resetting delayed mode [s]: In this drop-down list, the time can be selected.
 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Pre-Recorded Audio
Call request with confirmation

Feature PRO 800 2.1 – call request with confirmation
PRO 800
When pressed for the first time, a voice memo will be played. If the shutter button is pressed
LICENCE PRO2U again during the playback of this voice memo, the call request is triggered. If the shutter button
is not confirmed again until the end of the voice memo, the call request is not triggered, but
the whole process is restarted.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Pre-recorded audio
 Call release confirmation Normal Call [ID]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be
entered, which will be played back at the initiator as long as the call request of an emergency call
has not been acknowledged at the control desk.
 Call release confirmation Emergency Call [ID]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can
be entered, which will be played back at the initiator as long as the call request of an emergency call
has not been acknowledged at the control desk.
ATTENTION:
The call request is only triggered if the second key press (to confirm the call triggering) takes place
while the voice memo is playing. The voice memo must therefore contain sufficient "empty time" at
the end, so that the end user gets time to press the call button again.
300 1.5/0619
 Indication of input messages

The switch steps of activated inputs can be shown at a control desk in the display and/or with the buzz-
er. Depending on the configuration and cabling of the inputs, 5 different switch steps can be indicated
(only inputs on a plug-in card Gx-8E8A or Gx-16E or ET8E9A):
 Idle mode
 Active 1 (equivalent to a “normal call”)
 Active 2 (equivalent to an “emergency call”)
 Short circuit
 Line fault
Inputs on the motherboard G1-GEM/G3-GEM, on the power supply card G8-GEN or internal inputs of
a station can indicate only 2 switch steps):
Activation of the internal inputs of a station see page 200. An input message is acknowledged (like a
call request) at the control desk with button F.
ATTENTION:
 Configured input messages require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of the
 A maximum of 509 input messages can be configured for each input/output card (as of PRO 800 1.1
see page 476)!

 Go to: Inputs > Input message
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input message”.
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
 In the drop-down lists Break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and Short, the desired switch steps for the respective
input level can be selected that shall be shown at a control desk in the display and/or with the buzzer.
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > sub-folder input > tab Control Desks
1.5/0619 301
 Acknowledgement of input messages

For each switch step of an input it can be configured if a message can be deleted with F at the control
desk, or only acknowledged, while the input is still active.

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1 / Active 2 / Error
 Input becomes inactive when call is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge
an input message can be selected when the respective input becomes inactive when the call is still
active.
 Acknowledgement when input is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge
an input message can be selected when the respective input is still active.
 Acknowledgement when input is inactive: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an
input message can be selected when the respective input is inactive.
 Snapshot: Activate this checkbox to save a snapshot at a video station whenever an input message
of this type is initiated (allocation of camera to input at Inputs > General Settings).
Display indication
If an input message is acknowledged, the display changes from “==============” or
“**************” to “--------------” (see page 297).
“Only Active 1” or “Only Active 2”

Two different switch steps can be indicated: “Idle” and “Active 1” or “Idle” and “Active 2”.

 With default wiring definitions, the following wiring method can be used:
IN
Active 1
or
Active 2
 In the drop-down list break, select the option “Idle” and in the drop-down list short, select either
the option “Active 1” or “Active 2”.
302 1.5/0619
“Active 1 and Active 2” and line fault monitoring

Five different switch steps can be indicated: “Idle”, “Active 1”, “Active 2”, “line break” and “short
circuit”.

 With the wiring definitions, one of the following wiring methods can be used (select in the drop-
down lists break: Error, 15k: Idle, 5k6: Active 1, 1k5: Active 2 or short: Error):
IN
2k2 10k
Method 1: 15k
Active 2 Active 1
IN
2k2 6k8
Method 2: 15k Active 2 Active 1
1.5/0619 303
Cancel on site
With this function the input is provided with a flip-flop feature; e.g. with short activation of “Active 1”
or “Active 2” a call is initiated to the control desk in the respective call mode. A call cannot be deleted
from the control desk, but has to be reset by a further level at the input. This is used e.g. in retirement
homes and hospitals where a call has to be reset on site of release, or e.g. with detectors which have
to be reset on the site of release. This function can be configured for all or for single switch steps of an
input.

 With the wiring definitions one of the following wiring methods can be used (select in the drop-down
lists break: Error, 15k: Idle, 5k6: Active 1, 1k5: Active 2 or short: Active 2):
IN
2k2 10k
Method 1: 15k
Active 2 Active 1 Reset
IN
2k2 6k8
Method 2: 15k Active 2 Active 1 Reset
In this case, also line faults are indicated. Short circuit is equal to a permanent emergency call
(Active 2).
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1/Active 2/Error
 Input becomes inactive when call is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge
an input message can be selected when the respective input becomes inactive when the call is still
active.
 Acknowledgement when input is still active: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge
an input message can be selected when the respective input is still active.
 Acknowledgement when input is inactive: In this drop-down list, the type to acknowledge an
input message can be selected when the respective input is inactive.
 Snapshot: Activate this checkbox to save a snapshot at a video station whenever an input message
of this type is initiated (allocation of camera to input at Inputs > General Settings).
 In the drop-down list of an input state (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 or short), the option “Reset” has to
be selected for at least one input state. Otherwise, a state cannot be deleted.
 In the drop-down list of an input state (break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 or short), the option “Idle for cancel
on site” has to be selected for the idle state (instead of the option “Idle”).
304 1.5/0619
 Indication of different input states

For each switch step of an input it is possible to define if the input is indicated at the control desk only
in the display or also with buzzer. Indication of a certain switch step can also be completely deactivated.

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
 Active 1: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. In order to enable this drop-down list, the option “Active 1” has to be selected for at least one
input level of the respective input.
 Active 2: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. In order to enable this drop-down list, the option “Active 2” has to be selected for at least one
 Error: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective input.
In order to enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Error” has to be selected for at least one input
level of the respective input.
NOTE:
If e.g. for “Active 1” buzzer indication is configured, but at the buzzer definition of the control desk
“Normal call” is configured without buzzer, “Active 1” will be indicated without buzzer (see
page 324).

 Display text EE311/EE411: In this field, an up to 6 character long text can be entered, which are
indicated in the display of the control desk EE311/EE411 (possible characters see page 141).
 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, an up to 14 digits long station name can be
enteredentered, which will be indicated in the display of the central control station EE811.
Display indication
monochrome LCD display dot-matrix display
Call Request
CO2-Alarm CO2-Alarm
******** 57 ******** **************  “Active 2”
Schranken  “Active 1”
Barrier ==============
======== 20 ========
œZeile 1/2
› Annehmen
1.5/0619 305
 Indication of input messages via blinking conversation LED

An input message from an input with a 4-digit call number beginning with “94” is not indicated with
the buzzer, but with a blinking conversation LED. The call can be configured without buzzer and display
indication, otherwise an acknowledgement would have to be made.
NOTE:
If the function “Indication of Input Messages via blinking conversation LED” is used, the function code
for “Call transfer control desk” has to be changed in order to avoid a collision of call numbers.

 Go to: In the field Call number, change the call number of the respective input to “94xx”.
 Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
 In the drop-down list Active 1, select either the entry “call type 10”(no display, no buzzer) or “call
type 13” (only display indication).
 In the drop-down list Active 2, select either the entry “call type 11”(no display, no buzzer) or “call
type 15” (only display indication).
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Operations for Active 1 or Active 2
 in the drop-down list Input becomes inactive when call is still active, select the entry “Quit
call” for the respective input.
 Output contacts for input messages

One or several outputs can be configured as output contact for an input message (e.g. for light call
signalling in retirement homes / hospitals). A maximum of 509 output contacts for input messages can
be configured for each input/output card (as of PRO 800 1.1 see page 476).

 Go to: Inputs > Input message > sub-folder input > tab Attendant contacts
ATTENTION:
 Active 1: Activate this checkbox, to indicate the switch step “Active 1” at the respective control desk.
 Active 2: Activate this checkbox, to indicate this switch step “Active 2” at the respective control desk.
 Error: Activate this checkbox, to indicate this switch step “Error” at the respective control desk.
 Switch type: In this drop-down list, the switch type can be selected for the respective output (stand-
ard, constant, blinking (1 Hz; 500 ms on/500 ms off) and fast blinking (2 Hz, 250 ms on/250 ms off)).
NOTE:
The same output can also be configured for several inputs. In this case the contact is closed as soon
as an input message from this group comes in.
306 1.5/0619
 Acknowledge input messages with conversation

It is possible to define that at acknowledgement of an input message a conversation to a definable
station is built up. Per input one call number can be defined.
Application
Input messages can be used similar to call requests when more than two call buttons are required.

 Call quits input: In this field, the according call numbers can be entered for the respective input.
NOTE:
 A call request has to be configured for the subscriber, to which a call is made for acknowl-
edgement. Further information about the configuration of call requests can be found on page 297.
 The respective subscriber and the input have to be allocated in the same Intercom Server.
1.5/0619 307
 Line fault monitoring

 Line fault monitoring for an Intercom station
For each Intercom station allocated to a control desk, the line fault monitoring can be configured. A line
fault is indicated at the allocated control desk with a buzzer with short interval and in the display as
follows:

A line fault is indicated with a row of stars, e.g.: Blinking with an arrow “:” and the calling
number of the monitored Intercom station, e.g.:
Call Request
Elevator Elevator
******** 54 ******** **************
œLine 1/1 ›Take Call › Take Call
EE 311A/EE 411
If the line fault is acknowledged at the control desk with button F the buzzer is switched off, the display
remains blinking until the line fault is removed. When the line fault has been fixed, this event must be
acknowledged at the control desk by pressing the button F.

 Activate the checkbox Line Monitoring for the respective subscriber.
 Go to: Subscriber > Call Requests > sub-folder subscriber > tab Control Desks
 Time delay of line monitoring

The delay time of line monitoring can be defined individually for each subscriber.

 Line-monitoring-delay time [s]: In this drop-down list, the delay time to trigger the line-
monitoring can be selected for the respective subscriber.
308 1.5/0619
 Automatic acknowledgement of fixed line faults

Feature PRO 800 4.0 – automatic acknowledge of fixed line faults
Fixed line faults will be acknowledged automatically and must not be acknowledged manually
at the control desk by pressing the button F.

 Activate the checkbox Automatic acknowledge of line faults for the respective subscriber.
 Line fault monitoring for an input

If an input is defined for line fault monitoring (cabling see page 303), a line fault is indicated at the
allocated control desk with buzzer with short interval and in the display as follows:
dot-matrix display: A line fault is indicated EE 311A/EE 411:

by a row of stars, e.g.: Blinking with “IN:” and the calling number of
the monitored input, e.g.:
Call Request
CO Sensor CO Sensor
******* D114 ******* **************
› Take Call
If the line fault is acknowledged at the control desk with button F the buzzer is switched off, the display
remains blinking until the line fault is removed.
 Snapshot in case of line fault

In case of a line fault, a snapshot can be saved at a video station.

 Activate the checkbox Snapshot at line-fault for the respective subscriber.
NOTE:
For further information about snapshots, see the manual “Video WS”.
1.5/0619 309
Expansion module
 Error for missing device

If the expansion module will be removed during operation from the main module (see below), the error
will be indicated within 64 seconds at the respective control desk. If the main module is not in operation
(e.g. power failure), the error will be indicated within 64 seconds after the restart or re-registration of
the main module at the Intercom Server. In the meantime, line fault errors of the main module will not
be indicated.
Requirements
Intercom Server software:
 PRO 800 min. 5.0
Configuration software:
 CCT 800 min. 5.0
Requirements for main module (DSP device)

The following firmware types are supported:
 DSP 800A
 DSP 800B
 DSP 900A
 DSP 900B
 IoIP-Device
Requirements for main module (amplifier)

 AF-I min. 5.6
 AF-D min. 1.6

 Error for missing device: In this drop-down list, the state of the function can be selected for the
respective expansion module. The following states are available:
 Auto: The state of this function (on, off) is select by the expansion module. The current state of
the function is indicated in the brackets.
NOTE:
Receive the CCT 800 configuration to indicate the current state of the function.
 Off: This function is disabled.

 On: This function is enabled.
310 1.5/0619
 Prevent restart

If the main module executes a restart (e.g. re-registration at the Intercom Server, restart), this function
prevents a restart of the connected expansion module. A cold start of the expansion module is still pos-
sible.
Requirements
Intercom Server software:
 PRO 800 min. 5.0
 CCT 800 min. 5.0
Requirements for main module (DSP device)

The following firmware types are supported:
 DSP 800A
 DSP 800B
 DSP 900A
 DSP 900B
 IoIP-Device
Requirements for main module (amplifier)

 AF-I min. 5.6
 AF-D min. 1.6

 Prevent restart: In this drop-down list, the state of the function can be selected for the respective
expansion module. The following states are available:
 Auto: The state of this function (on, off) is select by the expansion module. The current state of
the function is indicated in the brackets.
NOTE:
Receive the CCT 800configuration to indicate the current state of the function (see page 60).
 Off: This function is disabled.

 On: This function is enabled.
 EB2E2A

The EB2E2A can be used with all station types with an option board connection (e.g. ET 311). However,
the EB2E2A has to be activated for the stations (it is not automatically recognised when receiving the
configuration from the Intercom Server.

 In the drop-down list Additional device, select the entry “EB2E2A” for the subscriber, to which the
EB2E2A is connected.
1.5/0619 311
 Reactivation of call requests/input messages

It is possible to define a time for call requests and input messages, after which they switch back to
status “active”.
Maximum time: 98304 seconds (about 27 hours). This is valid for:

 Acknowledged emergency calls with “Cancel on site with X”.
 Acknowledged line faults.
 Input messages (for which an acknowledged state is configured).
Exceptions
 This function is not available for “parked” normal calls.
 It is not possible to differ between call types (e.g. it cannot be defined that an acknowledged call
becomes active again, a parked call at this subscriber however not).
 It is also not possible to define per control desk if call requests shall become active again-only per
call initiator/input (it is not possible that, e.g. an input is switched back to “active” at control desk
“101”, but not at control desk “102”).
NOTE:
After confirmation of line faults or input faults, in general the faults are remain active until the
problem is solved.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Automatic end of call / Reactivation, or Inputs > In-
put message > tab Triggering
 Reactivation time Emergency calls and Errors [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after
which call requests or input messages of an emergency call or errors are reactivated (0 = no
reactivation of calls).
  Reactivation time Normal calls [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which call requests
or input messages of a normal call is reactivated (0 = no reactivation of calls).
NOTE:
If the conversation of an emergency call with “Cancel on site with [X]” is longer than the configured
reactivation time, a buzzer is audible at the control desk during the conversation every 16 seconds.
312 1.5/0619
 Cancel of call requests/input messages after time

It is possible to define a time for call requests and input messages after which they are automatically
deleted. Maximum time: 98304 seconds = about 27 hours; is not valid for line faults. The timer starts
when e.g. a call is initiated.
The timer does NOT start when:

 a call is acknowledged.
 acknowledgement of a line fault.
 reactivation of a call after time.
 call transfer to an other control desk.
The timer restart when:

 the call is initiated again,
 the call button is pressed again,
 a call is converted into a call request,
 “Call Park” function,
 or cancel of “Call Park” function.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Automatic end of call / Reactivation or
Inputs > Input message
 Automatic end of call Emergency calls [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which the
call requests or input messages of an emergency call or error is automatically deleted (0 = no auto-
matic cancel of calls).
  Automatic end of call Normal calls [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which the call
requests or input messages of a normal call is automatically deleted (0 = no automatic cancel of calls).
 Pre-recorded audio for cancel of call request via timeout


It is possible to play back pre-recorded audio when the timeout for a call request expires (e.g. at
information points: “At the moment there are no available operators. Please press the call button again
or try later”). Different pre-recorded messages can be used for Normal calls and Emergency calls.

 Automatic end of call Normal calls [s]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be
entered, which is played back at the time out of a normal call.
 Automatic end of call Emergency calls [s]: In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be
entered, which is played back at the time out of an emergency call.
 Pre-recorded audio for call suppression of call requests


Different pre-recorded messages can be played back at call suppression of normal calls and emergency
calls.

 Call Suppression (Normal calls): In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered,
which is played back at call suppression of normal calls.
 Call Suppression (Emergency calls): In this field, the ID of the pre-recorded audio can be entered,
which is played back at call suppression of emergency calls.
1.5/0619 313
 Manual call transfer
Call groups
The different call requests and input messages can be transferred either to one common target or
selectively to different targets. The call transfer is activated with a code including the group number of
the call types.
Group Call type
1 Call 1”: Normal call from an Intercom station
2 Call 2”: Emergency call from an Intercom station
3 All Call requests: All Call requests from Intercom stations (as of Pro 05.5 incl. parked calls)
4 All input messages without buzzer
5 Active 1”: Normal call from an input (with buzzer)
6 Active 2”: Emergency call from an input (with buzzer)
7 All input messages with buzzer
8 Line faults (from Intercom stations and inputs)
9 All Call types (as of Pro 05.5 incl. parked calls)
Activate the call transfer

The call transfer is activated with codes that can be dialled as follows:
 Direct dialling at the control desk (the code has to be defined by Direct Dialling, which makes it
possible to entitle single stations for call transfer).
 Select from the function list B at a station with dot-matrix display.
 Press a configured button at a control desk EE 880 / EE 380.
 Dialling simulation of an input.
 With an ICX message from a PC.
 The prefix “94” activates an additional call transfer. Each control desk several call transfers can be
activated at the same time. If different transfers are defined for the same call type, the last activated
transfer is valid.
 The prefix “95” cancels all previous call transfers and activates only the new one.
Cancel All Call transfers
Prefix Code Group Parameter Function
94 /95 -0- X - Cancel All Call transfers
Selective deleting of taking of calls or
94 / 95 -4- X Call no. target control desk
parallel indication
Call transfer
94 / 95 -1- X Call no. target control desk Call transfer to another control desk
94 / 95 -2- X Button Call transfer direct dialling
94 / 95 -3- X 0 Suppression Call Activation
94 / 95 -3- X 1 Deactivate buzzer
94 / 95 -3- X 2 Deactivate call indication
Transform normal call to emergency
94 / 95 -3- X 3
call 1)
1)
For inputs special configuration is required see page 316.
314 1.5/0619
Parallel indication taking of calls

Parallel indication at another control
94 /95 -5- X Call no. target control desk
desk
Call no. source control Taking of calls (parallel indication of
94 / 95 -6- X
desk the calls of another control desk)
Activate parallel indication at a
94 / 95 -7- X Call no. station
regular station
Deactivate parallel indication at a
94 / 95 -7- 0 Call no. station
regular station
ATTENTION:
Call transfers activated with a code are cancelled if the Intercom Server is switched off or the con-
trol desk is reset (with F + X)!
Indication in the display if call requests or input messages are (at least partially) transferred to another
control desk (with 94-1-Grp-target no.):
->102 -->102
Transfer
Transfer
F1-Subscribers
F2-Functions
F3-Main Menu
d-Menu

 Direct dialling: In this field, enter one of the following direct dialling codes for the respective
subscriber:
 Direct dialling = Prefix + code + group (if parameter shall be dialled at the subscriber).
 Direct dialling = Prefix + code + group + parameter (if nothing shall be dialled at the subscriber).
1.5/0619 315
 Types of call transfer

Cancel All Call transfers
Code: 94-0-Grp (95...): All Call Transfers, Parallel Indications and Taking of Calls are cancelled. Taking
of calls activated at another control desk remains active.
Call transfer to another control desk

Code: 94-1-Grp-Target (95...): All Call types belonging to the selected group are transferred to the
selected. Existing calls are indicated parallel at both control desks. In case of day/night transfer (see
page 320) existing calls are indicated only at the target control desk after activation of the transfer.
Call transfer direct dialling

Code: 94-2-Grp-Button (95...): The direct dialling configured for the selected button of the calling
station is carried out. If “T” is entered for the button, the direct dialling of the call button is carried out.
With this transfer all Intercom functions can be carried out, e.g. transfer to telephone or pager or ring-
ing at a group).
 If parallel indication at a second control desk is activated, the call transfer direct dialling is not carried
out, the call is indicated only at the parallel control desk.
 “Call Transfer direct dialling” has to be activated for the calling Intercom station, otherwise the Call
Transfer Direct Dialling is not carried out.

Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter
 Activate the checkbox Call Transfer Direct Dialling for the respective subscriber (changes are
applied at the next active call).
Deactivate call creation

Code: 94-3-Grp-0 (95...): All Calls belonging to the selected group are not created any more (except
they are indicated in parallel at another control desk). Attendant contacts remain inactive too.
Deactivate buzzer
Code: 94-3-Grp-1 (95...): All Calls belonging to the selected group are sent to the control desk and
acknowledged automatically, but not deleted. The calls are still indicated in the display of all called con-
trol desks, but the buzzer is switched off. Attendant contacts are activated as normal.
Deactivate call indication

Code: 94-3-Grp-2 (95...): All Calls belonging to the selected group are not indicated any more at the
own control desk. Indication at other control desks remains unchanged. The calls are active at the
calling inputs/stations and can be indicated again or transferred to other targets at any time.
Transform normal call to an emergency call

Code: 94-3-Grp-3 (95...): All normal calls are initiated as emergency calls once again. These emergen-
cy calls are indicated at all configured control desks. Attendant contacts are activated like for emergen-
cy calls. This transfer has no effect on existing emergency calls. Input messages active 1 without buzzer
(call types 10 and 13 = call group 4) are converted to active 2 with buzzer and display indication (call
type 7).
NOTE:
Call conversion for inputs is only carried out if “Active 2” is configured for a level (an unused level can
also be used).
316 1.5/0619
Parallel indication at another control desk

Code activate: 94-5-Grp-Target, deactivate: 94-5-Grp-00 (95...): The calls are indicated at both (or
more) control desks. Taking over the calls is possible at each control desk and deletes the calls at all
other control desks.
Taking of calls (calls of another control desk)

Code activate: 94-6-Grp-Source, deactivate: 94-6-Grp-00 (95...): The calls of another control desk
are indicated (in parallel) on the own control desk. Taking over the calls is possible at each control desk
and deletes the calls at all other control desks.
Parallel indication at a stations without control desk functionality

Code activate: 94-7-Grp-Target station, deactivate: 94-90 (95...): All Calls/input messages are addi-
tionally indicated at a regular station. A station can receive calls from multiple control desks. It is also pos-
sible to execute a parallel indication of a control desk to multiple regular stations.
As acoustic signalization at the receiver the buzzer for “call 1” or “call 2” or the configured DSP tone
for reception Alarm with low or high priority is audible. Visual indication at EE411-display with 6-digit
text, permanent or flashing, and in the EE811 display with call number and the 14-digit long text:
214 214
Main Entrance
Main Entrance
› Take Call
›Take Call
Only the call with the to most priority is indicated.
ATTENTION:
Only calls with buzzer are indicated. If e.g. an input message is acknowledged, it then is only indicated
at the control desk, however not indicated anymore at the parallel station!
Selective deleting of taking of calls or parallel indication

Code: 94-4-Grp-Target: Activated taking of calls and parallel indication of the respective control desk
is deleted. Taking of calls activated at other control desk remains active.
1.5/0619 317
 Call transfer after time

This call transfer is permanently active that means if a call is not taken over at the control desk within
a configurable time, the calls are transferred to a pre-configured control desk (or the call type or
indication is changed). Per control desk 8 different call transfers with separate times can be defined. A
group of calls can also be transferred to several control desks. The following transfers/transformations
are possible:
 Call transfer (parallel indication at another control desk)
 Call transfer direct dialling
 Deactivate call creation
 Deactivate buzzer
 Transform normal call to an emergency call
Further information about call transfer types can be found on page 316.

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desk > sub-folder subscriber > Call transfer
 Group: In this drop-down list, the call group can be selected for that the transfer is valid (see
page 314). The following fields are enabled.
 Time present [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which calls are transferred to the pre-
configured control desk (1 to 1000 seconds (~16 minutes)).
 Time absent [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which calls are transferred when at least
one call has already been transferred (1 to 1000 seconds (~16 minutes)).
 The time in the field Time absent [s] is usually defined shorter than in Time present [s]. That
means if calls were already transferred, it is assumed that the operator is not at his place and the
calls are transferred faster. As soon as any button is pressed at the control desk, the time in the
field Time present [s] is valid again.
 Function: In this drop-down list, the type of transfer/transformation to be activated can be selected
(see page 316). If the entry “Call transfer” or ”Call Transfer Direct Dialling” is selected, the field
Parameter Call number will be enabled.
 Parameter Call number: In this field, the call number of the target control desk (for entry “Call
Transfers”) or a button of the calling subscriber (“0” to “9” or “T”) can be entered as direct dialling
button (for the entry “Call Transfer Direct Dialling”).
 Day/Night: Select the desired radio button to define how the transfer is activated in daytime and
nighttime operation (see page 320). If no day or night transfer is used, select the radio button “Day”.
The following functions are available:
Settings day/night Transfer daytime operation Transfer nighttime operation
Day after time -
Night (without time) - immediately
both (time for day only) after time immediately
Night (with time) - after time
both (time at day and night) after time after time
ATTENTION:
 Calls with suppressed buzzer are regarded as acknowledged calls, therefore they cannot be
converted!
 Acknowledged calls (e.g. via suppressed buzzer) are not transferred after time!
 The status “absent” for the control desk is active, as soon as all configured call transfers are
expired (longest configured transfer time)!
 If an incoming privacy call will be transformed into a normal call at a control desk, a call transfer
by using the function “Call transfer direct dialling” (see page 316) is not possible!
318 1.5/0619
 Output contact for call transfer after time

For each of the 8 defined call transfers after time (see page 318), one (or several) attendant contacts can
be defined. The attendant contact remains active, until the transferred call is taken over.

ATTENTION:

 Enter the codes “9491” to ”9498” and click on the button Add to save the code.
NOTE:
1.5/0619 319
 Day/night transfer
A control desk can be switched to night-time mode with a code:
 9499: Switch off (nighttime operation).
 9490: Switch on (daytime operation).
 When switching off with “9599”, all transfers previously defined at the control station will not be
active any more after switching on again. This code can be dialled as follows:
 Direct dialling at the control desk (the code has to be defined by Direct Dialling, which makes it
possible to entitle single stations for switching off).
 Select from the function list B at a station EE811.
 Turning the key switch of a control desk EE880.
 Dialling simulation of an input.
 Over an ICX message from a PC (dialling simulation of the direct dialling)

 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling code can be entered for the respective subscriber
(e.g. “T9=9499, T0=9490” (switch off with T9 and switch on with T0)).
 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > sub-folder subscriber > Call transfer
 Day/Night: Select the desired radio button to define how the transfer is activated in daytime and
nighttime operation. If no day or night transfer is used, select the radio button “Day”. The following
functions are available:
Settings day/night Transfer daytime operation Transfer nighttime operation
Day after time -
Night (without time) - immediately
both (time for day only) after time immediately
Night (with time) - after time
both (time at day and night) after time after time
320 1.5/0619
 Output contact for night transfer

For the night transfer, one (or several) attendant contacts can be defined. The attendant contact
remains active, until the transfer is deactivated.

ATTENTION:

 Enter the code ”9499” and click on the button Add to save the code.
NOTE:
ATTENTION:
 Configured output contacts require memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
 The attendant contact is only switched with the standard function code 94! If the function code is
changed (at Intercom Server - Block XX > Function Codes) the contact is not switched!
 Secretary transfer at day/night transfer

It is possible to automatically activate secretary transfer together with day/night transfer.

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Transfer parameters
 Activate the checkbox Secretary transfer at night switch for the respective subscriber. Further
information about secretary transfer can be found on page 230.
1.5/0619 321
 Call distribution of control desk calls


It is possible to configure a call distribution for a certain number of control desks. If a call desk is not
available due to the processing of a control desk call, each other control desk call will be distributed to the
next free control desk within the distribution chain. A control desk is not available in the following states:
 Control desk is busy.
 Control desk is logged out (when a user login is configured, see page 166).
 The control desk has a line fault.

 Offline at line fault: Activate this checkbox to skip the respective control desk if not available.
 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desk > tab Call distribution-day, or Subscriber > Control Desk
> tab Call distribution-night
 Sequence: In this drop-down list, the control desk can be selected, to which the incoming control desk
call is transferred. In order to enable this drop-down list select in the drop-down list Control desk 1
an available control desk. The following functions are available:
 Next call first desk: The new activated control desk call will be transferred to the first available
control desk in the distribution chain.
 Next call next desk: The new activated control desk call will be transferred to the first next
higher available control desk in the distribution chain (based on the last activated control desk).
 Control desk 1 to Control desk 14: In these drop-down lists, the composition of control desks can be
selected for the call distribution (min. 2 control desks required). The drop-down list Sequence and field
Timeout [s] are enabled
ATTENTION:
 All control desks in the same distribution chain have to be in the same Intercom Server!
 Certain control desk calls will not be distributed:
 Converted door calls (see page 326),
 Calls without a buzzer (call type 10, 11, 13, 15),
 parked calls (call type 3).
 Certain control desk calls remain displayed at the control desk after the distribution:
 reactivated calls after time,
 parked calls (call type 3),
  acknowledged calls that remain visible.
 If one or more control desks within the distribution chain have an 8-digit call number, only a
maximum of seven control desks can be used for the call distribution!
 Timeout

Feature PRO 800 5.0 – timeout
PRO 800
With the timeout, it is possible to configure the delay, after which an active control desk call is
LICENCE PRO5U transferred from one control desk to another available control desk within the distribution
chain.

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desk > tab Call distribution-day, or Subscriber > Control Desk
> tab Call distribution-night
 Timeout [s]: In this field, the time can be entered, after which an active control desk call is trans-
ferred to the first available control desk in the distribution chain (max. 255 seconds).
NOTE:
 The timeout does not apply for new incoming control desk calls.
 An incoming control desk call will only be transferred once with a timeout value of “0”.
 If a control desk is configured several times for a distribution chain, it will be considered only once.
322 1.5/0619
 Storing of control desk transfers

It is possible to restore control desk transfers/parallel indication after a warmstart of the Intercom
Server. Even when the Intercom Server is reconfigured the transfer state is saved. Switching is also
carried out for control desks that are connected via CNET-LAN, NET, E1 or S0. The following transfer
types can be stored:
 Day/Night transfer (9499, 9599).
 All manual transfer types, e.g.:
 Taking of calls (94-6-group-source control desk).
 Parallel indication (94-5-group-destination control desk).
 Call transfer (94-2-group-button).
The following transfer type is NOT stored:
 Parallel indication at a stations without control desk functionality.
ATTENTION:
 The transfer states are not saved at a power failure or turning the power off and back on!
 The function “Storing of control desk transfers” is active for an “EE 880” only if the key-switch is
deactivated! At key-switch a simulated button has to be configured! For further information see
the manual “EE 880”.

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Transfer parameters
 Restore after warmstart: In this drop-down list, the store mode of control desk transfers can be
selected. The following modes are available:
 Do not save: The transfer is not saved.
 Restore last state: The state is restored, which was active before the restart.
 Permanent night switch: After a restart, the night transfer automatically is activated.
 Call transfer cancelling during active call request


Feature PRO 800 2.0 – call transfer cancelling during active call request
PRO 800
LICENCE PRO2U
After cancelling the call transfer, All Call requests are displayed only on the control desk 1.

 Activate the checkbox Delete transferred calls at destination control desk at end of transfer.
NOTE:
After expiration of the time, a call can be redirected to another control desk only once. If the call
request is deleted, the call will also be deleted at this control desk.
1.5/0619 323
Call types
There are different call types for call requests from Intercom stations and input messages available,
which define how the calls are indicated:
 For call requests from Intercom stations, the call types 1 to 15 are configurable, see “Change call ty-
pes of call requests” on page 325.
 For input messages, the call types 4 to 15 are available.
The different call types have the following default settings:
Display indication
EE 311, EE 411, Dot-matrix,
Buzzer EE 880
EE 380 TFT, LCD
Call type indication
Call type indication

in the display
in the display
Standing
Blinking
Normal
Fast
Call type
1 Intercom station “Normal call”  -  -  

2 Intercom station “Emergency call” -  -   
3 Intercom station “Call Park” - -  -  
4 Input “Active 1”  -  -  
5 Input “Active 1”  -  -  
6 Input “Active 2” -  -   
7 Input “Active 2” -  -   
8 Line fault input / Intercom station -  -   
9 Line fault input  -  -  
10 Input “Active 1” - - - - - -
11 Input “Active 2” - - - - - -
12 Input “Active 1”  -  -  -
13 Input “Active 1” - -  -  -
14 Input “Active 2” -  -   -
15 Input “Active 2” - - -   -
NOTE: Different tone signals available

There are different tone signals for the buzzer available. Each call type can be assigned to a tone sig-
nal, see ”Tones for calls to control desks” on page 339. This requires a DSP station (firmware version
DSP 800, DSP 800A, DSP 900, DSP 900A, DSP 900B), an IoIP station or an analogue station (via ET 901
with licence Lx-GET-DSP).
GOOD TO KNOW: Call type indication individually configurable

The indication of the call types is individually configurable:
The configuration of the control desk EE 880 can be found in the manual “EE 880”.
The configuration of the control desks EE 380 and Conductor can be found on page 187.
 Call types of the type “Active 1” are managed as normal calls in the Intercom system.
 Call types of the type “Active 2” are managed as emergency calls in the Intercom system.
324 1.5/0619
 Call type texts for display indication in dot-matrix displays

An up to 14-digit text can be defined for each call type, which is indicated in the display of a control
desk with dot-matrix display (valid for the entire block).
Examples
Call Request
Line Fault Line Fault Door Open
Sam Brown Sam Brown Main Entrance
======== 20 ======== ************** ==============
œLine 1/1 œLine 1/1

› Take Call › Take Call

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Call type texts
 Call type texts: In these fields, up to 14-digit texts can be entered for the respective call types.
 Change call types of call requests


Feature PRO 800 3.x – change call types of the call request
PRO 800
This feature allows you, to change the configurable call types of the call request (“normal call”,
LICENCE PRO3U “emergency call” and “line fault”) to each standard Intercom call type. For a list of all available
call types see page 314.

 Go to: Subscriber > Call Request > tab Call type
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add call request”.
 Normal call: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected, which is performed instead of a
normal call at a call request.
 Emergency call: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected, which is performed instead of
an emergency call at a call request.
 Line fault: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected, which is performed instead of a line
fault at a call request.
1.5/0619 325
 Conversations as call request

In order to obtain uniform operation at the control desk, the following incoming calls can be converted
to call requests:
 Loudspeaking calls
 Private calls
 Busy calls
 Ringing from a door (only for ringing at a group of stations; see page 287)
In addition, it is possible to select the call type to which the calls will be converted. If e.g. a call in privacy
mode arrives at the control desk, it is not indicated as private call but as call request, and can be taken
over like any call request with F.
NOTE:
Loudspeaking, private and busy calls from other control desks will not be converted to call requests.

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Call conversion
 Loudspeaking call: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming loudspeaking conversations to call
requests at the control desk (after a change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied
with the next call or door call).
 Privacy call: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming privacy calls to call requests at the control desk
(after a change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied with the next call or door
call).
 Busy: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming busy calls to call requests at the control desk (after a
change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied with the next call or door call).
 Ringing from door: Activate this checkbox to convert incoming door calls to call requests at the control
desk (after a change of configuration without restart, the configuration is applied with the next call or
door call).
 Convert to call type: In this drop-down list, the call type can be selected into which the calls will
be converted.
 Activate the checkbox Conversations as call request for the calling subscriber to convert calls
from this subscriber (except if the checkbox Ringing from door at Subscriber > Control Desks
> tab Call conversion is activated).
326 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration DSP function
DSP function
General
Requirements
The following station types are supported:
 IP stations
 Digital DSP stations (e.g. EE 811A, EE 311A)
 Analogue stations via ET 901A
 Analogue stations at a Gx-GET with DSP licence
Update of DSP software v2.6 to v3.0

 Modified loudspeaker/microphone surveillance: white noise
As of DSP software 3.0 the loudspeaker/microphone surveillance is carried out with white noise
instead of a DTMF tone. Possibly the values for loudspeaker/microphone surveillance has to be
adjusted (see page 328).
 Modified audio monitoring values
As of DSP software 3.0 the values for audio monitoring volume and integration time have been
changed. They have been adjusted to match the values of SA101 systems (see page 330).
NOTE:
Further information about software updates see page 67.
General
 Dynamic noise cancellation: Activate this checkbox to consistent reduce background noise when
no one is talking. The following station firmware are supported:
 DSP 800 min. 3.4
 DSP 800A min. 1.7
 DSP 900A min. 1.1
 DSP 800B min. 1.1
 Recording via handset: Activate this checkbox to pit out the loudspeaker and microphone signal
of the station over the headset-loudspeaker-connection (mixed together for recording purposes).
The following station firmware are supported: Firmware versions from DSP800 3.4, DSP800A 1.1 or
DSP900A 1.1 are required.
NOTE:
No headset can be used at the same time when the function is used.
NOTE:
In order for calls to be carried out with the volume configured for conversations in “Audio Fea-
tures”, the subscriber must have the “External Handset” function activated. Otherwise, conversa-
tions will be carried out with the volume “Handset”.
1.5/0619 327
DSP function Intercom Server Configuration
 Loudspeaker/microphone surveillance

Voraussetzungen
 min. DSP800A 3.4 Build 1
 min. IoIP-Device 7.3 Build 6
 min. PRO 800 6.3 Build 16
 min. VirtuoSIS 9.0
The loudspeaker sends a white noise in configurable intervals (1 minute to 1 hour). The white noise is
received by the microphone, the DSP analyses the spectrum. In the event of a fault there is a permanent
rushing. A faulty loudspeaker or microphone is signalled as a line fault, so the fault can be indicated at
a control desk. In addition the relay OUT1 of the respective station can be defined for indication of
loudspeaker/microphone monitoring.
ATTENTION:
Loudspeaker/microphone surveillance does not work at stations with an external loudspeaker, hand-
set, headset or activated handset function. When using build-in kits the function depends on construc-
tion details!
White noise: min. DSP software .

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Surveillance
 Function Relay 1: In this drop-down list, the indication mode of the loudspeaker/microphone
surveillance can be selected for the relay OUT1. The relay acts as an opener contact. That means, it
is closed, as long as no function fault occurs. When a fault occurs, the relay opens (at the same time
as the first reattempt).
AF-Hybrid: min. IoIP-Device 8.0

Weitere Informationen see “Amplifier AF Series” on page 271
NOTE: AF hybrid only

 The option “Line-monitoring OK + Amplifier OK” is only available for the amplifiers AF 50H,
AF 125H, AF 250H and AF 500H.
 The option “Loudspeaker line OK” is only available for the amplifiers AF 50H, AF 125H, AF 250H
and AF 500H. For the AF 20H, die option can be selected but has no function.
 Relay Transfer EB2E2A: With this setting, the previously described functionality can be redirected
from the device output OUT1 to the first (OUT1) or both (OUT1 + OUT2) outputs on the EB2E2A.
ATTENTION:
Only one EB2E2A may be used. This can be optionally connected to the intercom module or the IP
converter ET 901..
 Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance cycle time: In this checkbox, the time interval can be
selected, in which the loudspeaker sends the white noise (1 minute to 1 hour; None = loudspeaker- /
microphone surveillance disabled).
ATTENTION:
With DSP software up to v2.6 a cycle time of up to 15 hours is possible! As of DSP software 3.0 the
maximum cycle time is 1 hour, even if a larger value has been defined in CCT 800.
  Microphone ALM: In this drop-down list, the microphone type for the surveillance can be selected.
All connected microphones will automatically be detected and the microphone surveillance is
enabled for the microphone with the highest priority. An internal microphone has the lowest priority,
followed by a gooseneck and an external microphone.
328 1.5/0619
NOTE:
This function is available with:
Station firmware min. 02.5
 DSP 900A min. 05.5
 DSP 800B min. 01.7.
 IoIP-Device 7.0
 Check only once: Activate this checkbox to carry out the surveillance out only once.
 Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance retry time [s]: In this field, the interval for the three
repetitions of the white noise in the case of a fault can be entered (max. 255 seconds).
 Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance volume: In this drop-down list, the volume of the white
noise can be selected. The white noise has to be loud enough to be received by the microphone, but
may not be so loud as to cause overdrive (depending on the distance between loudspeaker and
microphone and on the loudspeaker’s volume). See the following examples:
 Loudspeaker LS1, distance loudspeaker/microphone about 15 cm (5.9“): Volume “4”.
 EE 61AC: Volume “2” (at centre position of potentiometer for volume).
 EE 311, EE 811, ECCT 80061, ECCT 80062: Volume “~4”.
 In case of a higher ambient noise level, the volume of the tone has to be increased (if necessary).
 Reduction -18dB: Activate this checkbox to decrease the volume of the terminal during the
surveillance by 18dB.
 Red Lamp: Activate this checkbox to activate the multifunctional LED of the respective subscriber
during the surveillance.
NOTE:
A call request has to be configured for the respective DSP station to a control desk (see
page 297).

 Activate the checkbox Line-monitoring for the respective DSP station.
 Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
 Line-monitoring delay time [s]: In this drop-down list, the time delay for line fault indication can
be selected for the respective DSP station.
1.5/0619 329
 Audio monitoring

The DSP station permanently monitors the noise level in the room via the connected microphone. On
exceeding the level, the dial of button 9 is simulated in order to initiate a direct dial or call request to
a defined control desk.
 Noise level and integration time

 The noise level defines the volume at the microphone of the monitored Intercom station, above
which a call request to the control desk is initiated. The following noise levels are available:
Noise level in dB(A) 60 63 67 70 73 77 80 83 87
GOOD TO KNOW:
The indicated noise levels are guidelines and depend on the position of the potentiometer for
microphone sensitivity and on the sensitivity of the connected microphone.
 The integration time defines how long the volume at the microphone of the monitored Intercom
station has to exceed the defined noise level before a call request is initiated (0 to 15 seconds).
ATTENTION:
New noise levels and integration times are available with DSP software min. 3.0!
Restrictions
 After a call request has been initiated and during an All Call or group call monitoring is deactivated
automatically, because otherwise the signal from the loudspeaker would initiate a call request.
 Audio monitoring has restricted functionality at stations with a gooseneck microphone, handset, head-
set or activated handset function. When using build-in kits the function depends on construction details.
 When audio monitoring is configured for a station, reception of music is not possible.

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Audio Monitoring
 Audio Monitoring Trigger: In this drop-down list, the noise level to trigger audio monitoring can
be selected (None = audio monitoring disabled).
 Audio Monitoring Time [s]: In this drop-down list, the integration time can be selected.
 Audio Monitoring permanent: Activate this checkbox to enable audio monitoring is permanently.
If this checkbox is deactivated, audio monitoring will only be carried out once!
 Short integration: Activate this checkbox to define a very short integration time and therefore the
sensitivity is enhanced.
NOTE:
This checkbox has to be activated when the behaviour of the SA101 is required.
 Red lamp: In this drop-down list, the status of the red lamp can be selected when audio monitoring
is enabled. The following states are available:
 On: The conversation lamp of the station is permanently lit.
 Off: The conversation lamp of the station is off in idle state.
 Blinking: The conversation lamp of the station is blinking in idle state.
NOTE:
The conversation lamp is activated permanently for analogue stations (i.e. the microphone is
only activated when the conversation lamp is on).
 A call request (see page 297) or direct dialling (see page 180) has to be configured for the button 9
of the respective DSP station (e.g. to an Intercom station, telephone or radio).
330 1.5/0619
 Adjusting of audio monitoring at the station


Certain audio monitoring settings can be configured at a separate control station with display for all
DSP stations. The audio monitoring menu can be opened at the control station with the function code
“9T4” either via a direct dialling code or an entry in the B menu and with the call number of the DSP
station that shall be configured.
Configuration at the station

 For the control station, configure either a direct dialling target (see page 180) or an entry in the B
menu (see page 146) for the function code “9T4”.
 Depending on the configuration, either press the direct dialling button or select the entry in the B
menu at the control station. One of the following dialogues will be indicated:
Audio Monitor
10_ 10_
Audio Monitor
X-Cancel
X-Cancel
 Enter the call number of the desired DSP station for which the audio monitoring parameters shall be
configured (in case of error, the error tone is audible). One of the following dialogues will be indi-
cated:
Audio Monitor
1234
1234 Ticket machine
Audio Monitor
Ticket machine Level 5
Level 9 Delay 4
Delay 5 T-Swap
œChange -/+
T-Swap › Save
œChange -/+ ›Save
In the first row, the call number and in the second row the 14-digit description of the station is indicated.
In row 4 and 5, the following audio monitoring parameters are indicated:
 Level: The noise level defines the volume at the microphone of the monitored Intercom station,
above which a call request to the control desk is initiated. The following noise levels are available:
Audio monitoring level 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Noise level in dB(A) - 60 63 67 70 73 77 80 83 87
 Delay: The integration time defines how long the volume at the microphone of the monitored
Intercom station has to exceed the defined noise level before a call request is initiated (0 to F for 0
to15 seconds).
Changing parameters
The currently selected parameter will be changed:
 D: Decrease by one step.
 E: Increase by one step.
 0 to 9: Direct input of the desired value.
 With button T, it is possible to toggle between the options “Level” and “Delay”.
1.5/0619 331
Saving of parameters
 By pressing the button F, the values are saved in the Intercom Server and de-/activated in the station.
 If no changes are made (e.g. only inquiry), the function is automatically quit after 4 seconds.
 If changes have been made, but F has not been pressed, 6 seconds after the last button press an
automatic save and quit is carried out.
 With button X it is possible to quit anytime without saving.
Indication in the B menu

If the direct dialling codes for adjustment of audio monitoring are configured in the B menu, the value
set for audio monitoring trigger (“Level”) is shown before each entry.
Indication of “level” in the B menu

Favorites
6 Station 105
1 6 AM Call 105 6 Station 106
6 Station 122
›Execute -Edit
 By pressing the T button, it is possible to activate/deactivate the audio monitoring of the selected
station in the B menu.

 Go to: Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Audio Monitoring
 An audio monitoring function has to be configured for the respective subscriber (see page 330).
 Audio Monitoring Off: Activate this checkbox to disable audio monitoring for the respective
subscriber. If audio monitoring is manually disabled and the configuration is received via CCT 800,
the checkbox Audio Monitoring Off is activated.
 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Function Codes
 Audio Monitoring settings: In this field, the function code of audio monitoring can be changed
(1 to 4 digits, by default 9T4).
 An entry of this function code has to be configured in the B menu (see page 146) or as direct di-
alling target (see page 180) for the respective subscriber.
 It is also possible to configure only the code “9T4” and select the station via after dialling.
 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Individual F2-menu > sub-folder subscriber
 Right-click and select “Add function”.
 Number / Code: In this field, the code including call number can be entered for the indication in the
B menu (e.g. “9T4120”).
NOTE:
Configuration in B menu only possible for max. 4-digit call numbers.
332 1.5/0619
 Audio monitoring with audio recording

In order to find out why a call was initiated via audio monitoring, it is possible to permanently record
the audio signal at the station. The audio data is saved in a ring memory until initiation of the call. The
control desk can then listen to the recording when accepting the call. For the stations audio monitoring
has to be configured (see page 330).
Audio Monitoring
initiation call initiation
pre-record time overlap time
Record time
Supported cards/stations
 G8/G3-GET: All analogue stations. The licence “Lx-GET-DSP” is required for the used subscriber.
 G8/G3-GED: All A-series stations (e.g. EE 811A, EE 311A).
 G8/G3-IP: With DSP 900A or IoIP-Device (not: ET 901).
 Playback at the control desk either:
 Automatically when accepting the call, or
 manual playback of the recording by pressing the button 4.
 An announcement tone can be defined, which is audible before playback of the recording.
 Memory: Max 63 seconds per subscriber card.

 Go to: Subscriber > Audio recording
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Audio recording”.
 In the drop-down list Recording mode, select the entry “audio-monitoring” for the respective sub-
scriber.
 Announce tone: In this drop-down list, the tone can be selected, which is played back at the control
desk before the recording.
 Announce time [s]: In this field, the playback time of the announcement tone can be entered.
 Record time [s]: In this field, the overall record time (incl. “Overlap time”) can be entered (max. 128
seconds).
 Overlap time [s]: In this field, the recording time after the triggering of audio monitoring can be
entered.
 Playback-repeat count: In this drop-down list, the number of playback repeats can be selected.
 Playback-delay between repeats [s]: In this drop-down list, the length of a pause between
repeats can be selected.
 Announce tone before playback: Activate this checkbox to play back the selected tone in the
drop-down list Announce tone before the playback of the recording.
 Automatic playback: Activate this checkbox to automatically play back the recording when the call
is accepted at the control desk.
 Delete after playback: Activate this checkbox to automatically delete the recording after the
playback at the control desk.
1.5/0619 333
ICX message with sound pressure level change

An ICX message can be generated if the sound pressure level changes. With this ICX message, the level
change can be indicated.

 Activate the checkbox ICX messages at dB-level changing for the respective feed-in. The
following fields are enabled.
 Range 1: 0 - < Level: In this drop-down list, the range between 0 and the desired level can be
selected.
 Range 2: In this field, the range between level 1 and level 2 is indicated.
 Range 3: >= Level: In this drop-down list, the range from the desired level to infinite can be
selected.
 Keypad tones

Keypad tones can be activated for the DSP stations, so that a tone sounds each time a button is pressed.
For each station the volume of the tone can be set separately.

 Keypad tones: In this drop-down list, the volume of the tones can be selected (00 dB = maximum
volume, -42 dB = minimum volume, None = keypad tones disabled).
 Lock echo canceller


For certain situations it is possible to disable the “Acoustic Echo Canceller” (AEC) of the DSP.

 Lock AEC: Activate this checkbox to disable the “Acoustic Echo Canceller” function for the res-
pective subscriber.
334 1.5/0619
 OpenDuplex®

OpenDuplex®improves the speech quality in case of high background noise. OpenDuplex®allows
simultaneous talking and listening of both subscribers.
The table on page 217 shows how conversations between subscribers configured to different speech
modes, are built up (the term “Full Duplex” is used instead of “OpenDuplex®”).

OpenDuplex®with 16 kHz is only possible with the following station types:
Station type OpenDuplex@ 16 kHz OpenDuplex@ 7 kHz
WS Series  
Digital A series stations (e.g. EE 811A)  
ET 901D + digital A series stations (e.g. EE 811A)  
Digital stations (z.B. EE 811)  
ET 901D + digital stations (e.g. EE 811)  
ET 901A + analogue stations  
ET 908, ET 963  
Intercom Client  1) 
Analogue stations 2) 

1) Depending on the used sound card.
2) With restrictions (one side must use handset or gooseneck microphone).
1.5/0619 335
 Special tones

 Per DSP station it is possible to define two special tones which can be used for signalling of events.

 Special tone 1 and Special tone 2: In these drop-down lists, two tones to signal an event can be
selected for the respective subscriber. These tones can be assigned to various events at Subscriber
> Signal tones-DSP stations.
The following tone signals are available
Tone signal Duration Tone signal Duration
Telephone: error tone 2 seconds (1s tone + 1 seconds (1s tone +
Alarm
(3 sound) 1s pause) 0s pause)
Telephone: privacy tone 4.6 seconds (600 ms tone 6 seconds (6s tone +
9 tone gong
at calling station + 4s pause) 0s pause)
Telephone: alley busy 0.4 seconds (200 ms tone 1.4 seconds (800 ms tone
Beam me up
tone + 200 ms pause) + 600 ms pause)
3 seconds (1s tone + 16.5 seconds (500 ms tone
Telephone: BT ring tone Call forwarding
2s pause) + 16s pause)
Telephone: BT rapid 0.5 seconds (250 ms tone 4 seconds (1s tone +
Ring tone
ring tone + 250 ms pause) 3s pause)
3 seconds (3s tone + 3 seconds (3s tone +
Bell Announcement
0s pause) 0s pause)
3 seconds (3s tone + 3 seconds (3s tone +
Transition Shine
0s pause) 0s pause)
3 seconds (3s tone +
Mass Transit Solutions Configurable
0s pause)
336 1.5/0619
 Tone generator

For the following functions different tone signals can be selected.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal tones-DSP stations > tab Signal, Tones 1
 Dialling tone: This tone is given out when dialling a calling number or function.
 Error tone: This tone is given out when the station is operated in an incorrect way.
 Busy tone: This tone is given out when the called subscriber is busy.
 Busy tieline: This tone is given out when a tieline is busy.
 Acknowledgement: This tone is given out when a function is enabled (e.g. privacy or secretary
transfer) and for status indication “Privacy on”.
 Acknowledgement off: This tone is given out as status indication for “Privacy off”.
 Access control: This tone is given out when the correct code is entered at a door station.
 Subscriber > Signal tones-DSP stations > tab Signal, Tones 2
 Privacy: This tone is given out as indication of a privacy call, as called station and as calling station.
 Calling signal access control: This tone is given out as call tone for control call after entering a
wrong code at the door station. This tone can be enabled for door station and control station.
 Calling signal: This tone is given out at every new set-up of a call, as called station and as calling
station. The calling signal cannot be faded out.
 Minute tone: This tone is given out during a conversation once per minute if a subscriber is waiting
and before the conversation time exceeds.
 Waiting signal microphone mute: This tone is given out when the conversation partner enables
the microphone mute.
 Waiting signal for further connection: This tone is given out when the conversation partner en-
ables inquiry or further transfer.
 Initiate ringing: This tone is given out at the door station as acknowledgement for ringing at a
group.
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal tones-DSP stations > tab Signal, Tones 3
 Reception ringing: This tone is given out at receivers of ringing at a group (not at converted call
requests).
 Reception alarm with low priority: This tone is given out as reception of an alarm with low
priority (priority 1, 2 or 3).
 Reception alarm with high priority: This tone is given out as reception of an alarm with medium
or high priority (priority 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9).
 Initiator call request: This tone is given out until the call request is taken over.
 All Call: This tone is given out as announcement of an All Call and can be enabled for an initiator
and receiver.
 Group Call: This tone is given out as announcement of a group call and can be enabled for an
initiator and receiver.1)
 Chime-signal: This tone is given out at the pre-configured receivers when the chime signal input is
enabled.
1)For SIP-C subscribers, this feature is not supported.
1.5/0619 337
Each function has its own tone sequence, with the selected sound signal only as long the original
sound signal is switched on. See table below:
Function Tone sequence Function Tone sequence
Waiting signal
Dialling tone 4s tone (continuous tone) 1s tone + 1s pause
microphone mute
Waiting signal for further
Error tone 64 ms tone + 64 ms pause 1s tone + 1s pause
connection
250 ms tone + 250 ms
Busy tone Initiating ringing pause + 1750 ms tone +
pause
1750 ms pause
Busy tieline Reception ringing pause + 1750 ms tone +
pause
1750 ms pause
(64 ms tone + 64 ms
Reception alarm with low
Acknowledgement pause (repetition 3 times)) 2s tone + 2s pause
priority
+ 576 ms tone
Reception alarm with 500 ms tone + 500 ms
Acknowledgement off 4s tone (continuous tone)
high priority pause
Access control Initiator call request pause + 1750 ms tone +
pause
1750 ms pause
Privacy 1s tone + 1s pause All Call 2s tone (continuous tone)
Calling signal access 128 ms tone + 128 ms
Group call 2s tone (continuous tone)
control pause
5300 ms tone
Calling signal Chime signal 2s tone (continuous tone)
(continuous tone)
300 ms tone
Minute tone
(continuous tone)
 Go to: Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations

 In these drop-down lists, the desired signal tone can be selected for the respective functions. The
following signal tones are available:
Tone signal Duration Tone signal Duration
500 Hz tone Continuous tone Ringtone 500 / 595 Hz Continuous tone
666 Hz tone Continuous tone Ringtone 500 / 666 Hz Continuous tone
1000 Hz tone Continuous tone 2 sound 3 seconds
2000 Hz tone Continuous tone 3 sound 4 seconds
4000 Hz tone Continuous tone 4 sound 3.5 seconds
Ringtone 500 / 440 Hz Continuous tone BigBen 6 seconds
338 1.5/0619
 Select the entry “Standard tone acc. to Intercom Server” to enable the standard tone signal for the
respective function:
Function Standard tone Function Standard tone
Waiting signal
Dialling tone 500 Hz 500 Hz
microphone mute
Waiting signal for further
Error tone 500 Hz 500 Hz
connection
Busy tone 500 Hz Initiating ringing 500 Hz
Busy tieline 500 Hz Reception ringing 500 Hz
Reception alarm with low
Acknowledgement 500 Hz 4 kHz
priority
Reception alarm with
Acknowledgement off 500 Hz 4 kHz
high priority
Access control 500 Hz Initiator call request 500 Hz
Privacy 500 Hz All Call 2 sound
Calling signal access
500 Hz Group call 2 sound
control
Calling signal 500 Hz Chime signal 500 Hz
Minute tone 500 Hz Fade-out tone -
 Tones for calls to control desks


At a DSP control desk, tone signals can be used instead of the buzzer for the 15 different call types (see
page 324). The following tone signals are available:
 500 Hz tone, 666 Hz tone, 1 KHz tone, 2 KHz tone, 4 KHz tone
 Ringtone 500 Hz 444 Hz, Ringtone 500 Hz 595 Hz, Ringtone 500 Hz 666 Hz
 2 sound, 3 sound, 4 sound
 Big Ben
 Special tone 1
 Special tone 2
 Fade out tone
 Pre-recorded audio (ID 100 to 131)

 Go to: Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Tone generator for buzzer
 In these drop-down lists, the desired tone signal can be selected for the respective call type.
 Select the option “Standard tone acc. to Intercom Server” to enable the standard tone signal for
the respective call type.
1.5/0619 339
 Microphone frequency response


For feed-in of audio signals over a ECCT 80008 (see page 254) it is possible to activate a linear frequen-
cy response. This is an advantage especially for feed-in of music.

 Microphone frequency response mode: In this drop-down list, the frequency range for feed-in
of audio signals can be selected. The following modes are available:
 Standard: Disable the linearization and equalization of the frequency response.
 Linear: Linearization of the frequency response.
  MIC480: Equalization of the frequency response and avoidance of feedbacks of Open-
Duplex®calls with increased volume.
NOTE:
The option “MIC480” should be selected exclusively for the microphone “MIC480“.
NOTE:
Use the following device types as default setting "MIC 480":
ET808A
ET908A
ET908H
AF LS 10HC
AF LS 10HH
AF LS 10HP
 ZStart beep

A beep tone can be defined for DSP stations, which is audible every time the Intercom Server starts.

 Start beep mode: In this drop-down list, the state of the start beep can be selected.
 Microphone gain

The microphone gain of DSP stations can be configured via CCT 800. The external microphone gain
can be adjusted separately (e.g. headset socket of stations EE 811 and EE 311).

 Internal microphone gain: In this drop-down list, the internal microphone gain can be selected.
 External microphone gain: In this drop-down list, the external microphone gain can be selected
(e.g. headset socket of stations EE 811 and EE 311).
340 1.5/0619
 External loudspeaker gain


Feature PRO 800 6.0 – external loudspeaker gain
VirtuoSIS The external loudspeaker gain over the line-out of DSP stations can be configured via CCT 800
LICENCE PRO6U
(e.g. for WS 800 or EX 7000).

 Line-out/External loudspeaker gain: In this drop-down list, the reduction of the external loud-
speaker gain can be selected.
 Sidetone for handsets/headsets


It is possible to configure a sidetone for handsets and headsets, which inserts the microphone signal
in real-time in the headset of the speaking person. This function can be activated for the headset
sockets of stations and the volume of the sidetone can be configured.

 Sidetone: In this drop-down list, the volume of the sidetone can be selected.
1.5/0619 341
Video Intercom Server Configuration
Video
General
The software of the GE 300/GE 800 offers optimal and low-priced control of a video switcher. During a
conversation to an Intercom station with camera, the video is automatically switched to the monitor.
With control desks the cameras can also be switched on during call requests or input messages.
ATTENTION:
Configured video connection requires memory in the main memory of the Intercom Server! A list of
Following protocols are available

 ULTRAK/VIDEV (for ULTRAK video switcher EUROMAX 250)
 Baud rate for Euromax 250: 19200,N,8,1
 Software version for Euromax: ab V1.10
 Connection to G3-V24, G8-V24
 ERNITEC (for ERNITEC video switcher 500M)
 Baud rate for 500M: 19200,N,8,1
 Connection to G3-V24 or G8-V24
 SOFT VIDEO (Standard-Protocol)
 Connection to G3-V24, G8-V24
 Geutebrück VX3
 Baud rate for Compax III: 19200,N,8,1
 Connection to G8-IF / G3-IF generation 2 (min. Rev. AB)
Monitors
Each Intercom station (control desk) can have one or several allocated monitors, but the same monitor
cannot be allocated to more than one Intercom station. Each station can have allocated a maximum of
9 monitors. There are three types of monitors:
 Main monitor: Reserved for indication of the conversation partner (also busy calls or private calls).
 Preview monitors (the number is configurable): For indication of call requests and input messages
(only for control desks).
 Observation monitors (the number is configurable): For static connection of cameras. Also the
main monitor or the preview monitors can be used as observation monitors.
Cameras
A camera can be allocated to each Intercom station or input. It is also possible to switch cameras which
are not allocated to an Intercom station or input. Each camera can be switched to several monitors at
the same time (depending on the design of the video switcher).
Video WS series
The configuration of “WS video clients” (camera, colour TFT display) is not described in this document.
NOTE:
For further information, see the manual “Video WS”.
342 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Video
4-digit camera numbers

It is possible to use 4-digit camera numbers (depending on the type of video switcher being used).

 Camera ID’s: Select the desired radio button to define the number of used digits for the camera ID.
Decentralised video system

The main Intercom Server can control cameras that are connected to a video switcher of a sub-central.
This enables a control desk to control video display of remote cameras. In the main Intercom Server a
physical video switcher or the program ComVideo can be used. Depending on the type of video
switcher the video content can be transmitted to the main Intercom Server either via cable (leased
lines) or IP connections.
Example: Video system with IP connection:
Monitor 1
GE 700 #1 1 8
Video switcher Call no. 1000

RS 232
64x8, or virtual
video switcher
1 10 11 64
IP-Network
IP-Video- IP-Video-
Interface Interface
ID=10 ID=11
Monitor 2 Monitor 2
Local video- Local video-

Call no. Call no.
switcher 1 4
switcher 1 4
2000 3000
16x4 16x4
GE 200 #2 GE 200 #3
1 16 1 16
RS 232 RS 232
Camera 2001 Camera 3001

Call no. Call no.
2001 3001
NOTE:
For further information about configuration, see the manual “ComVideo”.
1.5/0619 343
Camera connection with normal stations

Each Intercom station can have a maximum of 9 allocated monitors (with corresponding expansion of
the video switcher): one main monitor and several observation monitors. During a conversation with
a station allocated to a camera, the video is switched to the monitor. It is also possible to switch any
camera manually to the monitor.
Allocation of monitors
 Intercom station with a monitor (automatic connection during conversations)
If only one monitor is used a camera can be switched on manual, or several cameras can be scanned
on the monitor. During a conversation, the image of the conversation partner will be faded-out and will
be switched on when the call is cancelled.
 Allocation of observation monitors to a station

If several monitors are used (or a split monitor), one main monitor and several observation monitors
can be configured. The defined main monitor is reserved only for pictures of the conversation partner,
to the observation monitors any desired camera can be switched manual.

 Go to: Subscriber > Video
 Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Video”.
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab General
 Idle screen - camera: In this field, the camera number can be entered, which switches to the
monitor in idle state (max. camera number “255”).
 Go to: Subscriber > Video > tab Monitor
 Position of 1st Monitor: In this field, the lowest monitor number can be entered, which is
controlled from the respective subscriber.
 Activate the checkbox Main monitor present if a main monitor is used for the respective
subscriber.
NOTE:
The checkbox Main monitor present is deactivated for the Intercom Client. If this checkbox is
activated for an Intercom Client, the checkbox can be deactivated once, but not activated.
 Observation monitors: In this field, the number of observation monitors can be entered.
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the time for scanning of pictures on the observation monitors can be
entered (max. 255 seconds, 0 = scanning disabled).
Configuration CCT 800 (video switcher)

 Control via ICX #1 or Control via ICX #2: In these drop-down lists, the interface can be selected,
344 1.5/0619
to which the respective video switcher is connected.
GOOD TO KNOW:
will be sent. If in the drop-down list 2. ICX - Interface the value “----” is selected, ICX messages
will not be sent over these ICX interfaces. Here are some examples for sending ICX messages:
 Only internal ICX messages will be sent:
 Only external ICX messages will be sent:
 Internal as well as external messages will be sent:
 Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher

 Video switcher - inputs: In this field, the number of available camera inputs of the connected video
switcher can be entered.
 Video switcher - outputs: In this field, the number of available monitor outputs of the connected
video switcher can be entered.
 1st controlled monitor: In this field, the monitor number of the first monitor on the video switch
can be entered, which are controlled in ascending order by the Intercom system (lower numbers can-
not be controlled by the Intercom system).
 1st monitor output: In this field, the number of the 1st used monitor output of the video switch
can be entered.
 Lowest log. camera no. and highest log. camera no.: In these fields, the range of camera num-
bers can be entered, which shall be managed from the respective V24 video switch (e.g. lowest
log.camera no. = 70, highest log. camera no.= 85).
 Camera no. Offset: In this field, the offset value can be entered, which calculates the appropriate
physical camera input of the video switch (e.g. “69”, camera no. = 70  70-69 = 1st physical camera
input).
 Allocation of a camera to an Intercom station

A camera can be allocated to each Intercom station. Each camera can be switched to several monitors
at the same time (depending on the design of the video switcher).

 Number of camera: In this field, the camera number can be entered to allocate the respective
camera to the appropriate subscriber (either the accurate position on the video switcher or a higher
number e.g. “70”  the accurate camera input will then be calculated via configuration see above).
 Allocation of camera texts

A camera text can be allocated to each Intercom station. This text will be indicated on the monitor
during camera connection.

 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, the name of the station with up to 14-digits can be
entered.
 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher
 Send camera texts: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE811A &
camera on the respective monitor.
1.5/0619 345
 Connection of cameras to certain monitors with button

code
Each camera, no matter if it is allocated to a station or not, can be switched to any monitor
(independent of a conversation or a call request). This function is mainly used to indicate pictures for
observation on different monitors or on a split monitor. These pictures are faded during conversations
or incoming call requests. It is also possible to scan several cameras on one monitor.
Static connection
Button code Description
96 M R For a camera allocated to an Intercom station
96 M T K For a camera without allocation
M Monitor number (1- to8-digits, always number “1” for 1st monitor, even if a different number has been
defined at “Position of 1st monitor”)
R Calling number camera station (1-8 digits)
K Physical camera number (1- to 4-digits, e.g. “01” for camera “1”)
 Definition of scanning sequences on main, preview and observation monitors

Scanning of several cameras (input for cameras one after the other, max. 16 cameras):
97 M R For a camera allocated to an Intercom station
97 M T K For a camera without allocation
R Calling number camera station (1-8 digits)
K Physical camera number (1- to 4-digits, e.g. “01” for camera “1”)
 Switching-off a monitor (in case of scanning, all cameras are switched off
together)
96 M 00 or 97 M 00 -
 Connection to observation and main monitors

 Scan time [s]: In this field, the scan time of preview monitors can be entered (max. 255 seconds, 0
= scanning disabled).
346 1.5/0619
 Manual scanning control

It is possible to influence the automatic scanning (activated with 97) of video monitors via codes. The
scanning can be stopped, started, toggled, +1 and -1 as well as jump to the cancel of the list. The
following codes are possible:
97 M TT0 Stop scanning
97 M TT1 Start scanning
97 M TT2 Go back one snapshot
97 M TT3 Go to next snapshot
97 M TT9 Jump to last snapshot
97 M TTT Toggle (switching) start/stop
M Monitor number (0 = all monitors)
Camera connection for control desk calls

If a control desk has allocated monitors, cameras can be indicated also during call requests or input
messages. Call requests and input messages are indicated until they are deleted if e.g. “cancel on site”
is configured, the camera is still indicated after the call has been acknowledged.
 Automatic priority control of camera connection (normal call, emergency call)

Incoming control desk calls are indicated in order of their priority and of time.
 Camera connection during call requests

Allocation of only one monitor to a control desk:
 The first incoming control desk call or the call with the highest priority is indicated on the monitor.
 If several calls come in at the same time, the calls can be scanned in a configurable scan-time. During
a conversation to a camera station the allocated picture is indicated, other incoming call requests
(pictures) are faded and switched on again after the conversation is cancelled.
 Allocation of preview monitors to a control desk

 The pictures of incoming control desk calls are indicated on the preview monitors in order of their
priority and of time.
 Allocation of a main monitor to a control desk

 If a main monitor is configured, during a conversation (answer to a call request) the corresponding
picture is removed from the preview monitor and switched to the main monitor. The pictures on the
other preview monitors move up.
 If no main monitor is configured, during a conversation (answer to a call request) the corresponding
picture stays in the preview monitor. At the cancel of the conversation the picture is switched off and
the other pictures move up. If the answered call request is not the first indicated call request, the
corresponding picture is switched to the first preview monitor and the other pictures move up.

The monitor and camera have to be allocated to a subscriber (see page 344).
 Preview monitors: In this field, the number of preview monitors can be entered.
1.5/0619 347
 Camera connection during input messages

Incoming input messages (messages with and without buzzer) are indicated at the monitor (or on
several monitors). In case of a main monitor - preview monitor allocation the input messages are
indicated only at the preview monitors. The priority of input messages is higher than the priority of
equivalent call requests. If no main monitor is used, pictures of conversations have higher priority than
pictures of input messages. The pictures are switched off as soon as the input messages are
acknowledged by the control desk. The following situations can occur:
 The input is only a short impulse, acknowledged with F: The picture is switched off after
acknowledgement, but can be switched on again manually if desired.
 The input is still active after acknowledgement with F: The picture stays on the monitor as long as
the input is active (for appropriate configuration see page 302).

The monitor and camera have to be allocated to a subscriber (see page 344).
 Camera No.: In this field, the camera number can be entered to allocate the respective camera to
the appropriate input (position on the video switcher).
 Display text EE811A & camera: In this field, the name of the station with up to 14-digits can be
entered.
 Send camera texts: Activate this checkbox to indicate the text in the field Display text EE811A &
camera on the respective monitor.
 Configurable scan time

If more pictures (call requests or input messages) come in, than monitors are available, it can be
configured that the rest of the pictures are scanned at the last preview monitor. The scan-time is
configurable.

 Scan time [s]: In this field, the scan time of preview monitors can be entered (max. 255 seconds,
0 = scanning disabled).
348 1.5/0619
Connection to Euromax 250

The video switcher EUROMAX 250 of ULTRAK can be connected to an Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800
via an V24 interface card.
The cable for connection can be found in the figure below. The cable between central and video
switcher may not be longer than 10m. The cable is connected to socket 1 of the Euromax 250. Make
sure that this socket is defined for 19200 bit/s. This definition can be carried out either with the terminal
in “Dialogue mode” of the video switcher, or with the configuration program for the video switcher
(ask your sales partner for this program).
NOTE:
For further information, see the manual “Euromax 250”.
The PC with the configuration program has to be connected to socket 2 of the Euromax 250.
Cable V24 card to Euromax

1
5 5
3 2
2 3
GE 300 / GE 800 Euromax 250
(9-way D-Submin plug) (9-way D-Submin plug)
Connection to Ultrak KXM 1604/3208

The video switchers KXM 1604 and KXM 3208 of ULTRAK can be connected to an Intercom Server
GE300/GE800 via an V24 interface card. The cable between Intercom Server and video switcher may
not be longer than 10m. See the following illustration:
2 2
3 3
5 5
GE 300 / GE 800 Ultrak KXM 1604/3208
The cable is connected to interface 10 (port no. 3 “RS-232 PC”) of the ULTRAK KXM 1604 (3208). This
interface is in standard already configured to 19200 bit/s / N, 8, 1.
Connection to Ernitec 500M

The video switcher 500M of ERNITEC can be connected to an Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800 via an
V24 interface card. The cable between Intercom Server and video switcher may not be longer than 10m.
See the following illustration:
2 2
3 3
5 5
GE 300 / GE 800 Ernitec 500M
The cable is connected to the 9-way D submin socket in Slot SIO2 of the 500M. This interface is standard
already configured to 19200 bit/s.
1.5/0619 349
Connection to Geutebrück
Geutebrück video switches (e.g. “Compax III”) can be connected to interface cards (G3/G8 IF generation
2) of Intercom Servers GE300 and GE800. The cable for connection you find in the figure below. The
cable between Intercom Server and video switcher may not be longer than 10m.
TXD 2 2 RXD
RXD 3 3 TXD
GND 5 5 GND
GE 300 / GE 800 Compax III Basic 32/16
Baud rate
 The maximum baud rate of the video switch may be configured to 19200 (baud rate switch of video
switch: 4 = 19200 PAL; C = 19200 NTSC).
 Data bits: N, 8, 1.
Features
 Camera and monitor switch on/off.
 Output of camera texts at start of Intercom Server.
NOTE:
Camera numbers can be assigned to a max. of 255 (0xFF).
Requirements
The following interface cards are supported:
 G3/G8-IF cards of the 2nd generation (min. Rev. AB).
 CCT 800 min. 1.2.

 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab RS232
 In the drop-down list Type of connection, select the entry “Compax III”.
 In the drop-down list Baud rate, it is recommended to select the entry “19200”.
“Plug & Play” transmission of the video switcher

(configuration to Euromax video switchers)
After the video switcher is connected to the Intercom Server all camera texts configured in the Intercom
Server are loaded into the video switcher (if this option has been activated). These texts are loaded
automatically after each restart of the Intercom Server. Now, the video switcher and the Intercom
Server are ready for video operation.
Further information about the configuration of video and camera texts can be found on page 345.
350 1.5/0619
 Camera addressing for IP video


 Configurable ports for the WS camera
Feature PRO 800 3.x – configurable ports for the WS camera
PRO 800 With the licence it is possible to define a local port for LAN connection and an additional NAT
LICENCE PRO3U translated port.
The configuration of “WS video clients” (camera, colour TFT display) is not described in this document
NOTE:
For further information, see the manual “Video WS”.
NOTE:
 The configured CCT 800 settings will overwrite the web interface settings.
 In networks without a router, the global port number has to be the same as the values in the field
camera port no. and HTTP Listener port.
 Video terminal with additional video interface


It is possible to configure an additional interface for video terminals with built-in monitor (e.g. WS810).
In order to use this feature the terminal has to be configured as follows:

 In the drop-down list Control via ICX #1, select the entry “----”.
 In the drop-down list Control via ICX #2, select an additional interface.
Supported interfaces and cards

Only IP interfaces are supported for this function, which are used with G8-GEP, G3-GEP, IS3-GEP or
SIS-GEP and G8-IF, G3-IF or SIS-IF cards.
NOTE:
The first interface must not be configured, as this would disable the local video functionality. However,
you will need to configure the external coupling o the second interface.
ATTENTION:
G8-IP 32 interface is not supported!
1.5/0619 351
 Live video menu for stations with configured monitor


Feature PRO 800 5.1 – live video menu
Up to CCT 800 5.0, the live video menu will automatically be displayed at stations with a
PRO 800
configured monitor. Thus, it is possible to connect to each available camera without
LICENCE PRO5U
permission. With CCT 800 5.1 or higher, the live video menu can individually be enabled for
stations with monitor. Exclusively after an appropriate CCT 800 configuration, a connection to
each available camera is possible for subscribers.

 Subscriber > Video > tab General
 Show video menu: Activate this checkbox to enable the live video menu for the respective
subscriber.
 Camera control during conversation

It is possible to define that at conversations to stations, to which a camera is allocated, the following
buttons can be used for control of the camera:
Button Description
1 Focus in
2 Camera up
3 Zoom in
4 Camera left (pan)
5 Home
6 Camera right (pan)
7 Focus out
8 Camera down
9 Zoom out
0 Special

 Camera No.: In this field, a camera number can be allocated to the respective subscriber. I.e. posi-
tion on video switcher (0 = the checkbox Camera control is deactivated).
 Camera control: Activate this checkbox if a controllable camera is allocated to the respective
subscriber.
 Camera ID’s: Select the desired radio button to define the number of used digits for the camera ID.
 Go to: Subscriber > Video
 Control via ICX #1 or Control via ICX #2: In these drop-down lists, the interface can be selected,
to which the respective video switcher is connected.
ATTENTION:
When the checkbox control camera is activated, it is not possible to carry out after-dialling functions
for the camera station (e.g. microphone mute, re-call requests, call park of call requests with button
2 or 3)!
352 1.5/0619
 Deleting of monitors at the start of the Intercom Server

It is very common that the Intercom system shares a video switcher with other systems. At the start of
the Intercom Server that is connected to the video system, not all video monitors shall be reset.Only
monitors assigned to a control desk as main, preview or other type monitor my be reset.

 Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab Video switcher
 1st controlled monitor: In this field, the monitor number of the first monitor on the video switch
can be entered, which are controlled in ascending order by the Intercom system (lower numbers
cannot be controlled by the Intercom system).
 Send camera switch-OFF at start: Activate this checkbox to put out “black screen” messages for
the monitors. If this checkbox is deactivated, only the message “00 5E 00 0000 0000 00” is put out. If
an Idle screen camera is configured, a black screen is shortly displayed after a restart, followed by
the idle screen.
 Allocation of monitors to stations without video switcher


Feature PRO 800 3.x – bonding of monitors
PRO 800 With this feature it is possible to create a bonding of non-audio clients to audio subscribers.
LICENCE PRO3U This allows you to add up to 4 monitors to an audio subscriber without a video switcher.
Example
Example 1:
For the host client (CD 810I), no monitor is confi-
gured, this means that the colour TFT display re-
ceives no video. CTDS 50P (non-audio client) is
bonded to the CD 810I and it is configured as main
monitor. This means that each video from a video
conversation to the CD 810I is indicated at the CDTS
50P (non-audio client).
Example 2:
The function “main monitor mirroring” is activated
for the CD 810I. This means that the monitor from
the CD 810I is mirrored to the slave monitor.
1.5/0619 353

 Go to: Subscriber > Bonding
 Slave 1-4: In these drop-down lists, a slave monitor to allocate them to the respective Conductor or
non-audio client can be selected.
NOTE:
 All audio clients can be used, as host client.
 The following subscribers can be used as slaves:
 All non-audio clients (WS TM, NAC Intercom Client, NAC Android Intercom Client).
 Conductor.
 In case a subscriber is greyed out, the subscriber is already used as slave or cannot be used for the
bonding feature.
 The correct order of monitors is as follows:
 Main monitor.
 Mirrored main monitor (no configuration required).
 All preview monitors.
 All observation monitors.
Configuration CCT 800 (monitor)
NOTE:
Only one main, preview or observation monitor may be configured for a subscriber.

 Position of 1st Monitor: In this field, the lowest monitor number can be entered, which is
controlled from the respective subscriber.
 Main monitor present: Activate this checkbox if a main monitor is used for the respective
subscriber.
 Main monitor mirroring: Activate this checkbox to mirror the main monitor by slave “1”.
 Scan time [s]: In this field, the scan time of preview monitors can be entered (max. 255 seconds, 0
= scanning disabled).
NOTE:
 If the checkbox main monitor mirroring is activated, slave 1 is used as mirrored monitor if the
configured monitor options are not valid.
 In the field scan time [s], the scan time is always used from the main monitor. Therefore, it is
recommended to configure the scan times at the main monitor.
354 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Speech recording
 Speech recording
The transmitted audio signals of a microphone or loudspeaker of a station can be combined to a single
signal and saved by a recording subscriber. Recording is possible for a conversation, alarm, group call,
All Call, Simplex conference or OpenDuplex®conference. The following types of speech recording are
available:
 Speech recording of IoIP audio signals – see page 356
 Speech recording via RTP – see page 359
Requirements
 Recording subscriber: 
 Recorded subscriber: 
 Feature PRO 800 4.0 – Speech recording of subscribers with feature level B
Subscribers to be recorded must have feature level “B”.
The following Intercom Server cards support speech recording:

 Gx-AUD
 Gx-IP
Restrictions
 If the recorder (e.g. IP, RTP server or AUD) and the recorded subscriber are not located within the
same Intercom Server (except for RTP direct from device), two additional channels are required (4x
PCM with GEV, CNET-E1 and CNET-W).
 When using IP subscriber cards, restrictions possibly exist for this function (see page 450).
 In case an Intercom Server fails and cancels the conversation (e.g. due to a connection failure or in
case of voltage failure), the recording will stop automatically. If the Intercom Server containing the
recorder fails, an ongoing conversation (e.g. with mandatory recording) will be cancelled.
 Recording over a network is not possible with S0 cards.
1.5/0619 355
Speech recording Intercom Server Configuration
Speech recording of IoIP audio signals

On the following pages, you will find a step-by-step instruction to configure speech recording of IoIP
audio signals:
 Allocation of audio channels – see below
 Allocation of recording subscribers – see page 357
 Level adjustment for AUD cards – see page 358
 Allocation of audio channels

An audio channel can be assigned to a subscriber in order to configure this as recording subscriber. An
audio channel is required for transmitting the audio signals (microphone and loudspeaker) of the re-
corded subscriber.

To assign an audio channel to a subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Speech recording > Audio channel - allocation
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Audio channel - allocation”.
 3. In the drop-down list In parallel to, select the master channel, to which the subscribers shall be
switched.
GOOD TO KNOW: Need of a master channel?

Several recording channels can be assigned to one master channel in order to create a pool of
recording channels. A master channel can be assigned to a subscriber to be recorded, but the
subscriber can use all recording channels that are assigned to the master channel.
If a master channel is assigned to a subscriber (slave), this recording of the slave and master is
carried out only once. If the two subscribers are not connected by a master channel0, the recording
is carried out separately for each subscriber.
NOTES:
 At least one master channel is required.
 Each recording subscriber can be defined as master channel.
Additional settings
Attendant contact In this drop-down list, an output can be selected, which is closed while recording. 1)
In this drop-down list, an ICX interface can be selected, to which audio card messages
ICX messages
shall be put out 2)
1) Outputs from Gx-AUD cards are not suitable for direct switching (because of e.g. switching voltage or iso-
lation). Only indirect switching is allowed.
2)
356 1.5/0619
 Allocation of recording subscribers

A recording subscriber has to be assigned to each call type of the recorded subscriber that shall be
recorded.

To assign recording to a recorded subscriber, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > Speech Recording > Recording
2. In the drop-down lists Conversation, Alarm, All/Group Call, Conference and OpenDuplex®
conference, select a recording subscriber for the desired conversation type.
 VirtuoSIS Feature PRO 800 6.2 and VirtuoSIS 7.0

 LICENCE PRO6U
Speech recording of OpenDuplex®conferences
It is possible to record the initiator and all receivers of an OpenDuplex®conference (manda-
VirtuoSIS tory recording also possible).
LICENCE SIS7U
ATTENTION:
 For the drop-down lists Conference and OpenDuplex®conference, a restart of the respective
Intercom Server is required after the configuration has been changed!
 It is only possible to record OpenDuplex®conferences with up to eight participants (instead of one
initiator and up to eight receivers) as the recording subscriber can only record eight audio signals
at the same time!
3. Optional: Activate the checkbox Mandatory recording to mandatory record the respective
conversation type.
GOOD TO KNOW: Mandatory recording of the call types

Conversation (normal and emergency call)
During a call (normal or emergency call), a mandatory recording of the caller and callee is possible.
The conversation is started and recorded only if a recording subscriber is available. Otherwise, the
busy tone is played back at the respective stations.
Alarm, group call and All Call
During an alarm, group call or All Call, a mandatory recording of the initiator is possible. An alarm,
group call or All Call is started and recorded only if a recording subscriber is available for the
initiator. Otherwise, the busy tone is played back at the respective stations. A mandatory recording
of receivers is not possible. If a recording subscriber becomes available during an alarm, group call
or All Call, the receivers will be recorded at that moment.
Simplex and OpenDuplex®conference
During a Simplex or OpenDuplex®conference, a mandatory recording of the initiator and all
receivers is possible. A Simplex or OpenDuplex®conference is started and recorded only if a
recording subscriber is available. Otherwise, the busy tone is played back at the respective stations.
NOTES:
 Only for Intercom Server GE 200 and GE 700: Recording of a conversation between 2 analogue
subscribers within one Intercom Server is not possible.
 Recording with the function “Reception of multiple radio conferences” is not possible with Gx-
AUD cards. Only the first channel is recorded.
 The link of a subscriber to an active party line conference is delayed until a free recorder channel
is available (with busy tone).
 For conversation converted to a OpenDuplex®conference, mandatory recording is not possible.
I.e. in this case, the configuration will be ignored and the OpenDuplex®conference will be started.
1.5/0619 357
Level adjustment for AUD cards
NOTE: Available only for AUD cards

The following function is only available for AUD and AUD2 cards.
In CCT 800, the attenuation and amplification of different frequencies can be configured for speech
recording in order to suppress or increase certain frequencies.

To configure the frequency levels for speech recording, follow the instructions below:
2. In the drop-down list Input level, select the set value of the input level in order to adjust the value
to the codec of the AUD card.
3. In the drop-down list Output level, select the set value of the output level to adjust the value to the
recording subscriber.
4. In the drop-down lists Equalizer (Mic) and Equalizer (LS), select an equalizer preset for the
microphone or the loudspeaker. Optionally, the equalizer settings can be configured manually (see
below).
Additional settings
DTMF-identification Activate this checkbox to enable the DTMF identification.
Configure equalizer settings

To configure the equalizer settings, follow the instructions below:
2. Click on the button Configure. The following dialogue appears:
3. In the drop-down list Settings for, select whether the equalizer settings shall apply to the
microphone or loudspeaker.
4. Activate the checkbox next to the drop-down list Settings for to activate the equalizer. The state of
the amplifier is changed in real-time.
358 1.5/0619
5. Put the slider on the desired position for the respective frequency to adjust the attenuation or
amplification. The current value is shown in the field Value [db].
NOTE: 16 kHz only for AUD2 cards

The frequency 16 kHz is only available with AUD2 cards.
6. In the drop-down list Presets, a pre-configured setting can be loaded by pressing the button Load,
or the current equalizer settings can be saved in the selected preset by Pressing the button Save. It
is the same setting as in the drop-down list Equalizer (LS) in the main dialogue.
7. Click on the button Send to send the defined equalizer settings to the Intercom Server. Optionally,
activate the checkbox Online to send the equalizer settings to the Intercom Server in real-time.
8. Click on button Apply to save the equalizer settings and to close the dialogue.
 RTP mode

Feature PRO 800 2.0 – Speech recording via RTP mode over IP stations
PRO 800 Audio signals of the microphone and loudspeaker of a station (combined to a single audio
LICENCE PRO2U signal) can be transmitted for speech recording via RTP over IP stations in parallel to IoIP®.
 Feature PRO 800 2.1 – Speech recording via RTP mode over IP subscriber cards
PRO 800
Audio signals of the microphone and loudspeaker of a station (combined to a single audio
LICENCE PRO2U signal) can be transmitted for speech recording via RTP over IP subscriber cards in parallel to
IoIP®. Up to 5 audio channels can be processed per IP card simultaneously.
Requirements
The following firmware versions are required for speech recording via RTP:
 Over IP devices: DSP 900A (min. 5.1) and PRO 800 (min. 1.4) or IoIP-Device (min. 7.0).
 Over IP subscriber cards: Gx-IP (min. 5.2), PRO 800 (min. 2.1), SIS-IP-8.
The following licences are required for speech recording via RTP:
 Upgrade licence “Lx-PRO2U”
 Licence “L-IP-REC-1”

To configure speech recording via RTP over IP stations or IP subscriber cards, follow the instructions
below:
1. Only for IP subscriber cards: Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab Common
2. Only for IP subscriber cards: In the drop-down list Series, select the entry “RTP Server” or the
appropriate subscriber.
3. Configure the recorded IP subscribers. The configuration is explained under see “Allocation of audio
channels” on page 356 and see “Allocation of recording subscribers” on page 357.
4. Go to: Subscriber > RTP Configuration
5. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add function”.
6. In the field RTP Server IP, enter the IP address of the RTP server. The following fields will be
enabled.
7. In the field RTP Port, enter the port of the RTP server
8. In the drop-down list Quality, select the quality of the transmitted audio signals via RTP.
9. In the drop-down list RTCP-interval [s], select the time for the RTCP (RTP Control Protocol) for
receiving audio signals.
1.5/0619 359
10.In the drop-down list Mode, select the recording mode. The following modes are available:
 Off: No recording.
 Only audio: Only audio recording of microphone input.
 Audio + tones: Recording of microphone input and DSP tones (e.g. minute tone).
Additional settings
 Reserved RTCP port

In this field, the reserved RTCP port will be indicated, which will be used to receive
audio streams if several channels are configured.
In this drop-down list, the reduction of the RTP stream can be selected (with each 3dB
Reduction
levels).
VOX-Control For further information see page 361.
VOX-Follow up
For further information see page 361.
time [s]
Interface
In this drop-down list, an interface can be selected for synchronisation.
synchronisation
In this drop-down list, the mode of the time synchronisation via a SNTP server can be
selected. 1) The following modes are available:
 Off: No time synchronisation.
SNTP  On: The subscriber executes the time synchronisation directly via a SNTP server.
 On via IS: The subscriber carries out the time synchronisation indirectly via the In-
tercom Server, which receives the time from a SNTP server. This mode leads to an
increased delay in the synchronisation process.
1) A SNTP server can be configured for the respective Intercom Server in the field SNTP Server IP-Address at
Intercom Server > Real time (SNTP) (see page 378).
360 1.5/0619
 VOX control for RTP speech recording

Feature PRO 800 5.1 – VOX control
PRO 800 With the VOX control (Voice Operated Exchange), the transmission of a RTP stream will
LICENCE PRO5U automatically be interrupted as long as no audio is transmitted after a configurable time.
Audio signals of subscribers will be mixed to one single RTP stream that will be transmitted to the RTP
server. If no audio is transmitted in this mixed RTP stream within a configurable time (follow-up time),
the transmission will be interrupted. As soon as audio is transmitted again, the transmission of the RTP
stream will be continued. Each recording will be saved as separate file at the RTP server, also when the
transmission of the RTP stream has been interrupted temporarily. See the following illustration:
Requirements
This function is supported for the following Intercom Servers:
 GE 800 (min. PRO 800 5.1)
 GE 300 (min. PRO 800 5.1)
 VirtuoSIS (min. PRO 800 6.0)

To enable VOX control for speech recording via RTP, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Subscriber > RTP Configuration
2. Activate the checkbox VOX-Control to enable the VOX control for the respective RTP server. The
drop-down list VOX-Follow up time [s] is enabled.
3. In the drop-down list VOX-Follow up time [s], select the time, after which the transmission of the
RTP stream is interrupted if no audio is transferred.
1.5/0619 361
Pre-recorded audio Intercom Server Configuration
 Pre-recorded audio
Certain cards and Intercom Servers have a permanent storage which is able to save converted audio
files (so-called pre recorded audio files) for playback at e.g. stations or loudspeakers. Pre-recorded
audio files are converted WAV audio files that can be managed in the pre-recorded audio client of CCT
800 and used in the Intercom Server for various functions (e.g. calm-down signal at call requests or
announcements).
Requirements
Supported cards
The following cards and Intercom Server have a permanent storage for saving pre-recorded audio files:
Interface cards IAX, AUD, TEL
Subscriber card G8-IP-32 Subscriber cards GET, GED and IP
Intercom Server IS 300 (up to generation 2)
Subscriber cards GET, GED, IP (min. generation 3)
8 MB flash memory (7.48 MB audio memory) 2 MB flash memory (1.496 MB audio memory)
Up to 450 seconds at 16 kHz /
90 seconds at 16 kHz
maximum of 90 seconds per audio file
Up to 900 seconds at 7 kHz /
180 seconds at 7 kHz
maximum of 180 seconds per audio file
A maximum of 120 pre-recorded audio files per block A maximum of 120 pre-recorded audio files per card
NOTE: Transmission only possible with audio card

Pre-recorded audio can only be downloaded to Intercom Servers from computers with an installed
sound card.
Supported audio file formats

An imported audio file will be converted automatically, whereby also the storage of the audio file can
be changed. For import, only WAV audio file with audio codec “G.722” or “G.722e” is supported.
ATTENTION: Required sections of a WAV file

The sections fmt, data, and RIFF Subchunk of a WAV file has to be completed!
362 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Pre-recorded audio
Pre-recorded audio management

On the following pages, you will find a step-for-step instruction for the import of audio files, confi-
guration of pre-recorded audio files and the management of playlists. The following chapters are avail-
able:
 Management of pre-recorded audio files in the library – see below
 Management of playlists in the playlist editor – see page 365
 Send the playlists to the Intercom Server – see page 368
 Additional functions in the pre-recorded audio client – see page 370
Management of pre-recorded audio files in library

In the library, all imported audio files can be managed. In this view, audio files can be added to the
library and converted pre-recorded audio files can be added to the playlists for further use in the
Intercom Servers.

To configure the pre-recorded audio files in the library, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Menu Intercom Server > Pre-recorded audio
2. Click on the pre-recorded audio tree and select the entry “Library” (by default already selected when
opening the pre-recorded audio client). The library is shown pre-recorded audio client.
1.5/0619 363
Import of audio files

At the import, audio files are converted automatically (i.e. quality and storage can be changed). To
import audio files, follow the instructions below:
3. In the section “File System”, click on the button Import and select the desired audio files.
Additionally, audio files and playlists can be received from the Intercom Server (see page 374).
NOTE: Existing file can be overwritten or saved as copy

If there are existing audio files with the same data name in the library, they can be overwritten or
the imported audio file can be saved as copy.
When the import has been finished, the following settings are shown in the library of the pre-recorded
audio files:
Name Name of the pre-recorded audio file.
File type File type of the pre-recorded audio file.
Samples Original quality of the pre-recorded audio file in the quality prior to the conversion.
Bits Bitrate of the pre-recorded audio file.
Duration [s] Playback time of the pre-recorded audio file.
Size Original memory size of the pre-recorded audio file prior to the conversion
GOOD TO KNOW: Configuration of pre-recorded audio files

The settings of the pre-recorded audio files will be configured separately per playlist, to which the
audio file is assigned.
ATTENTION: Max. 1.496 MB per converted audio file

A single converted audio file must not exceed 1.496 MB! Otherwise, this pre-recorded audio file can-
not be added to a playlist.
Add pre-recorded audio files to a playlist

To add one or more pre-recorded audio files to a playlist, follow the instructions below:
4. Select the desired pre-recorded audio files in the library.
5. Drag-and-Drop the selected pre-recorded audio files onto the desired playlist. If the desired playlist
does not exist already, the following options are available:
 Create playlist: Carry out a right-click on “Playlists” in the pre-recorded audio tree and select
“New Playlist”.
 Import playlists – see page 371
 Receive playlists from Intercom Server – see page 374
NOTE: Additional functions

Further additional optional functions can be found on page 370.
364 1.5/0619
Management of playlists in the playlist editor

With the playlist editor, the individual pre-recorded audio files are grouped to playlists. These playlists
will be sent to the Intercom Server for further use. To configure the playlists in the playlist editor, follow
the instructions below:
2. Select the desired playlist in the pre-recorded audio tree. The following dialogue appears:
GOOD TO KNOW: Storage capacity of card types

The blue bar serves as a status indicator about the currently used storage space of the respective
block. See the following illustration:
Beginning with block 1 all audio files will be saved on the blocks in ascending order. 1) The audio
files will be saved in the same block; when the storage space of this block is full, the files will be
saved in the next block (if available). The storage capacity of the playlist must not exceed the
maximum capacity of all available blocks. 2) 3)
Transferred audio files will be dynamically saved to use the storage of each block in the best
possible way. A block has a storage space of 1.496 MB. The following storage spaces are available
for the different card types:
 8 MB (e.g. IAX, AUD, TEL, IP32, IP): The storage space is divided into five blocks with each
1.496 MB. In total, this card type has a storage space of 7.48MB for audio files.
 2 MB (e.g. GET, GED, IP): The storage space is divided into one block with 1.496 MB.
1)
Depending on the card type (2 MB or 8 MB) a different number of blocks are available.
2) An audio file can only be saved in one block. Thus the storage space of a block may be full at less
than 100%.
3) Up to 120 pre-recorded audio files can be saved per block.
1.5/0619 365
3. In the field Name, the name of the playlist can be changed.

4. In the drop-down list Memory Size, select the card type with the specific memory size. The
following memory sizes are available:
 8 MB (e.g. IAX, AUD, TEL, IP32, IP)
 2 MB (e.g. GET, GED, IP)
5. Activate the checkbox Enabled for the desired pre-recorded audio files in the playlist that shall be
sent to the Intercom Server.
6. In the field ID, enter a unique ID for the pre-recorded audio file, for which the checkbox Enabled is
activated. The following IDs are available:
 0–159: ID’s free for use.
NOTE: Invalid or duplicate IDs

Invalid IDs are indicated with beige background, whereas duplicate IDs are indicated with orange
background.
 160+: The pre-recorded audio is played instead of the respective system messages. The following
system messages are available:
ID Description ID Description
160 No tone 175 Waiting tone busy 1)
161 Info tone 176 Dial tone send
162 Dial tone 177 Dial tone receive
163 Error tone 178 Dial tone telephone interface 2) 3)
164 Busy tone 179 Alarm tone low
165 Busy tone (tieline) 180 Alarm tone high
166 Acknowledgement tone 181 Call request normal call-initiator
167 Acknowledgement tone off 182 Call request emergency call-initiator
168 Accept tone (access control modules) 183 Parked call 3) 4)
169 Privacy tone 184 All Call tone
Control call tone
170 185 Group call tone
(access control modules)
171 Call tone 186 Chime singal gong (IN on GEP/GEN)
172 Minute tone
173 Waiting tone microphone mute
174 Waiting tone call forwarding
1) Waiting information for “busy” after pressing button 0 (see page 173).
2) Can be used for GTEL, IAX and with PRO 800 6.1 for SIS-SIP-T.
3) Intercom Server software min. PRO 800 6.0 and licence “Lx-PRO8006U” required.
4)
Does not apply for emergency calls with the function “Cancel on site” (see page 299). These calls remain
active as call type 2 (emergency call).

Further information about tones can be found on page 133.
GOOD TO KNOW: Assembly of re-recorded audio files

It is possible to assembly multiple audio files with ICX messages (e.g. to form sentences). For
further information about assembling multiple audio files, see the manual “ICX Protocol”.
366 1.5/0619
7. In the drop-down list Client, select one or more clients, which should use the respective audio file.
The following clients are available:
 Client 1 – 4: For the first 4 subscribers of the subscriber card.
 Client 1 – 8 (only for IP subscriber cards): For all subscribers of the IP subscriber card.
 Client 5 (only G8-IP-32/G8-IP-64/Intercom Server IS 300): For the subscribers 5 to 32 (G8-IP-32)
or 5 to 64 (G8-IP-64) of the subscriber card.
ATTENTION: Separate allocation not possible

Pre recorded audio files cannot be allocated separately to this subscribers!
 Client 6 – 8: Not used on IP32 card.

8. In the field Destination quality, select the quality of the pre-recorded audio file in the Intercom
Server. The following qualities are available:
 8kHz: The audio file is converted to “G.722“.
 16kHz: The audio file is converted to “G.722e”.
ATTENTION: Restrictions for G8-IP-32 and IS 300

In case the plug-in server G8-IP-32 or the Intercom Server IS 300 is used, every pre-recorded
audio file must exist in both qualities (same ID but each with the destination quality of 8 kHz and
16 kHz)! If the required quality of the pre-recorded file is not available, the standard tone will be
used instead!
Additional settings
Name Name of the pre-recorded audio file.
File type File type of the pre-recorded audio file.
Samples Original quality of the pre-recorded audio file prior to the conversion.
Bits Bitrate of the pre-recorded audio file.
Duration [s] Playback time of the pre-recorded audio file.
Destination size Required memory size of the pre-recorded audio file. 1)
1)
The memory size might be changed by the configured destination quality of the audio file. (see above).
NOTE: Additional functions

Further additional optional functions can be found on page 370.
1.5/0619 367
Send playlists to Intercom Server

Playlists must be sent to the Intercom Server for playback at e.g. stations or loudspeakers. To send pre-
recorded audio files to the Intercom Server, follow the instructions below:
2. Select the desired playlist in pre-recorded audio tree that shall be sent to the Intercom Server.
3. Click on the button Download to Server. The following dialogue appears:
GOOD TO KNOW: Activation of button “Download to Server”

The button Download to Server is activated when the following conditions are fulfilled for the
selected playlist in the playlist editor:
 The checkbox Enabled must be activated for at least one pre-recorded audio file.
 Valid IDs are set for all pre-recorded audio files, for which the checkbox Enabled is activated.
 One or more clients are selected for all audio files, for which the checkbox Enabled is activated.
 A single converted audio file is not bigger than 1.496 MB.
 Maximum 120 pre-recorded audio files are available per block.
 The storage capacity does not exceed the maximum capacity of all available blocks.
Further information about these settings can be found on page 365.
5. Click on the button Get Data and select the tab Cards.
6. Select the desired Intercom Servers, to which the playlists shall be sent.
368 1.5/0619
7. Click on the button Download to send the selected playlists to the Intercom Server.
NOTE: Max one playlist per card

Max. one playlist can be loaded per card (existing playlists are overwritten). One playlist can be
downloaded to multiple cards.
ATTENTION:
 When uploading a playlist, the data of each block, which will not be used by the uploaded playlist,
will be deleted (is only valid for card types with a memory size of 8 MB)!
 In order to keep the download time to a minimum, it is recommend to select not more than two
cards per download!
8. When the playlists has been sent, click on the button Close to close the dialogue.
Allocation of pre-recorded audio

There are two possibilities to allocate and to use the pre-recorded audio:
 Allocation of pre-recorded audio via system tones: Allocation of an ID for system tones (see
page 366). Instead of the system tone the pre-recorded audio is played back at the cards/clients, to
which it has been downloaded.
 Allocation of pre-recorded audio via feed-in: Feed-in of pre-recorded audio via a music or radio
conference.

1. Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music or Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio Conference
2. Right-click on the desired subscriber and select “Add Feed-in of music” or “Add Feed in of radio
conference”.
3. In the field Pre-recorded audio ID, enter the ID of the pre-recorded audio. See table on page 366
for a list of all available pre-recorded audio IDs. For further information about feed-in see page 254.
NOTES:
 The pre-recorded audio has to be transferred to the same card as the subscriber (used as feed-in).
 The pre-recorded audio has to be allocated to the same client to which the respective subscriber is
allocated (see page 367).
 The pre-recorded audio is played back permanently in a loop.
1.5/0619 369
Additional functions in the pre-recorded audio client

The following additional functions can be carried out optionally in the pre-recorded audio client.
Rename pre-recorded audio files

To rename pre-recorded audio files, follow the instructions below:
1. Carry out a double or right click on a pre-recorded audio file in the library and select “Rename file”.
2. Enter the new name of the pre-recorded audio file.

Delete playlists
To delete pre-recorded audio files, follow the instructions below:
2. Right-click on the selected pre-recorded audio files and select “Remove files”. A dialogue appears.
3. Click on the button Yes.
NOTE: Pre-recorded audio files are removed from playlists

The deleted pre-recorded audio files will be removed from the playlists automatically.
Export of pre-recorded audio files

Pre-recorded audio files can be exported and saved on the computer. To export pre-recorded audio
files, follow the instructions below:
2. In the section “File System”, click on the button Export. A dialogue appears.
3. Select the desired storage path.
Change storage path of library

In CCT 800, the storage path of the library (i.e. pre-recorded audio files and playlists) can be changed.
To change the storage path, follow the instructions below:
1. In the section “Options”, click on the button Settings. The following dialogue appears:
2. In the field Library location, enter the desired path or click on the button... and select the desired
directory, where the library shall be saved.
Playback of pre-recorded audio files in CCT 800 with media player

The media player enabled the playback of pre-recorded audio files in the library. See the following
370 1.5/0619
screenshot:
To playback pre-recorded audio file, follow the instructions below:

1. Select the desired pre-recorded audio file in the library. The file name is shown in the header of the
media player.
2. Click on the play button to start the playback of the selected pre-recorded audio file. The blue bar
shows the current playback time.
3. Click on the stop button to stop the playback of the pre-recorded audio file.
Remove pre-recorded audio files from playlist

To remove pre-recorded audio files from the playlists, follow the instructions below:
2. Right-click on the selected pre-recorded audio files and select “´Remove Link”. A dialogue appears.
NOTE: Pre-recorded audio files remain in the library

The removed pre-recorded audio files will not be deleted from the library.
Delete a playlist
To delete an existing playlists, follow the instructions below:
1. Right-click on the desired playlist in the pre-recorded audio tree and select “Remove Playlist”. A
dialogue appears.
Import of playlists
With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, several playlists can be imported at the same time (up to CCT 6.1, playlist
can only be imported individually).

To import playlists, follow the instructions below:
1.5/0619 371
2. Click on the button Import 1 or carry out a right-click on the entry “Playlists” in the pre-recorded
audio tree 2 and select “Import Playlist”.
3. Activate the checkboxes of the desired directories with the playlists that shall be imported.
NOTE: Sub-directories are excluded

Only playlists in the selected directories will be imported. Playlists in sub-directories will not be
included for the import.
372 1.5/0619
4. Click on the button OK. The playlists are added automatically to the playlist editor.
NOTE: Playlists of the same name

Existing playlists with the same name will be extended by the pre-recorded audio file of the
imported playlist. Existing pre-recorded audio files will be replaced or excluded from the import.
Export of playlists
With CCT 800 7.0 or higher, several playlists can be exported and saved on the computer at the same
time (up to CCT 6.1, playlist can only be exported individually).

To export playlists, follow the instructions below:
2. Select the desired playlists in the pre-recorded audio tree 1 .

3. Click on the button Export 2 or carry out a right-click on the entry “Playlists” in the pre-recorded
audio tree 3 and select “Export Playlist”. The “folder browser” dialogue appears.
4. Select the desired storage path or create a new directory.
1.5/0619 373
Receive playlists from Intercom Server

The playlists and pre-recorded audio files saved in the cards of an Intercom Server can be received with
the pre-recorded audio client. To receive the playlists and pre-recorded audio files, follow the instruc-
tions below:
2. Click on the button Upload to PC. The following dialogue appears:
5. Select the desired cards, from which the playlists and pre-recorded audio files shall be received.
6. Click on the button Upload to receive the playlists and pre-recorded audio files from the selected
cards.
NOTE: File format of received pre-recorded audio files

Received pre-recorded audio files are saved either in the format G.722 (7 kHz) or G.722e (16 kHz).
7. When the data has been received, click on the button Close to close the dialogue. The received
playlists and pre-recorded audio files will be shown automatically in the pre-recorded audio client.
374 1.5/0619
Erase playlists from Intercom Server

The playlists and pre-recorded audio files saved in the cards of an Intercom Server can be erased with
the pre-recorded audio client. To erase the playlists and pre-recorded audio files, follow the instruc-
tions below:
2. Click on the button Erase. The following dialogue appears:
5. Select the desired cards, from which the playlists and pre-recorded audio files shall be erased.
6. Click on the button Erase to delete the playlists and pre-recorded audio files from the selected cards.
A dialogue appears.
8. When the files have been erased, click on the button Close to close the dialogue.
1.5/0619 375
 Recording pre-recorded audio files with Intercom station


Feature PRO 800 3.x – Recording of pre-recorded audio files
PRO 800
With dialling the button sequence “9T01” at an Intercom station, it is possible to create and
LICENCE PRO3U overwrite pre-recorded audio files within the Intercom system.
Example: The calm-down message of a help point can be recorded or changed from a control
desk such as EE811A.
Restrictions
 Pre-recorded audio files can be recorded for up to 30 seconds. With 8 MB of available flash memory,
individual files may contain a maximum of 90 or 180 seconds of recorded audio.
 Up to 120 pre-recorded audio files can be saved per card.
 When using cards with large-sized memory (8 MB), pre-recorded audio files can be recorded until
the limit of the available storage has exceeded. If the mark of 6 MB has been exceeded, pre-recorded
audio files can only be deleted with the pre-recorded audio client in CCT 800 (see page 375), because
the remaining storage is used as buffer.
 When using cards with low-sized memory (2 MB), pre-recorded audio files can only be deleted or
overwritten with the pre-recorded audio client in CCT 800 (see page 375).
 During recording with the 9T01 function, system-based audio messages (e.g, announcements) can-
not be played back at the recording and target station simultaneously. In addition, it may corrupt the
recording.
 Feature level D is required for subscribers that are recording pre-recorded audio files for remote
stations. However, recording for itself is not subject to this restriction.
 An Intercom station cannot receive or send more than one audio signals at a time. As a result, the
target subscriber will have no audio signal available during recordings or playbacks made using the
9T01 function.
Hardware and software requirements

The 9T01 function is available for any subscribers, which are connected to one of the following
Intercom Server or cards:
2 MB storage
Intercom Server or card Requirement
Gx-GED min. Rev. AB
Gx-GET min. Rev. AB
SIS-IP -
8 MB storage
Gx-AUD min. Rev. AB
Gx-IP min. Rev. AC, min. 05.4
IS 300 -
IP32 -
Gx-SUB min. 04.0
376 1.5/0619
Recording of pre-recorded audio files

To record a pre-recorded audio file at an Intercom station, follow the instructions below:
1. Dial the button sequence “9T01” at the recording station.
NOTES:
The button sequence “9T01” can be dialled with the following functions:
 Direct dialling
 Selection from the F2 function list at a station with dot-matrix display
 Dialling simulation of an input
 ICX message
2. At this station, enter the call number of the station to be recorded.
NOTE: Call number of own or remote station can be entered

It is possible to enter either your own call number (to record or change pre-recorded audio files for
your own subscriber), or to enter the call number of another station in the Intercom System (to
change a pre-recorded audio file remotely).
3. Enter the pre-recorded audio ID, in which the recording should be saved (001 – 199). The pre-
recorded audio ID is separated into a freely selectable and fixed IDs. Further information can be
found on page 366.
4. The recording mode starts. The following functions are available in the recording mode:
Button Description
Hold T Start recording
Release T Stop recording
0 Start playback
1 Saves the record for the selected subscriber
2 Recording for all subscribers will be saved on the card
3 Delete recording (available only while function is activated)
4 Scrolls through the saved audio files downwards (only during the replay)
6 Scrolls through the saved audio files upwards (only during the replay)
X Cancel recording
5. The save process lasts 60 seconds. In case of an error, a error tone is audible for 4 seconds (cancel
with X), followed by an new recording that can be started by pressing the button 1
ATTENTION: Audio files are available after 2–3 minutes after recording
When using the 9T01 function to overwrite an existing pre-recorded playback message, the new,
error-corrected recording will be available two to three minutes after the time indicated by the
confirmation tone on the calling terminal! During this time, the terminal will stay in idle mode and
will not indicate the progress of the overwriting process!
1.5/0619 377
Time, date Intercom Server Configuration
Time, date
 Time synchronisation
 The real-time feature of the Intercom Server GE 800 and GE 300 uses the SNTP standard to retrieve
the time from a time server.
 During the start up the Intercom Server retrieves the current time in UTC from the configured time-
server (in LAN or internet).
 The time can also be set with an ICX message (when no SNTP server is available).
 Indication of time-sync status via output.
 Automatic Daylight-Saving-Time (DST) adjustment.
 Time synchronisation interval:
 If a connection exists to the time server exists, the time is synchronised in an interval of 1 hour.
 If no connection exists to the time server exists, the synchronisation is executed in an interval of
5 minutes.
Time and date can be used for the following function:
 Indication of time and date at stations (see page 380).
 ICX messages with time-controlled execution (see page 381).

 Go to: Intercom Server > Real time (SNTP)
 Difference to UTC (+/- HH:MM): In this field, the time deviation to UTC “Universal Time
Coordinated” can be entered.
NOTE:
The entry of the time deviation is entered in the format “hours:minutes” and is divided into 15
minute steps.
  Automatic DST adjustment: In this drop-down list, the region for the automatic DST adjustment
can be selected. The following regions are available:
 Off: No automatic DST adjustment.
 Europe
 US
 The following regions are available with CCT 800 5.1:
 Australia
 New Zealand
 Date format: In this drop-down list, the date format of the displayed date and time can be selected
for the respective subscriber. The following date formats are available:
 Europe: DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
 US: MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS
 SNTP Server IP-Address: In this field, the IP address of the SNTP server can be entered. The
Intercom Server with the lowest server ID in the network distributes the time to all Intercom Servers
within the configured blocks, which does not have entered a SNTP server IP address.
 Output no.: In this field, the call number of the output can be entered for the indication of the
synchronisation state.
 Output is activated: The time of the respective Intercom Server is synchronised with SNTP.
 Output is deactivated: The time of the respective Intercom Server is not synchronised with SNTP.
378 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Time, date
 Time zones and date formats for single subscriber


Feature PRO 800 6.0 – time zones and date formats for single subscribers
VirtuoSIS Customized time zones can be configured with pre-defined date formats for single subscribers,
LICENCE PRO6U
regardless of the allocated Intercom Server.
If no time zone is configured for a subscriber, the respective settings of the allocated Intercom Server
will automatically be applied for this subscriber.

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > Time zones
 Right-click and select “Add time zone”.
 Description: In this field, enter a name for the time zone. The following settings will be enabled.
 Difference to UTC (+/- HH:MM): In this field, the time deviation from UTC “Universal Time
Coordinated” can be entered.
NOTE:
The entry of the time deviation is entered in the format “hours:minutes” and is divided into 15
minute steps.
 Automatic DST adjustment: In this drop-down list, the region for the automatic DST adjustment
can be selected. The following regions are available:
 Off: No automatic DST adjustment.
 Europe
 US
 Australia
 New Zealand
 Go to: Subscriber > General > tab Display time
 Activate the checkbox Display time for the respective subscriber. The following settings will be
enabled.
 Time zone: In this drop-down list, the configured time zone can be selected.
 Standard time zone acc. to Intercom Server: The configured time zone of the allocated
Intercom Server is applied for the respective subscriber (see page 378).
 Date format: In this drop-down list, the date format of the displayed date and time can be selected
for the respective subscriber. The following date formats are available:
 Standard date format acc. to Intercom Server: The selected date format of the allocated
Intercom Server is applied for the respective subscriber (see page 378).
 Europe: DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
 US: MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS
1.5/0619 379
Time, date Intercom Server Configuration
 Display of time and date at stations


The current time can be displayed selectively at stations with display. At all multiline displays
additionally the date is displayed.
101
101 Station 101
Station 101 08.02.10 09:50
Tu 30. Mar 10 F1-Subscribers

14:40 F2-Functions
F3-Main Menu
d-Menu
EE 311A/EE 411

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > tab General
 Display time: Activate this checkbox to display the time at the display of the respective subscriber.
 Display only time at station


Feature PRO 800 2.1 – show only time (large)
PRO 800 With the function “Show only time (large)” it is possible to indicate only the time with big
LICENCE PRO2U letters at the display.

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > Monitors > tab Monitor
 Show only time (large): Activate this checkbox to only show the time at the date/time indication
on the display of the respective subscriber.
 Subscriber > General > tab Display time
 Display time: Activate this checkbox to display the time at the display of the respective subscriber.
380 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Time, date
 ICX messages with time-controlled execution

 ICX messages can be sent only once, daily or weekly.
 Execution can be linked to the status of an input or output:
 Only when the input or output is active the ICX message is sent.
 A confirmation ICX message can be sent at execution of the time-controlled events (e.g. for
indication in Studio or logging in Reporter).
ID’s
For each time-controlled event, an ID has to be assigned. This ID can be used to control the ICX mes-
sages. Consider the following restrictions if the ID is used internally:
 IDs “0001” to “4FFF” has to be unique.
 IDs “5000” to “FFFF” do not have to be unique.
Activation/deactivation of time-controlled events via ICX messages
NOTE:
A maximum of 32 entries can be configured.
NOTE:

 Go to: Intercom Server > Time-triggered commands > sub-folder Intercom Server
 Right-click and select “Add delayed command”.
 ID: In this field, an ID has to be entered for each ICX message.
 Repeat at weekdays: Activate the checkboxes of the desired days, on which the ICX message shall
be put out.
 ICX-message at execution: Activate this checkbox to put out a confirmation ICX message when
the time-controlled message is put out. If a call number is configured, this results in the following
behaviour:
 Checkbox deactivated: The ICX message is only sent when the input/output is activated.
 Checkbox activated: The ICX message is only sent when the input/output is deactivated.
 Input- / Output state invers: Activate this checkbox to invert the state of the input or output. If
 Call number In-/Output: In this field, the call number of the input or output can be entered, which
determines if the time-controlled ICX message is put out.
 Execution time (YY.MM.DD-HH:MM:SS): In this field, the time/date can be entered, at which the
ICX message shall be executed.
ATTENTION:
The time must be entered in 24 hour format!
 Task: In this field, the task number of the desired ICX message has to be entered.
 Type: In this field, the type number of the desired ICX message has to be entered.
 Data: In this field, the parameter of the desired ICX message has to be entered.
 System no. receiver/sender: In this field, the receiver/sender block number of the Intercom Server
can be entered.
1.5/0619 381
Network function Intercom Server Configuration
Network function
Intercom Server blocks can be configured in Intercom Server networks (LAN, WAN, CNET-E1, CNET-
W, S0) to define in which housings functions like All Call or group calls shall be initiated. By pre-dialling
a function code, one Intercom Server or a group of Intercom Servers are selected and then the function
is carried out.
ATTENTION:
If no code number is pre-dialled the functions are carried out in all Intercom Server housings
connected over G8-NET, CNET-E1 or CNETW, but not in Intercom Server housings connected over
LAN/WAN or S0!
Example: CNET-LAN
These Intercom Server blocks can be used for the following functions:
All Call Pre-defined conference 7T
Group call Subscriber index
Ringing at a group Chime signal
Alarm Video
Music Call request
Control desk with output of ICX commands (Studio) – required
Radio conference 6T
only for LAN, WAN or S0 networks
NOTE:
Consider the restrictions with mixed operation of Intercom Servers with different software versions of
PRO 800 (see page 386).
382 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Network function
Define the block numbers

If you want to use 1-digit block numbers for the Intercom Server blocks, consider that most of the digits
are reserved for functions:
Function code Description Function code Description
00 Initiate All Call 94 Call transfer (additional)
01 Initiate group call 95 Call transfer (delete previous)
02 Follow Me 96 Camera connection static picture
03 Privacy function 97 Camera connection scanning
04 Group call with feedback protection 98 Initiate ringing at a group
TT Answer All Call / group call 9T1 Configure direct dialling
0T Reconnection with last call 9T2 Initiate alarm
4T Music 9T3 Cancel alarm
5T Answer re-call request 9T4 Audio monitoring settings
6T Reception radio conference 9T5 ICX messages
7T Initiate pre-configured conference 9T8 Configure licences
8T Take over door call
ATTENTION:
The block numbers may not collide with call numbers of subscribers, inputs or outputs!
All digits except 1, 2 and 3 are reserved for the internal functions (the function codes can be changed;
see page 129). Usually the calling numbers start with 1, 2 and 3, so we recommend to use 2-digit block
numbers.
NOTE:
Hexadecimal block numbers are possible, however no numbers containing “F” may be used (0F, 1F,
2F, ..., CF, DF, EF, and F0 – FF).
1.5/0619 383
Configuration of the block numbers
Block numbers
 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings
 Additional Blocks: In this field, up to 13 additional blocks can be assigned to the Intercom Server
(several definitions are separated via commas).
Configuration blocks
In a configuration block, certain settings can be executed for all Intercom Servers in this block. By de-
fault, the configuration block “00” is configured for any Intercom Server (the settings are displayed in
the project tree of CCT 800). For any additional configuration block, a separate folder is created in
CCT 800 with its own settings
 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings
 Configuration Block: In this field, a configuration block can be assigned to the Intercom Server.
Define the connections

For each connection over a network interface (S0, CNET-E1, CNET-W, CNET-LAN or WAN) it can be
defined, which Intercom Server blocks shall be reached over this interface. Maximum number of blocks
to be reached per connection:
 LAN: 16
 S0: 10
 CNET-W, CNET-E1: 16

 Go to: Network > IP-Connections > desired connection
 Intercom Server blocks: In this field, the block numbers of all Intercom Servers can be entered,
which are connected over the respective interface.
384 1.5/0619
 Prefix for block numbers

In order to free call number ranges for subscribers, inputs and outputs, it is possible to define a prefix
for configuration blocks:
 E.g block prefix “77”  only call numbers “7700” to “7799” are not available.
 The block prefix can be allocated to multiple block numbers.
 E.g block numbers “80”, “81” and “91” can be dialled with “7780xx”, “7781xx” and “7791xx”.
NOTE:
Block prefix numbers are also possible with G7U-GEP and G7 network cards (exception
G7-CNET-LAN cards of the first generation).

 Go to: Intercom Server - Block XX > General > tab Block settings
 Block prefix: In this field, a prefix can be entered for the configuration block.
Example
In this example e.g. the All Calls are initiated as follows

 An All Call in housing 1 is initiated with 8100.
 An All Call in all three housings is initiated with 8000.
If these codes are too long, you can configure them as direct dialling codes:

 In the field Direct Dialling, enter the direct dialling codes “100=8100, 200=8200, 300=8300,
900=8000” in the row of the respective configuration block.
All Calls are initiated as follows:
 An All Call in all three housings is initiated with 900.
If no block numbers are defined, the functions are carried out in all Intercom Server housings connect-
ed over G8-NET, CNET-E1 or CNETW, not in the Intercom Server housings connected over LAN, WAN
or S0.
1.5/0619 385
 Restrictions with WS series in mixed systems

At mixed operation of Intercom Servers with different PRO 800/PRO software versions in the same
config block restrictions for WS series stations apply:
 The station texts are saved with the block-data and are limited to 14 digits up to PRO 800 1.0.
 Because the old station texts are too short for the WS series new, longer texts have been introduced
as of PRO 800 1.1.
 If Intercom Servers with software below PRO 800 1.1 are in the same block as Intercom Server with
software PRO 800 1.1 and above the longer texts are no longer supported. The Intercom Servers with
software below PRO 800 1.1 cannot handle the new, longer texts.
 Therefore it is necessary to create a block for Intercom Servers with WS series stations, which does
not contain Intercom Server with software below PRO 800 1.1.
Indication in CCT 800

 If Intercom Servers in the same configuration block have different software versions (e.g. Intercom
Server no. 1 with PRO 800 1.0 and Intercom Server no. 2 with PRO 800 1.1) at receiving/opening of
the CCT 800 file the following text is displayed:
 This configuration can occur either manually. However the user is informed via a warning if he really
wants this configuration. It is then also explained that no extended texts for WS series stations are
stored.
 This configuration can also occur when Intercom Servers are initialised to different server IDs e.g. #1
and #10, see screenshot below) and then networked via NET cards. When initialised the standard
configuration block 00 is used.
386 1.5/0619
Special configuration
All Call, group call, 7T/7TT conference, party line

By default, no special configuration required. The selection of Intercom Server blocks is carried out via
pre-dialling. If one or more participants of a 7T/7TT conference or party line are located on an IP32 card,
the following additional configuration has to be carried out:

 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab Extended Settings
 IP32 block distribution: In this field, the Intercom Server blocks can be entered, via which the
respective function is carried out (several definitions are separated via commas; see page 384).
Ringing at a group
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling codes can be entered for the door station with the
number of the Intercom Server block (e.g. “4=81983” for ringing at group 3 in Intercom Server block
81 with button 4).
Alarm
 Direct Dialling: In this field, the direct dialling codes can be entered for the initiator with the
number of the Intercom Server block (e.g. “0=819T201” for initiating the alarm at group 01 in Inter-
com Server block “81” with button 0).
Music/radio conference 6T
 Go to: Subscriber > Feed-in > Music or Subscriber > Feed-in > Radio conference
 Receiver: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, which shall receive the
respective music/radio channel.
Subscriber menu
At stations with dot-matrix display an Intercom Server block can be pre-dialled before displaying the
subscriber index with A (e.g. 82 A).

 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, whose
subscriber menu is displayed with A without pre-dialling (see page 384).
1.5/0619 387
Chime signal
 Go to: Inputs > Chime signal
 Intercom Server-Block: In the drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, which
shall receive the respective chime channel (see page 384).
Video
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, which
shall receive the camera texts at the start of the system (see page 384).
Telephone interface
ATTENTION:
In order to distribute telephone numbers to control desks and ICX interfaces, the Intercom Server
block has to be entered at the involved connections!
Configuration CCT 800 (for LAN and WAN connections)

 Go to: Networks > IP-Connections > desired connection > tab LAN-Connections or
Networks > IP-Connections > desired connection > tab WAN-Connections
J  Description: In this field, a description can be entered for the IP address used for documentation
PRO 800
purposes.
LICENCE
PRO9U  Pre-dialling code: In this field a pre-dialling code can be entered.
 IP address of destination Intercom Server: The IP address of the Intercom Server is entered in
this field.
 Intercom Server-Block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected, via
which the telephone numbers will be distributed (see page 384).
Configuration CCT 800 (for S0 connections)

 Go to: Networks > S0-Connections > desired S0 connection
 Intercom Server-Block 1 to Intercom Server-Block 10: In these drop-down lists, the Intercom
Server blocks can be selected, via which the telephone numbers will be distributed (see page 384).
388 1.5/0619
Control desk
Required only for LAN/WAN/S0 networks.

 Control desk system: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server can be selected to transfer call
requests and input messages to a control desk over S0/LAN/WAN, which contains all Intercom
Servers where a control desk is defined or where a call request/input message comes from (also
transferred).
 ICX transfer: In this drop-down list, the block can be selected, in which the acknowledgement
messages for call transfers are put out (task “5B”; type “5x” and “6x”).
If a control desk call transfer is used in an S0/LAN/WAN network, it can be an advantage to define
different Intercom Server blocks for different Intercom Server in the drop-down list Control desk
system.
Example: 3 Intercom Servers (A, B and C, each with a control desk) are connected over S0. The
control desks B and C shall be able to transfer calls to control desk A. No call requests are defined
between Intercom Server B and C. Each time a call transfer from Intercom Server B to Intercom
Server A is activated, a short connection would be established also to Intercom Server C. This can
be avoided e.g. with the following configuration:
Configuration Intercom Server A Intercom Server B Intercom Server C
“Intercom Server Block” (in the folder
80, 81 80, 82 80, 83
Intercom Server)
“Intercom Server Blocks” (in the folder
80, 82, 83 80, 81, 83 80, 81, 82
Network)
Intercom Server - Block XX > General >
80 82 83
tab control desk system
Studio

 ICX: In this drop-down list, the block can be selected, from which Intercom Server block messages
shall be put out. Messages for call requests and input messages are put out in any case. If several
Intercom Servers are connected over S0/LAN/WAN with separate “ICX-connection” or “Output dial-
ling to ICX”, it can be necessary to define different configuration blocks for different Intercom Server
housings in the drop-down list ICX.
NOTE:
Direct dialling buttons


 Direct dialling buttons – block: In this drop-down list, the Intercom Server block can be selected,
in which the following events will be shown on direct dialling buttons:
 Call indication (except for active call)
 Busy (except for active call)
 Active outputs
1.5/0619 389
 Network monitoring
Any desired input in the networked system can be used for indication of connection errors. At the input
level “short” is simulated when an error occurs, this means an input message has to be defined to a
desired control desk.
ATTENTION:
Network monitoring is only possible within the same WAN region!
Different groups of Intercom Servers can be defined for monitoring. This has the advantage, that
 Group 1: For instance Intercom Servers, which are connected via S0, can be defined with longer
polling times, in order to prevent high connection costs due to constant connection initiation.
 Group 2: For Intercom Servers it is possible to define shorter polling times (e.g. via CNET-W).

 Go to: Inputs > Input message
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add Input message”.
 Go to: Inputs > Input message > sub-folder input > tab Network Monitoring
 Right-click on the desired input and select “Add monitoring”.
 Waiting time [s]: In this field, the time can be changed for the respective group, which passes after
a restart of the system before the connection test are carried out (max. 1049 seconds (ca. 17
minutes). This time shall assure that before the start of the network monitoring all connections are
built up. The waiting time is defined per system and is taken over for all groups from group 1 (by
 Polling time [s]: In this field, the time between connection tests can be entered for the respective
group (max. 245760 seconds (ca. 68 hours)).
 Answer time [min] and Answer time [s]: In these drop-down lists, the time to wait for an answer
from the monitored Intercom Server can be selected for the respective group, after which an error is
indicated (max. 15 seconds or 15 minutes).
NOTE: Restrictions
 At Intercom Servers connected via S0, the time for build-up of connection has to be observed.
 The answer time is not used at NET networks.
 V24 - call number: In this drop-down list, an interface can be selected for the respective group, to
which an Alive message (“00 42 00 D1010000 A4”) with the respective polling values is sent. If the
answer message (“00 40 00 D1010000 A4”) is not received within the entered time in the field
Waiting time, the level “short” is simulated at the respective input.
 Intercom Servers: In this field, the ID of the monitored Intercom Server can be entered for the
respective group (several definitions are separated by a comma).
390 1.5/0619
Network redundancy
General
A fallback network can be configured as an additional and redundant network connection. As soon as
the standard network fails, the connection is automatic directed via the fallback connection and
activated conversations are terminated. The following network connection can be used as standard
and/or fallback connections:
 Synchronous Intercom networks (GEV, CNET-W, CNET-E1): Permanently switched data connec-
tions (“dedicated line”).
 Asynchronous Intercom networks (NET, LAN, WAN, S0): Setup of data channel as soon as data
is sent (e.g. dynamic destination routing in an IP network).
Combinations of redundant network connections

Fallback connection
CNET-W CNET-E1 LAN S0
GEV 1)    
Standard connection
1)
NET    3) 
CNET-W    
CNET-E1    
LAN / WAN 2)    3) 
S0    
1)
Network connection can only be used as standard connection.
2) The WAN network connection cannot be used for the fallback function.
3) The same LAN card cannot be used as standard and fallback connection.
Requirements
 Software Intercom Server VirtuoSIS
 Intercom Server GE 800, GE 300, IP-32 or IS 300
1.5/0619 391
Fallback connection for G8-NET

Via the two Ethernet ports of the G8-NET, it is possible to realise a network redundancy connection. If
one of the two cables cannot establish a connection to the switch (e.g. due to a defect), the connection
automatically takes over via the second cable.
Scheme of a network redundancy
NOTE: Requirements for network redundancy

For network redundancy, the switch must support the “Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol” (RSTP).

1. Go to: IP - Settings > tab NET-Firewall
2. Activate the checkbox Allow packets between up- and downlink to establish a connection over
the uplink and downlink jack between two switches.
Examples for network redundancy

Redundant network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers
The master Intercom Server (server ID “01”) is connected with the secondary Intercom Servers (server
ID “02” and ”03”) via a HDSL connection, respectively an IP network. If one of the standard connections
or network cards fails, the connection to the affected secondary Intercom Server is routed via the
fallback network.
GE 800
server ID “01”
CNET-W
LAN
LAN
sta
nd
ard
” con
SL nec
HD tio standard
n“ n
ne ctio network
con
dard
stan fallback
network
CNET-W
LAN
LAN
LAN
GE 800 GE 800
Example: redundant network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers
392 1.5/0619
Redundant LAN network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers

If the standard connection or a LAN network card fails, the connection is routed via the fallback net-
work.
GE 800
server ID “01”
LAN
LAN
Router Router
standard fallback
network network
Router
Router Router Router

LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
GE 800 GE 800 GE 800
server ID “02” server ID “03” server ID “04”
Example: redundant network cards in master and secondary Intercom Servers
Two redundant master Intercom Server rings

The primary master Intercom Server (server ID “01”) is connected with the secondary Intercom Servers
(server ID “10” and “11”) via an IP connection and networked via a synchronous link (HDSL or E1) with
the secondary master Intercom Server (server ID “2”).
If the standard connection fails, the connection is routed via the fallback connection to the secondary
master and then to the primary master Intercom Server. When the primary master Intercom Server
fails, all incoming calls of the secondary Intercom Servers are displayed at the control desk of the
secondary master Intercom Server.
synchronous link (HDSL, E1)
CNET-E1/
CNET-E1/
CNET-W
CNET-W
GE 800 GE 800
LAN
LAN
Ethernet
Ethernet
standard fallback
network network
control desk
contr control desk
Router Router
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
GE 800 GE 800
Example: two redundant master Intercom Servers rings
1.5/0619 393
 Configuration: Fallback connection

To enable the fallback function for network connections, follow the instructions below:
Configuration CCT 800 (not for S0 connections)

1. Go to:
 For LAN connection: Network > IP-Connections > desired Intercom Server > tab LAN-connec-
tions
 For CNET connection: Network > CNET-W or Network > CNET-E1
2. Activate the checkbox Fallback mode.
Configuration CCT 800 (only S0 connections)

1. Go to: Interfaces > S0 > tab Telephone-Features
2. Own Tel-No.: In this field, enter the telephone number of the own ISDN connection (max. 24 digits).
The functions at Network > S0-Connections are enabled.
3. Go to: Network > S0 - Connections > desired Intercom Server
4. Right-click and select “Add new entry”.
5. Status check time: In this drop-down list, the time for connection monitoring can be selected.
ATTENTION: Consider dependencies

The function “status check time” also depends on the function “dialling-repetitions”!
6. Go to: Network > S0 - Connections > desired Intercom Server

7. Activate the checkbox Fallback mode.
394 1.5/0619
 Line monitoring of the network connection

NOTE: Requirements
For the following function, at least one control desk must be available in the Intercom system (see
page 294).
A faulty network connection can be indicated by a simulated input level via an input message at a
control desk. One input is sufficient to monitor the standard and the fallback connection. In case of a
network connection fault, the following input level can be simulated:
Network connection status Simulated input level
Standard connection OK, fallback connection OK Open
Standard connection NOT OK, fallback connection OK 15k
Standard connection OK, fallback connection NOT OK 5k6
Standard connection NOT OK, fallback connection NOT OK 1k5
To enable line monitoring for a fallback connection, Follow the instructions below:

1. Go to:
 For LAN connection: Network > IP-Connections > desired Intercom Server > tab LAN-connec-
tions
 For S0 connection: Network > S0-Connections > desired Intercom Server
 For CNET connection: Network > CNET-W or Network > CNET-E1
2. Input for status-indication: In this field, enter the call number of the respective input for network
monitoring.
3. Go to: Inputs > Input message
4. Right-click on the desired input and select “Add input message”.
5. Go to: Inputs > Input message > desired input > tab Control Desks
6. Right-click and select the desired configured control desk via “Add Control Desk”.
7. Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Triggering
8. In the drop-down lists Break, 15k, 5k6, 1k5 and Short, the desired switch steps can be selected
for the respective input level.
9. Go to: Inputs > Input message > tab Call types
10.Active 1: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. To enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Active 1” has to be selected for at least one
11.Active 2: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective
input. To enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Active 2” has to be selected for at least one
12.Error: In this drop-down list, the call type of this switch step can be selected for the respective input.
To enable this drop-down list, the switch step “Error” has to be selected for at least one input level
of the respective input.
1.5/0619 395
Routing compatibility
In the following table, the possible combinations to route a logical connection between Intercom
Servers with different network connections are listed:
NET/CNET LAN S0 WAN
NET/CNET    
LAN    
S0    
WAN    
Example: logical connection of Intercom Servers with different connections

In this example, a logical connection can be routed between the Intercom Servers with the server ID
“02” and “03”, since both Intercom Servers are connected with the Intercom Server with the server ID
“01” via different network connections (see table above).
GE 800
server ID “01”
CNET-W
LAN
CNET-W
LAN
logical connection
GE 800 GE 800
Example: logical connection with a NET and LAN connection
Example: logical connection of Intercom Servers with LAN connections

In this example, a logical connection cannot be routed between the Intercom Servers with the server
ID “02” and “03”, since both Intercom Servers are exclusively connected with the Intercom Server with
the server ID “01” via LAN network connections (see table above).
GE 800
server ID “01”
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
no logical connection
GE 800 GE 800
Example: no logical connection between with two LAN connection
396 1.5/0619
 Address Conflict Detection according to RFC 5227

Feature PRO 800 6.0 – Address Conflict Detection according to RFC 5227
VirtuoSIS
In the case of an IP address conflict, the respective card or IP station will stop its communication
LICENCE PRO6U according to RFC 5227.
Using a dynamic IP address, the respective IP station receives a new IP address from a DHCP
server.
Using a static IP address, the IP address remains unchanged. As long as the IP address conflict
exists, the respective station is not shown in IPStationConfig. To fix the conflict, the IP address
of the station has to be changed manually in another network with no IP address conflict. The
IP address of the card has to be changed manually in CCT 800.
Address Conflict Detection is supported for the following cards:
 G8/G3/SIS/IS-GEP
 G8/G3/SIS/IS-IP-8
 G8/G3/IP-4
 G8/G3/SIS-IF
 G8/G3/SIS-LAN/WAN
 G8/SIS-NET
Address Conflict Detection is supported for IP stations with the following firmware:
 DSP 900A
 DSP 900B
 WS-TM
 WS-CM
 ET 901
 IoIP-Device
The function “Address Conflict Detection” will be activated for the desired card in CCT 800. If this func-
tion shall be used for an IP station, this function must additionally be activated for the desired subscrib-
er in IPStationConfig.

 Go to: IP-Settings > tab Common
 Activate the checkbox Address Conflict Detection for the respective card.
Configuration IPStationConfig (only for IP stations)

 Open IPStationConfig.
 Activate the checkbox ACD for the respective IP station.
NOTE:
For further information on IPStationConfig see page 105.
1.5/0619 397
 SNMP

Feature PRO 800 3.x – SNMP
PRO 800
This feature allows you to use SNMP for the Intercom Server and Intercom IP terminals. Each
LICENCE PRO3U Intercom Server and Intercom subscriber operates as an own “Agent”, this allows you to use
SNMP for the desired “Agents”.
General Definition
The “Simple Network Management Protocol” (SNMP) is a network protocol for controlling and
monitoring network elements (e.g. router, server, switches, IP stations or Intercom Server) via one cen-
tral management station/PC. In this process the protocol is controlling the communication between the
monitored device and the monitoring station. SNMP describes the structure of the data packets as well
as the communication process.
The state of the respective device is detected by programs (so called “agents”) which are running
directly on the monitored device. By means of the SNMP, the “management station” is able to
communicate with this “agent” via the IP network.
SNMP is available for following Commend devices:

 Intercom Server
 Intercom Server cards
 Intercom terminals
 Conductor
 All devices with DSP 900A firmware
 WS IP
 WS IP CM
 IoIP-Device
Management Information Base (MIB)

The respective values (of an “Agent”) read out by the management station, are described in a
“Management Information Base” (MIB). MIB‘s are description files, in which the single values are listed
in table form.
398 1.5/0619
Using SNMP function

When using the monitoring function via SNMP, the following requirements have to be considered:
 SNMPv2c
 MIB according “RFC 1213”
 Support for “IP-MIB” and “IF-MIB”
 Commend-IOIP-MIB
 Private Enterprise Number (PEN): 37568
 Configuration
 The MIB Browser needs a pre-configuration to read out the values (see below).
 In order to use the Commend Intercom devices for SNMP, the terminals need a pre-configuration
via the program IPStationConfig (see page 403).
 In order to use SNMP for a Commend Intercom Server, the Intercom Server needs a pre-
configuration via the program CCT 800 (see page 403).
MIB browser
There are different providers for this type of browser; some MIB browsers can be downloaded from the
Internet as freeware.
Configuration MIB browser

In order to read out the values of the IP terminals, following pre-configuration has to be carried out:
 Port: The port number has to be 161.
 Read Community: The password “public” has to be set.
 SNMP Version: The SNMP version “Version 2” has to be selected.
Read out the MIB values

Different methods can be used to read out the MIB values:
 GET: The value for the desired OID number is read out.
 WALK: All values of the “agent” are read out.
 GETBULK: All values of the currently used MIB are read out.
 GETNEXT: Read out the next value.
Standard MIB
In the following table, the values are listed that can read out with the standard MIB:
System data Name OID Parameter (“value”)
Name or used firmware sysDesr .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 <Name> or <firmware version>
Object description sysObjectID .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2.0 <object description>
Operation time sysUPTime .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 <operation time>
Contact address sysContact .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0 <company mail address>
Display text of the IP subscriber sysname .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0 <display text>
Description of the IP subscriber sysLocation .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0 <station description>
Number of interfaces ifNumber .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0 <number of interfaces>
Number of received bytes ifINOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10 <number of received bytes>
Number of received packages ifInUncastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11 <number of received packages>
Number of sent bytes IfOutOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16 <number of sent bytes>
Number of sent packages IfOutOctetsPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17 <number of sent packages>
1.5/0619 399
Commend MIB
In the following tables the values, which can be read out with the Commend-IoIP MIB are listed:
NOTE:
In order that the values can be read, the file “Commend-IOIP-MIB.txt” (Commend-MIB) has to be
loaded via the MIB browser. The Commend-MIB can be downloaded at software-manuals.com.
Object Name OID Parameter (“value”)

commendStationCommonSta-
Station series .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.1 <station series>
tionType
Station type .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.2 <station type>
tionSubType
Firmware version .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.3 <firmware version>
tionSoftwareVersion
Hardware version .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.4.0 <hardware version>
tionHardwareVersion
Reason for last commendStationCommonSta-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.8.0 <warmstart cause>
warmstart tionLastWarmStartCause
Call number .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.10 <call number>
tionCallNumber
Display text of the commendStationCommonSta-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.11 <display text>
station tionStationName
Station description .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.12 <station description>
tionLocation
Operatin time .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.1.21 <operation time>
tionStartTime
Connection Name OID Parameter (“value”)
commendStationConnectivityIP-
Redundancy mode
Mode
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.6 <redundancy mode> 1)
State primary commendStationConnectivityIP-

connection PrimaryState
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.7 <state connection> 2)
Connection state fall- commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback

.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.8
back connection 1 IPSecondaryState connection 1> 2)
Connection state fall- commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.9
back connection 2 IPTertiaryState connection 2> 2)
1) 0 = Automatically, 1 = Standard, 2 = Fallback
2)
0 = No IP address, 1= Not connected, 2 = Connected
GEP Name OID Parameter (“value”)
GEP card type commendServerGEPType .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.1.1.0 <GEP type>
Used firmware
commendServerGEPSWVersion .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.1.2.0 <firmware version>
version
Reason for last commendServerGEPLastStart-
server restart Cause
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.1.10.0 <reason last restart> 1)
1)
05 = Initialized, 06= CCT 800 warmstart, 248 = Licence timeout, 249 = Download server firmware, 252 = Cold
start, 16 – 25 = Out of memory, 48 – 57 = Internal errors, 254 = Exception, 255 = Watchdog
400 1.5/0619
Server objects Name OID Parameter (“value”)

Used cards and CommendServerCardSlotX-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.1.0 <card>
licences WorkingType
Indication which card CommendServerCardSlotX-
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.2.0 <insetred card>
is inserted InsertedType 2)
Indication which card CommendServerCardSlotX-
is configured with .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.3.0 <installed card>
CCT 800 InstalledType 2)
Firmware version of CommendServerCardSlotX-

.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.4.0 <firmware version>
the card VersionType 2)
CommendServerCardSlotX-
Card state .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.2.X.5.0 <state> 1)
State 2)
X = Slot number
1)
working = Card is working, faulty = Card is not working, not initialized = No configuration on card
2) An overview of the available connections and connection numbers can be found on page 402.
Subscriber Name OID Parameter (“value”)

commendServerSub-
State of the subscriber
scriberXState
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.3.X.1 <State> 1)
X = Slot number
1) online = Subscriber connected to the Intercom Server, offline = Subscriber not connected to the Intercom
Server
 SNMP monitoring and traps for LAN and WAN network connections
Feature PRO 800 3.x – connection SNMP

PRO 800 With the licence it is possible to monitor LAN and WAN connections use via “SNMP v2”
LICENCE PRO3U protocol.
Every configured LAN or WAN connection can be monitored (GET requests) via SNMP. In addition
traps can be configured to be sent to a monitoring station in case of a link state change. Every moni-
tored link follows a static addressing scheme based on slot and connection number of the LAN/WAN
card in a certain Intercom Server housing. See the corresponding OIDs in the following table:
Server network Name OID Parameter (“value”)
commendServerNetworkSlotXX/
Connection state
YY_State
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.1.0 <redundancy mode> 1)
commendServerNetworkXX/YY_-
Connection type
Type
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.2.0 <connection type> 2)
Connection mode
YY_Fallbackmode
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.3.0 <connection mode> 3)
Target IP address .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.4.0 <target IP address>
YY_TargetAddress
Network parameter .1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.ZZ.5.0 <not available>
YY_NetworkParameter
XX Slot number,
YY Connection number
ZZ Consecutive connection numbers. An overview of the available connections and connection numbers can
be found below.
1) 0 = Not configured, 1 = Connection disconnected, 2= Connected, 3 = Fallback connected
2) 0 = No Connection, 1 = LAN, 2 = WAN, 3 = CNET-E1, 4 = CNET-W, 5 = S0
3) 0 = Standard, 1 = Fallback
1.5/0619 401
Available connections and connection numbers

Connection Connection number Connection Connection number
GEP 0/01 – 0/04 12 – 15 Slot 8/01 – 8/16 128 – 143
Slot 1/01 – 1/16 16 – 31 Slot 9/01 – 9/16 144 – 159
Slot 2/01 – 2/16 32 – 47 Slot 10/01 – 10/16 160 – 175
Slot 3/01 – 3/16 48 – 63 Slot 11/01 – 11/16 176 – 191
Slot 4/01 – 4/16 64 – 79 Slot 12/01 – 12/16 192 – 207
Slot 5/01 – 5/16 80 – 95 Slot 13/01 – 13/16 208 – 223
Slot 6/01 – 6/16 96 – 111 Slot 14/01 – 14/16 224 – 239
Slot 7/01 – 7/16 112 – 127 Slot 15/01 – 15/8 240 – 247
Example
If you need the connection state of “Slot 8 connection 8”, the following steps have to be carried out:
 Get the correct connection number from the table:
Available connection Connection number
Slot 8/01 – 8/16 128 – 143  135
 Insert the connection number into the OID:

Connection state:.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.1.4.135.1.0
Configuration
In order to enable SNMP monitoring for LAN/WAN connections within an Intercom Server, the trusted
host IP address and subnet mask (IP or network address plus netmask) has to be configured via CCT
800. In order to enable traps as well, up to two trap destinations can be configured (see page 403).
Traps
Independently from the values of the MIB, so called “traps” are sent. A “trap” is an unrequested
message of an agent to the management station, reporting that an event has occurred, e.g. reboot of
the IP subscriber. For the following events, traps are sent from the agent to the management station:
 Reboot
For each reboot of the agent a trap to the management station is sent. Warm- and cold start sends
different traps.
OID
warmstart .1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2
Cold start .1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1
 Connection state
In case a redundancy mode changes the state, a trap is sent to the management station.
Connection state Name OID Parameter (“value”)
commendStationConnectivityIP-
Redundancy mode
Mode
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.6 <redundancy mode> 1)
State primary commendStationConnectivityIP-

connection PrimaryState
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.7 <state connection> 2)
Connection state fallback commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback

.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.8
connection 1 IPSecondaryState connection 1> 2)
Connection state fallback commendStationConnectivity- <state fallback
.1.3.6.1.4.1.37568.2.2.9
connection 2 IPTertiaryState connection 2> 2)
1) 0 = Automatically, 1 = Standard, 2 = Fallback, 16 = Automatic redundancy mode, 17 = Switch manually to
Intercom Server1, 18 = Switch manually to Intercom Server 2, 19 = Switch manually to Intercom Server 3,
33 = Always switch manually to Intercom Server 1, 34 = Always switch manually to Intercom Server 2,
35 = Always switch manually to Intercom Server 3
2) 0 = No IP address, 1= Not connected, 2 = Connected
402 1.5/0619
SNMP for the Intercom Server

SNMP for the Intercom Server has to be configured via CCT 800.
NOTE
 If the trusted host is in a different IP network than the respective Intercom Server, a gateway has to
be configured for the GEP card (at IP-Settings > tab Common > field Router IP Address).
 It is recommend to do not change the default trap port “162” in the field Trap IP1 and Trap IP2.
 Go to: Intercom Server > SNMP

 Right-click on the desired Intercom Server and select “Add SNMP”.
 Trusted Host: In this field, enter the IP address of the management station.
 Subnet mask: In this field, enter the subnet mask of the management station.
 Trap IP1: In this field, the IP address of the trap receiver can be entered.
 Port1: In this field, the port of the trap receiver can be changed (by default 162).
SNMP for the Intercom terminal

SNMP for Intercom terminals will be configured via the program “IPStationConfig”.
NOTE:
For further information to the program IPStationConfig see page 105.
 Open the program IPStationConfig.
 Click on the button SNMP in the menu bar to enable the extended settings dialogue “SNMP”:
 Trusted Host: In this field, the IP address of the MIB browser can be entered (“management
station”).
 Subnet mask: In this field, the subnet mask of the MIB browser can be entered (“management
station”).
NOTE:
It is recommend to do not change the default trap port “162” in the fields Trap IP1 and Trap IP2.
1.5/0619 403
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) Intercom Server Configuration
 Peer-to-peer audio (P2P)


Peer-to-peer audio is an “Auto Discovery protocol” that means that for P2P audio no configuration is
necessary. Peer-to-peer audio is only possible within a network or between individual IP network
nodes. If all „Network requirements” are fulfilled, P2P audio is carried out in the network.
ATTENTION:
If voice recording for an Intercom subscriber is activated, P2P audio is not possible for these termi-
nals! For voice recording the audio data has to be sent over the Intercom Server! That means, voice
recording always needs one fully-fledged conversation channel!
Functionality P2P audio

Each Intercom conversation is established over the Intercom Servers. In case P2P audio is possible and
the conversation is established, the audio data tries to find the shortest path between the devices
(Intercom stations, Intercom modules or Intercom Client). With P2P audio, the devices try to send the
audio data directly between the IP network nodes whereas the conversation information is sent over
the Intercom Server.
P2P audio in a network
(10.10.2.241)
(10.10.1.241)
(10.10.2.1)
(10.10.2.7)
(10.10.1.1)
(10.10.1.7)
G8-GEP
G8-GEP
G8-NET
G8-NET
G8-IP-8
G8-IP-8
(10.10.1.7) (10.10.1.241) 3 (10.10.2.7) (10.10.2.241)

1 2
Audio
(10.10.1.71) (10.10.2.71)
EE 900A EE 900A
(10.10.1.71) (10.10.2.71)
 The conversation is build-up like a non-P2P conversation:

Intercom Server 1 Intercom Server 2
EE 900A  G8-IP-8  G8-NET  G8-NET  G8-IP-8  EE 900A
 Step-by-step the system tries to send the audio data via the shortest way between the Intercom
terminals. The steps 1 to 4 are carried out in the first 500 ms after the conversation is established.
 Establishment of the audio connection over the shortest channel in the network.
404 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Peer-to-peer audio (P2P)
Benefits P2P audio

 Increases the number of speech channels for conversations over IP (see page 406).
 Each not used IP network node saves one jitter buffer (jitter buffer results at the data input in an IP
device)  this leads to lower network delay.
 P2P audio tries to use shortcuts in the Network. Because the audio data tries to use the shortcuts,
less bandwidth on the network is required.
Network requirements
Software
 Network card software min. 5.5.
 IP subscriber card software min. 5.0.
 Station software min. 5.0.
Intercom Server software

 PRO 800 1.3.
General requirements
 A gateway for all IP cards and IP devices should be configured that P2P audio can establish a
connection directly to routers.
 All IP cards, network cards and IP devices should be in the same subnet. In case the devices are not
in the same subnet, P2P audio is only possible within the respective subnet.

 Ringtone before red lamp [s]: In this field, the length of the ring tone to indicate a call can be
changed. It is recommend to enter a value, which is not lower than 0.5 seconds (by default 0.5 sec-
onds).
 In the row “Intercom Server - Block XX.”, this setting can be changed for the entire Intercom Serv-
er block.
1.5/0619 405
Peer-to-peer audio (P2P) Intercom Server Configuration
Number of maximum conversations

Because of the conversation channels, the conversations between the Intercom Server are limited.
Using “uncompressed” conversations, the number of conversation channels for the Intercom Server
GE 800 can be increased.
NOTE:
For further information, see the manual “G8-LAN”.
With P2P audio, the number of conversation channels in a network for the other Intercom Servers is
also increased.
Overview of number of maximum conversations

GE 300 LAN (onboard) to G8-IP-32 to the Intercom
G3-LAN to the network IS 300 to the network
the network Server
4 conversations or up to 8 8 conversations or up to 4 conversations or up to 8 4 conversations or up to 8
P2P conversations 16 P2P conversations P2P conversations P2P conversations
Consumption of conversation channels

The following example shows how the different conversations occupy the conversation channels:
Example: GE300 with onboard LAN connection (4 conversation channels or up to 8 P2P conversations).
Channel Case 1 Case 2 Case 3
1 P2P non-P2P non-P2P
Fully-fledged
P2P conversation channels
channel

4 P2P non-P2P P2P
5 P2P Busy P2P
6 P2P Busy P2P
7 P2P Busy P2P
8 P2P Busy P2P
 Case 1: In this case all conversations can be established via P2P audio. It is possible to use the whole
functionality of 8 conversation channels.
 Case 2: In this case 4 non-P2P audio conversations are established. No further conversation can be
established (the other P2P channels are busy).
 Case 3: As long as at least one “fully-fledged” conversation channel is available, further
conversations can be established. In this case, a maximum of 3 non-P2P conversations are possible,
in order to establish one non-P2P conversation or up to 5 P2P conversations.
406 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration P2MP
 P2MP
What is P2MP?
P2MP (“point-to-multipoint”) is an auto-discovery protocol, which helps to reduce the bandwidth for
group calls, All Calls, music and radio conferences in an IP Intercom System. Instead of an unicast
system, where each subscriber gets an own IP stream, P2MP needs only one stream which is spread
to all IP devices. In case it is not possible for an IP subscriber to use P2MP audio, an unicast connection
will be established instead. P2MP works within the Intercom Server GE800 or VirtuoSIS or over a
“NET”,“LAN”, “WAN” connection between these Intercom Servers.
Examples
Unicast
With PRO 800 2.1 and lower, the whole Commend IP Intercom 5 x 146 kBps
System works as an unicast system, this means that each
subscriber gets an own IP stream from the Intercom Servers. SWITCH
For an All Call to 4 subscribers, 5 IP streams with 146 kbps are

required. This results in a bandwidth of 760 kbps for this All
Call.
P2MP within an IP system

As of PRO800 3.1, the Intercom Servers GE800 and VirtuoSIS try
to use P2MP for each IP terminal. This means that all the
receiving Intercom terminals will only need one IP stream 2 x 146 kBps
altogether.
SWITCH
For an All Call to 4 subscribers with P2MP, only 2 IP streams

with 146 kbs are used. This results in a bandwidth reduction of
468 kbps in an Intercom system with only 5 terminals; this
means 62% less traffic!
Abstract
 P2MP is supported for the Intercom Servers GE800 and VirtuoSIS.
 P2MP works independent from the network between the Intercom Servers.
 P2MP is an auto-discovery protocol.
 P2MP domains can be configured for separate networks.
 P2MP reduces the bandwidth for group calls, All Calls, music, conferences and alarms.
 P2MP is automatically switched back to unicast if P2MP isn‘t supported by an Intercom subscriber.
 P2MP works over “NET”,“LAN”, “WAN” connections.

 Go to: Intercom Server > General Settings > tab Extended Settings
 Point-to-Multipoint IP Address: In this field, the IP address can be entered for P2MP.
NOTES:
 The IP address “224.0.0.1” is a standard multicast IP, which will be provided by the “IANA” for “all
systems on this network”. This means, this IP address will always be forwarded to all ports.
 IP addresses between “224.0.0.0” and “239.255.255.255” can be used.
 Point-to-Multipoint Port: In this field, the port can be entered for P2MP (e.g. “16400”).
1.5/0619 407
Logic module Intercom Server Configuration
 Logic module
Requirements
 Upgrade licence “Lx-PRO4U”
 Intercom Server GE 300/GE 800/IS 300/G8-IP-32/VirtuoSIS
 One licence “L-LOGIC-8” per Intercom Server
 CCT 800 min. 4.1
Feature PRO 800 4.1 – logic module
The logic module compares incoming ICX messages and states of objects (e.g. subscriber,
output) and will be triggered by a changing truth of the condition. The triggered logic module
executes different actions (send an ICX message, change internal variables) according to the
truth of the condition.
The logic module is based on Boolean law, which represents the truth value of logic. A truth value can
assume the state "true" or "false". The default state of a truth value is "false". Depending on the truth
value, the logic module executes defined actions. The logic module is subdivided into an element dia-
log with up to eight elements which are executed sequentially and an object initialization dialog. Each
element consists of a condition dialog and action dialog.
See the following illustration:
The logic module is triggered by an element. By comparing an incoming ICX message or an object val-
ue with a defined object, the operator determines the truth value of the condition and thus also the trig-
gering action of the logic module. Depending on the changed truth value of the condition, the action
executes separate actions (send ICX message and change internal object values). The logic module is
triggered only once for the same truth value and incoming ICX message. The object initialization de-
fines the objects and data types used by the elements.
A simplified representation of the functionality of the logic module for the configuration is shown
below:
408 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Logic module
NOTE:
When the used CCT 800 version of the existing configuration data, the upgrade licence or L-LOGIC-
8 licence is invalid or missing, a hint will appear during the configuration. Nevertheless, the
configuration is still possible, provided at least CCT 800 4.1 is used. In order to deactivate this
dialogue, go to Options > Settings > tab General and deactivate the checkbox Show hint dia-
log if no license is available.
Compatible object comparisons

Operand 1 and operand 2 can be compared using the following matrix:
Compatible object comparisons
Data type
The data type determines the possible values, operations and meaning of an object. The data types are
defined the following way:
Data type Description
The 8-digit number value consists of numbers (0–9). The number value will be filled with lead-
Integer ing “0“-digits if necessary (e.g. number value 47 will be sent as 00000047; leading “0“-digits
will be removed at the input).
The 8-digit time value consists of numbers (0–9) and will be set in tenths of a second (min. 0.0
Timer sec. - max. 999999.9 sec). The time value will be filled with leading “0“-digits if necessary (e.g.
timer value 999.9 will be sent as 000999.9; leading “0“-digits will be removed at the input).
The 8-digit “Nibble Coded Hex (NCH)” value consists of numbers (0–9) and letters (A–F; Hex).
NCH Wert The NCH value will be filled with leading “0“-digits if necessary (e.g. NCH value 8080 will be
sent as 00008080; leading “0“-digits will be removed at the input).
The 8-digit call number consists of numbers (0–9) and letters (A–F; Hex). The call number will
Call number be filled with leading “F”-digits if necessary (e.g. call number 1506 will be sent as FFFF1506);
leading “F”-digits will be removed at the input).
NOTE:
If the data type NCH value or call number are changed to integer or timer, all values from A–F will be
replaced by “0”.
1.5/0619 409
Object
The object is defined by a data type, object name and object value. The object names are defined
in the following way::
Object type Description
The object value corresponds to the current call type of the subscriber (1-digit), but not the call
SUB
number. The data type of this object is NCH value.
The object value corresponds to the current call type of the input (1-digit). The data type of this
INP
object is NCH value.
The object value corresponds to the current state of the output (1-digit). The object value
OUT changes whenever the state of the selected output changes. The data type of this object is NCH
value.
The object continuously counts from its configured value to 0.0 seconds (changes also its state
when the timer does not run). The timer runs automatically as soon as the object value is une-
TMR
qual to 0.0. The object value can only be defined and changed by commands of the logic mod-
ule. The data type of this object is timer.
The object value is a selectable variable with a selectable data type (1-digit). The object value
VAR
can be changed by commands of the logic module.
The object value is a selectable constant with a selectable data type (1-digit). The object value
CON
cannot be changed by commands of the logic module.
ATTENTION:
Each configured input and output must have a dialable call number!
Object name
The object name is used for identification. An object name always consists of the 3-digit object type
(e.g. SUB or INP) followed by the 2-digit index number (01–16 for SUB, INP, OUT, CON, TMR and 40 –
4F for VAR).
Object value
The object value describes the current call type, state or user defined value of an object. The following
object values are available
Object SUB:
Object values subscriber 1) Description
(call type of call request)
0 No call request
1 Normal call
2 Emergency call
3 Parking
8 Line fault
1)
The object value will be changed, as soon as the call type of the object changes.
Object INP
Object values Input 2) Description
(call type of input message)
0X Not acknowledged input message
1X Acknowledged input message
410 1.5/0619
X = Call type:
0: Not active input messages
4, 5, A, C, D: Active 1
6, 7, B, E, F: Active 2
8, 9: Line fault
2) The object value will be changed, as soon as the call type of the object changes.
Object OUT
Object values Output (state) 3) Description
0 Off
1 On
3 Toggle
3) The object value will be changed, as soon as the state of the object changes.
Object TMR
Object values Timer (state) 4) Description
0 Timer does not run
>0 Timer runs
4)
The object value will be changed, as soon as the state of the object changes.
Object VAR
Object values Variable Description
User-defined value -
Object CON
Object values Constant Description
User-defined value -
Object CAL
 Object values Call state Description
0 No call
0xA1 Call “parked” as caller
0xB1 Call “parked” as called
0xA2 Call “loud” as caller
0xB2 Call “loud” as called
0xA3 Call “private” as caller
0xB3 Call “private” as called
0xA4 Call “busy” as caller
0xB4 Call “busy” as called
1.5/0619 411
ICX messages
Construction of an ICX message
 The ICX string consists of numbers (0–9) and letters (A–F; Hex).
 The logic module always uses ICX messages with long format.
 The minimum length of an ICX string are 8 characters; the maximum length are 250 characters.
 The logic module does not control the validity of the ICX string, but the length of the ICX string has
to be even (otherwise an alert appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid value).
NOTE:
Free variable parameters within an ICX string

For an incoming ICX string, which has to trigger the logic module, it is not necessary to match with the
entire reference ICX string. Parts of the reference ICX string can be replaced by question marks “?” as
wildcard. The logic module compares the incoming ICX message only with the part of the reference
ICX string, which are not replaced by a question mark (see illustration below). This way only a certain
part of an incoming ICX string is required to trigger the logic module.
wildcard characters
(not used for triggering
the logic module)
00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 ????????

FFFF 5678
all valid signs
necessary part of the ICX string 1234 5678 are possible
which triggers the logic module
FFFF D104
Example:
The logic module will be triggered by the ICX message “00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321” (call
indication from subscriber with the call number “1234” to subscriber “4321“). The comparison of “IF
ICX == 00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 ????????” is valid, because the question marks can be any valid
character.
Referencing an object
An ICX string can contain the reference of a single or several configured objects (subscriber, input,
output, constant, variable and timer) as part of the parameter. The ICX string always uses the current
value of the referenced object. Depending on the configuration, the ICX string uses only a certain part
of the value or if the desired number exceeds the digits, the entire value will be used and the remaining
unused digits will be filled with leading characters, which are determined by the data type.
NOTE:
Syntax
The referenced object is made up of the object, the length specification (separated by a colon) and
is put into square brackets:
NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP USWCTG
DTCEMGV
[CON01:8] [VAR08:4]
QDLGEV EQNQP
412 1.5/0619
Length specification
The length specification indicates the number of evaluated digits of the referenced object, which will
be used for the ICX string. The digits of the referenced object are evaluated from right to left. The
minimum value of the length specification is 1; the maximum value is 8.
 When the length specification is longer than the number of digits of the referenced object, the
remaining digits will be filled with leading characters (depending on the data type, see page 409).
 When the length specification is shorter than the number of digits of the referenced object, the
defined amount of digits will be taken, starting from the right.
 When the length specification is equal to the number of digits of the referenced object, all digits
will be taken over.
NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP
8-digits [CON01:8] = FFFF1234

3-digits [CON01:3] = 234
[CON01:2] = 34
[CON01:1] = 4
CON01 = 1234
ECNNPWODGT UVCTVUYKVJVJGFKIKV
QPVJGTKIJVUKFG
TGOCKPKPIFKIKVU
object NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP YKNNDGƂNNGFWR
CON01 = 1234 [CON01:8] FFFF1234

ECNNPWODGT
QDLGEVXCNWG FKIKVU
object NGPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP
CON01 = 1234 [CON01:2] 34

ECNNPWODGT
QDLGEVXCNWG FKIKVU
Example:
Call number: CON01 = 1234 [CON01:8] = FFFF1234 Will be filled with leading “F”-digits
CON01 = 1234 [CON01:2] = 34 Defined part will be used
CON01 = 1234 [CON01:4] = 1234 Length specification is equal to the
object value
Integer: VAR01 = 789 [VAR01:6] = 000789 Will be filled with leading “0“-digits
1.5/0619 413
Referencing an ICX message

An outgoing ICX string and the action “set” can contain a single or several references of the incoming
ICX string, which triggers the logic module as part of its own parameter.
Syntax
The referenced ICX message is made up of the fixed code, the offset, the length specification,
(separated by a colon) and is put into square brackets:
QHHUGV USWCTG
DTCEMGV
[ICX17:8] [ICX25:8]
EQFG length EQNQP

URGEKƂECVKQP
Offset
The offset defines the subsequent digits from where the following digits will be taken. The offset
consists of numbers (1–9) with a minimum value of “1“; the maximum value is “63“.
Length specification
The length specification indicates the number of digits, which will be taken from the incoming ICX
string. The digits of the ICX string will be taken from left to right side (see illustration below). The
length specification consists of numbers (1–8) with a minimum value of “1“; the maximum value is
“8“.
Offset = 17 16 digits
Offset = 13 12 digits
[ICX17:8] Offset = 9 8 digits
00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321 [ICX17:8] = FFFF 4321

.GPIVJURGEKƂECVKQP 8 digits
Starts with the digit

that corresponds
to the offset value
ICX string which triggers

the logic module ICX string to construct resulting outgoing ICX string
00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321 00 80 00 80 [ICX17:8] 1234 5678 00 80 00 80 FFFF 4321 1234 5678
Offset = 16 digits
.GPIVJURGEKƂECVKQPFKIKVU
[ICX17:8] = FFFF 4321 resulting value
414 1.5/0619
Position of the reference within the ICX string

Each reference can replace the parameter of an ICX string, but not the task or type. It does not matter
how many object references are used within an ICX string, as long as the maximum number of valid
digits of the ICX string will not be exceeded and the entire number of digits is even. A single or
several reference can replace the entire or only a part of the parameter. See the following
illustrations:
task type parameter(s)
CON01 = 1234 (call number)
VAR01 = 789 (integer)
00 60 00 81 XXXX XXXX resulting outgoing ICX string
[CON01:8] [VAR01:4]
each valid variation
FFFF [CON01:4] [VAR01:4] is possible 00 60 00 81 FFFF 1234 0789
[CON01:8] 0789
task type parameter(s) the logic module will be triggered by the following ICX message:
00 62 00 12 FFFF1234 FFFF 4321
00 80 00 80 XXXX XXXX resulting outgoing ICX string
[ICX9:8] [ICX17:8]
each valid variation
FFFF [ICX13:4] [ICX17:8] is possible 00 80 00 80 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321
FFFF 1234 [ICX:17:8]
ATTENTION:
The number of all digits of the entire ICX string has to be even (also including references; e.g. with
the object reference [CON01:3] the remaining ICX string has to be uneven), otherwise an alert
appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid value!
Example (object reference):

The outgoing ICX string:
Variable 1 as integer: VAR01 = 789
[VAR01:4] = 0789
Constant 1 as call number: CON01 = 1234
[CON01:8] = FFFF1234
00 60 00 81 [CON01:8] [VAR01:4]
The resulting ICX string is “00 60 00 81 FFFF 1234 0789”
Example (ICX reference):
The logic module will be triggered by the ICX message “00 62 00 12 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321”.
The outgoing ICX string:
Offset = 13 Length specification = 4 [ICX13:4] = 1234
Offset = 17 Length specification = 8 [ICX17:8] = FFFF 4321
00 80 00 80 FFFF [ICX13:4] [ICX17:8]
The resulting ICX string is “00 80 00 80 FFFF 1234 FFFF 4321”
1.5/0619 415
Configuration via CCT 800

Object initialization dialogue
With the object initialization dialogue up to 16 objects of each type (e.g. subscriber or input) can be
configured. All trigger items and thus all conditions and actions can use the same objects. There is one
object initialization dialogue per logic module.
 Go to: Intercom Server > Logic Modules > sub-folder Intercom Server
 Code: Indication of the objects subscriber (SUB), input (INP), output (OUT), constant (CON), variable
(VAR) and timer (TMR). Further information about objects can be found on page 410.
 Subscribers: In this field, the call number of a subscriber can be entered.
 Inputs: In this field, the call number of an input can be entered.
 Outputs: In this field, the call number of an output can be entered.
ATTENTION:
The state of an output with a non-dialable call number will not be automatically updated!
 Data type (constant): In this drop-down list, the data type of the object constant can be selected. Fur-
ther information about data types can be found on page 409.
 Value (constant): In this field, the value of the constant can be entered.
 Optional: In the field Description Constant, a description of the constant can be entered.
 Data type (variable): In this drop-down list, the data type of the object variable can be selected. Fur-
ther information about data types can be found on page 409.
 Value (variable): In this field, the value of the variable can be entered.
 Optional: In the field Description Variable, a description of the variable can be entered.
NOTE:
When the data type call number is selected for the object constant or variable, an empty value field
of a configured variable or constant will be filled with “FFFF FFFF”.
 Description Timer: In this field, a description can be entered for the timer to enable the object timer
for use in the condition and action dialogue. The description will be displayed as name of the object
in the condition and action dialogue.
Trigger item dialogue

The trigger item dialogue has eight configurable trigger items, in which each of them defines its own
trigger conditions and executed actions of the logic module. A trigger item contain a condition and an
action. By triggering the logic module, the corresponding trigger item and up to seven others will be
executed. There is one trigger item dialogue per logic module.
416 1.5/0619
 Go to: Intercom Server > Logic Modules > sub-folder Intercom Server
 Item Name: In this field, the name of the trigger item can be entered. The item name will be
displayed at the sub-folder of the Intercom Server.
 Group ID: In this field, the group ID of the trigger item can be entered (01–99). All trigger items with
the same group ID will be executed together, as soon as the logic module gets triggered by a single
or several trigger items with the same ID. The trigger items will be executed from the first executed
trigger item to the last one (by default 01).
 Optional: In the field Description, a description of the trigger item can be entered.
 Activated: Activate this checkbox to enable the trigger item with its conditions and actions. As long
as the field is deactivated, the trigger item will not trigger the logic module (by default, activated).
Condition dialogue
The operator compares two different operands to determine the truth of the condition. The logic
module will be triggered as soon as the truth value of the sum of all eight conditions has changed.
 Go to: Intercom Server > Logic Modules > sub-folder Intercom Server > desired trigger item
 Control field: The control field in the first column shows the current state of the opposite
configuration. If the configuration is complete, the field turns green, otherwise it turns red. If no con-
figuration is available the field is grey. The control field does not show whether the configuration is
valid but only if it is complete or not.
 Condition: In this drop-down list, the condition to trigger the logic module can be selected. The
following conditions are available:
 IF: The IF condition is true if the result of the operation is true, otherwise it is false.
 IF NOT: The IF NOT condition is true if the result of the operation is false, otherwise it is false.
 AND: The AND condition is true if the result of the operation and all previous operations are true,
otherwise it is false.
 AND NOT: The AND NOT condition is true if at least the result of the operation or any other pre-
vious operation is false, otherwise it is false.
 OR: The OR condition is true if the result of the operation or any other previous operation is true,
otherwise it is false.
 OR NOT: The OR NOT condition is true if the result of the operation and all previous operations
are false, otherwise it is false.
 Operand 1: In this drop-down list, an object or ICX message can be selected, which will be
compared with the operand 2 (operand 1 and operand 2 must not be the same object references).
The following options are available:
 Object: Compare the object value with the operand 2.
1.5/0619 417
ATTENTION:
 If the object “timer” is selected, the field operand 2 will be disabled and the object will always
be compared with the value 0.0!
 The object “constant” is not available for operand 1!
 ICX: Compare an incoming ICX message with the operand 2.

 Operator: In this drop-down list, the operator for the comparison can be selected. The following
operators are available:
Operator Description
== Equal to: The operator determines whether equality exists between two operands.
!= Not equal to: The operator determines whether inequality exists between two operands.
Examples: VAR01 = 6
Equal to Not equal to
VAR01 == 6 true VAR01!= 4 true
VAR01 == 2 false VAR01!= 6 false
Greater than: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is greater than
>
operand 2.
Less than: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is less than oper-
<
and 2.
Greater than or equal to: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is
>=
greater than or equal as operand 2.
Less than or equal to: The operator compares two operands to determine if operand 1 is less
<=
than or equal as operand 2.
Examples: VAR01 = 6
Greater than Less than
VAR01 > 1 true VAR01 < 9 true
VAR01 > 12 false VAR01 < 5 false
Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to
VAR01 >= 6 true VAR01 <= 6 true
VAR01 >= 4 true VAR01 <= 7 true
VAR01 >= 10 false VAR01 <= 2 false
Change of object value: The operator compares the current state of an object of operand 1
with the state value of operand 2. The operation is only ever true for the moment when the
state of the selected object has changed and is equal to operand 2. Further information about
==> the state of objects can be found on page 410.
Recommendation:
 At a comparison of two objects (e.g. SUB01 ==> OUT03) the “OR” condition should be used.
 Positive conditions should be used (IF, AND, OR).
Examples: Change of object value
Situation 1: Subscriber
Incoming call request of an emergency call at SUB01. The state value of the subscriber
changes to 2.
Condition
SUB01 ==> 2 true SUB01 ==> 3 false
Situation 2: Timer
Timer TMR01 has expired. The state value of the timer changes to 0.
Condition
TMR01 ==> 0 true TMR01 ==> 0 false (when timer is running)
Restrictions
 For the object timer used as operand 1 only the operators equal to, not equal to and change of object
418 1.5/0619
value are available:

== 0.0: The timer is not running
!= 0.0: The timer is running
==> 0: The timer has expired
 For “ICX” used as operand 1 only the operators equal to and not equal to are available.
 Operand 2: In this drop-down list, either an object, a selectable value or an ICX message can be
entered. The operand 2 will be compared with the operand 1 (data type of operand 1 and operand 2
must not be the same). The operand 2 will be configured the following way:
 Object: Select an object, provided an object is also selected for operand 1.
NOTE:
It is not possible to select the same object for operand 1 and operand 2 within the same opera-
tion.
 ICX: Enter an ICX message, provided for operand 1 ICX is selected. The ICX message can consist
of a single or several referenced objects, referenced ICX messages or wildcards. Further informa-
tion about ICX strings in the logic module can be found on page 412.
NOTE:
The number of all digits of the entire ICX string has to be even (also including references; e.g.
with the object references [CON01:3] the remaining ICX string has to be uneven), otherwise an
alert appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid value.
 Value: Enter a selectable value, provided an object is selected for operand 1. The data type of the
value depends on the selected object of operand 1 (e.g. time value or integer).
 Optional: In the field Comment, enter a description for the operation.
Action dialogue
Single or several actions will be executed to change internal variables and send ICX messages. The
action will be triggered as soon as the truth of the condition is known.
 Control field: The control field in the first column shows the current state of the opposite configu-
ration. If the configuration is complete the field turns green, otherwise it turns red. If no configuration
is available the field is grey. The control field does not show whether the configuration is valid but
only if it is complete or not.
 Case: In this field, the cases true and false are indicated. The state of the cases refers to the truth of
the condition. The cases are used in the following way:
 True: If the condition is true, up to 4 configured actions of the cases true will be executed. Actions
of the case false will not be executed.
 False: If the condition is false, up to 2 configured actions of the cases false will be executed.
Actions of the case true will not be executed.
NOTE:
Under certain circumstances, the case “False” cannot be applied (e.g. for timers and ICX
messages) and is disabled.
 Action: In this drop-down list, the action can be selected, which will be carried out if the logic module
is triggered. The following actions are available:
 Set: An object value will be set to a certain value.
 Add: A value will be added to an object value.
1.5/0619 419
 Subtract: A value will be subtracted from an object value.

 Send ICX: An ICX message will be sent.
ATTENTION:
The maximum and minimum value of an object cannot be exceeded!
 Variable: In this drop-down list, a variable or timer can be selected for the computational opera-
tions.
NOTE:
The drop-down list variable is disabled if the option “send ICX” is selected in the drop-down list
action.
 Value:
 In this field, enter a selectable value, referenced ICX message or an object if the action “set”,
“add” or “subtract” is selected (the data type depends on the selected object).
 In this field, enter an ICX message if the action “send ICX” is selected. The ICX string can consist
of a single or several referenced objects, referenced ICX messages or wildcards. Further informa-
tion about ICX strings in the logic module can be found on page 412.
NOTE:
The number of all digits of the entire ICX string has to be even (also references; e.g. with the
object reference [CON01:3] the remaining ICX string has to be uneven), otherwise an alert
appears and the ICX string will be reset to the last valid one.
 Delay: In this field, an up to 6-digit value (consisting of numbers 0–9) to delay an outgoing ICX
message according to the configured time can be entered. The value has to be entered (max. 6553.5
seconds).
NOTE:
 Only the sending of the ICX string will be delayed, but not the parameter values of the objects it
contains. The parameter values are set at the time when the logic module entry is triggered (con-
figured condition is set to true or false).
 The delay function is only available if the entry “send ICX” is selected in the drop-down list action.
 Optional: In the field Comment, a description of the operation can be entered.
420 1.5/0619
Control the logic module via ICX messages

Besides the trigger item, the logic module can also be triggered via ICX messages.
NOTE:
Block settings for the logic module

It can be determined, whether outgoing ICX messages of the triggered logic module will be sent to all
Intercom Servers within the system or only to Intercom Servers with the same block number. The block
number refers to the Intercom Server with the triggered logic module.

 ICX Logic: In this drop-down list, the send option of outgoing ICX messages can be selected. The
following sending options are available:
 GEV / CNET: All Intercom Servers within the system.
 Active Block: All Intercom Servers with the same block number, as the Intercom Server with the
triggered logic module.
1.5/0619 421
EventLOG Intercom Server Configuration
EventLOG
 Save ICX messages in the Intercom Server

Feature PRO 800 6.0 – save ICX messages in the Intercom Server
PRO 800
Incoming and outgoing ICX messages of an IP or serial interface can be saved in the Intercom
LICENCE L-LOG Server directly without the need of an external equipment. The ICX messages storage can be
read out i.e. with the program ComLOG. This function is available with the following licences:
 L-LOG: Saves ~ 100,000 ICX messages 1)
PRO 800
LICENCE L-LOG5
 L-LOG5: Saves ~ 5,000 ICX messages 1)
 L15-LOG (only for Intercom Server GE 150): Saves ~ 500 ICX messages 1)
1) Note: The number of storable ICX messages depends on the length of the respective ICX
PRO 800
LICENCE L15-LOG messages. Further information about the length of ICX messages can be found in the
manual “ICX Protocol”.
ICX messages are stored in a ring buffer of the Intercom Server. The used licence defines the size of
the ICX message storage. As soon as the storage is exceeded, the oldest ICX messages will be over-
written. See the following illustration:
ages
ess
m
X
IC
0
st
or
ag
e
lim
it
Store ICX messages Read-out ICX messages
NOTE:
 The data part of an ICX message that will be saved in the ICX message storage may not exceed
58 bytes. If the ICX message is longer, all data that exceeded the maximum storage size will be
discarded.
 Further information on reading-out ICX messages can be found in the manual “ComLOG”.

 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP
 In the drop-down list Type of connection, select a connection type to enable the checkbox Log
(except for “Pelco” and “Milestone XProtect”).
 Go to: Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab RS232
 In the drop-down list Type of connection, select an interface protocol to enable the checkbox Log
(except for “Ultrak”).
 Log: Activate this checkbox to save ICX messages of the respective interface in the Intercom Server.
422 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration SIP functions
 SIP functions
SIP features
 Up to 1,120 SIP subscribers per VirtuoSIS Master
 Up to 32 calls between SIP subscribers per VirtuoSIS Instance
Configuration overview
For the SIP configuration, the terms “incoming” and “outgoing” are based on VirtuoSIS as reference
point:
outgoing
incoming
SIP server
VirtuoSIS configuration principle
Example
Microphone signals from a SIP telephone will be received from VirtuoSIS (incoming) and the loud-
speaker signals will be sent from VirtuoSIS (outgoing).
NOTE: Max. audio connections at group calls, All Calls or conferences

With SIP-C and SIP-T-subscribers, max. 112 simultaneous activated audio connections are possible
per VirtuoSIS Master (at group calls, All Calls or conferences; this number will be reduced by 32 possi-
ble conversations per VirtuoSIS instance):
 Conversation: SIP to SIP subscriber – 2 audio connections required
 Conversation: SIP to IoIP subscriber – 1 audio connection required
 All Call or group call: Per initiator or receiver as SIP subscriber – 1 audio connection required
(i.e. 1 initiator with 10 receivers are equal to 11 required audio channels)
 Conference: Per initiator or receiver as SIP subscriber – 1 audio connection required
1.5/0619 423
SIP functions Intercom Server Configuration
Global SIP settings

The global SIP settings will be applied for all SIP trunks (see page 426) and SIP-C subscribers (see
page 440) of the SIP master. The following global SIP settings are available:
VirtuoSIS Master > SIP Settings
Serial number This field shows the serial number of the VirtuoSIS Master.
Hostname This field shows the host name of the VirtuoSIS Master. 1)
RTP Port Range [min.
In these fields, the pool of usable RTP ports can be defined.
value] and [max. value]
srvlookup Activate this checkbox to support DNS SRV lookups. 2)
localnet In this field, the local IP network address can be entered (if NAT is enabled). 3)
In this field, an optional IP address can be entered, which will be used as source IP
externip
address for SIP messages (if NAT is enabled).4)
In this field, the SIP listener port can be configured ("5060" by default). This port is
UDP bindport only used if at least one SIP client (SIP-C) or SIP trunk (SIP-T) is configured for this
protocol.
J In this field, the SIP listener port can be configured ("5060" by default). This port is
PRO 800 TCP bindport only used if at least one SIP client (SIP-C) or SIP trunk (SIP-T) is configured for this
LICENCE
PRO9U protocol. 4)
J In this filed, the SIP listener port can be configured ("5061" by default). This port is
PRO 800 TLC bindport only used if at least one SIP client (SIP-C) or SIP trunk (SIP-T) is configured for this
LICENCE
PRO9U protocol. 4)
S Min. SIP registration In this field, the minimum registration period in seconds can be entered within which
expiry [s] SIP subscribers has to re-register on VirtuoSIS (“60” by default).
In this field, the default registration period in seconds can be entered if no default
S Default SIP
registration period is configured at the SIP subscriber or if VirtuoSIS re-registers on a
registration expiry [s] SIP trunk (“120” by default).
S Max. SIP registration In this field, the maximum registration period in seconds can be entered within which
expiry [s] SIP subscribers must re-register on VirtuoSIS (“3600” by default).
1) CCT 800 version 8.0 or higher will not show the host name with VirtuoSIS version 7.1. To show the host name
in CCT 800, VirtuoSIS has to be upgraded to version 8.0 or higher and the console configuration has to be run
again (see also manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”).
2) This function cannot be disabled (even i the checkbox is deactivated).
3) While entering an IP address, also enter the appropriate subnet mask separated by a slash
(e.g. “192.168.168.0/255.255.255.0”)
4) License binding L-SIS-PRO9 bzw PRO9U.
424 1.5/0619
Certificates for TLS

F Feature VirtuoSIS 8.0 – Encryption of data transmission and audio (SIPS)
With this feature, it is possible to use encrypted data transmission (TLS).
For encrypted data transmission (TLS), certificates are required. The encrypted transmission is config-
urable for SIP-C and SIP-T. To activate encrypted data transmission, the cryptographic protocol TLS has
to be selected for respective SIP client or SIP trunk and valid certificates have to be imported and sent
to VirtuoSIS.
Activate the cryptographic protocol TLS for SIP clients:

1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
2. In the drop-down list Protocol, select the encrypted data transmission protocol TLS.
3. Activate the checkbox SRTP to transmit audio data encrypted.
Activate the cryptographic protocol TLS for SIP trunks:

1. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired Trunk
2. In the drop-down list Protocol, select the encrypted data transmission protocol TLS.
3. Activate the checkbox SRTP to transmit audio data encrypted.
Import of certificates:
1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > File Management
2. Click on the button Configure Host... / Configure CAs.... The following dialogue appears:
 Import: Click the Import button to import a host certificate. The FileOpen dialog automatically fil-
ters for the file formats ".pem" and ".crt". If a host certificate has already been imported, the exi-
sting certificate is replaced by importing again.
 Remove: If you would like to remove a host certificate, mark the host certificate to be removed
and click on the "Remove" button.
 OK: After completing the action, confirm with OK. The dialog box closes.
1.5/0619 425
 Cancel: Mit Klick auf den Button "Abbrechen" brechen Sie die Host Konfiguration ab.
ATTENTION: Imported certificates for TLS

 Only one host certificate can be used.
 A certificate can not be used as a host certificate and as a certificate authority at the same time.
 The validity of the imported certificate is not checked!
 If there are substantive amendments to the certificate, the certificate will not be updated in CCT
800. The certificate has to be imported/replaced.
 The file name of the certificate can only consist of the following characters: a–z, A–Z, 0–9. Special
characters are not allowed (such as # &! <> () '`' Ö ö Ö Ö Ü).
 The (changed) certificates are only applied after sending the configuration to the VirtuoSIS.
SIP trunk (SIP-T)

General information
The SIP trunk card allows an easy integration of SIP telephone systems.
VirtuoSIS Instance 1 Third-party SIP server
Trunk 1
SIP-T Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5 Trunk 2
Channel 6
Channel 7 Trunk 3
Channel 8
SIP-IP-8
EE 900A Third-party SIP telephone

call number: 1933 call number: 2011
Principle of the integration of SIP telephones in VirtuoSIS
An overview of all available SIP-T functions can be found on page 6.
SIP trunk licences

To use the full range of functions of the SIS-SIP-T cards, the cards must be licensed in CCT 800. The
following SIP trunk licences are available:
 L-SIS-SIPT1B: Licence for SIP trunk, 1 channel, feature level B
 L-SIS-SIPT8B: Licence for SIP trunk, 8 channels, feature level B
 L-SIS-SIPT1D: Licence for SIP trunk, 1 channel, feature level D
 L-SIS-SIPT8D: Licence for SIP trunk, 8 channels, feature level D
For further information about licensing see page 72.
426 1.5/0619
Example of use SIP-T

The following examples describe the different use cases and the required configuration.
General configuration of the example

 VirtuoSIS with SIP-T and SIP-IP-8 card
 All 8 channels of the SIP-T card are licensed
 The channels “1” to “5” are combined to trunk “88”
 The channels “6” to “8” are combined to trunk “89”
VirtuoSIS Instance 1 Third-party SIP server
Trunk 88
SIP-T Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5 Trunk 89
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
SIP-IP-8
Region: “+31”
EE 900A Third-party SIP telephone Third-party SIP telephone

call number: 1933 call number: 2011 call number: 2111
Configuration example with a SIP-T and SIP-IP-8 card
Case 1
 Configuration: only default configuration.
 The number of a free channel (e.g. channel “1” with the number “401”) and the phone number have
to be dialled to reach the SIP telephone.
What you dial Number that is dialled
401 2011 401 2011
Pros and contras:

– You have to know all channel numbers.
– You have to find a free channel.
+ No additional configuration required.
Case 2
 Configuration for trunk “88” (Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks): pre-dialling “88”.
 “88” to select the trunk (channel “1” to “5”) and the phone number have to be dialled to reach the
SIP telephone.
88 2011 2011
Pros and contras:

– You always have to dial the pre-dialling number (e.g. “88”) before a phone call.
+ You don‘t have to worry about channel numbers.
+ Automatic use of a free channel.
1.5/0619 427
Case 3
 Configuration for trunk “88” (Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks): code number “20”.
 If the SIP number starts with the code number or if the code number is the phone number, you don‘t
have to select a channel or a trunk. The Intercom station establishes a connection with the SIP tele-
phone automatically.
2011 2011
Pros and contras:

– No further Intercom numbers, which start with the code number (e.g. code number “20”:
Intercom number “2013” is not possible).
– You have to configure each phone number or the first digits of the phone numbers.
+ You only have to dial the phone number.
+ Automatic use of a free channel.
Case 4
 Configuration for trunk “89” (Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks): pre-dialling “89” and dial prefix
“+31”.
 With this configuration, you reach SIP telephones in a defined region. “89” to select the trunk (chan-
nel “1” to “5”) and the phone number have to be dialled.
89 2011 +31 2011
Pros and contras:

– All calls from this trunk have the same prefix and can only reach SIP telephones from this region
(e.g. dial prefix “+31”: only regions with dial prefix “+31” can be reached).
+ Automatic dial of prefixes.
428 1.5/0619
SIP trunk configuration
NOTE: Global SIP settings

For further information about the configuration of the global SIP settings see page 424. These SIP set-
tings will be applied for all SIP trunks and SIP subscribers of the SIP master.
NOTE: SIS-SIP-T card must be licensed

To carry out the following configuration steps, the respective SIS-SIP-T card must be licensed (see
page 426).
The following configuration steps are available:

 Add SIP trunk – see below
 SIP trunk configuration – see below
 SIP trunk channel configuration – see page 432
 Auto dialler mode – see page 434
Add SIP trunk

To add a SIP trunk, follow the instructions below:
1. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
2. Right click and select the option “Add trunk”.
NOTES: Max. 99 SIP trunks per VirtuoSIS Master

Max. 99 SIP trunks can be added per VirtuoSIS Master.
SIP trunk configuration

The following SIP trunk settings are available:
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
In this drop-down list, select the VirtuoSIS Master, to which the SIP trunk shall be
Master
assigned. The drop-down list Instance will be enabled.
In this drop-down list, select a VirtuoSIS Instance, to which the SIP trunk shall be
Instance
assigned. The remaining functions will be enabled.
Trunk ID This field shows the SIP trunk ID.
Trunk Name In this field, enter the desired SIP trunk name.
Trunk Configuration Click on this button to open the SIP trunk configuration dialogue (see below).
In this field, enter the time in seconds, after which a call over the selected SIP trunk
Dialling timeout [s]
shall be initiated automatically.
Activate the checkbox to dial the button “0” automatically at the telephone interface
Dial 0 at incoming call
for incoming calls over the SIP trunk (e.g. for initiating a call request).
After-Dial from tele- Activate this checkbox to enable after-dialling for outgoing calls in the telephone
phone mode (see page 439).
 fix: The SIP trunk is permanently in DTMF after-dial mode.
 x s/min: If “77” is entered on the station in after-dial mode, the DTMF after-dial
DTMF After-Dial
mode is activated for this SIP trunk. After the configured time, the SIP trunk
Mode
switches back into the Intercom after-dial mode. Possible selections: 8 s, 15 s,
30 s, 1 min, 2 min and 4 min (default setting: 8 s).
In this field, the block number of the Intercom Server can be entered which is con-
nected to a SIP trunk via SIP server. Display texts can be shown, which were sent via
Caller ID IS-block long ICX messages in the telephone mode, across LAN borders (e.g. display texts of
a SIP devices). 1)
1)
A configuration is only possible if the checkbox IAX/SIP-T - Caller-ID Information at Interfaces > Data
interfaces > tab TCP/IP is activated.
1.5/0619 429
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
In this field, a password can be entered, which must be dialled on the phone to accept
Password outgoing
the incoming call (1 to 4 digits).
In this field, a password can be entered, which must be dialled on the phone to initi-
Password incoming
ate a call over this SIP trunk (1 to 4 digits).
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds, after which the next sequence shall
Waiting time
be dialled if the current call has not been accepted.
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the telephone interface
Hang up after
hangs up when the call has been terminated.
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the speech direction will
Max. time simplex be switched during a simplex conversation unless the button “*” is not pressed
(timer will be reset).
In this field, a trunk prefix for placing international calls can be entered (e.g. “+43”).
Dial prefix
This prefix is pre-dialled for each outgoing call.
In this field, a button sequence to select a certain trunk (valid for all channels) can be
Pre-dialling
entered, which is not part of the outgoing called number.
In this field, up to 100 pre-dialling codes can be entered that will be pre-dialled auto-
Code numbers matically at each outgoing call of the Intercom station (several definitions are sepa-
rated via commas).
In this field, enter the IP address or DNS name of the SIP server. It is possible to enter
Primary host 1) IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
Secondary host In this field, the IP address or DNS name of a second SIP server can be entered. 2)
In this field, the destination port of the SIP server can be changed (e.g. port “5060” for
Port 1) UDP/TCP).
In this drop-down list, the transport protocol for outgoing data packets over the SIP
Protocol 1) trunk can be selected.
Activate this checkbox if the registration to a SIP provider should be carried out. Addi-
SIP register tionally, enter the SIP registration address in the field below. This address is struc-
tured as follows: “user[:secret[:authuser]]@host[:port][/extension]” 3)
Username and
In these fields, the user credentials can be entered for registering to a SIP provider.
Password
In this drop-down list, one of the following authentication types can be selected:
 none: The IP address and the port of the caller are checked and an authentication
after the Invite (during call establishment) is required.
 port4): Only the IP address of the caller is checked and an authentication after the
Invite (during call establishment) is required, but the call request also may come
Insecure from another port.
 invite: The IP address and the port of the caller are checked, but an Invite is also ac-
cepted without authentication.
 port + invite4): Only the IP address of the caller is checked, the call request also
may come from another port and an Invite is also accepted without authentication.
In this field, the user can be entered who replaces the user in the “From” header field
fromuser
of outgoing SIP packets.
In this field, the domain can be entered that replaces the domain in the “From”
fromdomain
header field of outgoing SIP packets.
1)
Mandatory items
2)
The second SIP server will only be used if the first SIP server is not available.
3)
Host syntax examples: “10.10.0.1”, “[1234::1234]” or “sip.commend.com”
4)
Only available up to VirtuoSIS version 8.1.
430 1.5/0619
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
Check this box to monitor the availability of the SIP trunk at periodic intervals. A con-
Active nection error can thus be displayed on a control station if a call request with line
monitoring is configured for the SIP-T subscriber.
In this field, the interval for SIP trunk monitoring via SIP OPTIONS can be changed.
Polltime [s]
The checkbox Polling active must be enabled.
Activate this checkbox to playback the pre-recorded audio ID “178”during ringing at a
 Force ringing calling Intercom station (SIP response code “180” must be received from the called
(outgoing) phone). Further information about importing pre-recorded audio can be found on
page 362.
Add incoming and Click on this button to add user-specific dial plan lines to the Asterisk dial plan for out-
Add outgoing going or incoming calls (see page 437). 1)
In this drop-down list, one of the following transmission protocols for DTMF tones
can be selected:
DTMF Mode 2)  RFC 2833: Signals are transmitted according to the RFC 2833 protocol.
 SIP Info: Signals are transmitted according to the SIP protocol.
In this drop-down list, the usage of NAT (“Network Address Translation”) can be
selected:
 yes: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581”. Symmetric RTP support is enabled.
 no: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if requested by the remote station. Sym-
NAT metric RTP support is disabled.
 force_rport: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” and disable symmetric RTP sup-
port.
 comedia: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if the remote side requests it and en-
able symmetric RTP support.
 Early media
Activate this checkbox to send pre-recorded audio to each calling phones while ring-
ing. For more information, see page 436.

SRTP Activate this checkbox to encrypt the transmission of audio data.
In these drop-down lists, the priority of the audio codecs can be selected that shall be
Codec 2) used (1 = highest, 5 = lowest). When initiating a call, the device uses the highest prior-
ity codec, which matches a codec from the opposite device.
Volume adjustment
outgoing [dB] and In these drop-down lists, the audio level for outgoing or incoming calls over the SIP
Volume adjustment trunk can be adjusted.
incoming [dB]
1)
The dial plan feature is only intended for experienced Asterisk users.
2)
Mandatory items
1.5/0619 431
SIP trunk channel configuration

Licensed SIP trunk channels can be assigned to a SIP trunk of the SIS-SIP-T card, via which SIP calls
will be sent and received. With calling over the SIP trunk, the first available and assigned SIP trunk
channel is selected automatically for the incoming or outgoing call. The following SIP trunk channel
settings are available:
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Common
In this drop-down list, select the SIP trunk, to which the respective SIP trunk channel
Trunk Name
shall be assigned.
In this field, a call number can be entered, which shall be reserved for this SIP trunk
Reservation incoming channel. At an incoming call from this call number, this SIP trunk channel will be
extension
used for the connection. 1)
Activate this checkbox to configure the SIP trunk channel in auto dialler mode (see
Auto Dialler Mode page 434). In auto dialler mode, outgoing calls will be established automatically to
the pre-defined telephone numbers.
Activate this checkbox to dial the button “0” automatically at the telephone interface
for incoming calls over the SIP trunk (e.g. for initiating a call request). 2)
After-Dial from Activate this checkbox to enable after-dialling for outgoing calls in the telephone
telephone mode (see page 439). 2)
 Checkbox active: DTMF after-dial mode is permanently activated for the respective
Fix DTMF After-Dial channel.
Mode 2)  Checkbox inactive: Intercom after-dial mode is permanently activated for the re-
spective channel. 3)
1) If for every SIP trunk channel a call number is configured, no further calls can be accepted.
2)
For this function, the checkbox Auto Dialler Mode must be activated.
3) If a call is coming in at the channel, the DTMF after-dial mode can be activated for 4 seconds at the respective
channel by dialling “77”.
During an active conversation, a configured virtual output can be set trough a SIP trunk channel. An
individually configured DTMF sequence can be sent to the respective SIP server by switching the virtual
output.
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Action Sequences
Activate this checkbox to create a virtual output for the respective channel. By activat-
Action Sequence 1 – 4 ing the checkbox, the columns “Call number OUT” and “DTMF sequence” are ena-
bled.
In this field, the call number of the virtual output can be entered. This output is listed
Call number OUT 1 – 4
in CCT 800 under Outputs > General Settings.
In this field, an individual one- or multi-digit DTMF sequence consisting of the charac-
DTMF-Sequence 1 – 4 ters 0 – 9, *, #, A – D can be entered. The DTMF sequence may consist of a maximum
of 16 characters.
ATTENTION: Call number action sequence output

Dialable call number required if action sequences are used across all instances.
Example: Transmission of DTMF sequence “1*A” via a SIP trunk channel

The DTMF sequence can be used for various actions on the third-party system (e.g., voice menu).
432 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS Third-party SIP server
DTMF-Sequence: 1*A
Call no.: 109 Call no. OUT 1: 9999
Trunk 1 Channel 1 Action sequence 1
SIP-T
Channel 2 Action sequence 2
Action sequence 3
...
Channel 8 Action sequence 4
SIP-IP-8
Third-party SIP telephone

EE 900A
Requirements for transmitting the DTMF sequence on a SIP trunk channel:

 There must be an active call connection between the Intercom station EE 900A and the third-party
SIP telephone on the SIP trunk channel.
 A door opener that triggers the virtual output 9999 must be configured for SIP trunk channel 1 with
call number 109.
 Cancel conversation:
 Automatically after door is opened: requires the checkbox “Cancel Call” in the door opener dia-
logue to be activated and the value in the column “After [s]” to be at least 6 seconds.
 Manually by a call participant: requires the checkbox “Cancel Call” in the door opener dialogue to
be deactivated.
1. Intercom station EE 900A calls the third-party SIP telephone on channel 1 (call number 109).
2. The pre-configured door opener button is pressed on the Intercom station EE 900A.
3. Virtual output 9999 is activated.
4. DTMF sequence “1*A” is transmitted to the third-party SIP telephone.
1.5/0619 433
Auto dialler mode
NOTE: Requirement
To carry out the following configuration, the checkbox Auto Dialler Mode at Interfaces > SIS-SIP-
T > Channels > tab Telephone settings must be activated (see page 432).
In auto-dialler mode, call requests and input messages (i.e. control desk calls) can be transferred auto-
matically to pre-defined telephone numbers over the SIP trunk. The telephone numbers and the order
in which these telephone numbers are dialled can be configured via dial sequences. If the call is not
answered or the telephone is busy, the call will be transferred to another telephone number in the dial
sequence. The following settings are available:
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Telephone settings
In this field, enter the time in seconds, after which a call over the selected SIP trunk
Dialling timeout [s]
shall be initiated automatically.
International Tone In this drop-down list, the respective tone plan can be selected. Tone plans are stand-
Plans ardized tones to indicate the status of lines or the result of calls with special tones.
In this field, the block number of the Intercom Server can be entered that is connected
over this SIP trunk to show display texts, which were sent via long ICX messages in
Caller ID IS-block the telephone mode, across LAN borders. E.g. to transmit display texts of a SIP
device, which is allocated to Intercom Server block “1” (VirtuoSIS), to a SIP station,
which is allocated to Intercom Server block “2” (GE 800). 1)
1) A configuration is only possible if at Interfaces > Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP the checkbox IAX/SIP-T -
Caller-ID Information is activated.
Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > desired SIP trunk channel
In this field, a password can be entered, which must be dialled on the phone to accept
Password outgoing
the incoming call (1 to 4 digits).
In this field, a password can be entered, which must be dialled on the phone to initi-
Password incoming
ate a call over this SIP trunk channel (1 to 4 digits).
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds, after which the next sequence shall
Waiting time
be dialled if the current call has not been accepted.
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the telephone interface
Hang up after
hangs up when the call has been terminated.
In this field, the time can be entered in seconds after which the speech direction will
Max. time simplex be switched during a simplex conversation unless the button “*” is not pressed
(timer will be reset).
In this field, a trunk prefix for placing international calls can be entered (e.g. “+43”).
Dial prefix
This prefix is pre-dialled for each outgoing call. 1)
In this field, the button to select a certain trunk (valid for all channels) can be entered,
Pre-dialling
which is not part of the outgoing called number.
In this field, an up to 24-digit telephone number can be entered that shall be dialled
Telephone numbers automatically (entry of “0” to “9”, “*” and “#” possible). The pre-defined telephone
numbers will be dialled via dial sequences (see below).
In this field, an up to 15-digit dial sequence can be entered (entry of “1” to “8” possi-
Sequences ble for telephone numbers). For further information about executing dial sequences
see page 435. 2) 3)
1)
If a channel is activated in the auto-dialler mode within a trunk, the dial prefix has to be entered in this field,
because the superordinate dial prefix configured in the SIP trunk does not apply.
2) By means of adding “9” at the end of the dialling sequence, the respective call is switched to the 1st call num-
ber of the sequence again if this call is not answered by the last call number of the sequence (e.g.
“12121219”).
3) Telephone numbers can be dialled multiple times per dial sequence.
434 1.5/0619
Trigger dial sequence

The different dialling sequences are activated with inputs via dialling simulation to which e.g. a time
switch can be connected. Follow the instructions below:

1. Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling
2. Right click on the desired input and select the option “Add input initiates dialling”.
3. Go to: Inputs > Dial via Input > Input initiates dialling > desired input
4. In the drop-down list Subscriber 1, select the telephone interface for which the dialling sequence
shall be switched over.
5. In the drop-down list Dial/Key next to the desired input level (e.g. “Short”), enter the code
“XX9T99” and the number of the dialling sequence (e.g. “XX9T992” to activate dialling sequence 2).
See the following screenshot:
NOTES: Existing call

 With the prefix “XX“, an existing conversation (built up by dialling the interface call number) is
cancelled before switching the dialling sequence. Otherwise, the sequence would not be changed.
 “XX” has no effect on an existing call request. The call remains and is transferred to the new dial-
ling sequence.
In the example above (screenshot), one input triggers the switch-over of the dialling sequences 1 and
2 for the subscriber 1 (telephone interface):
 Level input “Break” dialling sequence 1 is active
 Level input “Short” dialling sequence 2 is active
ATTENTION: Simultaneous dialled codes

Make sure that two inputs cannot dial a code at the same time. This could happen e.g. if codes for
“short” and for “open” are configured for several inputs. If one input closes and the other opens at
the same time, it cannot be guaranteed if the “open” code or the “short” code was dialled first,
because always the code dialled last becomes effective.
1.5/0619 435
 Early media while ringing

Feature PRO 800 6.1 – Early media while ringing
VirtuoSIS
With early media it s possible to send pre-recorded audio to calling phones during ringing.
LICENCE PRO6U When a phone is calling to an Intercom station and the call is not acknowledged (e.g. station
is busy), the SIP response code “180 – Ringing” will be sent to the calling phone while ringing.
In addition, the called Intercom station also sends an early media stream that contains pre-re-
corded audio. This audio stream will be played back at the calling phone for the pending call
(e.g. as calm down signal).
NOTE: SIP response code has to be interpreted

The calling phone must be able to interpret the SIP response code “180 – Ringing”.
To use early media, follow the instructions below:
Configuration SIP-T
1. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks
2. Click on Trunk Configuration.
3. Activate the checkbox early media.
5. Assign the ID “178” to the pre-recorded audio that shall be sent in the early media stream.
GOOD TO KNOW: Only ID “178” can be used for early media

For an early media stream, only the pre-recorded audio with ID “178” can be used. By default, a
standard system tone will be played back if no custom pre-recorded audio is used. For more infor-
mation about pre-recorded audio, see page 362.
6. Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Channels > tab Common

7. Activate the checkbox Dial 0 at incoming call.
GOOD TO KNOW: Call request required to send early media stream

To send an early media stream, a call request must be triggered by the calling phone. With the
function “Dial 0 at incoming call”, the button 0 is dialled automatically at the telephone interface to
trigger the call request in the Intercom system.
Configuration SIP-C
1. Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
2. Activate the checkbox early media.
3. Activate the checkbox Dial 0 at incoming call.
GOOD TO KNOW: Call request required to send early media stream

To send an early media stream, a call request must be triggered by the calling phone. With the
function “Dial 0 at incoming call”, the button 0 is dialled automatically at the telephone interface to
trigger the call request in the Intercom system.

5. Assign the ID “178” to the pre-recorded audio that shall be sent in the early media stream.
GOOD TO KNOW: Only ID “178” can be used for early media

For an early media stream, only the pre-recorded audio with ID “178” can be used. By default, a
standard system tone will be played back if no custom pre-recorded audio is used. For more infor-
mation about pre-recorded audio, see page 362.
436 1.5/0619
Example of use dial plan SIP-T

Example 1: Modify display text and shown call number
In this example, the caller ID (“Intercom”) and the shown call number (“+41”) for outgoing calls shall
be modified. For this, carry out the following configuration:

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
 Click on the button Add outgoing.
 For example, enter the following commands:
1,Set(CALLERID(name)=Intercom)
2,Set(CALLERID(num)=+41${CALLERID(num)})
ATTENTION: Priorities
Start with priority “1” only if the volume adjustments are not used (otherwise, start with “n” to
number entries automatically in ascending order)!
 Click on the button Accept.
Dial plan configuration window in CCT 800
Example 2: Hide first four call number characters

In this example, the first four characters of the call number shall be hidden. For this, carry out the fol-
lowing configuration:

 Go to: Interfaces > SIS-SIP-T > Trunks > desired trunk
 Click on the button Add outgoing.
 For example, enter the following command:
1,set(CALLERID(num)=${CALLERID(num):4})
1.5/0619 437
Example 3: Automatic DTMF after-dial at call acceptance

In this example, four DTMF tones shall be after-dialled after accepting the call automatically (in this ex-
ample “0000”), e.g. to verify the call for security reasons. For this, carry out the following configuration:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
 In the column Dial plan configuration, click on the button Add incoming.
1,Dial(SIP/SIP-trunk01/${EXTEN:2},,D(0000))
NOTE: “D” in the code

The “D” in the code defines that a DTMF tone string will be sent after the call is accepted, but before
it is bridged.
438 1.5/0619
Example for the function “After-Dial from telephone”

In the following example, a wallmount station is mounted next to a door and is operated by VirtuoSIS.
This wallmount station has the call number “801” and is connected to a VoIP server via the trunk “21”.
On the other side, a SIP telephone is operated by a 3rd-party VoIP server. This SIP telephone has the
call number “6000” and is connected to VirtuoSIS via the trunk “841”.
If now a call from the SIP telephone (“6000”) is initiated to the wallmount station (“801”), it is possible
to trigger the door opener, which is connected to the wallmount station (“801”), using the after-dial
function via the SIP telephone (“6000”) (incoming call). However, if a call from the wallmount station
(“801”) is initiated to the SIP telephone (“6000”), it is not possible to trigger the door opener, which is
connected to the wallmount station (“801”), using the after-dial function via the SIP telephone (“6000”)
(outgoing call). To allow after-diallings via the SIP telephone (“6000”) in case a call is initiated from the
wallmount station (“801”), the checkbox After-Dial from telephone has to be activated (see
page 432).
VirtuoSIS VoIP server

IP network
21 801
SIP
Reception
Office
Trunks
Garage
* 0 #
841 6000
SIP telephone
Door with wallmount (call number 6000)
Intercom station
(call number 801)
Example setup for a trunk between VirtuoSIS and a VoIP server
1.5/0619 439
SIP subscriber card (SIP-C)

General information
SIS Master
SIS Instance 1
Asterisk
SIS Instance 2
SIS Instance 3
SIS Instance 4
SIS Instance n
Control desk solutions and
visualisation software ComWIN Linux
Virtual Machine
VirtuoSIS
VoIP PBX
Networking with hardware Integration of 3rd-party

3rd-party SIP telephones Intercom Server via LAN/WAN systems via ICX protocol VoIP gateway
IP network
ET 901
INFORMATION
Barrier with IP
Intercom station Public address
Intercom stations and Ticket vending machine
Intercom modules IP camera
with Intercom station
Intercom client for PC SIP help point
and mobile devices Help point
Commend SIP stations
and SIP modules
Example of a VirtuoSIS system

The SIP subscriber card for VirtuoSIS allows an integration of SIP devices into your Intercom system.
Use your Commend SIP station or a 3rd-party telephone as normal Intercom device with numerous
Intercom features. The integration of your SIP station is only a few CCT 800 mouse clicks away.
An overview of all available SIP-T functions can be found on page 6.
Restrictions
The following VirtuoSIS Intercom features are not available for SIP devices
 Configuration of SIP devices via CCT 800
 Firmware upgrade
 DSP features (e.g. audio monitoring or microphone-speaker surveillance)
SIP-C licences
To use the full range of functions of the SIP-C subscriber cards, these cards must be licensed in CCT
800. The following SIP-C licences are available:
 L-SIS-SIP-8A: Licence for 8 SIP subscriber, feature level A
 L-SIS-SIP-2B: Licence for 2 SIP subscribers, feature level B
 L-SIS-SIP-8B: Licence for 8 SIP subscribers, feature level B
 L-SIS-SIP-8C: Licence for 8 SIP subscribers, feature level C
 L-SIS-SIP-2D: Licence for 2 SIP subscribers, feature level D
 L-SIS-SIP-8D: Licence for 8 SIP subscribers, feature level D
For further information about licensing see page 72.
440 1.5/0619
Configuration
 Feature PRO 800 4.0 - SIP-C

This feature allows the use of SIP-C cards.
NOTE: Global SIP settings

For further information about the configuration of the global SIP settings see page 424. These SIP set-
tings will be applied for all SIP trunks and SIP subscribers of the SIP master.
NOTE: SIP-C subscriber card must be licensed

To carry out the following configuration steps, the respective SIP-C subscriber card must be licensed
(see page 440).
The following SIP-C settings are available:
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Authentication
Activate this checkbox to activate the SIP participant for the respective station. Rela-
J Enable SIP account
ted incoming ports are opened (e.g., 5060). By default, the SIP account is disabled.
User ID This field, the number of the subcriber is shown..
J In this field, a user name independent of the telephone number can be assigned. This
PRO 800 Authentication ID
LICENCE is useful to increase the security of your SIP account.
PRO9U
In this field, a password can be entered a SIP device has to use to register at the
Password
server.
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
In this field, the destination port of the SIP station can be changed (e.g. port “5060”
Port no.
for UDP/TCP).
In this drop-down list, the transport protocol for outgoing data packets over the SIP
Protocol
trunk can be selected.
 SRTP Activate this checkbox to encrypt the transmission of audio data.
In this drop-down list, one of the following authentication types can be selected:
 none: The IP address and the port of the caller are checked and an authentication
after the Invite (during call establishment) is required.
 port: Only the IP address of the caller is checked and an authentication after the In-
vite (during call establishment) is required, but the call request also may come from
Insecure1) another port.
 invite: The IP address and the port of the caller are checked, but an Invite is also ac-
cepted without authentication.
 port + invite: Only the IP address of the caller is checked, the call request also may
come from another port and an Invite is also accepted without authentication.
In this drop-down list, the usage of NAT (“Network Address Translation”) can be
selected:
 yes: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581”. Symmetric RTP support is enabled.
 no: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if requested by the remote station. Sym-
 NAT metric RTP support is disabled.
 force_rport: Force behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” and disable symmetric RTP sup-
port.
 comedia: Enable behaviour acc. to “RFC 3581” if the remote side requests it and en-
able symmetric RTP support.
In this drop-down list, one of the following transmission protocols for DTMF tones
can be selected:
DTMF Modus
 RFC 2833: Signals are transmitted according to the RFC 2833 protocol.
 SIP Info: Signals are transmitted according to the SIP protocol.
1)
Only available up to VirtuoSIS version 8.1.
1.5/0619 441
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Settings
In this field, the interval for SIP trunk monitoring via SIP OPTIONS can be changed.
Polltime
The checkbox Polling active must be enabled.
Activate this checkbox to monitor the availability of SIP trunks in periodical intervals.
In case of a link loss, a call request can be triggered to a control desk. A connection
Polling active
error can thus be displayed on a control console if a call request with line monitoring
is configured for the SIP subscriber.
Activate this checkbox to send pre-recorded audio to each calling phones while ring-
 Early Media
ing. For more information, see page 436.
Activate the checkbox to dial the button “0” automatically at the telephone interface
for incoming calls over the SIP trunk (e.g. for initiating a call request).
Add outgoing and Add Click on this button to add user-specific dial plan lines to the Asterisk dial plan for out-
incoming going or incoming calls (see page 444).
Volume adjustment
Outgoing [dB] and Vol- In these drop-down lists, the audio level for outgoing or incoming calls can be
ume adjustment adjusted.
Incoming [dB]
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Codecs

In these drop-down lists, the priority of the audio codecs can be selected that shall be
Codec used (1 = highest, 5 = lowest). When initiating a call, the device uses the highest prior-
ity codec, which matches a codec from the opposite device.
 ATTENTION: Character set for special characters

CCT 800 automatically recognises the used system language and character set. To avoid a misinter-
pretation of the special characters (e.g. for SIP applications), the desired character set can be selected
in CCT 800 as follows:
1. Go to: VirtuoSIS Master > General Settings
1. In the drop-down list Character Set VirtuoSIS, the desired character set can be selected.
During an active conversation, a configured virtual output can be set through a SIP station channel. An
individually configured DTMF sequence can be sent to the respective SIP terminal by switching the vir-
tual output.
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals > tab Action Sequences
Activate this checkbox to create a virtual output for the respective subscriber. By acti-
Action Sequence 1 – 4 vating the checkbox, the columns “Call number OUT” and “DTMF sequence” are
enabled.
In this field, the call number of the virtual output can be entered, which are treated as
Call number OUT 1 – 4 extended clients (see also “Extended clients” on page 215). This output is listed in
CCT 800 under Outputs > General Settings.
In this field, an individual DTMF sequence consisting of the characters 0 – 9, *, #,
DTMF-Sequence 1 – 4 A – D can be entered. The DTMF sequence may consist of a maximum of 16 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Usable call numbers Action Sequences

If multiple instances are used, the numbers of the virtual output must be a diable number.
Example: Transmission of DTMF sequence “1*A” via a SIP-Terminal

The DTMF sequence can be used for various actions on the SIP terminal device.
442 1.5/0619
VirtuoSIS
DTMF-Sequence: 1*A
Call no.: 109 Call no. OUT 1:
Subscriber 1 Action sequence 1
SIP-C
Action sequence 3
...
Office

WS 301V I CM
SIP-IP-8
EE 900A
Requirements for transmitting the DTMF sequence on a SIP trunk channel:

 There must be an active call connection between the EE 900A Intercom station and the
WS 301V I CM.
 A door opener that actuates virtual output 9999 must be configured for SIP subscriber 1
 Cancel conversation:
 Automatically after door is opened: requires the “Cancel Call” checkbox in the Door Opener dia-
logue to be activated and the value in the “After [s]” column to be at least 3 seconds.
 Manually by a call participant: requires the “Cancel Call” checkbox in the Door Opener dialogue
to be deactivated.
1. The EE 900A Intercom station calls Intercom station WS 301V I CM (call number 109).
2. The pre-configured door opener key is pressed on the EE 900A Intercom station.
3. Virtual output 9999 is activated.
4. DTMF sequence “1*A” is transmitted to the WS 301V I CM Intercom station.
1.5/0619 443
Example of using dial plan SIP-C

Example 1: Modify display text
In this example, the caller ID for outgoing calls will be modified. For this, carry out the following con-
figuration:

 Go to: Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Terminals
 In the column Dial plan configuration, click on the button Add outgoing.
1,Set(CALLERID(name)=CallerID-OverWrittenOutgoing)
Example 2: Add a condition

In this example, the condition for the SIP device “101” is added, which defines that the call will be
accepted and a pre-recorded audio file will be played back automatically until the caller ends the call.
For this, carry out the following configuration:

 In the column Dial plan configuration, click on the button Add outgoing.
1,GotoIf($["${CALLERID(num)}"="101"]?play:dial)
n(play), Answer()
n(play), Milliwatt()
NOTES: Meaning of the commands

 “play:dial” means that, if the condition is “true”, the audio file will be played back (“play”) or, if
the condition is “false”, the default dial plan will be executed (“dial”).
 In this example, “Milliwatt” is a test tone.
444 1.5/0619
Example 3: Forwarding call requests

In this example, any incoming dial-string extension will be ignored and the button “0” will be pressed
virtually. For this, carry out the following configuration:

 In the column Dial plan configuration, click on the button Add incoming.
 Enter the following command:
1,Dial(IAX2/SIS-IAX-GW/CC0)
NOTE: Command prefix

In this code, “CC” is a Commend specific prefix.
1.5/0619 445
IT security Intercom Server Configuration
IT security
As a provider of security-specific solutions, Commend has a tradition of passionate commitment to
security, both physical and digital. We are acutely aware of what is at stake, as users depend – and in
extreme cases even stake their lives – on the reliability of our systems. Where digital security is
concerned, we make every effort to ensure cyber security best practices in the design, production and
rigorous testing of every component to rule out exploitable vulnerabilities as much as possible.
The following sections will guide you through the most crucial cyber security related configuration
steps.
Password management
Using a secure and unique password is the most fundamental means of providing basic protection
against unauthorised access. For this reason, it is essential to change the default password for any de-
vice in the Intercom system. Make sure you are using a strong password according to your internal IT
security regulations.
A password should meet the following requirements:
 A minimum of 8 characters
 A mix of numbers, symbols (if applicable), uppercase and lowercase letters
 Password should not include user names or dictionary words
A password generator will help you to create randomly generated passwords that are hard to crack.
Online services can be used to check whether your password is a common notion or already known in
the hacker community.
Another way to ensure a maximum of security is to change and renew the password regularly. This is
especially important for passwords that are used on a daily basis.
Furthermore, it is recommended to use a password manager software to securely store passwords.
For configuration details, follow the links below.
Password-protected access
 User account in Linux / VirtuoSIS, see page 70 and manual “VirtuoSIS Setup Guide”
 User account management in CCT 800, see page 26
Password-protected configuration
 IP connection to Intercom Server, see page 54
 Intercom Server configuration, see page 42
 IP station configuration, see page 115
Password-protected interfaces
 SIP subscriber (SIP-C), see page 441
 SIP trunk (SIP-T), see page 429
446 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration IT security
Ports
In order to be able to transport user data such as audio and video, some ports of the Commend Inter-
com systems must be enabled for network traffic. However, the number of enabled ports should be
reduced to an absolute minimum.
Used ports on GE300, GE800 and IS300 Intercom Servers

The following applications or configurations require unlocked ports:
 CCT 800
 ICX
 IoIP participants
 LAN / WAN network connections
 NTP / SNTP client
 RTP / RTCP streaming for recording
 SNMP / GET
 SNMP / TRAPS
For detailed information, see the manual "VirtuoSIS Setup Guide": VirtuoSIS Ports.
Certificates
Public key certificates provide security for data transmission between SIP clients, SIP trunks and serv-
ers. As a result, SIP data packages are transported encrypted via the network protocol TLS. By activat-
ing SRTP, also sensitive audio data can be transported encrypted.
The following information is included in X.509 certificates:
 Explicit name of the issuer
 Explicit name of the owner
 Period of validity from-to
 Length of the public key
 Encryption algorithm RSA
GOOD TO KNOW: Naming of certificates

Commend recommends unique names for certificates. e.g.:
 Host certificates: “hostname_serial-number.pem”
 CAs: “issuer_usecase.crt”
1.5/0619 447
IT security Intercom Server Configuration
SIP trunk
SEQBSUZ
VirtuoSIS SIP server
)PTUDFSUJƀDBUFT TLS TLS )PTUDFSUJƀDBUFT

1&.BOE,FZ 1&.BOE,FZ
IP network
CA
Reception
Office
Garage
ID5 TD CM $"DFSUJƀDBUF WS 303V CM

Schematic illustration for encryption using certificates
To activate TLS and import certificates, see page 425.
The instructions how to import a certificate for a SIP client can be found in the respective manual.
448 1.5/0619
Intercom Server Configuration Appendix
Appendix
Station tests
The station tests are started as follows:
 Keep button F pressed.
 Press the button for the desired test (e.g. 1 for test “1”).
 Release button F.
 Release the button for the test.
Each test is cancelled by pressing the button X.
Station tests for stations with dot-matrix display

 Test 1 (display test): A test picture appears in the display (slanting lines).
 Test 2 (button test): “DIAGNOSTIC Keyboard” and the button which is pressed at the Intercom
station is indicated in the display.
 Test 6 (only with DSP 800 stations; test for line errors): “DIAGNOSTIC Communication” and a num-
ber is indicated (counts upward every 10000 error free messages, max. 99).
 Test 7 (line quality): “DIAGNOSTIC Levelmeter” and a dB value is indicated in the display. Activate
this test during a conversation to display the microphone level at the called station.
 Test 8 (test tone): During conversations or music reception a test tone is put out at the loudspeaker.
If a conversation to this station is built-up and the T button is pressed, the test tone is put out via the
microphone (therefore it is audible at the conversation partner). DSP software min. 3.0 required.
 Test 9 (ambient volume measurement): In the display “DIAGNOSTIC Soundlevel” and the sound
pressure in dB is displayed. DSP software min. 3.0 required.
ATTENTION:
The station tests not mentioned here are for internal purposes only! They shall not be activated,
because they can influence the station’s behaviour!
Station tests for 4-wire stations EE 411

 Test 1 (display test with “888888”): With this test the display can be tested.
 Test 2 (dialling test): With this test the dialling of the station can be queried.
 Test 3 (input/output test): The 4 digits show the status of the station internal inputs and outputs
(0 = Inactive, 1 = Active, order: IN1, IN2, OUT1, OUT2 from the right to the left)
 Test 4 (display test with all segments): With this test all segments of the display are switched on, so
that eventual defects of the display can be diagnosed.
 Test 5 (indication software version / station type): *V02.0* means: station software version 02.0.
Station tests for 2-wire stations EE 311A

The tests 1 to 5 are like the tests of a station EE411:
 Test 8 (test tone): During conversations or music reception a test tone is put out at the loudspeaker.
If a conversation to this station is built-up and the T button is pressed, the test tone is put out via the
microphone (therefore it is audible at the conversation partner). DSP software min. V3.0 required.
 Test 9 (ambient volume measurement): In the display “T9:” and the sound pressure in dB is
displayed. DSP software min. V3.0 required.
1.5/0619 449
Appendix Intercom Server Configuration
Restriction of audio blocks for IP subscriber cards

Each IP subscriber card has a maximum of 16 audio blocks (independent of the card type), which will
be distributed dynamically. An audio block is required for several functions on an IP subscriber card,
(e.g. a simplex call, 7TT conference, All Call, speech recording). The required number of audio blocks
vary from function to function and will individually be calculated for each IP subscriber card. As result,
it is possible that the maximum number of available audio blocks will be exceeded for the same
function at one IP subscriber card, but not necessarily at any other IP subscriber card. If no sufficient
number of audio blocks is available on an IP subscriber card, this function will not be supported.
Affected Intercom Server and IP subscriber cards

This restriction applies for the following Intercom Server and IP subscriber cards:
 IS 300/GE 300/GE 800
 Gx-IP32
 Gx-IP-8
 Gx-IP-4
 VirtuoSIS
 SIS-IP-8
Affected Intercom functions

The following Intercom functions require audio blocks on an IP subscriber card:
 Call (Simplex/Duplex/OpenDuplex®) (see page 451)
 Alarm (see page 451)
 All Call or group call (see page 452)
 7T conference (see page 453)
 7TT conference (see page 454)
 6T radio conference (see page 454)
 Speech recording (IoIP or RTP) (see page 455)
NOTE:
These functions can be mixed on the same IP subscriber card. The required number of audio blocks
will be added up and shall not exceed a number of 16 audio blocks – otherwise, the complete
functionality cannot be guaranteed for certain functions.
450 1.5/0619
Call type (Simplex/Duplex/OpenDuplex)

Required number of audio blocks per call type:
Required number of audio blocks per
Call type Comment
IP subscriber card
Simplex 1
For caller and called individually
Duplex 2 (provided that the called is on an IP
subscriber card)
OpenDuplex 2
In order to calculate the required number of audio blocks, use the following formula:
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABX
ABX number of audio blocks for all outgoing and incoming calls on the respective IP subscriber
card (decimal)
Example
1 Simplex call and 2 OpenDuplex®calls on IP subscriber card “A”:
Number of Simplex calls 1) Number of OpenDuplex®calls 2)

IP subscriber card A 1 (1) 2 (4)
1)
Required audio blocks ABX1
2) Required audio blocks ABX2
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX1 + ABX2 =
= 1 + 4 = 5 audio blocks
 5 audio blocks required; 16 audio blocks available
Alarm
Required number of audio blocks for an alarm:
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Feed-in 1 Only one per alarm
Independent of the total number for
Receive 1
all receiver
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABX + ABY
ABX availability of a feed-in on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
ABY availability of at least one receiver on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
Example
Alarm with 6 participants (1 speaker, 5 listener), split on 2 IP subscriber cards:
Number of speaker 1) Number of receiver 2)

IP subscriber card B 0 (0) 3 (1)
1)
Required audio blocks ABX
2) Required audio blocks ABY
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY =
1.5/0619 451
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY =
= 0 + 1 = 1 audio block
 1 audio block required; 16 audio blocks available
All Call or group call

Required number of audio blocks for an All Call or group call:
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Trigger 1 Only one per alarm
Independent of the total number
Receiver 2
for all receivers
Playback of pre-recorded audio
1 Per receiver
(ID: 0 – 159)
Playback of pre-recorded audio
0 No audio block required
(ID: 160 – 192)
Independent of the total number
Playback of calm down signal 1
for all receiver
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABW + ABX + ABY + ABZ
ABW availability of a trigger on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
ABX availability of at least one receiver on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
ABY number of receivers, which receive the pre-recorded audio (ID 0 – 159) on the respective IP
subscriber card (decimal)
ABZ availability of at least one receiver, which receives a calm down signal on the respective IP
subscriber card (decimal)
Example
All Call with 1 trigger and 8 receivers, split on three IP subscriber cards. Playback of pre-recorded audio
with ID “25” and a calm down signal:
Number of trigger 1) Number of receiver 2)

IP subscriber card A 1 (1) 1 (2) (1) (1)
IP subscriber card B 0 (0) 4 (2) (4) (1)
IP subscriber card C 0 (0) 3 (2) (3) (1)
1) Required audio blocks ABW
2)
Required audio blocks ABX, ABY, ABZ
Required audio blocks for

= ABW + ABX + ABY + ABZ =
IP subscriber card A
= 1 + 2 + 1 + 1 = 5 audio blocks
452 1.5/0619

IP subscriber card B
= 0 + 2 + 4 + 1 = 7 audio blocks

IP subscriber card C
= 0 + 2 + 3 + 1 = 6 audio blocks
7T conference
Required number of audio blocks for a 7T conference:
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Speak 1 Only one per 7T conference
Independent of the total
Listen 1
number for all listener
Required audio blocks in total per IP subscriber card and 7T conference = ABX + ABY
ABX availability of a speaker on the respective IP subscriber card per 7T conference (decimal)
ABY availability of at least one listener on the respective IP subscriber card per 7T conference
(decimal)
Example
7T conference with 6 participants (1 speaker, 5 receiver), split on 2 IP subscriber cards:
Number of trigger 1) Number of receiver 2)

IP subscriber card B 0 (0) 3 (1)
1) Required audio blocks ABX
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY =
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY =
= 0 + 1 = 1 audio block
 1 audio block required; 16 audio blocks available
1.5/0619 453
7TT conference
Required number of audio blocks for a 7TT conference:
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Participate 1 Per participant
ATTENTION:
In order to avoid an exceed of the maximum available audio blocks, not more than three 7TT
conference participants shall be configured at the same time per IP subscriber card!
Required audio blocks in total per IP subscriber card and 7TT conference = ABX + 2 x ABY
ABX sum of 7TT conference participants on all IP subscriber cards per 7TT conference (decimal)
ABY number of 7TT conference participants on the respective IP subscriber card (decimal)
Example
7TT conference with 6 participants, split on 2 IP subscriber cards
Total number of 7TT conference
Number of 7TT conference participants 2)
participants 1)
IP subscriber card A 4 (4)
6 (6)
IP subscriber card B 2 (2)
1)
2)
Required audio blocks ABY
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + 2 x ABY =
= 6 + 2x4 = 14 audio blocks

Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + 2 x ABY =
= 6 + 2x2 = 10 audio blocks

6T radio conference
Feed-in of a 6T radio conference
Required number of audio blocks for feed-in:
Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Feed-in 1 Per feed-in
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card and 6T radio conference = ABX
ABX number of 6T radio conference feed-ins on the respective IP subscriber card per 6T radio
conference (decimal)
Receiver of a 6T radio conference
454 1.5/0619
Required audio blocks for receiver:

Action Comment
IP subscriber card
Receive 1 Per receiver
Per different received
Receive audio channel 1
radio channel
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABY + ABZ
ABY number of 6T radio conference receiver on the respective IP subscriber card per 6T radio
ABZ number of different received radio channels on the respective IP subscriber card per 6T radio
Example
6T radio conference with 4 receivers and 3 different received radio channels, split on 2 IP subscriber
cards. A feed-in is not configured on this IP subscriber cards:
IP subscriber card A IP subscriber card B
Receiver 1 Receiver 2 Receiver 3 Receiver 4
Received radio channels 6T1, 6T2 6T1, 6T3 6T2, 6T3 6T2, 6T3
Number of feed-in 1) 0 (0) 0 (0)
Number of receiver 2) 3 (3) 1 (1)

Number of received radio
3 (3) 2 (2)
conferences 3)
1)
3) Required audio blocks ABZ
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY + ABZ =
= 0 + 3 + 3 = 6 audio blocks
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY + ABZ =
= 0 + 1 + 2 = 3 audio blocks
Speech recording (IoIP or RTP)

Required number of audio blocks for speech recording:
Recording type Comment
IP subscriber card
Simplex 1
Duplex/OpenDuplex 3
Alarm 1 Per active recording type
All Calls/Group Calls 1
6T-Conference 1
1.5/0619 455
ATTENTION:
 In order to avoid an exceed of the maximum available audio blocks, not more than five speech
recorders shall be configured for Duplex/OpenDuplex®calls at the same time per IP subscriber card!
 If the RTP speech recording function is configured on the same IP subscriber card as the a recorded
call, no audio blocks are required for this speech recorder!
Required audio blocks in total per subscriber card = ABX
ABX number of audio blocks for the speech recorders on the respective IP subscriber card
(decimal)
ATTENTION:
In addition to the required audio blocks for speech recording, audio blocks are also required for the
recorded types (e.g. Simplex, alarm) – see page 450!
Example
2 speech recorders record 2 OpenDuplex®calls on IP subscriber card “A”; 2 speech recorders record 1
OpenDuplex®and 1 Simplex call on IP subscriber card “B”:
Number of OpenDuplex®
Number of recorders 1) Number of Simplex calls 2)
calls 3)
IP subscriber card A 2 (6) 0 (0) 2 (4)
IP subscriber card B 2 (3) 1 (1) 1 (2)
1) Required audio blocks ABX
2)
Required audio blocks ABY1
3)
Required audio blocks ABY2
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card A = ABX + ABY1 + ABY2 =
= 6 + 0 + 4 = 10 audio blocks
Required audio blocks for IP subscriber card B = ABX + ABY1 + ABY2 =
= 4 + 1 + 2 = 7 audio blocks
ABY1,2 Number of audio blocks for all outgoing and incoming calls on the respective IP subscriber
card (decimal; see page 451).
456 1.5/0619
Licensing note
Starting with CCT 800 5.1, a key icon is indicated instead of a notice dialogue when for certain features
a licence is missing or insufficient:
 The required licence for a certain feature is not available. In case of a missing licence, config-
uration is not possible.
 More Intercom clients are configured than licences are available on a subscriber card. This key
icon is only indicated when the firmware version PRO 800 5.0 or lower is installed on the
GOOD TO KNOW: Tool tips

With CCT 800 6.1 or higher, tool tips show information about missing licences for individual functions.
Move the cursor over the indicated key icon in order to display the tool tip.
In the following table, you will find all functions that require one or more licences:
Intercom Server
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Required
Path in CCT 800 Feature
licence
General Settings > tab General Connection SA101 Lx-*ICX       

Cards CSA Lx-PRO5(U)       
Lx-PRO2(U)
L15-G3-GET
G15 cards in Intercom Server GE L15-G3-8E8A
      
300 L15-G3-16A
L15-G3-16E
L15-G3-TEL
SIP-C Lx-PRO4(U)       
G3 cards in Intercom Server GE
L15-GE300       
150
SNMP SNMP Lx-PRO3(U)       
Logic module > desired Lx-PRO4(U)
Logic module       
Intercom Server L-LOGIC-8
Subscriber menus Phonebook view Lx-PRO6(U)       
External subscriber list Lx-*ICX       
Intercom Server - Block XX
General > Delete transferred calls at destina-
Lx-PRO2(U)       
tab Control desk system tion control desk at end of transfer
Group options PTT Mode Lx-PRO4(U)       
Time zones Time zones for subscribers Lx-PRO6(U)       
1.5/0619 457
IP-Settings
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Required
licence
IP - Settings Address Conflict Detection Lx-PRO5(U)       

Outputs
ICX at output ICX interface Lx-*ICX       
Inputs
ICX at input ICX interface Lx-*ICX       
Input message > desired input >
V24-Call number Lx-*ICX       
tab Network Monitoring
Network
Lx-LAN-x
IP - Connections > desired con- Lx-WAN-x
LAN-connection       
nection > tab LAN-connections Lx-NETLANx
Lx-NETWANx
IP - Connections > desired con- Lx-WAN-x
WAN-connection       
nection > tab WAN-connections Lx-NETWANx
Interfaces
Data interfaces > tab Apps Lx-PRO5(U)       
Data interfaces > tab RS232,
Parallel call number Lx-*ICX       
TCP/IP, Apps
Data interfaces > tab RS232 Length ICX-messages: “Always
Lx-PRO2(U)       
and TCP/IP long“
Data interfaces > tab RS232 Port (Moxa), IP Address (Moxa) Lx-*ICX       
L15-LOG
Log L-LOG       
L-LOG5
L15-LOG
Data interfaces > tab TCP/IP Log L-LOG       
L-LOG5
Lx-ICX
L-IS3-ICX
Type of connection Lx-IF-ICX       
L-IF-PELCO
L-IF-MILEST
SIS-SIP-T > Trunk > desired
Protocol, Early Media Lx-PRO6(U)       
trunk
Dial plan Lx-PRO5(U)       
458 1.5/0619
Subscriber
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Required
licence
General > tab Display time Display time Lx-PRO6(U)       

Call Disabling Invert call barring Lx-PRO2(U)       
Direct Dialling F-button-based direct dialling Lx-PRO5(U)       
L-EX-AF-OUT
Audio-Features > tab General Separate control loudspeaker (only for       
EX 7000)
Lx-PRO6(U)
DSP-Features > tab Micro- Line-out / External, loudspeaker L-EX-AF-OUT
      
phone, Loudspeaker, Tones gain (only for
EX 7000)
Lx-PRO2(U)
RTP Configuration RTP configuration       
L-IP_REC-1
Interface synchronisation Lx-*ICX       
Calling history Calling history Lx-PRO2(U)       
Station properties > tab Com-
Intercom Client IC200I IC200I(-x)       
mon
Intercom Client ICCAA L-ICCAA(-x)       
Non-Audio Client ICCNA L-ICCNA(-x)       
Invert key 0 and T Lx-PRO2(U)       
AC 200I, RTP server, CD Series Lx-PRO2(U)       
EE 380, EE 380A, Axis WS Lx-PRO3(U)       
EE 980 Lx-PRO4(U)       
Station properties > tab
Hebrew Lx-PRO2(U)       
Extended Settings
Station properties > desired sta-
tion series > desired subscriber >
PA functions Lx-PRO6(U)       
Button-/Indication function >
tab PA functions
Station properties > desired sta-
Button function Lx-PRO2(U)       
tion series
Remote control CD Lx-PRO3(U)       
Remote Control EE 380, EE 380A,
Lx-PRO6(U)       
EE 980, ICCAA, ICCNA
Station properties > AF series
Line monitoring L-AF-LM       
> tab Line monitoring
L-EX-AF-OUT
Station properties > Ex sta-
OUT 1 (voltage-regulated output) (only for       
tions > tab Outputs
EX 7000)
1.5/0619 459
Subscriber
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Required
licence
Station properties > Intercom Number of modules for Intercom

L-DD202(-x)       
Clients > tab General Client IC200I (module 1 to 4)
Number of modules for Intercom
L-ICCDDA(-x)       
Client ICCAA (module 1 to 8)
Number of modules for Intercom
Lx-PRO5(U)       
Client ICCAA (module 5 to 8)
Station properties > IP-Termi- Number of modules for non-audio
L-DD202(-x)       
nals > tab Common IC200I (module 1 to 4)
Number of modules for non-audio
L-ICCDDA(-x)       
ICCAA (module 1 to 8)
Number of modules for non-audio
Lx-PRO5(U)       
ICCAA (module 5 to 8)
Station properties > IP-Termi-
nals > tab Extended subscrib- Extended subscribers Lx-PRO2(U)       
ers
Dummy ports Lx-PRO4(U)       
Station properties > Monitors
Show only time (large) Lx-PRO2(U)       
> tab Monitor
Station properties > SIP-Ter-
SIP client L-SIS-SIP-x       
minals > tab Settings
Protocol, Early Media, Dial 0 at
Lx-PRO6(U)       
incoming call
Dial plan Lx-PRO5(U)       
Speech recording > tab Audio
ICX messages Lx-*ICX       
channel-Allocation
Speech recording > tab Call, alarm, All Call/group call,
Lx-PRO4(U)       
Recording conference
Control Desks > tab IP/RS232 -
ICX connection,SA101 connection Lx-*ICX       
ICX
Control Desks > tab Call distri-
Timeout Lx-PRO5(U)       
bution - day/night
Call Request > tab De-bounce
Amount of presses Lx-PRO2(U)       
for releasing call
Video > tab General Control via ICX Lx-*ICX       
Number of monitors for Intercom
Video > tab Monitor L-VM201(-x)       
Client IC200I (monitor 1)
L-ICCVA(-x)       
Client IC200I (monitor 1 to 2)
Lx-PRO(5U)       
Client IC200I (monitor 2)
Remote Stations > tab Remote
ICX connection Lx-*ICX       
Station
Receiver Music / Radio confer- Reception of multiple radio confer-
Lx-PRO5(U)       
ence ences for SIP
460 1.5/0619
 Configuration changes without restart

Configuration changes of certain Intercom subscriber functions can be applied in the Intercom Server
without a restart. Next to this features, the icon is displayed in the manual “Intercom Server
Configuration”. In the table below, the following restrictions are available for the respective Intercom
Server firmware versions:
 Feature requires no restart at configuration change
 Feature requires a restart at configuration change
NOTE:
 With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, ICX synchronisation messages are put out at ICX interfaces, which are
allocated to a control desk, in case of configuration changes without a restart.
Intercom Server
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Switch off times Release T-Key       

Intercom Server - Block XX
Time zones Description       
Difference to UTC (+/-
      
HH:MM)
Automatic DST adjustment       
VirtuoSIS Master
General Settings SSH Port       
1)
Network Settings > tab Network NET networking allowed       
Network Settings > tab DNS Settings Name Server(s)       
Domain       
Search       
Parameters
Optional parameters 900       
901       
902       
903       
904       
905       
906       
907       
908       
909       
910       
911       
912       
913       
914       
1.5/0619 461
915       
916       
917       
      
919       
ICX parameter > desired subscriber Function: Add parameter       
Function: Remove parameter       
Function: Add entry       
Function: Remove entry       
1)
An existing NET connection is not interrupted, when a function is deactivated. After restarting VirtuoSIS
master, NET networking is no longer established.
Outputs
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
General Settings Description       

Display text EE 811A & cam-
      
era
Plan ID       
Template ID       
Inputs
General Settings Description       
Display text EE 811A & cam-
      
era
Plan ID       
Key switches input Key 1)       
Input message Function: Add input message       
Input message > tab Triggering Break       
15k       
5k6       
1k5       
Short       
Reactivation time Emergency
      
calls and Errors [s]
Automatic end of call Emer-
      
gency calls [s]
Reactivation time Normal
      
calls [s]
Automatic end of call Normal
      
calls [s]
Calls quits input       
Input message > tab Call types Active 1       
Active 2       
Error       
462 1.5/0619
Input becomes inactive when

Input message > tab Operations for Active 1       
call is still active
Acknowledgement when in-
      
put is still active
      
put is still inactive
Snapshot       
Input message > tab Operations for Active 2       
      
put is still active
      
Snapshot       
Inputs
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2

Input message > tab Operations for Error       
      
put is still active
      
Snapshot       
Input message > desired input > tab Control Desks Function: Add Control Desk       
Function: Remove Control
      
Desk
Active 1       
Active 2       
Error       
Input message > desired input > tab Attendant con-
Function: Add output       
tacts
Function: Remove output       
Active 1       
Active 2       
Error       
Switch type       
1)
Requires restart of the device.
Network
Function: Add LAN-connec-
IP-Connections > tab LAN connections       
tion
Function: Delete LAN-connec-
      
tion
IP Address of Destination In-
      
tercom Server
Port no.       
Intercom Server blocks       
1)
ID number subscriber       
Idle time [s]      
1.5/0619 463
Fallback mode      
Input for status-indication      
DSCP      
Network
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
IP-Connections > tab WAN connections Function: Add WAN-connection       

Function: Delete WAN-connection       
Pre-dialling code       
IP Address of Destination Intercom
      
Server
Port no.       
Intercom Server blocks       
1)
ID number subscriber       
Idle time [s]       
Fallback mode       
Input for status-indication       
DSCP       
Allow ICX commands       
Block lock       
IP-Connections > tab WAN hierarchy levels Level 1 to Level 15       
1) Requires restart of the connections. Active calls or conferences will be cancelled.
Interfaces
SIS-SIP-T > desired trunk Basic SIP Trunk configuration       
Advanced SIP Trunk configuration       
Dial plan configuration       
Volume adjustment       
General
Subscriber > General > tab Naming Description       
Camera control       
Display text EE 311A/411       
Display text EE 811A & camera       
Secretary Number       
Secretary Waiting time when busy [s]       
Plan ID       
Subscriber > General > tab Display time Display time       
Time zone       
Date format       
464 1.5/0619
Entitlements
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Privacy Permission privacy       

Fix as calling station       
Fix as called station       
Music on waiting (Busy/Privacy)       
4 kHz as privacy tone       
Permission privacy via tilting       
LED when private       
Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Talk into,
Intrusion when private       
Priority call, call transfer, Recall Request
Intrusion when busy       
Allow intrusion       
Priority call       
Call transfer as calling station       
Call transfer as called station       
Receive Recall Request       
No busy tone at talk in (conference)       
Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Alarm,
Release keypad despite alarm       
Common
Alarm 1 receiver       
Receive Chime-signal       
Auto. disconnection       
Minute tone       
Disable After-Dialling       
Conversations as call request       
Audiocom       
No Group Call during call       
Hide subscribers from F1-menu       
No contrast adjustment       
Subscriber specific ICX messages       
Subscriber > Entitlements > tab Line mon-
Line-monitoring       
itoring
Offline at line fault       
1.5/0619 465
All Calls / Group Calls / Zones
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > All Calls/Group Calls/Zones All Call initiator       

All Call receiver       
“Gr. 0” to “Gr. 59”       
“Gr. 70 Zn.11” to “Gr. 89 Zn. 30”       
Call Disabling
Subscriber > Call Disabling Hierarchy       
WAN Hierarchy       
Invert call barring       
Direct Dialling
Subscriber > Direct Dialling Direct Dialling       
Toggle Mode       
Disconnect on release       
Audio-Features
Subscriber > Audio- > tab General Mode HE 505       
Duplex mode       
Separate control loudspeaker       
Subscriber > Audio- > tab Duplex, Sim-
Duplex active       
plex, Full Duplex
Duplex mode       
Duplex limit       
Simplex active       
Simplex mode       
Simplex limit       
Full Duplex active       
Full Duplex mode       
Full Duplex limit       
Subscriber > Audio- > tab Handset, Music,
Handset active       
All Call
Handset mode       
Handset limit       
Music active       
Music mode       
Music limit       
All Call active       
All Call mode       
All Call limit       
466 1.5/0619
Audio-Features
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab Gong,

Gong active       
Tones, Buzzer
Gong mode       
Gong limit       
Tones active       
Tones mode       
Tones limit       
Summer active       
Summer mode       
Summer limit       
Subscriber > Audio-Features > tab Feed-
6T Feedback active       
back, Radio, Headset
6T Feedback mode       
6T Feedback limit       
Radio active       
Radio mode       
Radio limit       
Headset active       
Headset mode       
Headset limit       
DSP-Features
Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab General Template (LED + TFT)       
Lock AEC       
AEC gain 1)       
High volume duplex mode       
IN2 at ext. mic.       
IN2 at PPT-button of handset       
1)
Dynamic noise cancellation       
Recording via handset 1)       
Disable loudspeaker equalization 1)       
1.5/0619 467
DSP-Features
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Surveil-

Function Relay 1       
lance
Relay Transfer EB2E2A 2)       
Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance
      
cycle time
Microphone ALM       
Check only once       
Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveil-
      
lance retry time [s]
Loudspeaker-/Microphone Surveillance
      
volume
Reduction -18dB       
Red lamp       
Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Audio
Audio Monitoring trigger       
Monitoring
Audio Monitoring time [s]       
Audio Monitoring permanent       
Short integration       
Red lamp       
Audio Monitoring Off       
Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Micro- Microphone Frequency response
      
phone, Loudspeaker,Tones mode 3)
Internal microphone gain       
External microphone gain       
Gooseneck microphone gain       
Headset microphone gain       
Line-out/External loudspeaker gain       
Keypad tones       
Special Tone 1       
Special Tone 2       
Start beep mode       
Sidetone       
468 1.5/0619
DSP-Features
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > DSP-Features > tab Voice con-

IVC 1)       
trol
Threshold - High       
Threshold - Low       
Level “low” at start of Intercom Server       
Level “low” when button is pressed       
Reduction       
ICX messages at dB-level changing       
Range 1: 0 - < level       
Range 2:       
Range 3: >= level       
1)
Requires restart of the device with PRO 800 6.1.
2)
Requires restart of the device with PRO 800 6.1 if the entry “OUT1 + OUT2” is selected.
3) Requires restart of the device with PRO 800 6.1 if the entry “MIC480” is selected.
NOTES:
 After configuration changes at Subscriber > DSP-Features, a restart of the station type ET 901 is
always required.
 After configuration changes at Subscriber > DSP-Features using PRO 800 6.0, a restart of each
station type is required.
Signal Tones-DSP Stations
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
Path in CCT 800 Feature PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations

Dialling tone       
> tab Signals, Tones 1
Error tone       
Busy tone       
Busy tieline       
Acknowledgement       
Acknowledgement Off       
Access control       
Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations
Privacy       
> tab Signals, Tones 2
Calling signal access control       
Calling signal       
Minute tone       
Waiting signal microphone mute       
Waiting signal for further connection       
Initiate ringing       
1.5/0619 469
Signal Tones-DSP Stations
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Signal Tones-DSP Stations>

Reception ringing       
tab Signals, Tones 3
Reception alarm with low priority       
Reception alarm with high priority       
Initiator call request       
All Call       
Group Call       
Chime-signal       
Station properties
Subscriber > Station properties > tab
Display time       
Common
Subscriber > Station properties > tab
Dialling of button on hook-off       
Handset
EE 900A
Subscriber > Station properties > EE900A
Allow blinking output during a call       
> tab Outputs
Subscriber > Station properties > EE900A
Hide idle menu help       
> tab Display
IP-Terminals
Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Ter-
Terminal IP Address       
minals > tab Common
Port No.       
Dynamic registration       
MAC-Address       
Subscriber > Station properties > IP-Ter-
Bandwidth kBit       
minals > tab Extended Settings
Databandwidth kBit       
Card poll time       
Station poll time       
VOX-Control       
VOX-Follow up time       
DSCP       
Jitter Buffer Start Delay       
No decrement of Jitter Buffer       
Deactivate switch LEDs       
470 1.5/0619
SIP-Terminals
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Station properties > SIP-Ter-

Port No.       
minals > tab Common
Protocol       
Password       
Codec 1       
Codec 2       
Codec 3       
Codec 4       
Codec 5       
DTMF mode       
Polltime       
Polling active       
early media       
Dial 0 at incoming call       
Volume adjustment Outgoing [dB]       
Volume adjustment Incoming [dB]       
Dial plan configuration       
Alarm triggering
Subscriber > Alarm triggering Function: Add alarm trigger       
Subscriber > Alarm triggering > desired
Function: Add new entry       
subscriber
Group       
Priority       
Disconnect       
Attendant contact       
Indication of alarm       
Last subscriber switches off: restart
      
alarm
Receiving stations entitled to talk       
no red lamp during alarm       
1.5/0619 471
Speech recording
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Speech recording > Record-

Conversation       
ing
Mandatory recording       
Alarm       
All/Group Call       
Feed-in
Subscriber > Feed-in > Music Display text EE 311A/411       
Display text EE 811A & camera       
Control Desks
Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Buzzer Buzzer-mode       
Buzzer during conversation Normal
      
call
Buzzer during conversation Emergen-
      
cy call
Buzzer via output       
Buzzer via output Normal call       
Buzzer via output Emergency call       
Buzzer at station Normal call       
Buzzer at station Emergency call       
Red lamp at buzzer       
Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Call con-
Loudspeaking call       
version
Privacy call       
Busy       
Ringing from door       
Convert to call type       
Subscriber > Control Desks > tab Tone
01 - Normal Call       
generator for Buzzer
02 - Emergency Call       
04 - Active 1       
05 - Active 1       
06 - Active 2       
07 - Active 2       
08 - Error       
09 - Error       
12 - Active 1       
14 - Active 2       
472 1.5/0619
Call Requests
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Call Request Function: Add Call Request       

Subscriber > Call Request > tab Trigger Trigger key 1       
Call type for trigger key 1       
Snapshot at key 1       
Trigger key 2       
Trigger key 3       
Subscriber > Call Request > tab De-
Amount of presses       
bounce for releasing call
Time for stable press until call is re-
      
leased [s]
Time for resetting debounce mode [s]       
Subscriber > Call Request > tab Parameter Calm down signal normal call       
Calm down signal emergency call       
Line-monitoring       
Automatic acknowledgement of line
      
fault
Snapshot at line-fault       
Cancel on site with [X]       
Call Transfer Direct Dialling       
Disable After-Dialling       
Subscriber > Call Request > tab Pre-re-
Automatic end of call Normal calls [ID]       
corded audio
Automatic end of call Emergency calls
      
[ID]
Call Suppression Normal calls [ID]       
Call Suppression Emergency calls [ID]       
Call release confirmation Normal Call
      
[ID]
Call release confirmation Emergency
      
Call [ID]
Subscriber > Call Request > tab Automat- Reactivation time Emergency calls and
      
ic end of call/ Reactivation Errors [s]
Automatic end of call Emergency calls [s]       
Reactivation time Normal calls [s]       
Automatic end of call Normal calls [s]       
1.5/0619 473
Call Requests
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Call Request > tab Call type Normal call       
Emergency call       
Line fault       
Subscriber > Call Request > desired sub-
Function: Add Control Desk       
scriber > tab Control Desks
Function: Remove Control Desk       
Normal call       
Line fault       
Subscriber > Call Request > desired sub-
Function: Add Output       
scriber > tab Attendant contacts
Function: Remove Output       
Normal call       
Line fault       
Parking       
Switch type       
Door opener
Subscriber > Door opener Function: Add door opener function       
Subscriber > Door opener > tab Door open Simplex during opening       
Time for door opener [s]       
Automatic open       
Automatic open when private       
after [s]       
Cancel call       
after [s]       
Authorisation group       
Subscriber > Door opener > tab Control
Control Station       
Station
Number of attempts       
Duration control station call [s]       
Only control station can open       
Subscriber > Door opener > tab Waiting in-
Waiting information       
formation
474 1.5/0619
Door opener
VirtuoSIS 7.x
VirtuoSIS 8.x
VirtuoSIS 9.x
PRO 800 5.1
PRO 800 6.0
PRO 800 6.1
PRO 800 6.2
Subscriber > Door opener > desired sub-

Function: Add Output       
scriber > tab General
Function: Remove Output       
Button       
Relay toggle       
Access code(s)       
Subscriber > Door opener > desired sub-
Function: add new group       
scriber > Forwarding Group-ringing
Function: remove current group       
Transfer-Group       
Target No.       
Time [s]       
1.5/0619 475
Restrictions for configuration

The following restrictions have to be observed for configuration:
Feature level Maximum number of inputs Up to PRO 800 1.1
4 changed buttons per input (at up to 5 sub-
Input changes button of a subscriber -
scribers)
Input initiates dialling at a subscriber At up to 5 subscribers -
Individual F2 menu / Favourites 1) 40
255 entries per subscriber
Protection against feed back 1020 disabled calling numbers per subscriber 123
1020 disabled calling numbers / functions per
Selective disabling of functions 123
subscriber
Direct dialling selective 339 direct dialling targets per subscriber 41
Direct dialling general 339 direct dialling targets 41
339 definitions per subscriber card. One defi-
nition is one or more activations at "active
Output contacts 41
at", one entry at "PA-Numbers" and one entry
at "Call no. / Function"
123 per subscriber, minus 2 per allocated
Access codes -
output
Call requests 509 control desks per subscriber card 61
Output contacts for call requests 509 per subscriber card 61
Input messages 509 control desks per input/output card 61
Output contacts for input messages 509 per input/output card 61
Tieline 61 code numbers per Intercom Server -
1)
A maximum of 135 different user defined texts can be created (per Intercom Server-Block). As soon as all
these texts are created, it is not possible to create a new entry at “Individual F2 menu” and “Direct dialling set-
tings / Favourites”.
Restrictions for radio authorization channels

If for the radio conferences the authorization channels “41” to “48” are used, certain group calls are
disabled.
Radio conference Disabled group calls
6T41 66, 75, 83
6T42 67, 76, 84
6T43 68, 77, 85
6T44 69, 78, 86
6T45 70, 79, 87
6T46 71, 82, 88
6T47 72, 83, 89
6T48 73, 84, 90
476 1.5/0619
Memory capacity of the Intercom Server

Installed subscriber cards, input/output cards and certain features require memory in the main memory
of the Intercom Server. For storage of these customer-specific functions a maximum of 256 kB is avail-
able for an Intercom Server GE300 and GE800 per housing. This value may not be exceeded.
NOTE:
Already used memory is shown at Intercom Server > Cards for each Intercom Server separately.
Required memory
Plug-in cards
G3-GED-4, G8-GED-4 400 bytes per card
G3-GET-4, G8-GET-4 392 bytes per card
G3-8E8A, G8-8E8A 1024 bytes per card
G3-16E, G8-16E 1024 bytes per card
G3-16A, G8-16A 1024 bytes per card
G3-V24, G8-V24 160 bytes per card
Protection against feed- +2 bytes per saved call num-
8 bytes per subscriber with feedback protection
back ber
+2 bytes per saved call num-
Disabling of functions 8 bytes per subscriber with disabled functions
ber
+6 bytes per direct dialling tar-
Direct dialling selective 8 bytes per subscriber with direct dialling
get
+6 bytes per direct dialling tar-
Direct dialling general 8 bytes
get
Output contact 8 bytes per with output contacts +6 bytes per output contact
Door control
Door station 26 bytes per door station
+4 bytes per output +2 bytes
Access control 8 bytes per card with door opener contacts
per code
Control desk functions
Control desk 62 bytes per control desk
+28 bytes per calling sub-
scriber
8 bytes per per card from which call requests are
Call request from a station +4 bytes per allocated control
initiated
station
+4 bytes per output contact
+28 bytes per initiating input
8 bytes per card from which input messages are +4 bytes per allocated control
Input messages
initiated station
+4 bytes per output contact
Alarm
+4 bytes per alarm
Alarm function 8 bytes per alarm initiator
+6 bytes per transfer level
1.5/0619 477
Video
+2 bytes general memory
Video connection 28 bytes per station that has an allocated monitor
for video
Radio conference, music
Feed-in music programs 24 bytes per music program
Feed-in radio channels 24 bytes per radio channel
Stations with input level detection

GOOD TO KNOW: What is the purpose of an input level detection?
The input level detection is required for the automatic detection of a connected direct dialling module.
If a direct dialling module (WSDD 53V or WSDD 59V) is detected, this module can be allocated to the
respective station in the configuration software CCT 800. Further information about direct dialling
modules can be found on page 186.
The following station types have an input level detection:

EE 7000D ET 962A 1) WS 800PD WS 210VICM
EE 7000D AF 1) ET 962H 1) WS 800FD WS 210VICA

EE 7000I ET 970A 1) WS 800FDMD WS 210VIDA
1) 1) WS 800VD WS 210VIM
EE 7000I AF ET 970H
EE 900A WS 200PD WS 810PD WS 500VICM
EF 962A 1) WS 200VD WS 810FD WS 800PI
EF 962H 1) WS 200PDCM WS 200PI WS 800FI

EF 963A WS 200VDCM WS 200VI WS 800FI PS1
1) WS 210VD WS 200PICM WS 800VI
ES 962H
ET 908A WS 500VDCM 1) WS 210VI WS 800VI PS1
WS 210VDCM WS 200VICA WS 200VICM
ET908H
WS 200PICA WS 210VDM WS 210VDDA WS 810PI

WS 810FI
1)
With PRO 800 6.1 or higher, the connection of a direct dialling module is possible.
 Safe mode
If one or more errors in the Intercom Server configuration prevent an flawless operation of the
Intercom Server, the safe mode ensures always a successful restart of the Intercom Server and its
operation in a reduced form. Certain configured functions are not available as long as the Intercom Ser-
ver is in the safe mode. If the Intercom Server performs a restart in the safe mode, a part of the saved
Intercom Server configuration will be disabled, but the connection between the Intercom Server and
the connected PC remains active.
ATTENTION:
The firmware download (downgrade and upgrade) cannot be performed during the safe mode. The
respective Intercom Server has to be initialised first (see page 43)!
478 1.5/0619
Indication of the safe mode state

The program CCT 800 only shows whether the Intercom Server is in the safe mode or not. It will not be
displayed, which error has caused the safe mode. The current state of the safe mode will be displayed
in the receive dialogue 1 and the card dialogue 2 in the program CCT 800.
1 Receive dialogue
 Go to: Intercom Server > Receive
 Receive the Intercom Server configuration of the respective Intercom Server (see page 60). If the In-
tercom Server is operating in the safe mode, the following dialogue appears:
The safe mode is indicated by:

 The status bar of the respective Intercom Server is coloured magenta.
 In the column State, the message “Safe Mode” is displayed for the respective Intercom Server.
2 Card dialogue
 Go to: Intercom Server > Receive
 Receive the Intercom Server configuration of the respective Intercom Server (see page 60).
 If the Intercom Server is operating in the safe mode, the following dialogue appears:
The safe mode is indicated by:

 The field Server-ID is coloured magenta.
 Hover the cursor over the coloured field “Server-ID” to indicate an info message that the respective
Intercom Server has been started in safe mode.
Troubleshooting
The following possibilities are available:
 Patch all existing errors of the affected CCT 800 file and send the Intercom Server configuration to
the respective Intercom Server (see page 61).
 Send a previous version of an error-free backup of the affected Intercom Server configuration to the
 Contact the technical support.
1.5/0619 479
Technical Support Intercom Server Configuration
Technical Support
For further information about our products and services, visit:
www.commend.com
480 1.5/0619

PM Intercom Server Configuration en V15 0619

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PM Intercom Server Configuration en V15 0619

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PM Intercom Server Configuration en V15 0619

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PRODUCT MANUAL

COMMEND INTERNATIONAL GMBH

Number of pages: 480

 Required feature level of the subscriber card. 1)

 2-wire [2W] or 4-wire [4W] subscriber card required. 1)

 Only possible with DSP station or with certain DSP software. 1)

Intercom Server and subscriber functions

Intercom subscriber functions

Advanced Intercom function C B A

Entry level Intercom function A

General Intercom functions

Text parameter - - - B B B B B B B B B - - 130

Disable position switch and handset function B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 137

Double minute signal in case of waiting subscriber B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 174

Indication squelch input - - - - - - B B B B B B - - 191

PRO 800 1.0

Variable executive/secretary transfer chain B B B B B B B B B B B B B - 231

Initiate a Simplex conference during a conversation C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 246

Door station with one door opener B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 284

Automatic door opening with time delay B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 289

Parallel indication and operation of functions at several

Expansion module – prevent restart - - - - - - - B B B B B - - 311

Tones for calls to control desk B B B B B B B B B B B B - - 339

Speech recording D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 355

Intercom Server functions

Calling numbers             128

Time synchronisation -            378

Configuration software CCT 800

NOTE: Configuration sequence in CCT 800

Installation of CCT 800

GOOD TO KNOW: Correct display of character sets

 Keyboard and mouse

Initialize Handset Opens a dialogue for initializing a handset at selective subscribers.

Help Opens the CCT 800 online help. 1)

Creates a new CCT 800 configuration file.

Opens an existing CCT 800 configuration file.

Saves the existing CCT 800 configuration file.

Cuts the selection and save it in the clipboard.

Copies the selection and save it in the clipboard.

Inserts the saved content of the clipboard.

Prints the active Intercom Server configuration (see page 52).

Resets the volume for all subscribers.

Reduces the volume of for subscribers. 1)

Connects to a WAN region.

Disconnects from a WAN region.

Saves the selected connection to the CCT 800 file. 3)

up, it has to be exist in CCT 800.

User account management

Execute program CCT 800

Login to a project via:

CCT 800 user account

Domain user account

Pre-configured CCT 800 user ac-

Open User account management

Create CCT 800 Import domain

Edit user account information

Configure Section: Roles

Configure Section: Groups Configure User Roles

Create a group Allocate a role to a user ac-

Configure User Groups